H8S2199R

REJ09B0329-0200 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 16 H8S/2199R Group, H8S/2199R F-ZTAT™ Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family/H8S/2100 Series H8S/2199R H8S/2198R H8S/2197R H8S/2197S H8S/2196R H8S/2196S HD6432199R HD64F2199R HD6432198R HD6432197R HD6432197S HD6432196R HD6432196S Rev.2.00 Revision Date: Jan. 15, 2007 Notes regarding these materials 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page ii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed usage notes on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If the descriptions under General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the body of the manual differ from each other, the description in the body of the manual takes precedence. 1. Handling of Unused Pins Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. ⎯ The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In operation with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is induced in the vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and malfunctions may occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal. Unused pins should be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual. 2. Processing at Power-on The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied. ⎯ The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied. In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the states of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the reset process is completed. In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on reset function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the power reaches the level at which resetting has been specified. 3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses Access to reserved addresses is prohibited. ⎯ The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are accessed. 4. Clock Signals After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has become stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the target clock signal has stabilized. ⎯ When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization of the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an external resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress, wait until the target clock signal is stable. 5. Differences between Products Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number, confirm that the change will not lead to problems. ⎯ The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern. When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation test for each of the products. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page iii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page iv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Preface This LSI is a single-chip microcomputer made up of the H8S/2000 CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. This LSI is equipped with ROM, RAM, digital servo circuits, a sync separator, an OSD, a data slicer, seven types of timers, three types of PWMs, two types of serial communication interfaces 2 (SCIs), an I C bus interface (IIC), a D/A converter, an A/D converter, and I/O ports as on-chip supporting modules. This LSI is suitable for use as an embedded processor for high-level control TM systems. Its on-chip ROM is flash memory (F-ZTAT *) that provides flexibility as it can be reprogrammed in no time to cope with all situations from the early stages of mass production to full-scale mass production. This is particularly applicable to application devices with specifications that will most probably change. Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2199R Group and TM H8S/2199R F-ZTAT in the design of application systems. Members of this audience are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical TM characteristics of the H8S/2199R Group and H8S/2199R F-ZTAT to the above audience. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: • In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics. • In order to understand the details of the CPU’s functions Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. • In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in appendix B, Internal I/O Registers. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page v of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Examples: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial communication, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx Bit order: Number notation: Signal notation: Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/ Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page vi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 H8S/2199R Gruop and H8S/2199R F-ZTAT Document Title H8S/2199R Gruop, H8S/2199R F-ZTAT TM TM manuals: Document No. Hardware Manual This manual REJ09B0139 H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual User’s manuals for development tools: Document Title H8S, H8S/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor User’s Manual H8S, H8S/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User’s Manual High-performance Embedded Workshop User’s Manual Document No. REJ10B0058 ADE-702-037 ADE-702-201 Application Notes: Document Title H8S Series Technical Q&A Application Note Document No. REJ05B0397 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page vii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page viii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Main Revisions in This Edition Item All Page ⎯ Revision (See Manual for Details) • Notification of change in company name amended (Before) Hitachi, Ltd. → (After) Renesas Technology Corp. • Product naming convention amended (Before) H8S/2199R Series → (After) H8S/2199R Group ⎯ 2.1.3 Difference from H8S/300 CPU 21 Package code amended (Before) FP-112 → (After) PRQP0112JA-A Expanded address space Note * added Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbytee address space ... Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI. 2.2 CPU Operating Modes 22 Note * added H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: Normal* and advanced. Normal mode* supports a maximum 64-Mbyte address space. Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI. 2.3 Address Space 27 Note * added ... 64-kbyte address space in normal mode*, and maximum ... Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI. 2.6.1 Overview Table 2.1 Instruction Classification 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Table 2.4 Arithmetic Instruction 41 36 Table 2.1 amended Bit manipulation (Before) RSET → (After) BSET Size description amended ADDS, SUBS (Before) B → (After) L DAA, DAS (Before) B/W → (After) B Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page ix of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions Page 48 Revision (See Manual for Details) Table 2.10 amended Instruction EEPMOV.B Size* — Function if R4L ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4L −1 → R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → ER6+ R4 −1 → R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6 R4L or R4: size of block (bytes) EEPMOV.W — 2.7.1 Addressing Mode 51 Table 2.11 Modes Addressing Table 2.11 amended Symbol of Absolute address amended (Before) @aa:8/#@aa:16/@aa:24//@aa:32 → (After) @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24//@aa:32 Table 2.12 amended Absolute Address Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) Normal Mode H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF Table 2.12 Absolute 53 Address Access Ranges 2.8.1 Overview Figure 2.16 State Transitions 7.3.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) 59 Figure 2.16 amended RES = High SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 0 141 Bit figure amended Bit : Initial value R/W : 7 EB7 0 R/W 7.3.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) 142 Bit figure amended Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 EB15 0 R/W 10.3.2 Register Configuration 193 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) Description amended When the pin functions of P16/IC and P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 are switched by PMR1, ... 10.4.3 Pin Functions 200 P27/SYSCI bit table amended (Before) PCR → (After) PCR27 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page x of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 10.5.3 Pin Functions 10.6.1 Overview 10.8 Overview Page 209 211 226 Revision (See Manual for Details) Description amended P34/PWM2: P34/PWM2 is switched as shown below ... Description amended ... It is switched by port mode register 4 (PMR4), timer output ... Description amended Port 7 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P77 to P70), HSW timing generation circuit ... outputs (PPG7 to PPG0), and realtime output port (RPB to RP8). ... 10.8.3 Pin Functions 231 Description amended P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0: P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 are switched as shown below ... 10.9.2 Register Configuration 10.9.3 Pin Functions 235 241 Description amended ... When reset, PMR8 is initialized to H'00. ... Description amended P84/H.Amp SW/G: ... according to the PMR84 bit in PMR8, PMRC4 bit in PMRC, and PCR84 bit in PCR8. 13.2.5 Timer Counter K 267 (TCK) 15.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1) 16.6 Exemplary Uses of Timer X1 294 Description amended ... The inputting clock can be selected by the EXN and PS22 bits of the TMJ, and the PS21 and PS20 bits of the TMJ. ... Description amended Bit 0⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-1 (CPS): In combination with the LAT bit (Bit 7) of the TMRM2, this bit works ... 338 Description amended 2. Each time a comparing match occurs, the OLVLA bit and the OLVLB bit are reserved by use of the software. Description amended WTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. ... Description amended ... PW8CR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset. 17.2.1 Watchdog Timer 347 Counter (WTCNT) 18.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR) 18.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) 360 361 Description amended Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32): These bits set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as I/O pin or it is used as 8-bit PWM output PWMm pin. 20.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL) 376 Description amended PWM data registers U and L ...in one PWM waveform cycle. ... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 22.2.4 Transmit Data Register 1 (TDR1) 22.2.7 Serial Status Register 1 (SSR1) Page 394 402 403 Revision (See Manual for Details) Description amended ... When the SCI detects that TSR1 is empty, ... Bit 7 description amended [Setting condition] 1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0 Bit 6 description amended [Setting condition] When serial reception ... is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 405 Bit 1 description amended Bit 1 MPB 0 Description [Clearing condition] When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received* (Initial value) 22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1) 406 Description amended BRR1 is an 8-bit register ... by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR1. ... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1) Table 22.3 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Operating Frequecy φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2 n 0 0 0 N 51 25 12 Error (%) 0.16 0.16 0.16 2.097152 n 0 0 0 0 N 54 26 13 6 Error (%) −0.71 1.12 −2.54 −2.54 2.4576 n 0 0 0 0 0 N 63 31 15 7 3 3 Error (%) n 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 0 0 N 77 38 19 9 4 Error (%) 0.16 0.16 −2.40 −2.40 −2.40 407, 408 Table 22.3 amended — — — — — — — — — Operating Frequecy φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 3.6864 n 2 0 0 0 N 64 23 11 5 Error (%) 0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 n 2 0 0 N 70 25 12 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 4.9152 n 2 0 0 0 0 0 N 86 31 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) n 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 −1.73 0.00 2 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 32 15 7 4 3 Error (%) 0.25 −1.38 1.70 1.70 0.00 1.70 — 0 — 3 — 0.00 — 0 — 2 — 0.00 — — — Operating Frequecy φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 9600 19200 31250 38400 0 0 0 0 6 n N 19 9 5 4 Error (%) −2.40 −2.40 0.00 −2.40 6.144 n 0 0 0 0 N 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.00 0.00 2.34 0.00 7.3728 n 0 0 N 23 11 8 Error (%) n 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 N 25 12 7 Error (%) 0.16 0.16 0.00 — 0 — 5 — 0.00 — — — Operating Frequecy φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 9600 19200 31250 38400 9.8304 n 0 0 0 0 N 31 15 9 7 Error (%) 0.00 0.00 −1.73 0.00 10 n 0 0 0 0 N 32 15 9 7 Error (%) −1.38 1.70 0.00 1.70 22.2.9 Serial Interface 413 Mode Register 1 (SCMR1) 22.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 22.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) 424 Bit 3 description amended TDR1 contents are transmitted ... Figure 22.7 amended [2] [3] Receive error handling and break detection: ... and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. ... [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR1 and check that RDRF = 1, then ... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xiii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Figure 22.11 amended [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then ... 22.3.3 Multiprocessor 429 Communication Function Figure 22.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Figure 22.13 Sample 432 Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) 22.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode Figure 22.17 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Figure 22.22 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations 2 Figure 22.13 amended [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then ... Figure 22.17 amended Set data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1 437 443 Figure 22.22 amended RDRF = 1 23.2.5 I C Bus Control 464 Register (ICCR) Bit 7 description amended Bit 7 ICE 1 Description I 2C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SDA are driving the bus) ICMR and ICDR can be accessed 23.3.2 Master Transmit 482 Operation 23.3.4 Slave Receive Operation 23.4 Usage Note 485 499 Description amended [11] ... When there is data to be transmitted, go to the step [9] to continue next transmission. ... Description amended 5. ... At this time, RDRF flag is cleared to 0. Description amended 6. ... The I C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tcyc, as shown in table 23.5. ... 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xiv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 23.4 Usage Note Page 504 to 511 Revision (See Manual for Details) 10. Notes on WAIT Function 11. Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode 12. Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode 13. Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode 14. Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception 15. Notes on TRS Bit Setting and ICDR Register Access Description added 26.2.1 Overview 556 Description amended This LSI is equipped with ... and twenty-nine pins multiplexed with general-purpose ports. ... 26.4.5 Register Description 601 FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB) Description amended Bit 13⎯S-TRIGB Bit (STRIGB): ... When the STRIGB is selected by the ISEL, ... 26.4.6 Operation Figure 26.23 Example of Timing Waveform of HSW (for 12 DFG Pulses) 26.7.4 Register Description 608 Figure 26.23 amended Example of setting: DFCRA = H'02, DFCRB = H'08, ... 632 Drum Pulse Preset Data Registers (DPPR1, DPPR2) Description amended ... The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'8000 as the reference value. 26.13.5 Register Description 698 Bit 0 description amended • ASM Mark Direct Mode: ... The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 65% (when an ASM mark is not detected). 26.13.6 Operation Figure 26.50 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing (When phase Control Is Performed by REF30P and DVCFG2 in REC Mode) 701 Note 1 amended Note: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 26.13.6 Operation Figure 26.51 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing (When phase Control Is Performed by CREF and DVCFG2 in REC Mode) 26.15.5 Register Description Page 702 Revision (See Manual for Details) Note 1 amended Note: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3. 736 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HTR) Description amended ... Thus, if φs = 5 MHz, NTSC system is used, ... (HVTH - 2) × 0.4 μs ≤ 2.35 μs < (HVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs ∴HVTH ≥ H'7 26.15.6 Noise Detection 741 Description amended Example of Setting: ... Accordingly, ... (Value of HPWR3 - 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 4.7 (μs) ∴HPWR3 - 0 = H'B ... 27.1.2 Block Diagram 753 Figure 27.1 Sync Separator Block Diagram Figure 27.1 amended AFCosc AFC oscillator 27.2.1 Sync Separation 755 Input Mode Register (SEPIMR) 27.2.2 Sync Separation 762 Control Register (SEPCR) Description amended Bits order than bit 5 CCMPSL are cleared to 0 ... Bit 2 description amended ... Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK)* function when ... Note * added Note: * HHK: Half Hsync Killer Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xvi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 AFCLPF AFCpc Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Figure 27.3 title amended 27.2.4 Horizontal Sync 765 Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR) Figure 27.3 HVTH Value and SEPH Generation Timing when Equalization Pulses Are Detected 766 Description amended In general, ... , set the HVTH value so that 2.35-μs equalizing pulses can be detected. Figure 27.8 Timing of 768 Hsync-Vsync PhaseDifference Error Due to Noise Occurrence after Equalizing Pulse Is Lost at Hsync Pulse Position Figure 27.9 Timing of 769 Forcible HHK Operation in V Blanking Period when Equalizating Pulse Is Not Detected 27.2.5 Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR) Figure 27.10 VVTH Value and SEPV Generation Timing Figure 27.11 VVTH 771 Value and SEPV Generation Timing when Digital LPF Is Enabled 27.2.6 Field Detection 772 Window Register (FWIDR) 27.3.5 Noise Detection 789 770 "HC" deleted from figure 27.8 "HC" deleted from figure 27.9 Figure 27.10 title amended Figure 27.11 title amended (1) Bit 0 of SEPCR Register Bit 0 table amended (Before) LD → (After) FLD Description amended ... The noise detection window signal is se to 1 ... at the HHK clearing timing specified by bits HM6 to HM0 of the HCMMR. ... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xvii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 28.2.1 Slice Even(Odd-) Fields Mode Register (SEVFD, SODFD) 28.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) Page 1004 Revision (See Manual for Details) Bits 4 to 0 notes amended Notes: 1. 576 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 448 when FRQSEL is 1. 2. fh: Horizontal sync signal frequency 811 Bit figure amended MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Bit: Initial value: 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 28.4 32-Bit Slice Operation Figure 28.13 Sampling Clock when Bit DSL32B Is 1 29.2.3 On-Screen Display Configuration Figure 29.4 Correspondence between Display Data RAM and On-Screen Display 819 Note * amended Note: * 576 when ... is set to 0. 448 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 1. 829 Note amended Note: D800 to DAFE indicate the lower 16 bits of addresses in the on-screen display RAM. 29.3.6 Character Data 834 ROM (OSDROM) Figure 29.7 OSD ROM Map Figure 29.7 amended Bit data for character code H'000 (blank character display)* 045FFF* 2 1 Notes: 1. Character code H'000 is reserved for blank character display and ... 040000 :H'F0 040001 :H'00 040002 :H'F0 040003 :H'00 ... 040022 :H'F0 040023 :H'00 040024 :H'FF 04003F :H'FF 2. These addresses represent the H8S/2199R Group addresses. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xviii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item 29.3.7 Display Data RAM (OSDRAM) Page 839 Revision (See Manual for Details) Bits 11 to 9 bit table amended OSDRAM Bit 11 CR 0 Bit 10 CG 0 Bit 9 CB 0 1 1 0 1 Character Color C.Video Output NTSC Black π 7π/4 3π/2 PAL Black ±π ±7π/4 ±3π/2 R,G,B Outputs Black Blue Green Cyan 29.4.5 Row Registers 842 (CLINEn, N = rows 1 to 12) 846 Bit figure amended Bit 4 (Before) CLUn2 → (After) CLUn0 Bit 0⎯Cursor Brightness/Halftone Levels Specification Bit (KLUn, n = 1 to 12) • • Cursor Brightness in Text Display Mode Halftone Levels in Superimposed Mode Bit table amended (Before) KLU → (After) KLUn 29.6.5 OSDV Interrupt 858 31.4.8 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 31.32 Flash Memory Characteristics 950 Bit figure amended R/W description in bit 10 (Before) R/W → (After) ⎯ Table 31.32 amended Item Programming time*1*2*4 Erase time*1*3*5 Reprogramming count Data retention time* 10 Symbol tP tE NWEC Min Typ — — 100 *8 10 Max 200 Unit ms/128 bytes Notes 10 100 1200 ms/block Times Years 10000 — *9 — — tDRP 951 Notes 6 to 8 added Notes: 6. Minimum number of times for which all characteristics are guaranteed after rewriting (Guarantee range is 1 to minimum value). 7. Reference value for 25C° (as a guide line, rewriting should normally function up to this value). 8. Data retention characteristics when rewriting is performed within the specification range, including the minimum value. B.2 Function List 1022 H'D029: CFIC: Digital Filter Figure amended Capstan phase system Z-1 initialization bit 0 1 Phase system Z-1 does not reflect CZp value. (Initial value) Phase system Z-1 reflects CZp value. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xix of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item B.2 Function List Page 1071 Revision (See Manual for Details) H'D106: TCRX: Timer X1 Figure amended Buffer enable B 0 1 ICRD is not used as buffer register for ICRB (Initial value) ICRD is used as buffer register for ICRB 1103 H'D200 to H'D20B: CLINE1 to CLINE12: OSD Figure amended Bit 4 (Before) CLUn2 → (After) CLUn0 Cursor color specification bits (Cursor Colors in Text Display Mode) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Character Brightness Level Cursor Color (C.Video Output) Cursor Color (R, G, B Output) KRn KGn KBn NTSC PAL 0 0 0 Black Black Black (Initial value) π ±π Blue 1 ±7π/4 1 0 7π/4 Green ±3π/2 1 3π/2 Cyan π/2 ±π/2 1 0 0 Red ±3π/4 1 3π/4 Magenta 1 0 Same phase ±0 Yellow 1 White White White 1112 H'D222: SODFD: Data Slicer Figure amended Bit : 7 SLVLO2 6 SLVLO1 5 SLVLO0 4 DLYO4 3 DLYO3 2 DLYO2 1 DLYO1 0 DLYO0 Bit 4 (Before) DLYO3 → (After) DLYO4 1115 H'D240: SEPIMR: Sync Separator Figure amended Bit 5 (Before) CCMPSL → (After) CCMPSL* 1128 H'FFCD: PMR0: I/O Port Figure amended (Before) P07/AN7 to P00/IRQ0 rin function select bits→ (After) P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 pin switching 1137 H'FFE3: PUR3: I/O Port Figure amended Bit : 7 PUR37 0 R/W 6 PUR36 0 R/W 5 PUR35 0 R/W 4 PUR34 0 R/W 3 PUR33 0 R/W 2 PUR32 0 R/W 1 PUR31 0 R/W 0 PUR30 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 1 Note: P3n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor P3n pin has pull-up MOS transistor n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xx of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Item B.2 Function List Page 1138 Revision (See Manual for Details) H'FFE5: Real Time Output Trigger Select Register 1 RTPSR1: I/O Port Figure amended Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTPSR17 RTPSR16 RTPSR15 RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10 Subheading amended H'FFE6: Real Time Output Trigger Select Register 2 RTPSR2: I/O Port 1141 H'FFEB: LPWRCR: System Control Note * deleted from DTON description (Before) • ... to subactive mode*, or transition is made directly to sleep mode or standby mode → (After) • ... to subactive mode, or transition is made directly to sleep mode or standby mode 1142 H'FFEE: STCR: System Control Note * added to I C control description Used combined with CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR0* E.1 Power Supply Rise 1163 and Fall Order Figure E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order Figure E.1 amended VCC, AVCC 2 Vin SVCC, OVCC Appendix G Package Dimensions Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (PRQP0112JA-A) 1173 Figure G.1 replaced Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Contents Section 1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 1 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 7 Pin Arrangement and Functions........................................................................................ 9 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 9 1.3.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 11 Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 19 2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU............................................................................. 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... CPU Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... 2.2.1 Normal Mode (Not available for this LSI)........................................................... 2.2.2 Advanced Mode ................................................................................................... Address Space ................................................................................................................... Register Configuration ...................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.4.2 General Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... Data Formats ..................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes ..................................................................... 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions ................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................... 2.7.1 Addressing Mode ................................................................................................. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation.............................................................................. Processing States............................................................................................................... 2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.8.2 Reset State............................................................................................................ 19 19 20 21 21 22 22 24 27 28 28 29 30 32 33 33 35 36 36 38 39 49 50 51 51 54 58 58 59 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxiii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 2.8.4 Program Execution State...................................................................................... 2.8.5 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... 2.9 Basic Timing..................................................................................................................... 2.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) ......................................................................... 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 2.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 2.10.1 TAS Instruction.................................................................................................... 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction ......................................................................................... 60 61 62 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 65 3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... Operating Mode (Mode 1) ................................................................................................ Address Map in Each Operating Mode............................................................................. 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 68 3.2 3.3 3.4 Section 4 Power-Down State............................................................................................ 71 4.1 4.2 Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 4.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 4.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 4.2.3 Timer Register A (TMA) ..................................................................................... 4.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... Medium-Speed Mode........................................................................................................ Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................... 4.4.1 Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 4.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode............................................................................................ Module Stop Mode ........................................................................................................... 4.5.1 Module Stop Mode .............................................................................................. Standby Mode ................................................................................................................... 4.6.1 Standby Mode ...................................................................................................... 4.6.2 Clearing Standby Mode ....................................................................................... 4.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode.......................... Watch Mode...................................................................................................................... 71 76 76 76 78 80 81 82 83 83 83 84 84 85 85 85 85 87 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxiv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 4.7.1 Watch Mode......................................................................................................... 4.7.2 Clearing Watch Mode .......................................................................................... 4.8 Subsleep Mode.................................................................................................................. 4.8.1 Subsleep Mode..................................................................................................... 4.8.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode ...................................................................................... 4.9 Subactive Mode................................................................................................................. 4.9.1 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................... 4.9.2 Clearing Subactive Mode..................................................................................... 4.10 Direct Transition ............................................................................................................... 4.10.1 Overview of Direct Transition ............................................................................. 87 87 88 88 88 89 89 89 90 90 Section 5 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 91 5.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority ............................................................... 5.1.2 Exception Handling Operation............................................................................. 5.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table ................................................................... Reset.................................................................................................................................. 5.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 5.2.2 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 5.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. Notes on Use of the Stack ................................................................................................. 91 91 92 92 94 94 94 95 96 97 98 99 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Section 6 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 101 6.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 6.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 6.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 6.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 6.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ........................................... 6.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IENR) ............................................................................... 6.2.4 IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR) ...................................................................... 6.2.5 IRQ Status Register (IRQR) ................................................................................ 6.2.6 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ............................................................................. Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................................... 6.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 101 101 102 103 103 104 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 110 6.2 6.3 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 6.4 6.5 6.3.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 6.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table ........................................................................ Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................ 6.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................ 6.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 6.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 ..................................................................................... 6.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 6.4.5 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 6.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 6.5.2 Instructions That Disable Interrupts..................................................................... 6.5.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 112 113 116 116 118 120 123 124 125 125 126 126 Section 7 ROM ..................................................................................................................... 127 7.1 7.2 Overview........................................................................................................................... 7.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................. 7.2.1 Features................................................................................................................ 7.2.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 7.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes ......................................................................... 7.2.4 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 7.2.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Flash Memory Register Descriptions................................................................................ 7.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 7.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 7.3.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................... 7.3.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ........................................................................... 7.3.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 7.4.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 7.4.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ............................................................................... 7.5.1 Program Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)................... 7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) .... 7.5.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF).................... 7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) .... 127 127 128 128 129 130 134 134 135 135 138 141 142 143 144 145 150 151 151 152 154 156 7.3 7.4 7.5 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxvi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Flash Memory Protection.................................................................................................. 7.6.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 7.6.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 7.6.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... Flash Memory Programmer Mode .................................................................................... 7.8.1 Programmer Mode Setting ................................................................................... 7.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map...................................................................... 7.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation .............................................................................. 7.8.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 7.8.5 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................ 7.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode ................................................................................................. 7.8.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 7.8.8 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 7.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time..................................................................... 7.8.10 Notes on Memory Programming.......................................................................... Note on Switching from F–ZTAT Version to Mask-ROM Version ................................. 157 157 158 158 159 160 160 160 161 162 165 167 168 170 170 171 172 Section 8 RAM ..................................................................................................................... 173 8.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 173 8.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 173 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator..................................................................................... 175 9.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 9.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 9.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 9.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 9.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator........................................................................... 9.3.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................ Duty Adjustment Circuit ................................................................................................... Medium-Speed Clock Divider .......................................................................................... Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .................................................................................. Subclock Oscillator Circuit ............................................................................................... 9.7.1 Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator .......................................................... 9.7.2 When Subclock Is Not Needed ............................................................................ Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit................................................................................ Notes on the Resonator ..................................................................................................... 175 175 175 176 176 176 177 177 179 182 182 182 182 182 183 183 184 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxvii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port .............................................................................................................. 185 10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 10.1.1 Port Functions ...................................................................................................... 10.1.2 Port Input ............................................................................................................. 10.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors .................................................................................... 10.2 Port 0................................................................................................................................. 10.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.2.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.2.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.3 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 10.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.3.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.3.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.4 Port 2................................................................................................................................. 10.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.4.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.4.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.4.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.5 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 10.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.5.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.5.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.6 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 10.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.6.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.6.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.6.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.7 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 10.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.7.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.7.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.7.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 10.7.5 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 10.8 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 10.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.8.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.8.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxviii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 185 185 185 188 189 189 189 191 191 192 192 192 196 197 198 198 198 200 203 204 204 204 208 210 211 211 211 214 216 217 217 218 222 224 225 226 226 227 231 10.8.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 10.8.5 Pin States.............................................................................................................. 10.9 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 10.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 10.9.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 10.9.4 Pin States.............................................................................................................. 232 233 234 234 235 240 242 Section 11 Timer A ............................................................................................................. 243 11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 11.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 11.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 11.2.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)........................................................................... 11.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA) ...................................................................................... 11.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 11.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 11.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer ........................................................................... 11.3.2 Operation as Clock Timer .................................................................................... 11.3.3 Initializing the Counts.......................................................................................... 243 243 244 244 245 245 247 247 248 248 248 248 Section 12 Timer B ............................................................................................................. 249 12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 12.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 12.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 12.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 12.2.1 Timer Mode Register B (TMB) ........................................................................... 12.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB)....................................................................................... 12.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB) ............................................................................. 12.2.4 Port Mode Register A (PMRA) ........................................................................... 12.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 12.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 12.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer ........................................................................... 12.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer ................................................................... 12.3.3 Event Counter ...................................................................................................... 249 249 249 250 250 251 251 253 253 254 255 256 256 256 256 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxix of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J............................................................................................................... 257 13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 13.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 13.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 13.2.1 Timer Mode Register J (TMJ) ............................................................................. 13.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC) ........................................................................ 13.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS)........................................................................... 13.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ) ......................................................................................... 13.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK) ...................................................................................... 13.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ)................................................................................ 13.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK) ............................................................................. 13.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 13.3.1 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1) ................................................................................ 13.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2) ................................................................................ 13.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission ................................................................ 13.3.4 TMJ-2 Expansion Function.................................................................................. 257 257 257 259 259 260 260 263 266 267 267 268 268 269 270 270 270 271 275 Section 14 Timer L ............................................................................................................. 277 14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 14.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 14.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 14.2.1 Timer L Mode Register (LMR) ........................................................................... 14.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC)................................................................................. 14.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR) ............................................................. 14.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 14.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation ......................................................................... 14.3.2 Auto-Reload Operation........................................................................................ 14.3.3 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 14.3.4 Interrupt Request.................................................................................................. 14.4 Typical Usage ................................................................................................................... 14.5 Reload Timer Interrupt Request Signal............................................................................. 277 277 278 279 280 280 282 282 283 284 284 285 286 286 287 287 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxx of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R ............................................................................................................. 289 15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 15.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 15.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 15.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)................................................................... 15.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)................................................................... 15.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS)......................................................... 15.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1) .............................................................. 15.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2) .............................................................. 15.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1) ..................................................................... 15.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2) ..................................................................... 15.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3) ..................................................................... 15.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 15.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 15.3.1 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1.................. 15.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2.................. 15.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3.......................................................................... 15.3.4 Mode Identification.............................................................................................. 15.3.5 Reeling Controls .................................................................................................. 15.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor ................................. 15.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function .................................................................. 15.4 Interrupt Cause.................................................................................................................. 15.5 Settings for Respective Functions ..................................................................................... 15.5.1 Mode Identification.............................................................................................. 15.5.2 Reeling Controls .................................................................................................. 15.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function .................................................................. 15.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor ................................. 289 289 289 291 291 292 292 294 297 299 299 300 300 301 301 302 302 302 303 304 304 304 305 307 308 308 309 310 311 Section 16 Timer X1 ........................................................................................................... 313 16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 16.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 16.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 16.2.1 Free Running Counter (FRC)............................................................................... 16.2.2 Output Comparing Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB) ................................ 313 313 314 315 316 317 317 317 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.2.3 Input Capture Registers A through D (ICRA through ICRD).............................. 16.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)........................................................... 16.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX) ......................................................... 16.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX) ...................................................................... 16.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR) ........................................... 16.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 16.3.1 Operation of Timer X1......................................................................................... 16.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC ............................................................................... 16.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing ..................................................... 16.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing .......................................................................................... 16.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing ................................................................ 16.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing ............................ 16.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing ........................ 16.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing............................................................ Operation Mode of Timer X1 ........................................................................................... Interrupt Causes ................................................................................................................ Exemplary Uses of Timer X1 ........................................................................................... Precautions when Using Timer X1 ................................................................................... 16.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC .................................. 16.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC ........................... 16.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR .................. 16.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations............................... 318 319 322 326 328 330 331 331 332 333 333 334 335 336 336 337 337 338 339 339 340 341 342 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT).............................................................................. 345 17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 17.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 17.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 17.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 17.2.1 Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)................................................................... 17.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)........................................... 17.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 17.2.4 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 17.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 17.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 17.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ......................................................... 17.4 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 17.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 345 345 346 347 347 347 348 350 351 352 352 353 354 354 355 17.5.1 Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment 355 17.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0...................................................................... 355 17.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 356 Section 18 8-Bit PWM ....................................................................................................... 357 18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 18.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 18.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 18.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 18.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 18.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 18.2.1 8-bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3)........... 18.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR) ............................................................... 18.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) ............................................................................. 18.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 18.3 8-Bit PWM Operation ....................................................................................................... 357 357 357 358 358 359 359 360 360 361 362 Section 19 12-Bit PWM..................................................................................................... 363 19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 19.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 19.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 19.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 19.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 19.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 19.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR) .......................................... 19.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (DPWDR, CPWDR) .............................................. 19.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 19.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 19.3.1 Output Waveform ................................................................................................ 363 363 364 365 365 366 366 368 369 370 370 Section 20 14-Bit PWM..................................................................................................... 373 20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 20.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 20.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 20.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 20.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 20.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 20.2.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR).......................................................................... 20.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)............................................ 20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 373 373 374 374 375 375 375 376 377 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxiii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 20.3 14-Bit PWM Operation..................................................................................................... 378 Section 21 Prescalar Unit .................................................................................................. 379 21.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 21.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 21.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 21.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 21.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 21.2 Registers............................................................................................................................ 21.2.1 Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1).......................................................................... 21.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR) ................................................... 21.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ............................................................................. 21.3 Noise Cancel Circuit ......................................................................................................... 21.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 21.4.1 Prescalar S (PSS) ................................................................................................. 21.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW) .............................................................................................. 21.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count .................................................................... 21.4.4 8-bit PWM ........................................................................................................... 21.4.5 8-bit Input Capture Using IC Pin ......................................................................... 21.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output ....................................................................... 379 379 380 381 381 382 382 382 384 385 385 385 386 386 387 387 387 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) .............................................. 389 22.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 22.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 22.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 22.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 22.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 22.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 22.2.1 Receive Shift Register 1 (RSR1) ......................................................................... 22.2.2 Receive Data Register 1 (RDR1) ......................................................................... 22.2.3 Transmit Shift Register 1 (TSR1) ........................................................................ 22.2.4 Transmit Data Register 1 (TDR1)........................................................................ 22.2.5 Serial Mode Register 1 (SMR1)........................................................................... 22.2.6 Serial Control Register 1 (SCR1)......................................................................... 22.2.7 Serial Status Register 1 (SSR1) ........................................................................... 22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1) ................................................................................. 22.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register 1 (SCMR1)......................................................... 22.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 22.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 22.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxiv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 389 389 391 392 392 393 393 393 394 394 395 398 402 406 413 414 415 415 22.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 22.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function............................................................ 22.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode ......................................................................... 22.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 22.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 417 427 435 444 445 Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) ................................................................................. 451 23.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 23.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 23.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 23.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 23.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 23.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 2 23.2.1 I C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 23.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) ............................................................................. 23.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 2 23.2.4 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ........................................................................... 2 23.2.5 I C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ......................................................................... 2 23.2.6 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 23.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 23.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ...................................................................... 23.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 23.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 2 23.3.1 I C Bus Data Format ............................................................................................ 23.3.2 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 23.3.3 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 23.3.4 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 23.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 23.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 2 23.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Transfer to I C Bus Format Transfer...... 23.3.8 Noise Canceler ..................................................................................................... 23.3.9 Sample Flowcharts............................................................................................... 23.3.10 Initializing Internal Status.................................................................................... 23.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 451 451 452 453 454 455 455 457 459 460 464 471 475 476 478 479 479 481 483 485 488 489 491 492 492 496 498 Section 24 A/D Converter ................................................................................................. 513 24.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 24.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 24.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 24.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 513 513 514 515 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 24.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 24.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 24.2.1 Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR)................................................. 24.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR) ............................................... 24.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 24.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 24.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR)........................................................................ 24.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0) ............................................................................. 24.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 24.3 Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 24.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 24.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion................................................................... 24.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion ............................................. 24.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 516 517 517 517 518 521 524 524 525 526 527 527 528 529 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) ................................................................. 531 25.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 25.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 25.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 25.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 25.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 25.2.1 Address Trap Control Register (ATCR) .............................................................. 25.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0) ................................................... 25.3 Precautions in Usage......................................................................................................... 25.3.1 Basic Operations .................................................................................................. 25.3.2 Enabling............................................................................................................... 25.3.3 Bcc Instruction..................................................................................................... 25.3.4 BSR Instruction.................................................................................................... 25.3.5 JSR Instruction..................................................................................................... 25.3.6 JMP Instruction.................................................................................................... 25.3.7 RTS Instruction.................................................................................................... 25.3.8 SLEEP Instruction ............................................................................................... 25.3.9 Competing Interrupt............................................................................................. 531 531 531 532 532 532 533 534 534 536 536 540 541 543 544 545 549 Section 26 Servo Circuits .................................................................................................. 553 26.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 26.1.1 Functions.............................................................................................................. 26.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.2 Servo Port ......................................................................................................................... 26.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxvi of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 553 553 554 556 556 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 26.8 26.2.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.2.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 26.2.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.2.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals ...................................................................................... Reference Signal Generators............................................................................................. 26.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.3.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.3.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.3.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.3.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator ............................................................................ 26.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.4.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.4.3 HSW Timing Generator Configuration................................................................ 26.4.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.4.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.4.6 Operation ............................................................................................................. 26.4.7 Interrupts.............................................................................................................. 26.4.8 Cautions ............................................................................................................... High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback ...................................... 26.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.5.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.5.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 26.5.4 Register Description............................................................................................. Drum Speed Error Detector .............................................................................................. 26.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.6.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.6.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.6.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.6.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 26.6.6 fH Correction in Trick Play Mode......................................................................... Drum Phase Error Detector............................................................................................... 26.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.7.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 26.7.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.7.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.7.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 26.7.6 Phase Comparison................................................................................................ Capstan Speed Error Detector ........................................................................................... 556 558 560 560 564 565 565 565 567 568 573 588 588 588 590 591 591 606 612 613 614 614 615 615 616 618 618 618 620 621 626 628 629 629 630 631 632 635 637 637 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxvii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 26.9 26.10 26.11 26.12 26.13 26.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.8.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.8.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.8.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.8.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. Capstan Phase Error Detector ........................................................................................... 26.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.9.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.9.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.9.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.9.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit ....................................................................... 26.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.10.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.10.3 Register Description............................................................................................. Digital Filters .................................................................................................................... 26.11.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.11.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer................................................................................................. 26.11.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.11.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.11.6 Filter Characteristics ............................................................................................ 26.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response........................................................... -1 26.11.8 Initialization of Z ................................................................................................ Additional V Signal Generator ......................................................................................... 26.12.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.12.2 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 26.12.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.12.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal.................................................................................... CTL Circuit....................................................................................................................... 26.13.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 26.13.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 26.13.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 26.13.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 26.13.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 26.13.6 Operation ............................................................................................................. 26.13.7 CTL Input Section ............................................................................................... 26.13.8 Duty Discriminator .............................................................................................. 26.13.9 CTL Output Section............................................................................................. 637 638 639 640 645 647 647 647 649 650 653 655 655 655 657 660 660 661 663 664 665 673 675 675 677 677 678 678 678 680 683 683 684 685 685 686 700 703 706 712 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxviii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 26.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit.............................................................................. 26.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt........................................................................................ 26.14 Frequency Dividers ........................................................................................................... 26.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 26.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider ..................................................................................... 26.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider ..................................................................................... 26.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit .............................................................................. 26.15 Sync Signal Detector......................................................................................................... 26.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 26.15.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 26.15.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................... 26.15.4 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 26.15.5 Register Description ........................................................................................... 26.15.6 Noise Detection .................................................................................................. 26.15.7 Activation of the Sync Signal Detector .............................................................. 26.16 Servo Interrupt .................................................................................................................. 26.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 26.16.2 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 26.16.3 Register Description ........................................................................................... 715 716 716 716 716 721 730 732 732 733 734 734 734 741 744 744 744 744 745 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer ................................................ 751 27.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 27.1.1 Features .............................................................................................................. 27.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 27.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................... 27.1.4 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 27.2 Register Description.......................................................................................................... 27.2.1 Sync Separation Input Mode Register (SEPIMR) .............................................. 27.2.2 Sync Separation Control Register (SEPCR)....................................................... 27.2.3 Sync Separation AFC Control Register (SEPACR) ........................................... 27.2.4 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR) ...................................... 27.2.5 Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR) .......................................... 27.2.6 Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR) ...................................................... 27.2.7 H Complement and Mask Timing Register (HCMMR) ..................................... 27.2.8 Noise Detection Counter (NDETC) ................................................................... 27.2.9 Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR) ......................................................... 27.2.10 Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR) ........................................ 27.2.11 Internal Sync Frequency Register (INFRQR) .................................................... 27.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 27.3.1 Selecting Source Signals for Sync Separation.................................................... 751 752 752 754 754 755 755 760 763 765 769 772 774 776 777 778 780 781 781 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxix of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 27.3.2 27.3.3 27.3.4 27.3.5 27.3.6 27.3.7 Vsync Separation ................................................................................................. Hsync Separation ................................................................................................. Field Detection..................................................................................................... Noise Detection.................................................................................................... Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC) .............................................................. Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 787 788 789 789 790 795 Section 28 Data Slicer ........................................................................................................ 797 28.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 28.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 28.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 28.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 28.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 28.1.5 Data Slicer Use Conditions .................................................................................. 28.2 Register Description.......................................................................................................... 28.2.1 Slice Even- (Odd-) Field Mode Register (SEVFD, SODFD) .............................. 28.2.2 Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4).................................... 28.2.3 Slice Detection Registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4) ..................................... 28.2.4 Slice Data Registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4) ............................................ 28.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 28.2.6 Monitor Output Setting Register (DOUT) ........................................................... 28.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 28.3.1 Slice Line Specification ....................................................................................... 28.3.2 Slice Sequence ..................................................................................................... 28.4 32-Bit Slice Operation ...................................................................................................... 797 797 798 799 800 800 801 801 805 807 810 811 812 813 813 816 817 Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD) ........................................................................... 821 29.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 29.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 29.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 29.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 29.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 29.1.5 TV Formats and Display Modes .......................................................................... 29.2 Description of Display Functions...................................................................................... 29.2.1 Superimposed Mode and Text Display Mode...................................................... 29.2.2 Character Configuration....................................................................................... 29.2.3 On-Screen Display Configuration........................................................................ 29.3 Settings in Character Units ............................................................................................... 29.3.1 Character Configuration....................................................................................... 29.3.2 Character Colors .................................................................................................. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xl of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 821 821 823 824 825 826 826 826 827 828 829 829 829 29.4 29.5 29.6 29.7 29.8 29.9 29.3.3 Halftones/Cursors ................................................................................................ 29.3.4 Blinking ............................................................................................................... 29.3.5 Button Display ..................................................................................................... 29.3.6 Character Data ROM (OSDROM)....................................................................... 29.3.7 Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).......................................................................... Settings in Row Units ....................................................................................................... 29.4.1 Button Patterns..................................................................................................... 29.4.2 Display Enlargement............................................................................................ 29.4.3 Character Brightness ............................................................................................ 29.4.4 Cursor Color, Brightness, Halftone Levels .......................................................... 29.4.5 Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12)......................................................... Settings in Screen Units .................................................................................................... 29.5.1 Display Positions ................................................................................................. 29.5.2 Turning the OSD Display On and Off ................................................................. 29.5.3 Display Method.................................................................................................... 29.5.4 Blinking Period .................................................................................................... 29.5.5 Borders................................................................................................................. 29.5.6 Background Color and Brightness ....................................................................... 29.5.7 Character, Cursor, and Background Chroma Saturation ...................................... 29.5.8 Display Position Registers (HPOS and VPOS).................................................... 29.5.9 Screen Control Register (DCNTL) ...................................................................... Other Settings.................................................................................................................... 29.6.1 TV Format............................................................................................................ 29.6.2 Display Data RAM Control ................................................................................. 29.6.3 Timing of OSD Display Updates Using Register Rewriting................................ 29.6.4 4fsc/2fsc ............................................................................................................... 29.6.5 OSDV Interrupts .................................................................................................. 29.6.6 OSD Format Register (DFORM) ......................................................................... Digital Output ................................................................................................................... 29.7.1 R, G, and B Outputs............................................................................................. 29.7.2 YCO and YBO Outputs ....................................................................................... 29.7.3 Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT) ................................................... 29.7.4 Module Stop Control Register (MTSTPCR)........................................................ Notes on OSD Font Creation ............................................................................................ 29.8.1 Note 1 on Font Creation (Font Width) ................................................................. 29.8.2 Note 2 on Font Creation (Borders)....................................................................... 29.8.3 Note 3 on Font Creation (Blinking) ..................................................................... 29.8.4 Note 4 on Font Creation (Buttons)....................................................................... OSD Oscillator, AFC, and Dot Clock ............................................................................... 29.9.1 Sync Signals......................................................................................................... 830 831 832 833 835 840 840 840 840 840 842 847 847 848 848 848 849 849 849 850 851 857 857 857 857 858 858 858 862 862 865 866 868 870 870 870 872 873 874 874 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xli of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 29.9.2 AFC Circuit.......................................................................................................... 29.9.3 Dot Clock............................................................................................................. 29.9.4 4/2fsc.................................................................................................................... 29.10 OSD Operation in CPU Operation Modes ........................................................................ 29.11 Character Data ROM (OSDROM) Access by CPU.......................................................... 29.11.1 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 874 874 875 877 878 878 Section 30 Power Supply Circuit .................................................................................... 879 30.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 879 30.2 Power Supply Connection (Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit On-Chip) ........... 879 Section 31 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................. 881 31.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................................. 31.2 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R .................................................................................................................... 31.2.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ....................................................................................................... 31.2.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 31.2.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ....................................................................................................... 31.2.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ....................................................................................................... 31.2.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 31.2.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ........................................................................ 31.2.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 31.3 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S.......................................... 31.3.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯ ......... 31.3.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ......................... 31.3.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S....................................... 31.3.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432197S and HD6432196S................................ 31.3.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S .................... 31.3.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S...... 31.3.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S.................... 31.4 Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R....................................................................... 31.4.1 DC Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................................... 31.4.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2199R ...................................................... Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xlii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 881 882 882 889 890 893 897 898 901 905 905 911 912 915 919 920 923 927 927 934 31.4.3 31.4.4 31.4.5 31.4.6 31.4.7 31.4.8 AC Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................................... Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2199R............................................................. A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................. Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R................................... OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R................................................. Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 935 938 942 943 946 950 Appendix A Instruction Set .............................................................................................. 953 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 Instructions........................................................................................................................ 953 Instruction Codes .............................................................................................................. 964 Operation Code Map......................................................................................................... 974 Number of Execution States.............................................................................................. 978 Bus Status during Instruction Execution ........................................................................... 988 Change of Condition Codes ............................................................................................ 1002 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ............................................................................... 1007 B.1 B.2 Addresses ........................................................................................................................ 1007 Function List ................................................................................................................... 1017 Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams ................................................................................ 1148 C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams....................................................................................................... 1148 Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State.................................................... 1162 D.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams....................................................................................................... 1162 Appendix E Usage Notes................................................................................................. 1163 E.1 E.2 E.3 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order.................................................................................. 1163 Sample External Circuits................................................................................................. 1166 Handling of Pins When OSD Is Not Used ...................................................................... 1171 Appendix F Product Lineup ........................................................................................... 1172 Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................ 1173 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xliii of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xliv of xliv REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8S/2199R Group comprises microcomputers (MCUs) built around the H8S/2000 CPU, adopting Renesas Technology proprietary architecture, and equipped with on-chip supporting modules. The H8S/2000 has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16Mbyte linear address space. The H8S/2199R Group is equipped with a digital servo circuit, sync separator, OSD, data slicer, ROM, RAM, seven types of timers, three types of PWM, two types of serial communication 2 interface, an I C bus interface, A/D converter, and I/O port as on-chip supporting modules. The on-chip ROM is either flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) or mask ROM, with a capacity of 256, 128, 112, 96, or 80 kbytes. ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased. Using the H8S/2199R Group can implement a system suitable for VTR control. This manual describes the H8S/2199R Group hardware. For details on instructions, see the H8S/2600 and H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Item CPU Features of the H8S/2199R Group Specifications • General-register architecture ⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • High-speed operation suitable for real-time control ⎯ Maximum operating frequency: 10 MHz/4 V to 5.5 V ⎯ High-speed arithmetic operations 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns (10-MHz operation) 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 2000 ns (10-MHz operation) 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 2000 ns (10-MHz operation) • Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation ⎯ Sixty-five basic instructions ⎯ 8/16/32-bit transfer/arithmetic and logic instructions ⎯ Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions ⎯ Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • CPU operating modes ⎯ Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space Seven types of timer are incorporated ⎯ Timer A • • 8-bit interval timer Clock source can be selected among 8 types of internal clock of which frequencies are divided from the system clock (φ) and subclock (φSUB) Functions as clock time base by subclock input Functions as 8-bit interval timer or reload timer Clock source can be selected among 7 types of internal clock or external event input Functions as two 8-bit down counters or one 16-bit down counter (reload timer/event counter timer/timer output, etc., 5 types of operation modes) Remote controlled transmit function Take up/Supply Reel Pulse Frequency division Timer • • • • ⎯ Timer B ⎯ Timer J • • • Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 2 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Item Timer Specifications ⎯ Timer L • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Prescaler unit 8-bit up/down counter Clock source can be selected among 2 types of internal clock, CFG frequency division signal, and PB and REC-CTL (control pulse) Compare-match clearing function/auto reload function Three reload timers Mode discrimination Reel control Capstan motor acceleration/deceleration detection function Slow tracking mono-multi 16-bit free-running counter Clock source can be selected among 3 types of internal clock and DVCFG Two output compare outputs Four input capture inputs Functions as watchdog timer or 8-bit interval timer Generates reset signal or NMI at overflow ⎯ Timer R ⎯ Timer X1 (except for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S) ⎯ Watchdog timer ⎯ Divides system clock frequency and generates frequency division clock for supporting module functions ⎯ Divides subclock frequency and generates input clock for Timer A (clock time base) ⎯ Generates 8-bit PWM frequency and duty period ⎯ 8-bit input capture at external signal edge ⎯ Frequency division clock output enabled PWM • Three types of PWM are incorporated ⎯ 14-bit PWM: Pulse resolution type × 1 channel (except for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S) ⎯ 8-bit PWM: Duty control type × 4 channels (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S : 2 channel) ⎯ 12-bit PWM: Pulse pitch control type × 2 channels Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 3 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Item Serial communication interface (SCI) I C bus interface (2 channels) (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S : 1 channel) 2 Specifications ⎯ Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable ⎯ Desired bit rate selectable with built-in baud rate generator ⎯ Multiprocessor communication function ⎯ Conforms to Phillips I C bus interface standard 2 ⎯ Start and stop conditions generated automatically ⎯ Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving, and automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting ⎯ Selection of acknowledgement mode or serial mode (without acknowledge bit) A/D converter ⎯ Resolution: 10 bits ⎯ Input: 12 channels ⎯ High-speed conversion: 13.4 μs minimum conversion time (10-MHz operation) ⎯ Sample-and-hold function ⎯ A/D conversion can be activated by software or external trigger Address trap controller ⎯ Interrupt occurs when the preset address is found during bus cycle ⎯ To-be-trapped addresses can be individually set at three different locations ⎯ 56 input/output pins ⎯ 8 input-only pins ⎯ Can be switched for each supporting module I/O port Servo circuit • Digital servo circuits on-chip ⎯ Input and output circuits ⎯ Error detection circuit ⎯ Phase and gain compensation Sync signal (servo) • On-chip sync signal detection circuit ⎯ Can separately detect horizontal and vertical sync signals ⎯ Noise detection function Sync separator including AFC ⎯ Horizontal and vertical sync signals separated from the composite video signal ⎯ Noise detection ⎯ Selection of sync separation methods Sync separator for • OSD and data slicer Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 4 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Item OSD (On Screen Display) Specifications ⎯ Screen of 32 characters × 12 lines ⎯ 384 types of characters (H8S/2199R F-ZTAT: 512 types of characters H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 256 types of characters) ⎯ Character configuration: 12 dots × 18 lines ⎯ Character colors: ⎯ Cursor colors: ⎯ Halftone display ⎯ Button display Data slicer ⎯ Slice lines: Four lines (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: two lines) ⎯ Slice levels: Seven levels ⎯ Sampling clock generated by AFC ⎯ Slice interrupt ⎯ Error detection Memory ⎯ Flash memory or mask ROM (Refer to the product line-up) ⎯ High-speed static RAM Product Name H8S/2199R H8S/2198R H8S/2197R H8S/2196R H8S/2197S H8S/2196S ⎯ Medium-speed mode ⎯ Sleep mode ⎯ Module stop mode ⎯ Standby mode ⎯ Subclock operation Subactive mode, watch mode, subsleep mode Interrupt controller ⎯ Six external interrupt pins (IRQ5 to IRQ0) ⎯ 44 internal interrupt sources (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S : 35 internal interrupt sources) ⎯ Three priority levels settable Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 5 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 ROM 128 k (256 k*) bytes 112 k bytes 96 k bytes 80 k bytes 96 k bytes 80 k bytes 3 k bytes RAM 4 k (8 k*) bytes 4 k bytes 4 k bytes Eight hues Eight hues ⎯ Background colors: Eight hues Power-down state Section 1 Overview Item Clock pulse generator Specifications • Two types of clock pulse generator on-chip ⎯ System clock pulse generator: 8 to 10 MHz ⎯ Subclock pulse generator: 32.768 kHz Packages Product lineup Part No. Group Mask ROM Versions F-ZTAT Versions ROM/RAM (bytes) Packages PRQP0112JA-A ⎯ 112-pin plastic QFP (PRQP0112JA-A) H8S/2199R HD6432199R HD64F2199R 128 k/4 k (256 k*/ 8 k*) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 112 k/4 k 96 k/4 k 80 k/4 k 96 k/3 k 80 k/3 k HD6432198R HD6432197R HD6432196R HD6432197S HD6432196S Note: * F-ZTAT version PRQP0112JA-A PRQP0112JA-A PRQP0112JA-A PRQP0112JA-A PRQP0112JA-A Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 6 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview 1.2 Internal Block Diagram Figure 1.1 shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2199R Group. X1 X2 OSC1 OSC2 MD0 RES External address bus VCC VSS VCL VSS VCC VSS External address bus External data bus External data bus P27/SYNCI P26/SCL0 P25/SDA0 P24/SCL1 P23/SDA1 P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 P17/TMOW P16/IC P15/IRQ5 P14/IRQ4 P13/IRQ3 P12/IRQ2 P11/IRQ1 P10/IRQ0 P07/AN7 P06/AN6 P05/AN5 P04/AN4 P03/AN3 P02/AN2 P01/AN1 P00/AN0 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB AVCC AVSS P87/DPG P86/EXTTRG P85/COMP/B P84/H.Amp SW/G P83/C.Rotary/R P82/EXCTL P81/EXCAP/YBO P80/YCO SVCC SVSS Port 2 H8S/2000 CPU Internal data bus ROM Internal address bus RAM Port 1 P37/TMO P36/BUZZ P35/PWM3 P34/PWM2 P33/PWM1 P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 P47/RPTRG P46/FTOB P45/FTOA P44/FTID P43/FTIC P42/FTIB P41/FTIA P40/PWM14 P67/RP7/TMBI P66/RP6/ADTRG P65/RP5 P64/RP4 P63/RP3 P62/RP2 P61/RP1 P60/RP0 P77/PPG7/RPB P76/PPG6/RPA P75/PPG5/RP9 P74/PPG4/RP8 P73/PPG3 P72/PPG2 P71/PPG1 P70/PPG0 Subclock pulse generator Subclock pulse pulse generator Bus controller Address trap controller Prescaler unit Timer A Port 6 Port 7 Port 4 Interrupt controller 14-bit PWM 12-bit PWM 8-bit PWM Watchdog timer Port 0 Timer L Timer B SCI1 I2C bus interface Timer J Analog port Timer R A/D converter Timer X1 Servo circuit Port 8 Data slicer OSD Sub-carrier oscillator AFC Sync signal detection Port 3 4fscin/2fscin 4fscout/2fscout AFC pc AFC osc AFC LPF Servo pins (CTL input/output amplifier, three-level output, etc.) DPG DFG CFG DRMPWM CAPPWM CTL(+) CTL(–) CTLBias CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) AUDIO FF VIDEO FF Vpulse CTL FB CTL REF OSD (Analog input/output) CVin1 CVout Sync separation CVin2 Csync/Hsync Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2199R Group (except for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 7 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Hsync(Csync) VLPF/Vsync OVCC OVSS Section 1 Overview Figure 1.2 shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. X1 X2 OSC1 OSC2 MD0 RES External address bus VCC VSS VCL VSS VCC VSS External address bus External data bus External data bus P27 P26 P25 P24/SCL1 P23/SDA1 P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 P17/TMOW P16/IC P15/IRQ5 P14/IRQ4 P13/IRQ3 P12/IRQ2 P11/IRQ1 P10/IRQ0 P07/AN7 P06/AN6 P05/AN5 P04/AN4 P03/AN3 P02/AN2 P01/AN1 P00/AN0 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB AVCC AVSS P87/DPG P86/EXTTRG P85/COMP/B P84/H.Amp SW/G P83/C.Rotary/R P82/EXCTL P81/EXCAP/YBO P80/YCO SVCC SVSS Port 2 H8S/2000 CPU Internal data bus ROM Internal address bus RAM Port 1 P37/TMO P36/BUZZ P35 P34 P33/PWM1 P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 P47/RPTRG P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40 P67/RP7/TMBI P66/RP6/ADTRG P65/RP5 P64/RP4 P63/RP3 P62/RP2 P61/RP1 P60/RP0 P77/PPG7/RPB P76/PPG6/RPA P75/PPG5/RP9 P74/PPG4/RP8 P73/PPG3 P72/PPG2 P71/PPG1 P70/PPG0 Subclock pulse generator Subclock pulse pulse generator Bus controller Address trap controller Prescaler unit Timer A Port 6 Port 7 Port 4 Interrupt controller 12-bit PWM 8-bit PWM Watchdog timer Port 0 Timer L Timer B SCI1 I2C bus interface Timer J Analog port Timer R A/D converter Data slicer Servo circuit Port 8 OSD Port 3 Sub-carrier oscillator AFC Sync signal detection 4fscin/2fscin 4fscout/2fscout AFC pc AFC osc AFC LPF Servo pins (CTL input/output amplifier, three-level output, etc.) DPG DFG CFG DRMPWM CAPPWM CTL(+) CTL(–) CTLBias CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) AUDIO FF VIDEO FF Vpulse CTL FB CTL REF OSD (Analog input/output) CVin1 CVout Sync separation CVin2 Hsync(Csync) Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 8 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Csync/Hsync VLPF/Vsync OVCC OVSS Section 1 Overview 1.3 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement and Functions Pin Arrangement Figure 1.3 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2199R Group. P33/PWM1 P34/PWM2 MD0 VCL OSC2 VSS OSC1 RES X1 X2 FWE P40/PWM14 P41/FTIA P42/FTIB P43/FTIC P44/FTID P45/FTOA P46/FTOB P47/RPTRG P20/SI1 P21/SO1 P22/SCK1 P23/SDA1 P24/SCL1 P25/SDA0 P26/SCL0 P27/SYNCI VSS Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2199R Group (except for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S) SVSS CTLREF CTL(+) CTL(–) CTLBias CTLFB CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) CFG SVCC AFCpc AFCosc AFCLPF Csync/Hsync VLPF/Vsync CVin2 CVin1 OVCC CVout OVSS 4fscout/2fscout 4fscin/2fscin AVSS ANB ANA AN9 AN8 P07/AN7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 P70/PPG0 P71/PPG1 P72/PPG2 P73/PPG3 P74/PPG4/RP8 P75/PPG5/RP9 P76/PPG6/RPA P77/PPG7/RPB P80/YCO P81/EXCAP/YBO P82/EXCTL P83/C.Rotary/R P84/H.Amp SW/G P85/COMP/B P86/EXTTRG P87/DPG DFG VIDEO FF AUDIO FF DRM PWM CAP PWM Vpulse VSS Csync VCC 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 PRQP0112JA-A (Top view) 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 VCC P35/PWM3 P36/BUZZ P37/TMO P60/RP0 P61/RP1 P62/RP2 P63/RP3 P64/RP4 P65/RP5 P66/RP6/ADTRG P67/RP7/TMBI P17/TMOW P16/IC P15/IRQ5 P14/IRQ4 P13/IRQ3 P12/IRQ2 P11/IRQ1 P10/IRQ0 AVCC P00/AN0 P01/AN1 P02/AN2 P03/AN3 P04/AN4 P05/AN5 P06/AN6 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 9 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Figure 1.4 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. P33/PWM1 P34 MD0 VCL OSC2 VSS OSC1 RES X1 X2 NC P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47/RPTRG P20/SI1 P21/SO1 P22/SCK1 P23/SDA1 P24/SCL1 P25 P26 P27 VSS Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 10 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 SVSS CTLREF CTL(+) CTL(–) CTLBias CTLFB CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) CFG SVCC AFCpc AFCosc AFCLPF Csync/Hsync VLPF/Vsync CVin2 CVin1 OVCC CVout OVSS 4fscout/2fscout 4fscin/2fscin AVSS ANB ANA AN9 AN8 P07/AN7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 P70/PPG0 P71/PPG1 P72/PPG2 P73/PPG3 P74/PPG4/RP8 P75/PPG5/RP9 P76/PPG6/RPA P77/PPG7/RPB P80/YCO P81/EXCAP/YBO P82/EXCTL P83/C.Rotary/R P84/H.Amp SW/G P85/COMP/B P86/EXTTRG P87/DPG DFG VIDEO FF AUDIO FF DRM PWM CAP PWM Vpulse VSS Csync VCC 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 PRQP0112JA-A (Top view) 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 VCC P35 P36/BUZZ P37/TMO P60/RP0 P61/RP1 P62/RP2 P63/RP3 P64/RP4 P65/RP5 P66/RP6/ADTRG P67/RP7/TMBI P17/TMOW P16/IC P15/IRQ5 P14/IRQ4 P13/IRQ3 P12/IRQ2 P11/IRQ1 P10/IRQ0 AVCC P00/AN0 P01/AN1 P02/AN2 P03/AN3 P04/AN4 P05/AN5 P06/AN6 Section 1 Overview 1.3.2 Pin Functions Table 1.2 summarizes the functions of the H8S/2199R Group pins. Table 1.2 Type Power supply Pin Functions Symbol VCC Pin No. 56, 112 I/O Input Name and Function Power supply: All Vcc pins should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V) Ground: All Vss pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V) Servo power supply: SVcc pin should be connected to the servo analog power supply (+5 V) Servo ground: SVss pin should be connected to the servo analog power supply (0 V) Analog power supply: Power supply pin for A/D converter. It should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V) when the A/D converter is not used Analog ground: Ground pin for A/D converter. It should be connected to the system power supply (0 V) OSD power supply: OVCC should be connected to the OSD analog power supply (+5 V) OSD ground: OVSS should be connected to the OSD analog power supply (0 V) Smoothing capacitor connection: Connect 0.1-µF power-smoothing capacitance between VCL and VSS Connected to a crystal oscillator. It can also input an external clock. See section 9, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input Connected to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See section 9, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 11 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 VSS 57, 79, 110 10 Input SVCC Input SVSS 1 Input AVCC 36 Input AVSS 23 Input OVCC 18 Input OVSS 20 Input VCL 81 Input Clock OSC1 OSC2 78 80 Input Output X1 X2 76 75 Input Output Section 1 Overview Type Operating mode control System control Symbol MD0 Pin No. 82 I/O Input Name and Function Mode pin: This pin sets the operating mode. This pin should not be changed while the MCU is in operation Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset Flash memory enable: Enables/disables flash memory programming. This pin is available only with MCU with flash memory on-chip. External interrupt request 0: External interrupt input pin for which rising edge sense, falling edge sense or both edges sense are selectable External interrupt requests 1 to 5: External interrupt input pins for which rising or falling edge sense are selectable RES FWE 77 74 Input Input Interrupts IRQ0 37 Input IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 Prescaler unit IC TMOW 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Input Input Output Input capture input: Input capture input pin for prescaler unit Frequency division clock output: Output pin for clock of which frequency is divided by prescaler Timer B event input: Input pin for events to be input to Timer B counter Timer J event input: Input pin for events to be input to Timer J RDT1or RDT-2 counter Timer J timer output: Output pin for toggle at underflow of RDT-1 of Timer J, or remote controlled transmit data Timer J buzzer output: Output pin for toggle which is selectable among fixed frequency, 1 Hz frequency divided from subclock (32 kHz), and frequency division CTL signal Timers TMBI 45 Input IRQ1 IRQ2 TMO 38 39 53 Input Output BUZZ 54 Output Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 12 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Type Timers Symbol IRQ3 Pin No. 40 I/O Input Name and Function Timer R input capture: Input pin for input capture of Timer R TMRU-1 or TMRU-2 Timer X1 output compare A and B output: Output pin for output compare A and B of Timer X1 Timer X1 input capture A, B, C and D input: Input pin for input capture A, B, C and D of Timer X1 8-bit PWM square waveform output: Output pin for waveform generated by 8-bit PWM 0, 1, 2 and 3 14-bit PWM square waveform output: Output pin for waveform generated by 14-bit PWM SCI clock input/output: Clock input pins for SCI 1 SCI receive data input: Receive data input pins for SCI 1 SCI transmit data output: Transmit data output pins for SCI 1 I C bus interface clock input/output: 2 Clock input/output pin for I C bus interface I C bus interface data input/output: 2 Data input/output pin for I C bus interface I C bus interface clock input: 2 I C formatless serial clock input 2 2 2 FTOA* FTOB* FTIA* FTIB* FTIC* FTID* PWM PWM0 PWM1 PWM2* PWM3* PWM14* 68 67 72 71 70 69 85 84 83 55 73 Output Input Output Output Serial communication interface (SCI) SCK1 SI1 SO1 63 65 64 59 61 60 62 58 Input /output Input Output Input /output Input /output Input I C bus interface 2 SCL0* SCL1 SDA0* SDA1 SYNCI* Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 13 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Type A/D converter Symbol Pin No. I/O Input Name and Function Analog input channels 7 to 0: Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is started by a software triggering Analog input channels 8, 9, A and B: Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is started by an external trigger, a hardware trigger, or software A/D conversion external trigger input: A/D conversion for analog data input pins 8, 9, A, and B is started by an external trigger Audio FF: Output pin for audio head switching signal Video FF: Output pin for video head switching signal Capstan mix: 12-bit PWM output pin giving result of capstan speed error and phase error after filtering Drum mix: 12-bit PWM output pin giving result of drum speed error and phase error after filtering Additional V pulse: Three-level output pin for additional V signal synchronized to the VIDEO FF signal Color rotary signal: Output pin for color signal processing control signal in four-head special-effects playback Head-amp switch: Output pin for preamplifier output select signal in four-head special-effects playback. Compare input: Input pin for signal giving the result of preamplifier output comparison in four-head special-effects playback. CTL head (+) and (-) pins: I/O pins for CTL signals CTL primary amp bias supply: Bias supply pin for CTL primary amp AN7 to AN0 28 to 35 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB ADTRG 27 26 25 24 46 Input Input Servo circuits AUDIO FF VIDEO FF CAPPWM 106 105 108 Output Output Output DRMPWM 107 Output Vpulse 109 Output C.Rotary 99 Output H.AmpSW 100 Output COMP 101 Input CTL (+) CTL (-) CTL Bias 3 4 5 Input /output Input Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 14 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Type Servo circuits Symbol CTL Amp (o) Pin No. 7 I/O Output Input Input Name and Function CTL amp output: Output pin for CTL amp CTL Schmitt amp input: Input pin for CTL Schmitt amp CLT feedback input: Input pin for CTL amp high-range characteristics control CTL amp reference voltage output: Output pin for 1/2 Vcc (SV) Capstan FG input: Schmitt comparator input pin for CFG signal Drum FG input: Schmitt input pin for DFG signal Drum PG input: Schmitt input pin for DPG signal External CTL input: Input pin for external CTL signal Mixed sync signal input: Input pin for mixed sync signal Capstan external sync signal input: Signal input pin for external synchronization of capstan phase control External trigger signal input: Signal input pin for synchronization with reference signal generator Servo monitor output pin 1: Output pin for servo module internal signal Servo monitor output pin 2: Output pin for servo module internal signal PPG: Output pin for HSW timing generator. To be used when head switching is required as well as AUDIO FF and VIDEO FF CTL SMT (i) 8 CTLFB 6 CTLREF CFG DFG DPG EXCTL Csync EXCAP 2 9 104 103 98 111 97 Output Input Input Input Input Input Input EXTTRG 102 Input SV1 SV2 PPG7 to PPG0 87 86 95 to 88 Output Output Output Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 15 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Type Sync separator Symbol Csync/ Hsync VLPF/ Vsync AFC pc Pin No. 14 I/O Input/ output Input Name and Function Sync signal input/output: Composite sync signal input/output or horizontal sync signal input Sync signal input: Pin for connecting external LPF for vertical sync signal or input pin for vertical sync signal AFC oscillation: Pin for connecting external circuit for AFC oscillation AFC oscillation: Pin for connecting external circuit for AFC oscillation Pin for connecting external LPF for AFC fsc oscillation: Input pin for subcarrier oscillator. 4fsc or 2fsc can be selected fsc: Subcarrier frequency fsc oscillation: Output pin for subcarrier oscillator. 4fsc or 2fsc can be selected fsc: Subcarrier frequency Composite video input: Composite video signal input. Input 2-Vp-p composite video signal, and the sync tip of the signal is clamped to about 2.0 V Composite video input: Composite video signal input for OSD. Input 2Vp-p composite video signal, and the sync tip of the signal is clamped to about 1.4 V Composite video output: Composite video signal output for OSD. 2-Vp-p composite video signal is output OSD digital output: Color signal R output OSD digital output: Color signal G output OSD digital output: Color signal B output 15 11 Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input AFC osc 12 AFC LPF 4 fsc in/ 2 fsc in 13 22 4 fsc out/ 2 fsc out 21 Output CVin2 16 Input OSD CVin1 17 Input CVout 19 Output R G B 99 100 101 Output Output Output Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 16 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Type OSD Symbol YCO YBO Data slicer CVin2 Pin No. 96 97 16 I/O Output Output Input Name and Function OSD digital output: Character data output OSD digital output: Character display position output Composite video input: Composite video signal input. Input 2-Vp-p composite video signal, and the sync tip of the signal is clamped to about 2.0 V. Port 0: 8-bit input pins Port 1: 8-bit I/O pins Port 2: 8-bit I/O pins Port 3: 8-bit I/O pins Port 4: 8-bit I/O pins Port 6: 8-bit I/O pins Port 7: 8-bit I/O pins Port 8: 8-bit I/O pins Realtime output port: 8-bit realtime output pins Realtime output port: 4-bit realtime output pins Realtime output port trigger input: Input pin for realtime output port trigger I/O port P07 to P00 P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P47 to P40 P67 to P60 P77 to P70 P87 to P80 RP7 to RP0 RPB to RP8 RPTRG 28 to 35 44 to 37 58 to 65 53 to 55 83 to 87 66 to 73 45 to 52 95 to 88 Input Input /output Input /output Input /output Input /output Input /output Input /output 103 to 96 Input /output 45 to 52 95 to 92 66 Output Output Input Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 17 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 1 Overview Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 18 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8S/2000 CPU has the following features. • Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs • General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] • 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 19 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU • High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states Maximum clock rate: 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode*/Advanced mode Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. • Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction CPU clock speed selection 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU 10 MHz 1200 ns 1200 ns 2000 ns 2000 ns 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below. • Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Number of execution states The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions differ as follows. Number of Execution States Instruction MULXU Mnemonic MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, Erd MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, Erd H8S/2600 3 4 4 5 H8S/2000 12 20 13 21 There are also differences in the address space, EXR register functions, power-down state, etc., depending on the product. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 20 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added. • Expanded address space Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced addressing mode The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • Additional control register One 8-bit control register has been added. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 21 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal* and advanced. Normal mode* supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address space (architecturally the maximum total address space is 4 Gbytes, with a maximum of 16 Mbytes for the program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for the data area). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller. Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. Maximum 64 kbytes for program and data areas combined Normal mode* CPU operating mode Advanced mode Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. Maximum 16 Mbytes for program and data areas combined Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes 2.2.1 Normal Mode (Not available for this LSI) The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU. (1) Address Space A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. (2) Extended Registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@-Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 22 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (3) Instruction Set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. (4) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The configuration of the exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.2. For details of the exception vector table, see section 5, Exception Handling. H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 23 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (5) Stack Structure When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 5, Exception Handling. SP PC (16 bits) SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch Note: * Ignored when returning. (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode 2.2.2 Advanced Mode (1) Address Space Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined). (2) Extended Registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. (3) Instruction Set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 24 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (4) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see section 5, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B H'0000000C (Reserved for system use) H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 25 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. (5) Stack Structure In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 5, Exception Handling. SP Reserved PC (24 bits) SP CCR PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 26 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode*, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. H'0000 H'00000000 H'FFFF Program area H'00FFFFFF Data area Cannot be used with this LSI H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal mode* (b) Advanced mode Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. Figure 2.6 Memory Map Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 27 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.4 2.4.1 Register Configuration Overview The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 (SP) Control Registers (CR) 23 PC 0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 76543210 EXR* T – – – – I2 I1 I0 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend: : SP : PC EXR : : T I2 to I0 : CCR : : I : UI Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit H U N Z V C : : : : : : Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Note: * Does not affect operation in this LSI. Figure 2.7 CPU Registers Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 28 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.4.2 General Registers The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit registers. Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. • Address registers • 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) RH registers (R0H to R7H) Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the stack. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 29 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.9 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR), and 8-bit condition-code register (CCR). (1) Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) (2) Extended Control Register (EXR) An 8-bit register. In this LSI, this register does not affect operation. Bit 7: Trace Bit (T): This bit is reserved. In this LSI, this bit does not affect operation. Bits 6 to 3: Reserved: These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0: Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits are reserved. In this LSI, these bits do not affect operation. (3) Condition: Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 30 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Bit 7: Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller. Bit 6: User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller. Bit 5: Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 4: User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3: Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. Bit 2: Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1: Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 0: Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: a. Add instructions, to indicate a carry b. Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow c. Shift and rotate instructions, to store the carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit-manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instructions. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 31 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.4.4 Initial Register Values Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 32 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.5 Data Formats The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers. Data type General Register Data Format 7 1-bit data RnH 0 Don't care 76 54 32 10 7 1-bit data RnL Don't care 0 76 54 32 10 7 4-bit BCD data RnH 43 0 Don't care Upper digit Lower digit 7 4-bit BCD data RnL Don't care 43 0 Upper digit Lower digit 7 Byte data RnH MSB 0 Don't care LSB 7 Byte data RnL Don't care MSB 0 LSB Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 33 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Data Type General Register Data format Word data Rn 15 0 MSB Word data 15 En 0 LSB MSB Longword data 31 ERn LSB 16 15 0 MSB En Rn LSB Legend: ERn : General register ER En Rn : General register E : General register R RnH : General register RH RnL : General register RL MSB : Most significant bit LSB : Least significant bit Figure 2.11 General Register Data Formats (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 34 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.12 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. Data Type Address 7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Data Format Byte data Address L MSB LSB Word data Address 2M MSB Address 2M +1 LSB Longword data Address 2N MSB Address 2N +1 Address 2N +2 Address 2N +3 LSB Figure 2.12 Memory Data Formats When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 35 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.6 2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Function Data transfer Instruction Classification Instructions MOV 1 1 POP* , PUSH* 5 5 LDM* , STM* Size BWL WL L 3 Types 5 MOVFPE* , MOVTPE* 3 B BWL B BWL L BW WL B BWL 4 8 14 5 9 1 Total: 65 types 19 Arithmetic ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS EXTU, EXTS 4 TAS* Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control Block data transfer Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, BWL ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS 2 B ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP EEPMOV Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 36 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @SP. 2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Cannot be used in the H8S/2199 Group. 4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 5. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 37 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2000 CPU can use. Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Addressing Modes @-ERn/@ERn+ Function @(d:16, ERn) @(d:32, ERn) @(d:8, PC) @(d:16, PC) @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @aa:8 @ERn #xx Rn @@aa:8 Instruction MOV BWL — POP, PUSH — LDM*3, STM*3 MOVFPE, — 1 MOVTPE* ADD, CMP BWL SUB WL ADDX, SUBX B ADDS, SUBS — INC, DEC — DAA, DAS — MULXU, — DIVXU MULXS, — DIVXS NEG — EXTU, EXTS — 2 TAS* — AND, OR, BWL XOR NOT — Shift — Bit manipulation — Bcc, BSR — Branch JMP, JSR — RTS — TRAPA — RTE — SLEEP — LDC B STC — ANDC, B ORC, XORC NOP — — Block data transfer Data transfer BWL — — — BWL BWL B L BWL B BW BW BWL WL — BWL BWL BWL B — — — — — — B B — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — B — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — — — — — — BWL — — B — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — WL L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — System control Logic operation Arithmetic operations — — — BW Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Notes: 1. Cannot be used in this LSI. 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 38 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 — Section 2 CPU 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the functions of the instructions. The notation used in table 2.3 is defined below. Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM Disp + − × ÷ ∧ ∨ ⊕ → ∼ :8/:16/:24/:32 Note: * General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Extended control register Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive OR Move NOT (logical complement) 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 39 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instruction MOV Data Transfer Instructions Size* 1 Function (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register B/W/L MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L Cannot be used in this LSI Cannot be used in this LSI @SP+ → Rn Pops a general register from the stack POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn PUSH W/L Rn → @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP LDM* STM* 2 L L @SP+ → Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack Rn (register list) → @-SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack 2 Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 40 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.4 Instruction ADD SUB Arithmetic Instructions Size* 1 Function Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction) B/W/L ADDX SUBX B Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register INC DEC ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU B/W/L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only) L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register B Rd decimal adjust → Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits MULXS B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits × 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits × 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 41 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Instruction DIVXS Size* B/W 1 Function Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder CMP B/W/L Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result NEG B/W/L 0 - Rd → Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left TAS B @ERd - 0, 1 → ( of @ERd)* 2 Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1 Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 42 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.5 Instruction AND Logic Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data OR B/W/L Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data NOT B/W/L ~ Rd → Rd Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents Note: * B: W: L: Size refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Table 2.6 Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Note: * B: W: L: Shift Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd (shift) → Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible Size refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 43 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.7 Instruction BSET Bit Manipulation Instructions Size* B Function 1 → ( of ) Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register BCLR B 0 → ( of ) Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register BNOT B ~ ( of ) → ( of ) Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register BTST B ~ ( of ) → Z Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register BAND B C ∧ ( of ) → C ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag BIAND B C ∧ [~( of )] → C ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data BOR B C ∨ ( of ) → C ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag BIOR B C∨ [~( of )] → C ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 44 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Instruction BOXR Size* B Function C ⊕ ( of ) → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag BIXOR B C ⊕ [~ ( of )] → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data BLD B ( of ) → C Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag BILD B ~ ( of ) → C Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data BST B C → ( of ) Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand BIST B ~ C → ( of ) Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 45 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.8 Instruction Bcc Branch Instructions Size* ⎯ Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true The branching conditions are listed below Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS BCC (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (True) Never (False) HIgh Low of Same Carry Clear (High or Same) Carry Set (LOw) Not Equal EQual oVerflow Clear oVerflow Set PLus MInus Greater or Equal Less Than Greater Than Less or Equal Condition Always Never CVZ = 0 CVZ = 1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV = 0 N⊕V=1 Z∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0 Z∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1 JMP BSR JSR RTS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Branches unconditionally to a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Returns from a subroutine Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 46 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.9 Instruction TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC System Control Instructions Size* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling Returns from an exception-handling routine Causes a transition to a power-down state (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR Moves contents of a general register or memory or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid STC B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid ANDC ORC XORC B B B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data CCR∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR∨ #IMM → EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data NOP Note: ⎯ PC + 2 → PC Only increments the program counter * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 47 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions Instruction EEPMOV.B Size* ⎯ Function if R4L ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4L −1 → R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → ER6+ R4 −1 → R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6 R4L or R4: size of block (bytes) EEPMOV.W ⎯ Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 48 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Figure 2.13 shows examples of instruction formats. (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc. rn rm MOV.B@(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc. Figure 2.13 Instruction Formats (Examples) (1) Operation Field Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. (2) Register Field Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. (3) Effective Address Extension Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 49 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (4) Condition Field Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, carry out bit manipulation, then write back the byte of data. Caution is therefore required when using these instructions on a register containing write-only bits, or a port. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear internal I/O register flags to 0. In this case, the relevant flag need not be read beforehand if it is clear that it has been set to 1 in an interrupt handling routine, etc. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 50 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.7 2.7.1 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation Addressing Mode The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.11 Addressing Modes No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 (1) Register Direct–Rn The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. (2) Register Indirect–@ERn The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand in memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 51 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (3) Register Indirect with Displacement–@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. (4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement–@ERn+ or @-ERn a. Register indirect with post-increment–@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. b. Register indirect with pre-decrement–@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. (5) Absolute Address–@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32 The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 52 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) Normal Mode H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF (6) Immediate–#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. (7) Program-Counter Relative–@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. (8) Memory Indirect–@@aa:8 This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 53 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details, see section 5, Exception Handling. Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode* (b) Advanced Mode Note: * Not available for this LSI Figure 2.14 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or an instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode* the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Note: * Not available for this LSI. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 54 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation No. 1 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct (Rn) op rm rn Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents 2 Register indirect (@ERn) 31 General register contents op r 0 31 24 23 0 Don’t care 3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) 31 General register contents 31 op r disp 31 Sign extension disp 0 24 23 0 Don’t care 0 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement • Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 General register contents 0 31 24 23 0 Don’t care op r 1, 2, or 4 • Register indirect with pre-decrement @–ERn 31 General register contents 31 op r Operand Size Byte Word Longword Value Added 1 2 4 1, 2, or 4 24 23 0 Don’t care 0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 55 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address @aa:8 op abs 31 24 23 H'FFFF 87 0 Don’t care No. 5 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) @aa:16 op abs 31 Don’t care 24 23 16 15 Sign extension 0 @aa:24 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don’t care @aa:32 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don’t care 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op IMM Operand is immediate data 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) 23 PC contents 0 op disp 23 Sign extension 0 disp 31 24 23 0 Don’t care Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 56 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Memory indirect @@aa:8 • Normal mode* op abs No. 8 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) 31 H'000000 87 abs 0 31 24 23 16 15 0 Don’t care 15 Memory contents 0 H'00 • Advanced mode op abs 31 H'000000 87 abs 0 31 Memory contents 0 31 24 23 0 Don’t care Note: * Not available for this LSI. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 57 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.8 2.8.1 Processing States Overview The CPU has four main processing states: the reset state, exception-handling state, program execution state, and power-down state. Figure 2.15 shows a diagram of the processing states. Figure 2.16 indicates the state transitions. Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped. Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt or trap instruction. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Sleep mode Power-down state CPU operation is stopped to conserve power.* Standby mode Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, modue stop mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode and watch mode. Figure 2.15 Processing States Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 58 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Program execution state of ex ce es pt tf io or n ha ex ce nd pt ion ling ha nd lin g S w LE SS ith EP BY LS in =0 ON stru =0 ct , ion Sleep mode En d Re qu Inte r tr rup equ est S w LE SS ith EP TM B LS in A3 Y=1 ON stru =0 , =0 ct , ion Exception-handling state External interrupt request Standby mode RES = High Power-down state*2 Reset state *1 Notes: 1. From any state, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. The power-down state also includes a watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For details, see section 4, Power-Down State. Figure 2.16 State Transitions 2.8.2 Reset State When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are disabled in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, see section 17, Watchdog Timer (WDT). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 59 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. (1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.14 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR. Table 2.14 Exception Handling Types and Priority Priority High Type of Exception Detection Timing Reset Synchronized with clock Start of Exception Handling Exception handling starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence Interrupt End of instruction execution or end of exception-handling 1 sequence* Low Trap instruction When TRAPA instruction Exception handling starts when a trap 2 is executed (TRAPA) instruction is executed* Notes: 1. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. 2. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. (2) Reset Exception Handling After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES goes high again, reset exception handling starts. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 60 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU (3) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start address. Figure 2.17 shows the stack after exception handling ends. Normal Mode*2 Advanced Mode SP CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits) SP CCR PC (24 bits) Notes: 1. Ignored when returning. 2. Normal mode is not available for this LSI. Figure 2.17 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples) 2.8.4 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 61 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.8.5 Power-Down State The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode, standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on a medium-speed clock. Module stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are power-down modes that use subclock input. For details, see section 4, Power-Down State. (1) Sleep Mode A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) and the LSON bit in the low-power control register (LPWRCR) are both cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are retained. (2) Standby Mode A transition to standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in the TMA (timer A) are both cleared to 0. In standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 62 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU 2.9 2.9.1 Basic Timing Overview The CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a “state.” The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one or two states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory and on-chip supporting modules. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. Figure 2.18 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Bus cycle T1 φ Internal address bus Internal read signal Read access Internal data bus Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Read data Address Figure 2.18 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 63 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 2 CPU Bus cycle T1 φ Internal address bus Internal read signal Read access Internal data bus Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Read data Address T2 Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle 2.10 2.10.1 Usage Note TAS Instruction Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS instruction is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used. 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Two, three, or four registers can be saved/restored by one STM/LDM instruction. The following ranges can be specified in the register list. Two registers : ER0⎯ER1, ER2⎯ER3, or ER4⎯ER5 Three registers : ER0⎯ER2 or ER4⎯ER6 Four registers : ER0⎯ER3 The STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 64 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 3.1.1 Overview Operating Mode Selection This LSI has one operating mode (mode 1). This mode is selected depending on settings of the mode pin (MD0). Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection MD0 0 1 CPU Operating Mode ⎯ Advanced Description ⎯ Single-chip mode MCU Operating Mode 0 1 The CPU's architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but this LSI actually accesses a maximum of 16 Mbytes. Mode 1 operation starts in single-chip mode after reset release. This LSI can only be used in mode 1. This means that the mode pins must be set at mode 1. Do not changes the inputs at the mode pins during operation. 3.1.2 Register Configuration This LSI has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pin (MD0) and a system control register (SYSCR) and that controls the operation of this LSI. Table 3.2 summarizes these registers. Table 3.2 Name Mode control register System control register Note: * MCU Registers Abbreviation MDCR SYSCR R/W R R/W Initial Value Undetermined H'09 Address* H'FFE9 H'FFE8 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 65 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.2 3.2.1 Register Descriptions Mode Control Register (MDCR) Bit : 7 — 6 — 0 — 5 — 0 — 4 — 0 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 MDS0 —* R Initial value : R/W : 0 — Note: * Determined by MD0 pin MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register monitors the current operating mode of this LSI. Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bit 0⎯Mode Select 0 (MDS0): This bit indicates the value which reflects the input levels at mode pin (MD0) (the current operating mode). Bit MDS0 corresponds to MD0 pin. They are readonly bits-they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit : 7 — Initial value : R/W : 0 — 6 — 0 — 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 1 — Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 66 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bits 5 and 4⎯Interrupt control modes 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0) These bits are for selecting the interrupt control mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the interrupt control modes, see section 6.4.1, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation. Bit 5 INTM1 0 Bit 4 INTM0 0 1 1 0 1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 ⎯ ⎯ Description Interrupt is controlled by bit I (Initial value) Interrupt is controlled by bits I and UI, and ICR Cannot be used in this LSI Cannot be used in this LSI Bit 3⎯External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST 0 1 Description A reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow A reset is generated by an external reset (Initial value) Bits 2 and 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bit 0⎯Reserved: This bit is always read as 1. 3.3 Operating Mode (Mode 1) The CPU can access a 16 Mbyte address space in advanced mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 67 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.4 Address Map in Each Operating Mode H8S/2196R H'000000 Vector area H'0000FF On-chip ROM (80 kbytes) H'007FFF H'013FFF H'017FFF H'040000 H'045FFF H'040000 H'045FFF Absolute address, 16 bits Memory indirect branch address H8S/2197R H'000000 Vector area On-chip ROM (96 kbytes) OSD ROM (24 kbytes) OSD ROM (24 kbytes) H'FF8000 Absolute address, 16 bits H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFEFB0 H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFEFB0 4 kbytes H'FFFF00 H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF Absolute address, 8 bits On-chip RAM On-chip RAM (4 kbytes) H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF Figure 3.1 Address Map (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 68 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes H8S/2198R H'000000 Vector area H'000000 H8S/2199R H8S/2199R (F-ZTAT version) H'000000 Vector area Vector area On-chip ROM (112 kbytes) On-chip ROM (128 kbytes) Flash memory (256 kbytes) H'01BFFF H'040000 H'045FFF H'01FFFF H'040000 H'045FFF OSD ROM (24 kbytes) H'03FFFF H'047FFF Flash memory (OSD) (32 kbytes) OSD ROM (24 kbytes) H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFEFB0 H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFEFB0 H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFDFB0 On-chip RAM (4 kbytes) On-chip RAM (4 kbytes) On-chip RAM (8 kbytes) H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF Figure 3.2 Address Map (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 69 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes H8S/2196S H'000000 Vector area On-chip ROM (80 kbytes) H'013FFF H'017FFF H'000000 Vector area On-chip ROM (96 kbytes) H8S/2197S H'040000 H'043FFF OSD ROM (16 kbytes) H'040000 H'043FFF OSD ROM (16 kbytes) H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD000 Internal I/O register H'FFD2FF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFD800 OSD RAM (768 bytes) H'FFDAFF H'FFF3B0 On-chip RAM (3 kbytes) H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 H'FFFFFF H'FFF3B0 On-chip RAM (3 kbytes) H'FFFFAF H'FFFFB0 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O register Internal I/O register Figure 3.3 Address Map (3) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 70 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Section 4 Power-Down State 4.1 Overview In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has a power-down state in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and so on. This LSI operating modes are as follows: 1. High-speed mode 2. Medium-speed mode 3. Sub-active mode 4. Sleep mode 5. Sub-sleep mode 6. Watch mode 7. Module stop mode 8. Standby mode Of these, 2 to 8 are power-down modes. Certain combinations of these modes can be set. After a reset, the MCU is in high-speed mode. Table 4.1 shows the internal chip states in each mode, and table 4.2 shows the conditions for transition to the various modes. Figure 4.1 shows a mode transition diagram. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 71 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Table 4.1 Function System clock Subclock pulse generator CPU operation External interrupts H8S/2199R Group Internal States in Each Mode MediumHigh-Speed Speed Sleep Module Stop Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Halted Halted Standby Halted Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted Retained Functioning Halted Retained Subclock operation Halted Retained Halted Retained Instruction Functioning Mediums speed Registers IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted Halted Functioning Halted On-chip I/O supporting Timer A module operation Timer B Timer J Timer L Timer R Timer X1* 2 Functioning Functioning Retained Functioning Halted Functioning Retained Subclock operation Halted (retained) Subclock operation Halted (retained) Halted Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Subclock /halted operation (retained) Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted /halted (retained) (retained) Functioning Halted (reset) /halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Subclock operation Halted*1 Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Subclock operation Halted*1 Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Halted Halted*1 Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (retained) Watchdog Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted timer (retained) 8-bit PWM Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted /halted (retained) (retained) 12-bit PWM 14-bit 2 PWM* PSU SCI1 IIC Functioning Functioning Halted (reset) Functioning Halted /halted (reset) (reset) Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted /halted (retained) (retained) Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning/ Subclock halted operation Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning/ Halted*1 1 halted* Functioning/ Halted halted (retained) (retained) Functioning Halted /halted (reset) (reset) Functioning Functioning Halted (reset) Functioning Halted /halted (reset) (reset) Functioning Halted /halted (retained) (retained) A/D Servo circuit Sync Functioning Functioning Halted separator (retained) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 72 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Function MediumHigh-Speed Speed Sleep Module Stop Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Standby Halted (reset) Data slicer Functioning Functioning Halted On-chip supporting (reset) module OSD operation Functioning Halted /halted (reset) (reset) Notes: "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is "operation suspended." "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized. In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained). In the power-down mode, the analog section of the servo circuits are not turned off, therefore Vcc (Servo) current does not go low. When power-down is needed, externally shut down the analog system power. 1. The SCI1 status differs from the internal register. For details, refer to section 22, Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCII). 2. Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 73 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Reset state Program-halted state Program execution state Program-halted state Standby mode SLEEP instruction a Interrupt 1 SLEEP instruction a Interrupt 1 SLEEP instruction b Active (high-speed) mode g h SLEEP instruction c SLEEP instruction e Interrupt 3 SLEEP instruction d Sleep (high-speed) mode Interrupt 2 SLEEP instruction b Active (medium-speed) mode SLEEP instruction e Interrupt 3 Sleep (medium-speed) mode SLEEP Interrupt 2 instruction c SLEEP instruction b Interrupt 2 SLEEP instruction d SLEEP instruction 1 Interrupt 4 Watch mode Subactive mode Subsleep mode Power-down mode Conditions for mode transition (1) Flag LSON SSBY TMA3 DTON a b c d e f g h 0 * 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 * 1 * 0 1 1 * * 1 2 3 4 Conditions for mode transition (2) Interruption factor IRQ0 to 1 IRQ0 to 1, Timer A interruption All interruption (excluding servo system) IRQ0 to 5, Timer A interruption SCK1 to 0 = 0 SCK1 to 0 ≠ 0 (either 1 bit = 0) Legend: * Don't care Note: When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, transition cannot be made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the interrupt request Figure 4.1 Mode Transitions Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 74 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Table 4.2 Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions Control Bit States at Time of Transition SSBY TMA3 * * 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 LSON 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 DTON * * * * 0 0 1 1 * * * * 0 0 1 1 State before Transition State after Transition by SLEEP Instruction Sleep ⎯ Standby ⎯ Watch Watch ⎯ Subactive ⎯ ⎯ Subsleep ⎯ Watch Watch High-speed/ 2 medium-speed* ⎯ State after Return by Interrupt High-speed/ 1 medium-speed* ⎯ High-speed/ 1 medium-speed* ⎯ High-speed/ 1 medium-speed* Subactive ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Subactive ⎯ High-speed/ 2 medium-speed* Subactive ⎯ ⎯ High-speed/ 0 medium-speed 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Subactive 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Legend: * Don't care Notes: ⎯: Do not set. 1. Returns to the state before transition. 2. Mode varies depending on the state of SCK1 to SCK0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 75 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.1.1 Register Configuration The power-down state is controlled by the SBYCR, LPWRCR, TMA (Timer A), and MSTPCR registers. Table 4.3 summarizes these registers. Table 4.3 Name Standby control register Low-power control register Module stop control register Power-Down State Registers Abbreviation SBYCR LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'30 Address* H'FFEA H'FFEB H'FFEC H'FFED H'FFBA Timer mode register A Note: * TMA Lower 16 bits of the address. 4.2 4.2.1 Register Descriptions Standby Control Register (SBYCR) Bit : 7 SSBY 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 SCK1 0 R/W 0 SCK0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 76 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Bit 7⎯Software Standby (SSBY): Determines the operating mode, in combination with other control bits, when a power-down mode transition is made by executing a SLEEP instruction. The SSBY setting is not changed by a mode transition due to an interrupt, etc. Bit 7 SSBY 0 Description Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode (Initial value) 1 Transition to standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode Bits 6 to 4⎯Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the time the MCU waits for the clock to stabilize when standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by means of a specific interrupt or instruction. With crystal oscillation, see table 4.5 and make a selection according to the operating frequency so that the standby time is at least 10 ms (the oscillation settling time). Bit 6 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 * Description Standby time = 8192 states Standby time = 16384 states Standby time = 32768 states Standby time = 65536 states Standby time = 131072 states Standby time = 262144 states Reserved Legend: * Don't care Bits 3 and 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 77 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Bits 1 and 0⎯System Clock Select 1 and 0 (SCK1, SCK0): These bits select the CPU clock for the bus master in high-speed mode and medium-speed mode. Bit 1 SCK1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 SCK0 0 1 0 1 Description Bus master is in high-speed mode (Initial value) Medium-speed clock is φ/16 Medium-speed clock is φ/32 Medium-speed clock is φ/64 4.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) Bit : 7 DTON 6 LSON 0 R/W 5 NESEL 0 R/W 4 — 0 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 SA1 0 R/W 0 SA0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bit 7⎯Direct-Transfer on Flag (DTON): Specifies whether a direct transition is made between high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, and subactive mode when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. The operating mode to which the transition is made after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by a combination of other control bits. Bit 7 DTON 0 Description • • 1 • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode or watch mode (Initial value) When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, transition is made directly to subactive mode, or a transition is made to sleep mode or standby mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made directly to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode • Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 78 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Bit 6⎯Low-Speed on Flag (LSON): Determines the operating mode in combination with other control bits when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. Also controls whether a transition is made to high-speed mode or to subactive mode when watch mode is cleared. Bit 6 LSON 0 Description • • • 1 • • • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch mode, or directly to high-speed mode After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode (Initial value) When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made to watch mode, subactive mode, sleep mode or standby mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode or watch mode After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode Bit 5⎯Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL): Selects the frequency at which the subclock (φw) generated by the subclock pulse generator is sampled with the clock (φ) generated by the system clock oscillator. When φ = 5 MHz or higher, clear this bit to 0. Bit 5 NESEL 0 1 Description Sampling at φ divided by 16 Sampling at φ divided by 4 Bits 4 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 79 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Bits 1 and 0⎯Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0 (SA1, SA0): These bits select the CPU operating clock in the subactive mode. These bits cannot be modified in the subactive mode. Bit 1 SA1 0 0 1 Bit 0 SA0 0 1 * Description Operating clock of CPU is φw/8 Operating clock of CPU is φw/4 Operating clock of CPU is φw/2 (Initial value) Legend: * Don’t care 4.2.3 Timer Register A (TMA) Bit : 7 TMAOV 6 TMAIE 0 R/W 5 — 1 R/W 4 — 1 R/W 3 TMA3 0 R/W 2 TMA2 0 R/W 1 TMA1 0 R/W 0 TMA0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. The timer register A (TMA) controls timer A interrupts and selects input clock. Only bit 3 is explained here. For details of other bits, see section 11.2.1, Timer Mode Register A (TMA). TMA is a readable/writable register which is initialized to H'30 by a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 80 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Bit 3⎯Clock Source, Prescaler Select (TMA3): Selects timer A clock source between PSS and PSW. It also controls transition operation to the power-down mode. The operation mode to which the MCU is transited after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by the combination with other control bits. For details, see the description of clock select 2 to 0 in section 11.2.1, Timer Mode Register A (TMA). Bit 3 TMA3 0 Description • • Timer A counts φ-based prescaler (PSS) divided clock pulses When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode or software standby mode (Initial value) Timer A counts φw-based prescaler (PSW) divided clock pulses When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, watch mode, or subactive mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode, watch mode, or high-speed mode 1 • • • 4.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode control. MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. MSTPCRH and MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0⎯Module Stop (MSTP 15 to MSTP 0): These bits specify module stop mode. See table 4.4 for the method of selecting on-chip supporting modules. MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0 MSTP 15 to MSTP 0 0 1 Description Module stop mode is cleared Module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 81 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.3 Medium-Speed Mode When the SCK1 and SCK0 bits in SBYCR are set to 1 in high-speed mode, the operating mode changes to medium-speed mode at the end of the bus cycle. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on the operating clock (φ16, φ32 or φ64) specified by the SCK1 and SCK0 bits. The onchip supporting modules other than the CPU always operate on the high-speed clock (φ). In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/16 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip memory is accessed in 16 states, and internal I/O registers in 32 states. Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing the both bits SCK1 and SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR are cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are both cleared to 0, a transition is made to software standby mode. When standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. When the RES pin is driven low, a transition is made to the reset state, and medium-speed mode is cleared. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer. Figure 4.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode. Medium-speed mode Internal φ, supporting module clock CPU clock Internal address bus SBYCR SBYCR Internal write signal Figure 4.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 82 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.4 4.4.1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR are both cleared to 0, the CPU will enter sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules (excluding some functions) do not stop. 4.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or with the RES pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling is started. Sleep mode will not be cleared if interrupts are disabled, or if interrupts other than NMI have been masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, the reset state is entered. When the RES pin is driven high after the prescribed reset input period, the CPU begins reset exception handling. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 83 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.5 4.5.1 Module Stop Mode Module Stop Mode Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating independently. Table 4.4 shows MSTP bits and the on-chip supporting modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module starts operating again at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules excluding some modules are retained. After reset release, all modules are in module stop mode. When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is disabled. Table 4.4 Register MSTPCRH MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules Bit MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 Module Timer A Timer B Timer J Timer L Timer R Timer X1* Sync separator Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) 2 I C bus interface (IIC0)* 2 MSTPCRL MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 I C bus interface (IIC1) 14-bit PWM* 8-bit PWM Data slicer A/D converter Servo circuit, 12-bit PWM OSD Note: * This bit has no function in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 84 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.6 4.6.1 Standby Mode Standby Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is cleared to 0, standby mode will be entered. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator (except for subclock oscillator) all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers and data in the on-chip RAM, as well as on-chip peripheral circuits (with some exceptions), are maintained in the current state. (Timer X1 and SCI1 are partially reset.) The I/O port, at this time, is caused to the high impedance state. In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced. 4.6.2 Clearing Standby Mode Standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (pin IRQ0 to IRQ1), or by means of the RES pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are supplied to the entire chip, standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. Standby mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0 or has been masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset exception handling. 4.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below. Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 10 ms (the oscillation settling time). Table 4.5 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS2 to STS0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 85 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State Table 4.5 STS2 0 Oscillation Settling Time Settings STS1 0 STS0 0 1 1 0 1 Standby Time 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states Reserved 10 MHz 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 1 13.1* 8 MHz 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 1 16.4* Unit ms 1 0 0 1 26.2 ⎯ 32.8 ⎯ 1 * Legend: * Don't care Note: 1. Recommended time setting Using an External Clock: Any value can be set. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 86 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.7 4.7.1 Watch Mode Watch Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode, medium-speed mode or subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU will make a transition to watch mode. In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules except timer A stop. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, some on-chip supporting module registers, and on-chip RAM, are retained, and I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state. 4.7.2 Clearing Watch Mode Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, or pin IRQ0 to IRQ1), or by means of the RES pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, watch mode is cleared and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, or to subactive mode if the LSON bit is set to 1. When making a transition to medium-speed mode, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are supplied to the entire chip, and interrupt exception handling is started. Watch mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU. See section 4.6.3, Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode, for the oscillation settling time setting when making a transition from watch mode to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode. Clearing with the RES Pin: See Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 87 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.8 4.8.1 Subsleep Mode Subsleep Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU will make a transition to subsleep mode. In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules other than Timer A stop. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, some on-chip supporting module registers, and on-chip RAM, are retained, and I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state. 4.8.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, or pin IRQ0 to IRQ5), or by means of the RES pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, subsleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling is started. Subsleep mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: See (2) Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 88 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.9 4.9.1 Subactive Mode Subactive Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode when the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) are all set to 1, the CPU will make a transition to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in watch mode, if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in subsleep mode, a transition is made to subactive mode. In subactive mode, the CPU performs sequential program execution at low speed on the subclock. In this mode, all on-chip supporting modules other than timer A stop. 4.9.2 Clearing Subactive Mode Subsleep mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction, or by means of the RES pin. Clearing with a SLEEP Instruction: When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set to 1, subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to watch mode. When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set to 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode. When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit is set to 1 and the LSON bit is cleared to 0 in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set to 1, a transition is made directly to high-speed or medium-speed mode. For details of direct transition, see section 4.10, Direct Transition. Clearing with the RES Pin: See Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 89 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 4 Power-Down State 4.10 4.10.1 Direct Transition Overview of Direct Transition There are three operating modes in which the CPU executes programs: high-speed mode, mediumspeed mode, and subactive mode. A transition between high-speed mode and subactive mode without halting the program* is called a direct transition. A direct transition can be carried out by setting the DTON bit in LPWRCR to 1 and executing a SLEEP instruction. After the transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling is started. Direct Transition from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the LSON bit and DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are all set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode. Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode/Medium-Speed Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit is cleared to 0 and the DTON bit is set to 1 in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set to 1, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, a transition is made to directly to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode. Note: * At the time of transition from subactive mode to high- or medium-speed mode, an oscillation stabilization wait time is generated. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 90 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling Section 5 Exception Handling 5.1 5.1.1 Overview Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 5.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 5.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits in SYSCR. Table 5.1 Priority High Exception Types and Priority Exception Type Reset 1 Trace* Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1 Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception 2 handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued* Started by a direct transition resulting from execution of a SLEEP instruction Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA) Interrupt Direct transition Trap instruction 3 (TRAPA)* Low Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control modes 2 and 3. (They cannot be used in this LSI.) Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE instruction. 2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 91 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling 5.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows: 1. The program counter (PC) and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 5.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 5.1. Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 5.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. • Reset • Trace (cannot be used in this LSI) External interrupts … NMI*, IRQ5 to IRQ0 Exception sources • Interrupts Internal interrupts … Interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules • Direct transition • Trap instruction Note: * In this LSI, the watchdog timer generates NMIs. Figure 5.1 Exception Sources Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 92 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling Table 5.2 Exception Vector Table Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Vector Address* H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'0064 to H'0067 H'0068 to H'006B H'006C to H'006F | H'007C to H'007F H'0080 to H'0083 | H'0084 to H'0087 H'0088 to H'008B | H'010C to H'010F Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 93 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 1 Exception Source Reset Reserved for system use Direct transition External interrupt NMI* 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 Trap instruction (4 sources) Reserved for system use 12 13 14 15 Address trap #0 #1 #2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | 31 32 | 33 Internal interrupt (IC) Internal interrupt (HSW1) External interrupt IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 Internal interrupt* 2 Reserved Internal interrupt* 3 34 | 67 Section 5 Exception Handling Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. In this LSI, the watch dog timer generates NMIs. 3. For details on internal interrupt vectors, see section 6.3.3, Interrupt Exception Vector Table. 5.2 5.2.1 Reset Overview A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the LSI enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of onchip supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high. The LSIs can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 17, Watchdog Timer (WDT). 5.2.2 Reset Sequence The LSI enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low during the oscillation stabilizing time of the clock oscillator when powering on. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. For pin states in a reset, see appendix D, Port States in the Different Processing States. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows: 1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. 2. The reset exception vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figure 5.2 shows examples of the reset sequence. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 94 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling Vector fetch Internal Fetch of first program processing instruction φ RES Internal address bus (1) (3) Internal read signal Internal write signal High level Internal data bus (2) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) : Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000 or H'000000) : Start address (contents of reset exception vector address) : Start address ((3) = (2)) : First program instruction Figure 5.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 1) 5.2.3 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 95 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling 5.3 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by six external sources (IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 5.3 shows the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT), prescaler unit (PSU), Timers A, B, J, L, R and X1 (TMR), serial communication interface (SCI), 2 A/D converter (ADC), I C bus interface (IIC), servo circuits, sync detection, data slicer, OSD, address trap, etc. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to either three priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. For details on interrupts, see section 6, Interrupt Controller. NMI*1 (1) External interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 (6) WDT*2 (1) Interrupts PSU (1) TMR (15)*3 SCI (4) Internal interrupts ADC (1) IIC (3)*4 Servo circuits (9) Synchronized detection (1) Address trap (3) Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources. 1. In this LSI, the watchdog timer generates NMIs. 2. When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at each counter overflow. 3. The number of interrupt sources is eight in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. 4. The number of interrupt sources is one in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Figure 5.3 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 96 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling 5.4 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 5.3 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 5.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR I 1 1 UI ⎯ 1 EXR* I2 to I0 ⎯ ⎯ T ⎯ ⎯ Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 ⎯: Retains value prior to execution. *: Does not affect operation in this LSI. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 97 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling 5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figures 5.4 and 5.5 show the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP→ CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 5.4 Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode)* Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI. SP→ CCR PC (24 bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Figure 5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 98 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling 5.6 Notes on Use of the Stack When accessing word data or longword data, this chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W PUSH.L Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.WRn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) POP.LERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 5.6 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. CCR SP PC SP R1L PC H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD SP H'FFFEFF TRAPA instruction executed SP set to H'FFFEFF MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 Contents of CCR lost Data saved above SP Legend: CCR PC R1L SP : Condition-code register : Program counter : General register R1L : Stack pointer Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, is advanced mode. Figure 5.6 Operation when SP Value Is Odd Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 99 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 5 Exception Handling Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 100 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.1 6.1.1 Overview Features This LSI controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the following features: • Two Interrupt Control Modes ⎯ Either of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR). • Priorities Settable with ICR ⎯ An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI. • Independent Vector Addresses ⎯ All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. • Six External Interrupt Pins ⎯ NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. ⎯ Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection can be selected for interrupt IRQ0. ⎯ Falling edge or rising edge can be individually selected for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1. Note: * In this LSI, the watch dog timer generates NMIs. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 101 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. INTM1, INTM0 SYSCR Interrupt request Vector number IRQ input IRQ input unit IRQR Priority determination IEGR Internal interrupt requests IENR I, UI CCR CPU ICR Interrupt controller Legend: IEGR IENR IRQR ICR : IRQ edge select register : IRQ enable register : IRQ status register : Interrupt control register SYSCR : System control register Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 102 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 6.1 Name External interrupt request 0 External interrupt requests 1 to 5 Interrupt Controller Pins Symbol IRQ0 IRQ1 to IRQ5 I/O Input Input Function Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both edges can be selected Maskable external interrupts: rising, or falling edges can be selected 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 6.2 Name System control register IRQ edge select register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt control register A Interrupt control register B Interrupt control register C Interrupt control register D Port mode register 1 Interrupt Controller Registers Abbreviation SYSCR IEGR IENR IRQR ICRA ICRB ICRC ICRD PMR1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/ (W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 1 Address* H'FFE8 H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 H'FFCE Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 103 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2 6.2.1 Register Descriptions System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit : 7 — 0 — 6 — 0 — 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — Initial value : R/W : SYSCR is an 8-bit readable register that selects the interrupt control mode. Only bits 5, 4, 2 and 1 are described here; for details on the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset. Bits 5 and 4⎯Interrupt Control Mode (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of two interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. The INTM1 bit must not be set to 1. Bit 5 INTM1 0 Bit 4 INTM0 0 1 1 0 1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 ⎯ ⎯ Description Interrupts are controlled by I bit (Initial value) Interrupts are controlled by I and UI bits and ICR Cannot be used in this LSI Cannot be used in this LSI Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 104 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) Bit : 7 ICR7 0 R/W 6 ICR6 0 R/W 5 ICR5 0 R/W 4 ICR4 0 R/W 3 ICR3 0 R/W 2 ICR2 0 R/W 1 ICR1 0 R/W 0 ICR0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The ICR registers are four 8-bit readable/writable registers that set the interrupt control level for interrupts other than NMI. The correspondence between ICR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 6.3. The ICR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 7 to 0⎯Interrupt Control Level (ICR7 to ICR0): Set the control level for the corresponding interrupt source. Bit n ICRn 0 1 Note: Description Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority) n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Table 6.3 ICRA Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings ICRA7 Reserved ICRA6 Input capture ICRB6 ICRA5 HSW1 ICRA4 IRQ0 ICRA3 IRQ1 ICRA2 IRQ2 IRQ3 ICRB2 Timer J ICRA1 IRQ4 IRQ5 ICRB1 Timer R ICRA0 Sync separator, OSD ICRB0 Timer L ICRB ICRB7 ICRB5 Servo (drum, capstan latch) ICRC5 Watchdog timer ICRD5 Reserved ICRB4 Timer A ICRB3 Timer B Data slicer Sync separator ICRC ICRC7 Timer X1* ICRC6 Synchronized detection ICRD6 Reserved ICRC4 Servo ICRC3 IIC1 ICRC2 SCI1 (UART) ICRD2 ICRC1 IIC0* ICRC0 A/D ICRD ICRD7 HSW2 ICRD4 Reserved ICRD3 Reserved ICRD1 ICRD0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Note: * This bit has no function in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 105 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IENR) Bit : 7 — 0 — 6 — 0 — 5 IRQ5E 0 R/W 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : IENR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0. IENR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 0. Do not write 1 to them. Bits 5 to 0⎯IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ5 to IRQ0 are enabled or disabled. Bit n IRQnE 0 1 Note: Description IRQn interrupt disabled IRQn interrupt enabled n = 5 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 106 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2.4 IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR) Bit : 7 — 6 IRQ5EG 0 R/W 5 IRQ4EG 0 R/W 4 IRQ3EG 0 R/W 3 IRQ2EG 0 R/W 2 1 0 IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 — IEGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects detected edge of the input at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0. IEGR register is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bit 7⎯Reserved: This bit is always read as 0. Do not write 1 to it. Bits 6 to 2⎯IRQ5 to IRQ1 Pins Detected Edge Select (IRQ5EG to IRQ1EG): These bits select detected edge for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1. Bits 6 to 2 IRQnEG 0 1 Note: Description Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn pin input Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn pin input n = 5 to 1 (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0⎯IRQ0 Pin Detected Edge Select (IRQ0EG1, IRQ0EG0): These bits select detected edge for interrupt IRQ0. Bit 1 IRQ0EG1 0 0 1 Bit 0 IRQ0EG0 0 1 * Description Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0 pin input (Initial value) Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0 pin input Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ0 pin input Legend: * Don't care Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 107 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2.5 IRQ Status Register (IRQR) Bit : 7 — 0 — 6 — 0 — 5 IRQ5F 0 R/(W)* 4 IRQ4F 0 R/(W)* 3 IRQ3F 0 R/(W)* 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* 1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. IRQR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. IRQR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 0. Do not write 1 to them. Bits 5 to 0⎯IRQ5 to IRQ0 Flags: These bits indicate the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit n IRQnF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] (1) Cleared by reading IRQnF set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF (2) When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed 1 [Setting conditions] (1) When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input while falling edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0) (2) When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input while rising edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0) (3) When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQ0 input while both-edge detection is set (IRQ0EG1 = 1) Note: n = 5 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 108 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.2.6 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) Bit : 7 PMR17 0 R/W 6 PMR16 0 R/W 5 PMR15 0 R/W 4 PMR14 0 R/W 3 PMR13 0 R/W 2 PMR12 0 R/W 1 PMR11 0 R/W 0 PMR10 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) controls pin function switching-over of port 1. Switching is specified for each bit. PMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Only bits 5 to 0 are explained here. For details, see section 10.3.2, Register Configuration. Bits 5 to 0⎯P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 pin switching (PMR15 to PMR10): These bits are for setting the P1n/IRQn pin as the input pin for P1n or as the IRQn pin for external interrupt request input. Bit n PMR1n 0 1 Note: Description P1n/IRQn pin functions as the P1n input/output pin P1n/IRQn pin functions as the IRQn input/output pin n = 5 to 0 (Initial value) Notes on switching the pin function by PMR1 are as follows: • When the port is set as the IC input pin or IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pin, the pin level must be high or low regardless of active mode or power-down mode. Do not set the pin level at medium. • Switching the pin function of P16/IC or P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 may be mistakenly identified as edge detection and detection signal may be generated. To prevent this, operate as follows: ⎯ Set the interrupt enable/disable flag to disable before switching the pin function. ⎯ Clear the applicable interrupt request flag to 0 after switching the pin function and executing another instruction. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 109 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Program example : MOV.B R0L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt disabled MOV.B R1L,@PMR1 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Pin function change NOP BCLR m @IRQR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Optional instruction ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Applicable interrupt clear MOV.B R1L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt enabled : 6.3 Interrupt Sources Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts. 6.3.1 External Interrupts There are six external interrupt sources; IRQ5 to IRQ0. Of these, IRQ1 to IRQ0 can be used to restore this chip from standby mode. • IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features: (a) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is requested by a falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pin IRQ0. (b) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is requested by a falling edge or rising edge at pins IRQ5 to IRQ1. (c) Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IENR. (d) The interrupt control level can be set with ICR. (e) The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in IRQR. IRQR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 110 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Figure 6.2 shows a block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0. IRQnE IRQnEG Edge detection circuit IRQn input IRQnF S Q R IRQn interrupt request Clear signal Note: n = 5 to 0 Figure 6.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 Figure 6.3 shows the timing of IRQnF setting. Internal φ IRQn input pin IRQnF Figure 6.3 Timing of IRQnF Setting The vector numbers for IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 21 to 26. Upon detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts, the applicable pin is set in the port register 1 (PMR1) as IRQn pin. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 111 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.3.2 Internal Interrupts There are 38 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. • For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If any one of these is set to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. • The interrupt control level can be set by means of ICR. • The NMI is the highest priority interrupt and is always accepted regardless of the control mode and CPU interrupt mask bit. In this LSI, NMIs are used as interrupts generated by the watchdog timer. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 112 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table Table 6.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among modules can be set by means of ICR. The situation when two or more modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 6.4. Table 6.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities Origin of Interrupt Source External pin ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Direct transition NMI Trap instruction TRAPA#0 TRAPA#1 TRAPA#2 TRAPA#3 Reserved ⎯ Instruction Watchdog timer Instruction Vector No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Low 15 H'003C to H'003F Vector Address H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B ICR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Remarks Priority Interrupt Source High Reset Reserved Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 113 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Origin of Interrupt Source #0 #1 #2 IC HSW1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 External V interrupt OSD V interrupt Data slicer odd field interrupt Data slicer even field interrupt Noise interrupt Reserved Sync separator ⎯ Sync separator OSD Data slicer PSU Servo circuit External pin ATC Vector No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Drum latch 1 (speed) Capstan latch 1 (speed) TMAI TMBI TMJ1I TMJ2I TMR1I TMR2I TMR3I Low TMLI Timer L Timer R Timer A Timer B Timer J Servo circuit 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Priority Interrupt Source High Address trap Vector Address H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'0064 to H'0067 H'0068 to H'006B H'006C to H'006F H'0070 to H'0073 H'0074 to H'0077 H'0078 to H'007B H'007C to H'007F H'0080 to H'0083 H'0084 to H'0087 H'0088 to H'008B H'008C to H'008F H'0090 to H'0093 H'0094 to H'0097 H'0098 to H'009B H'009C to H'009F H'00A0 to H'00A3 H'00A4 to H'00A7 H'00A8 to H'00AB ICR ⎯ Remarks ICRA6 ICRA5 ICRA4 ICRA3 ICRA2 ICRA1 ICRA0 ICRB7 ICRB6 ⎯ ICRB5 ICRB4 ICRB3 ICRB2 ICRB1 H'00AC to H'00AF ICRB0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 114 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Origin of Interrupt Source Timer X1* Vector No. 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Sync signal detection ⎯ Watchdog timer Servo circuit 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 IIC1 ERI RXI TXI TEI IIC0* DDCSW* A/D conversion end Low HSW2 IIC0* SCI1 (UART) 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 A/D Servo circuit 66 67 Priority Interrupt Source High ICXA* ICXB* ICXC* ICXD* OCX1* OCX2* OVFX* VD interrupts Reserved 8-bit interval timer CTL Drum latch 2 (speed) Capstan latch 2 (speed) Drum latch 3 (phase) Capstan latch 3 (phase) IIC1 SCI1 Vector Address H'00B0 to H'00B3 H'00B4 to H'00B7 H'00B8 to H'00BB H'00BC to H'00BF H'00C0 to H'00C3 H'00C4 to H'00C7 H'00C8 to H'00CB ICR ICRC7 Remarks H'00CC to H'00CF ICRC6 H'00D0 to H'00D3 H'00D4 to H'00D7 ICRC5 H'00D8 to H'00DB ICRC4 H'00DC to H'00DF H'00E0 to H'00E3 H'00E4 to H'00D7 H'00E8 to H'00EB H'00EC to H'00EF ICRC3 H'00F0 to H'00F3 H'00F4 to H'00F7 H'00F8 to H'00FB H'00FC to H'00FF H'0100 to H'0103 H'0104 to H'0107 H'0108 to H'010B H'010C to H'010F ICRC0 ICRD7 ICRC1 ICRC2 Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 115 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.4 6.4.1 Interrupt Operation Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation Interrupt operations in this LSI differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The NMI interrupt* and address trap interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state. In the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt sources in which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller. Table 6.5 shows the interrupt control modes. The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in ICR, and the masking state indicated by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR. Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer. Table 6.5 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Interrupt Control Modes SYSCR INTM1 0 INTM0 0 Priority Setting Register ICR Interrupt Mask Bits I Description Interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit Priority can be set with ICR 3-level interrupt mask control is performed by the I and UI bits Priority can be set with ICR 1 1 ICR I, UI Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 116 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Figure 6.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit. ICR I UI Interrupt source Interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control Default priority determination Vector number Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Figure 6.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Priority Determination Operation • Interrupt Acceptance Control and 3-Level Control: In interrupt control modes 0 and 1, interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control is performed by means of the I and UI bits in CCR, and ICR (control level). Table 6.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode. Table 6.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Mask Bit I 0 1 1 0 1 UI * * * 0 1 Selected Interrupts All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) 1 NMI* and address trap interrupts All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) 1 NMI* , address trap and control level 1 interrupts NMI* and address trap interrupts 1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Legend: * Don't care Note: 1. In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer. • Default Priority Determination: If the same value is set for ICR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated. Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending. Table 6.7 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 117 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Table 6.7 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode Setting INTM0 0 1 Interrupt Acceptance Control, 3-Level Control I IM IM UI ⎯ IM ICR PR PR Interrupt Control Mode INTM1 0 1 0 Default Priority Determination Legend: : Interrupt operation control performed IM: Used as interrupt mask bit PR: Sets priority ⎯: Not used 6.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by the I bit in the CPU’s CCR, and ICR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. Control level 1 interrupt sources have higher priority. Figure 6.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. • If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. • When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected. • The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I 1 bit is set to 1, only an NMI* or an address trap interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. • When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. • The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. • Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI* and address trap. • A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 118 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer. Program execution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No Yes Address trap interrupt? No Control level 1 interrupt? No Hold pending Yes IC Yes HSW1 Yes No No IC Yes HSW1 Yes No No HSW2 Yes HSW2 Yes I=0 Yes Save PC and CCR I←1 No Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 6.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 119 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 Three-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts by means of the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR and ICR. • Control level 0 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. • Control level 1 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit or UI bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1. For example, if the interrupt enable bit for an interrupt request is set to 1, and H'04, H'00, H'00 and H'00 are set in ICRA, ICRB, ICRC and ICRD respectively, (i.e. IRQ2 interrupt is set to control level 1 and other interrupts to control level 0), the situation is as follows: • When I = 0, all interrupts are enabled (Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IC > HSW1 > ...) • When I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, address trap and IRQ2 interrupts are enabled • When I = 1 and UI = 1, only NMI and address trap interrupts are enabled Figure 6.6 shows the state transitions in these cases. I←0 All interrupts enabled I ← 1, UI ← 0 I←0 Exception handling execution or I ← 1, UI ← 1 Only NMI, address trap and IRQ2 interrupts enabled UI ← 0 Exception handling execution or UI ← 1 Only NMI and address trap interrupts enabled Figure 6.6 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Figure 6.7 shows an operation flowchart of interrupt reception. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 120 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller (1) If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. (2) When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected. (3) The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit has no effect. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI* and address trap interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 1 has priority over an interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0, and is accepted if the I bit is cleared to 0, or if the I bit is set to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0. When both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1, only NMI* and address trap interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. (4) When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. (5) The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. (6) Next, the I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI* and address trap. (7) A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 121 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller Program execution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No Yes Address trap interrupt? No Control level 1 interrupt? No Hold pending Yes IC Yes HSW1 Yes No No IC Yes HSW1 Yes No No HSW2 Yes HSW2 Yes I=0 No No I=0 Yes UI = 0 No Yes Yes Save PC and CCR I ← 1, UI ← 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 6.7 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 122 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 6.4.4 Interrupt acceptance Interrupt handling routine instruction prefetch Interrupt level determination Wait for end of instruction Instruction prefetch Internal operation Stack Vector fetch Internal operation φ Interrupt request signal Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Internal read signal Internal write signal Figure 6.8 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in onchip memory. Figure 6.8 Interrupt Exception Handling (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) Saved PC and saved CCR Vector address Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12)) First instruction of interrupt handling routine (6)(8) (9)(11) (10)(12) (13) (14) Internal data bus (1) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address.) (2)(4) Instruction code (Not executed.) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.) (5) SP-2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 123 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller (7) SP-4 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.4.5 Interrupt Response Times Table 6.8 shows interrupt response times-the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols used in table 6.8 are explained in table 6.9. Table 6.8 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Interrupt Response Times Advanced Mode 1 2 Number of States Interrupt priority determination* Number of wait states until executing instruction ends* PC, CCR stack save Vector fetch 3 Instruction fetch* 4 Internal processing* 3 1 to 19 + 2⋅SI 2 ⋅ Sk 2 ⋅ SI 2 ⋅ SI 2 12 to 32 Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instruction. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Table 6.9 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Object of Access Symbol Instruction fetch SI Stack operation SK Internal Memory 1 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 124 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller 6.5 6.5.1 Usage Notes Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 6.9 shows an example in which the OCIAE bit in timer X1 TIER is cleared to 0. TIER write cycle by CPU OCIA interrupt exception handling φ Internal address bus TIER address Internal write signal OCIAE OCFA OCIA interrupt signal Figure 6.9 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 125 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 6 Interrupt Controller The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. 6.5.2 Instructions That Disable Interrupts Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 6.5.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W BNE R4,R4 L1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 126 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Section 7 ROM 7.1 Overview The H8S/2199R has 128 kbytes or 256 kbytes of on-chip ROM (flash memory or mask ROM), the H8S/2198R has 112 kbytes, the H8S/2197R and H8S/2197S have 96 kbytes, and the H8S/2196R and H8S/2196S have 80 kbytes*. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher processing speed. The flash memory versions of the H8S/2199R can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a general-purpose PROM programmer. Note: * For details on product line-up, refer to section 1, Overview. 7.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000002 H'000001 H'000003 H'01FFFE H'01FFFF Figure 7.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2199R) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 127 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.2 7.2.1 Overview of Flash Memory Features The features of the flash memory are summarized below. • Four flash memory operating modes ⎯ Program mode ⎯ Erase mode ⎯ Program-verify mode ⎯ Erase-verify mode • Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase (in single-block units). When erasing all blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 4-kbyte, 32-kbyte, and 64-kbyte blocks. (In OSD ROM, block erasing can be performed on 1-kbyte, 2-kbyte, and 28-kbyte blocks). • Programming/erase times The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 128-byte programming, equivalent to 78 μs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. • Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. • On-board programming modes There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: ⎯ Boot mode ⎯ User program mode • Automatic bit rate adjustment If data transfer on boot mode, automatic adjustment is possible at host transfer bit rates and LSI's bit rates. • Protect modes There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. • Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 128 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.2.2 Block Diagram Figure 7.2 shows a block diagram of the flash memory. Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) STCR FLMCR1 Bus interface/controller Operating mode FWE pin Mode pin Module bus FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 Flash memory (OSD ROM) (32 kbytes) Flash memory (256 kbytes) Legend: : Serial/timer control register STCR FLMCR1 : Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR2 : Flash memory control register 2 : Erase block register 1 EBR1 : Erase block register 2 EBR2 Figure 7.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory (H8S/2199R Only) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 129 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes Mode Transitions When each mode pin and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 7.3. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer mode. = MD1 User mode FWE = 0 or SWE = 0 User program mode 1, F WE =0 Reset state FWE = 1, MD0 = 0, P12 = P13 = P14 = 1 RES =0 1 0, = = 13 D0 P M 12 = P RES = 0 = 0 RES = 0 S ,P FWE = 1 SWE = 1 RE 14 = Programmer mode Note: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 0 Boot mode On-board program mode Figure 7.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 130 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM On-Board Programming Modes • Boot mode 1. Initial state The flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. The description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. Programming control program New application program Boot program SCI Boot program Boot program area Application program (old version) Application program (old version) SCI 2. Writing control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in this LSI chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, and SCI communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Programming control program New application program 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Programming control program New application program Boot program Boot program area Flash memory erase SCI 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Boot program Programming control program New application program SCI Program execution state Figure 7.4 Boot Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 131 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM • User program mode 1. Initial state (1) The FWE assessment program that confirms that the FWE pin has been driven high, and (2) the program that will transfer the programming/erase control program from the flash memory to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (3) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. Programming/erase control program New application program Boot program FWE assessment program Transfer program SCI Boot program FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) SCI New application program 2. Programming/erase control program transfer When the FWE pin is driven high, user software confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase control program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. New application program Boot program FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/erase control program Flash memory erase New application program SCI Boot program FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/erase control program SCI Program execution state Figure 7.5 User Program Mode (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 132 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode Entire memory erase Block erase Programming control program* Note: * Yes No Program/program-verify User Program Mode Yes Yes Erase/erase-verify Program/program-verify To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Block Configuration The main ROM area is divided into three 64-kbyte blocks, one 32-kbyte block, and eight 4-kbyte blocks. The OSD ROM area is divided into two 1-kbyte blocks, one 2-kbyte block, and one 28kbyte block. Address H'00000 4 kbytes × 8 32 kbytes 2 kbytes 32 kbytes Address H'40000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 256 kbytes 64 kbytes 28 kbytes 64 kbytes Address H'47FFF OSD ROM area 64 kbytes Address H'3FFFF Main ROM area Figure 7.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 133 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.2.4 Pin Configuration The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 7.1. Table 7.1 Pin Name Reset Flash write enable Mode 0 Port 12 Port 13 Port 14 Transmit data Receive data Flash Memory Pins Abbreviation RES FWE MD0 P12 P13 P14 SO1 SI1 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Flash program/erase protection by hardware Sets this LSI operating mode Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0 Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0 Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0 Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input 7.2.5 Register Configuration Table 7.2 shows the registers used to control the flash memory when enabled. In order for these registers to be accessed, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 in STCR. Table 7.2 Flash Memory Registers Abbreviation FLMCR1* 5 FLMCR2* 5 Register Name Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Serial/timer control register Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. R/W R/W* 2 R/W* 2 Initial Value H'00* 4 H'00* 3 Address* H'FFF8 H'FFF9 H'FFFA H'FFFB H'FFEE 1 EBR1* EBR2* STCR 5 5 R/W* R/W* R/W 2 2 H'00* H'00* H'00 4 4 Lower 16 bits of the address. When the FWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set at 1, writes are disabled. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80. When a low level is input to the FWE pin, or if a high level is input and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00. 5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 134 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.3 7.3.1 Flash Memory Register Descriptions Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) Bit : 7 FWE —* R 6 SWE1 0 R/W 5 ESU1 0 R/W 4 PSU1 0 R/W 3 EV1 0 R/W 2 PV1 0 R/W 1 E1 0 R/W 0 P1 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Note: * Determined by the state of the FWE pin. FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. With addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF, program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PV1 bit and EV1 bit. Program mode is entered by setting SWE1 when FWE = 1, then setting the SWE1 bit and PSU1, and finally setting the P1 bit. With addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF, erase mode is entered by setting SWE1 when FWE = 1, then setting the ESU1 bit, and finally setting the E1 bit. FLMCR1 is initialized by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE pin while the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is not set to 1. Its initial value is H'80 when a high level is input to the FWE pin, and H'00 when a low level is input. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Writes to the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 are enabled only when FWE = 1; writes to the ESU1, PSU1, EV1 and PV1 bits only when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1; writes to the E1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1; and writes to the P1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1. Bit 7⎯Flash Write Enable (FWE): Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. Bit 7 FWE 0 1 Description When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state) When a high level is input to the FWE pin Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 135 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 6⎯Software Write Enable (SWE): Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits 5 to 0, bits 7 to 0 in EBR1, and bits 3 to 0 in EBR2. Bit 6 SWE1 0 1 Description Writes are disabled Writes are enabled [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Erase Set-Up 1 (ESU1): Prepares for erase mode. ESU1 should be set to 1 before setting the E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time. Bit 5 ESU1 0 1 Description Erase set-up cleared Transition to erase set-up mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Program Set-Up 1 (PSU1): Prepares for program mode. PSU1 should be set to 1 before setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, E1 or P1 bit at the same time. Bit 4 PSU1 0 1 Description Program set-up cleared Transition to program set-up mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 136 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 3⎯Erase-Verify (EV1): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time. Bit 3 EV1 0 1 Description Erase-verify mode cleared Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Program-Verify (PV1): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time. Bit 2 PV1 0 1 Description Program-verify mode cleared Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Erase (E1): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, or P1 bit at the same time. Bit 1 E1 0 1 Description Erase mode cleared Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 137 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 0⎯Program (P1): Selects program mode transition or clearing (target address range : H'00000 to H'3FFFF). Do not set the SWE1, PSU1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, or E1 bit at the same time. Bit 0 P1 0 1 Description Program mode cleared Transition to program mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1 are selected (Initial value) 7.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) Bit : 7 FLER 0 R 6 SWE2 0 R/W 5 ESU2 0 R/W 4 PSU2 0 R/W 3 EV2 0 R/W 2 PV2 0 R/W 1 E2 0 R/W 0 P2 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating control mode. With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, program-verify mode and erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE2 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the EV2 bit and the PV2 bit. Program mode is entered by setting SWE2 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the SWE2 bit and PSU2 bit, and finally setting the P2 bit. With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, erase mode is entered by setting SWE2 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the ESU2 bit , and finally setting the E2 bit. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE pin while the SWE2 bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1. FLER can be initialized only by a reset. Writes to the SWE2 bit in the FLMCR2 are enabled only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1; writes to the ESU2, PSV2, EV2, and PV2 bits only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1 and SWE2 = 1; writes to the E2 bit only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, SW2 = 1, and ESU2 = 1; writes to the P2 bit only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, SWE2 = 1, and PSU2 = 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 138 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 7⎯Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state. Bit 7 FLER 0 Description Flash memory is operating normally Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [Clearing condition] Reset 1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [Setting condition] See section 7.6.3, Error Protection (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Software Write Enable 2 (SWE2): Enables or disables flash memory programming (target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). SW2 should be set when setting bits 5 to 0 and bits 7 to 4 in EBR2. Bit 6 SWE2 0 1 Description Writes are disabled Writes are enabled [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Erase Set-up 2 (ESU2): Prepares for erase mode. (Target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the PSU2, EV2, PV2, W2, P2 bits at the same time. Bit 5 ESU2 0 1 Description Erase set-up cleared Transition to erase set-up mode [Setting condition] Setting is enabled when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 139 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 4⎯Program Set-up 2 (PSU2): Prepares for program mode (Target address rang: H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, EV2, PV2, E2, P2 bits at the same time. Bit 4 PSU2 0 1 Description Program set-up cleared Transition to program set-up mode [Setting condition] Setting is enabled when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Erase-Verify 2 (EV2): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing (target address range : H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, PV2, E2, P2 bits at the same time. Bit 3 EV2 0 1 Description Erase-verify mode cleared Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Program-Verify 2 (PV2): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing (target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, E2, and P2 bits at the same time. Bit 2 PV2 0 1 Description Program-verify mode cleared Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 140 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Bit 1⎯Erase 2 (E2): Selects erase mode transition or clearing (target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF, do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, and P2 bits at the same time. Bit 1 E2 0 1 Description Erase mode cleared Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE2 = 1, and ESU2 = 1 are selected Bit 0⎯Program 2 (P2): Selects program mode transition or clearing (target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, and E2 bits at the same time. Bit 0 P2 0 1 Description Program mode cleared Transition to program mode [Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE2 = 1, and PSU2 = 1 are selected 7.3.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) Bit : 7 EB7 0 R/W 6 EB6 0 R/W 5 EB5 0 R/W 4 EB4 0 R/W 3 EB3 0 R/W 2 EB2 0 R/W 1 EB1 0 R/W 0 EB0 0 R/W Initial value R/W : EBR1 is an 8-bit register that specify the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. If set, all bits are cleared to 0. Table 7.3 shows the flash memory block configuration. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 141 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.3.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) Bit : 7 EB15 0 R/W 6 EB14 0 R/W 5 EB13 0 R/W 4 EB12 0 R/W 3 EB11 0 R/W 2 EB10 0 R/W 1 EB9 0 R/W 0 EB8 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : EBR2 is an 8-bit register that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; EBR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, and when a low level is input to the FWE pin. Bits 3 to 0 are initialized to 0 when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE1 in FLMCR1 is not set. Bits7 to 4 are initialized to 0 when the SWE2 in FLMCR2 is not set. When a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. If set, all bits are cleared to 0. The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 7.3. Table 7.3 Block (Size) EB0 (4 kbytes) EB1 (4 kbytes) EB2 (4 kbytes) EB3 (4 kbytes) EB4 (4 kbytes) EB5 (4 kbytes) EB6 (4 kbytes) EB7 (4 kbytes) EB8 (32 kbytes) EB9 (64 kbytes) EB10 (64 kbytes) EB11 (64 kbytes) EB12 (1 kbyte) EB13 (1 kbyte) EB14 (2 kbytes) EB15 (28 kbytes) Flash Memory Erase Blocks Address H'000000 to H'000FFF H'001000 to H'001FFF H'002000 to H'002FFF H'003000 to H'003FFF H'004000 to H'004FFF H'005000 to H'005FFF H'006000 to H'006FFF H'007000 to H'007FFF H'008000 to H'00FFFF H'010000 to H'01FFFF H'020000 to H'02FFFF H'030000 to H'03FFFF H'040000 to H'0403FF H'040400 to H'0407FF H'040800 to H'040FFF H'041000 to H'047FFF Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 142 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.3.5 Bit Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) : : : 7 — 0 — 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 — 0 — 2 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — FLSHE OSROME Initial value R/W STCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the I C bus interface operating mode, on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and OSD ROM. For details on IIC bus interface, refer to 2 section 23, I C Bus Interface (IIC). If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 6 and 5⎯I C Control (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I C bus 2 interface. For details, see section 23, I C Bus Interface (IIC). 2 2 Bit 3⎯Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents are retained. Bit 3 FLSHE 0 1 Description Flash memory control registers deselected Flash memory control registers selected (Initial value) Bit 2⎯OSD ROM Enable (OSROME): Controls the OSD character data ROM (OSDROM) access. When this bit is set to 1, the OSDROM can be accessed by the CPU, and when this bit is cleared to 0, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU but accessed by the OSD module. Before writing to or erasing the OSDROM in the F-ZTAT version, be sure to set this bit to 1. Note: During OSD display, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU. Before accessing the OSDROM by the CPU, be sure to clear the OSDON bit in the screen control register to 0 then set the OSROME bit to 1. If the OSROME bit is set to 1 during OSD display, the character data ROM cannot be accessed correctly by CPU. Bit 2 OSROME 0 1 Description OSD ROM is accessed by the OSD OSD ROM is accessed by the CPU Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 143 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 (Initial value) Section 7 ROM Bits 7, 4, 1 and 0⎯Reserved: Always read as 0. Do not write 1 to these bits. 7.4 On-Board Programming Modes When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 7.4. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 7.3. Table 7.4 Mode Mode Name Boot mode User program mode Setting On-Board Programming Modes Pin FWE 1 1* 1 MD0 0 1 P12 1* ⎯ 2 P13 1* ⎯ 2 P14 1* ⎯ 2 Notes: 1. In user program mode, the FWE pin should not be constantly set to 1. Set FWE to 1 to make a transition to user program mode before performing a program/erase/verify operation. 2. Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 144 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.4.1 Boot Mode When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode. When a reset-start is executed after the LSI’s pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program built into the LSI is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially transmitted to the LSI via the SCI. In the LSI, the programming control program received via the SCI is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is performed). The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the programming algorithm given later. Figure 7.7 shows the system configuration in boot mode. Figure 7.8 shows the boot program mode execution procedure. This LSI Flash memory Host Write data reception Verify data transmission SI1 SCI1 SO1 On-chip RAM Figure 7.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 145 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Start Set pins to boot mode and execute reset-start Host transfers data (H'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate The LSI measures low period of H'00 data transmitted by host The LSI calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register After bit rate adjustment, the LSI transmits one H'00 data byte to host to indicate end of adjustment Host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (H'00), and transmits one H'55 data byte After receiving H'55, LSI transmits one H'AA data byte to host Host transmits number of programming control program bytes (N), upper byte followed by lower byte The LSI transmits received number of bytes to host as verify data (echo-back) n=1 Host transmits programming control program sequentially in byte units The LSI transmits received programming control program to host as verify data (echo-back) Transfer received programming control program to on-chip RAM No Yes End of transmission Check flash memory data, and if data has already been written, erase all blocks After confirming that all flash memory data has been erased, The LSI transmits one H'AA data byte to host Execute programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM n+1→n n = N? Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations are halted. Figure 7.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 146 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment Start bit Stop bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) High period (1 or more bits) Figure 7.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment When boot mode is initiated, the LSI measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The LSI calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the LSI. If reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the LSI system clock frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the LSI. To ensure correct SCI operation, the host's transfer bit rate should be set to (4800, 9600, 19200) bps. Table 7.5 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of the LSI’s bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system clock range. Table 7.5 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit Rate Is Possible System Clock Frequency 8 MHz to 10 MHz 8 MHz to 10 MHz 8 MHz to 10 MHz Host Bit Rate (bps) 4800 9600 19200 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 147 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 2048-byte area from H'FFDFB0 to H'FFE7AF is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 7.10. The area to which the programming control program is transferred is H'FFE7B0 to H'FFFFAF (6144 bytes). The boot program area can be used when the programming control program transferred into RAM enters the execution state. A stack area should be set up as required. H'FFDFB0 Boot program area* (2048 bytes) H'FFE7AF Programming control program area (6144 bytes) H'FFFFAF Note: * The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot program reamins stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming control program. Figure 7.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 148 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Notes on Use of Boot Mode: 1. When the LSI comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI's SI1 pin. The reset should end with SI1 pin high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for the LSI to get ready to measure the low period of the SI1 pin input. 2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. 3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. 4. The SI1 and SO1 pins should be pulled up on the board. 5. Before branching to the programming control program (H'FFE7B0 in RAM area), the LSI terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The transmit data output pin, SO1, goes to the high-level output state (P21PCR = 1, P21PDR = 1). The contents of the CPU's internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program. The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed. 6. Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 7.4 and executing a resetstart. When the LSI detects the boot mode setting at reset release*, it retains that state internally. Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting the FWE pin and mode pins, and executing reset release*. Boot mode can also be cleared by a WDT overflow reset. If the mode pin input levels are changed in boot mode, the boot mode state will be maintained in the microcomputer, and boot mode continued, unless a reset occurs. However, the FWE pin must not be driven low while the boot program is running or flash memory is being programmed or erased. Note: * Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states) with respect to the reset release timing. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 149 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.4.2 User Program Mode When set to user program mode, the LSI can program and erase its flash memory by executing a user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of FWE control and supply of programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. In this mode, the LSI starts up in mode 1 and applies a high level to the FWE pin. The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE1 bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip RAM or external memory. Figure 7.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when transferred to on-chip RAM. Write the FWE assessment program and transfer program (and the program/erase control program if necessary) beforehand MD0 = 1 Reset start Transfer program/erase control program to RAM Branch to program/erase control program in RAM area FWE = high Execute program/erase control program (flash memory rewriting) Clear FWE Branch to flash memory application program Note: Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin. Apply a high level to the FWE pin only when the flash memory is programmed or erased. Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Figure 7.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 150 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. With addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF, transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU1, ESU1, P1, E1, PV1 and EV1 bits in FLMCR1. With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU2, ESU2, P2, E2, PV2, and EV2 bits in the FLMCR2. The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory. Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, and P1 bits in FLMCR1, and the SWE2, ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2, and P2 in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. When programming or erasing, set FWE to 1 (programming/erasing will not be executed if FWE = 0). 3. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. 4. Do not write to addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF and H'40000 to H'47FFF at the same time. Otherwise operation cannot be guaranteed. 5. Do not operate the OSD when writing or erasing addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF. Do not set the OSROME in STCR to 1 before manipulating the flash control register. 7.5.1 Program Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 7.12 to write data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. Following the elapse of 1.0 μs or more after the SWEn bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register n (FLMCRn), 128-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 128-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. The lower 8 bits of the start address written to must be H'00, or H'80. One hundred and twenty-eight consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 151 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Set 6.6 ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the elapse of 50 μs or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the Pn bit in FLMCRn. The time during which the Pn bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting for one programming operation using the table in the programming flowchart. 7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the Pn bit in FLMCRn is cleared, then the PSUn bit is cleared at least 5 μs later). The watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of 5 μs or more, and the operating mode is switched to program-verify mode by setting the PVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of 4 μs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least 2 μs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 7.12) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After 128 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least 2 μs, then clear the SWEn bit in FLMCRn. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than 1,000 times on the same bits. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 152 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Start of programming Start Set SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR(2) tsswe: Wait 1 µs Write pulse application subroutine Programming pulse apply subroutine Enable WDT n=1 Set PSU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) m=0 tspsu: Wait 50 µs Set P1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tsp10 or tsp30 or tsp200: Wait 10 µs or 30 µs or 200 µs Clear P1(2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcp: Wait 5 µs Clear PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcpsu: Wait 5 µs Disable WDT End of subroutine Note: 6. Programming pulse width Number of times of programming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Programming time (z) µs 30 30 30 30 30 30 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Program data = verify data? OK 6 ≥ n? NG OK Calculate additional program data Transfer additional program data to additional program data area *4 Calculate reprogram data Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area *3 *4 NG m=1 Increment address *5 Write 128-byte program data in RAM reprogram data area consecutevely to flash memory Call subroutine Programming pulse 30 µs or 200 µs Set PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2) tspv: Wait 4 µs H'FF dummy write to verify address tspvr: Wait 2 µs Read verify data *2 n ←n + 1 *1 Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area *4 Refer to note *6 for the pulse width NG Complete 128-byte data verification? OK 998 999 1000 200 200 200 Clear PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2) tcpv: Wait 2 µs 6≥n? OK Write 128-byte program data in RAM additional data area consecutively to flash memory Call subroutine Write pulse additional program pulse 10 µs *1 NG The programming pulse must be 10 µs in additional programming RAM Program data storage are (128 bytes) Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes) m = 0? OK NG n ≥ 1000? OK NG Additional program data storage area (128 bytes) Clear SWE1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2) tcswe: Wait 100 µs End of programming Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1(2) tcwe: Wait 100 µs Programming Failure Perform programming after erasing data. Do not perform additional programming to addresses that have already been written to. Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower eight bits of the start address must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes: in this case, H'FF must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. Even in case of the bit which is already-programmed in the 128-byte programming loop, perform additional programming if the bit fails at the next verify. 4. An area for storing program data (128 bytes), reprogram data (128 bytes), and additional program (128bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the reprogram and additional program areas are rewritten as programming processes. 5. A 30 µs or 200 µs programming pulse must be applied. For details on programming pulse, refer to Note 6. To perform additional data programming, apply a programming pulse of 10 µs. Reprogram data X' is the reprogram data after program pulse is applied. Reprogram Data Calculation Table Source Data (D) Verify data (V) Reprogram data (X) 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram Still in erased state; no action Additiona l program data calculation table Reprogram data (X') Verify data (V) Additional program data (Y) Comments 0 0 0 Additional programming performed 1 0 1 Additional programming not performed 1 1 0 1 1 1 Additional programming not performed Figure 7.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 153 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.5.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 7.13. To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least 1 μs after setting the SWEn bit to 1 in flash memory control register n (FLMCRn). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set more than 19.8 ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the ESUn bit in FLMCRn, and after a elapse of 100 μs or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the En bit in FLMCRn. The time during which the En bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that erase time does not exceed 10 ms. Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 154 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM START *1 Set SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tsswe: Wait 1 µs n=1 Set EBR1 (2) Enable WDT Set ESU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tsesu: Wait 100 µs Set E1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tse: Wait 10 ms Clear E1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tce: Wait 10 µs Clear ESU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcesu: Wait 10 µs Disable WDT Set EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tsev: Wait 20 µs Set block start address to verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address tsevr: Wait 2 µs Read verify data Increment address Verify data = all 1? YES NO Last address of block? YES Clear EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcev: Wait 4 µs NO Clear EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcev: Wait 4 µs NO n←n+1 *3 *2 *4 End of erasing of all erase blocks? YES n ≥ (N)? YES *5 NO Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcswe: Wait 100 µs Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2) tcswe: Wait 100 µs End of erasing Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Erase failure Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. Set only one bit in EBR. More than two bit cannot be set. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. For the value of N, see table 31.32, Flash Memory Characteristics. Figure 7.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 155 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the En bit in FLMCRn is cleared, then the ESUn bit is cleared at least 10 μs later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of 10 μs or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of 6.0 μs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least 2 μs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than 100 times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least 4 μs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks, clear the SWEn bit in FLMCRn. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 156 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.6 Flash Memory Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 7.6.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 7.6.) In error protected state, the FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are maintained. Table 7.6 Hardware Protection Functions Item FWE pin protection Description • Program Erase Yes When a low level is input to the FWE pin, FLMCR1, Yes FLMCR2 (excluding the FLER bit), EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in standby mode or watch mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC characteristics Yes Reset/standby protection • Yes • Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 157 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.6.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 and SWE2 bit in FLMCR2 and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) or P2 or E2 bit in flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 7.7.) Table 7.7 Software Protection Functions Item SWE bit protection Block specification protection Description • Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the program/erase-protected state for all blocks (Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory) Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state Program Yes Erase Yes • ⎯ Yes • 7.6.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV1, PV2, EV1 and EV2 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. FLER bit setting conditions are as follows: • When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) • Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing • When a SLEEP instruction (including standby) is executed during programming/erasing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 158 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Figure 7.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. Program mode Erase mode RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 RES = 0 E (S rror lee oc p i cur ns re tru nc cti e on ) Reset (hardware protection) RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 S =0 RE Error occurrence RES = 0 FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2 initialization state Error protection mode RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 Power-down mode Power-down mode release Error protection mode (power-down mode) RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2 initialization state Legend: RD: Memory read possible VF : Verify-read possible PR : Programming possible ER : Erasing possible RD: Memory read impossible VF : Verify-read impossible PR : Programming impossible ER : Erasing impossible Figure 7.14 Flash Memory State Transitions 7.7 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts are disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the P1 or E1 bit is set in FLMCR1, or the P2 or E2 bit is set in FLMR2), and while the boot program is 1 executing in boot mode* , to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this: • Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. • In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would 2 not be read correctly* , possibly resulting in MCU runaway. • If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 159 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal erasing and programming or MCU operation. All requests must therefore be disabled inside and outside the MCU during FWE application. Interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state while the P1 or E1 bit remains set in FLMCR1, or the P2 or E2 bit remains set in FLMCR2. Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until data write by the write control program is complete. 2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons: • If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be returned). • If the interrupt entry in the interrupt vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. 7.8 7.8.1 Flash Memory Programmer Mode Programmer Mode Setting Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board programming modes. In programmer mode, flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, autoerase mode, and status read mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation. 7.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the PROM programmer. The socket adapter product codes are listed in table 7.8. Figure 7.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode. Table 7.8 Part No. HD64F2199R Socket Adapter Product Codes Package 112-pin QFP Socket Adapter Product Code ME2199ESHF1H (Minato Electronics) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 160 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM H8S/2199R MCU mode H'000000 Programmer mode H'00000 On-chip ROM area H'047FFF H'47FFF Figure 7.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode 7.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation Table 7.9 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and table 7.10 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below. • Memory Read Mode: Memory read mode supports byte reads. • Auto-Program Mode: Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. • Auto-Erase Mode: Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. • Status Read Mode: Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the IO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. Table 7.9 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode Pin Names Mode Read Output disable Command write 1 Chip disable* FWE H or L H or L H or L* H or L 3 CE L L L H OE L H H X WE H H L X IO0 to IO7 Data output Hi-Z Data input Hi-Z A0 to A18 Ain X Ain* X 2 Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. 3. For command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode, input a high level to the FWE pin. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 161 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Table 7.10 Programmer Mode Commands 1st Cycle Number of Cycles Mode Address 1+n 129 2 2 write write write write X X X X 2nd Cycle Data H'00 H'40 H'20 H'71 Mode read write write write Address RA WA X X Data Dout Din H'20 H'71 Command Name Memory read mode Auto-program mode Auto-erase mode Status read mode Notes: 1. In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. 2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n). 7.8.4 Memory Read Mode • After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by means of a command write before the read is executed. • Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state. • Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed. • After power-on, memory read mode is entered. Table 7.11 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (1) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 ⎯ ⎯ Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 30 30 Unit μs ns ns ns ns ns ns ns − Preliminary − Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 162 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Command write A18 to A0 Memory read mode ADDRESS STABLE CE OE WE IO7 to IO0 twep tceh tnxtc tces tf tr H'00 tdh tds DATA Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE. Figure 7.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write Table 7.12 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode − Preliminary − Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 ⎯ ⎯ Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 30 30 Unit μs ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 163 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Other mode command write A18 to A0 ADDRESS STABLE CE OE WE IO7 to IO0 DATA tnxtc tces tf twep tceh tr H'XX tdh tds Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time. Figure 7.17 Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode Table 7.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (2) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Access time CE output delay time OE output delay time Output disable delay time Data output hold time Symbol tacc tce toe tdf toh Min ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 5 Max 20 150 150 100 ⎯ Unit μs ns ns ns ns − Preliminary − A18 to A0 ADDRESS STABLE ADDRESS STABLE CE OE WE tacc IO7 to IO0 DATA toh DATA toh tacc VIL VIL VIH Figure 7.18 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Enable State Read Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 164 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM A18 to A0 ADDRESS STABLE ADDRESS STABLE tacc CE OE WE IO7 to IO0 tce toe tdf DATA toh tce toe VIH tdf DATA toh tacc Figure 7.19 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Clocked Read 7.8.5 Auto-Program Mode AC Characteristics Table 7.14 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Address setup time Address hold time Memory write time WE rise time WE fall time Write setup time Write end setup time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep twsts tspa tas tah twrite tr tf tpns tpnh Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 ⎯ 0 60 1 ⎯ ⎯ 100 100 Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 150 ⎯ ⎯ 3000 30 30 ⎯ ⎯ Unit μs ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ns ns ms ns ns ns ns − Preliminary − Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 165 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM FWE A18 to A0 CE OE WE IO7 tpns ADDRESS STABLE tceh tnxtc twep tces tf tds tdh tr tas tah tpnh tnxtc Data transfer 1 byte to 128 bytes twsts tspa twrite(1 to 3,000 ms) Programming operation end identification signal IO6 Programming normal end identification signal Programming wait IO5 to IO0 H'40 DATA DATA H'00 Figure 7.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms Notes on Use of Auto-Program Mode • In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. • A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. • The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. • Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 7.20). Do not perform transfer after the second cycle. • Do not perform a command write during a programming operation. • Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. • Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking IO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (IO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end identification pin). • The status polling IO6 and IO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 166 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode AC Characteristics Table 7.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Memory erase time WE rise time WE fall time Erase setup time Erase end setup time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tests tspa terase tr tf tens tenh Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 ⎯ 100 ⎯ ⎯ 100 100 Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 150 40000 30 30 ⎯ ⎯ Unit μs ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ms ns ns ns ns − Preliminary − FWE tens A18 to A0 tenh CE OE WE IO7 IO6 tces tceh tspa tnxtc twep tests terase (100 to 40000ms) Erase end identification signal Erase normal end identification signal CLin DLin H'20 H'00 tnxtc tf tds tr tdh IO5 to IO0 H'20 Figure 7.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 167 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM Notes on Use of Erase-Program Mode • Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. • Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. • Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking IO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (IO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end identification pin). • The status polling IO6 and IO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. 7.8.7 Status Read Mode Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode. The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is performed. Table 7.16 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width OE output delay time Disable delay time CE output delay time WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep toe tdf tce tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 150 100 150 30 30 Unit μs ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns − Preliminary − Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 168 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM A18 to A0 CE tce OE WE tces tf tds twep tceh tr tdh IO7 to IO0 H'71 tnxtc tces tf tds H'71 twep tceh tr tdh DATA tnxtc toe tdf tnxtc Note: IO2 and IO3 are undefined. Figure 7.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms Table 7.17 Status Read Mode Return Commands Pin Name Attribute IO7 IO6 IO5 IO4 IO3 IO2 IO1 ⎯ ⎯ IO0 Normal end Command identification error 0 Command error: 1 Programming Erase error error 0 0 Programming Effective or erase count address error exceeded 0 Count exceeded: 1 Otherwise: 0 0 Effective address error: 1 Otherwise: 0 Initial value 0 Indications Normal end: 0 Abnormal end: 1 0 0 ⎯ Programming Erase error: 1 ⎯ error: 1 Otherwise: 0 Otherwise: 0 Otherwise: 0 Note: IO2 and IO3 are undefined. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 169 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.8.8 Status Polling The IO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase mode. The IO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-erase mode. Table 7.18 Status Polling Output Truth Table Pin Names IO7 IO6 IO0 to IO5 Internal Operation in Progress 0 0 0 Abnormal End 1 0 0 ⎯ 0 1 0 Normal End 1 1 0 7.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. Table 7.19 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications Item Standby release (oscillation stabilization time) Programmer mode setup time VCC hold time Symbol tosc1 tbmv tdwn Min 10 10 0 Max ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Unit ms ms ms VCC RES FWE tosc1 tbmv Memory read mode Command wait state tdwn Auto-program mode Auto-erase mode Command Don't care wait state Normal/abnormal end identification Don't care Note: Except in auto-program mode and auto-erase mode, drive the FWE input pin low. Figure 7.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot Program Transfer Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 170 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.8.10 Notes on Memory Programming • When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming. • When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto-programming. Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 171 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 7 ROM 7.9 Note on Switching from F–ZTAT Version to Mask-ROM Version The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 7.20 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 7.20 is read in the mask ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure that the registers in table 7.20 have no effect. Table 7.20 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version Register Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Abbreviation FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 Address H'FFF8 H'FFF9 H'FFFA H'FFFB Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 172 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 8 RAM Section 8 RAM 8.1 Overview The H8S/2199R, H8S/2198R, H8S/2197R, and H8S/2196R have 4 kbytes, H8S/2197S, and H8S/2196S have 3 kbytes, and H8S/2199R F-ZTAT version has 8 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte data and word data to be accessed in one state. This makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer. 8.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'FFEFB0 H'FFEFB2 H'FFEFB4 H'FFEFB1 H'FFEFB3 H'FFEFB5 H'FFFFAE H'FFFFAF Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2199R) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 173 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 8 RAM Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 174 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator 9.1 Overview This LSI has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (φ), the bus master clock, and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of a system clock oscillator, a duty adjustment circuit, clock selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, subclock oscillator, and subclock division circuit. 9.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. φ/16, φ/32, φ/64 φw/2, φw/4, φw/8 φ or φ SUB Bus master clock To CPU Clock selection circuit OSC1 OSC2 System clock oscillator Duty adjustment circuit Mediumspeed clock divider φ SUB X1 X2 Subclock oscillator Subclock division circuit Timer A count clock Internal clock To supporting modules φSUB (φw/2, φw/4, φw/8) Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator 9.1.2 Register Configuration The clock pulse generator is controlled by SBYCR and LPWRCR. Table 9.1 shows the register configuration. Table 9.1 Name Standby control register Low-power control register Note: * CPG Registers Abbreviation SBYCR LPWRCR R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFEA H'FFEB Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 175 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator 9.2 9.2.1 Register Descriptions Standby Control Register (SBYCR) Bit : 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 SCK1 0 R/W 0 SCK0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. Only bits 0 and 1 are described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 1 and 0⎯System Clock Select 1 and 0 (SCK1, SCK0): These bits select the bus master clock for high-speed mode and medium-speed mode. Bit 1 SCK1 0 Bit 0 SCK0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Bus master is in high-speed mode Medium-speed clock is φ/16 Medium-speed clock is φ/32 Medium-speed clock is φ/64 (Initial value) 9.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) Bit : 7 DTON 0 R/W 6 LSON 0 R/W 5 NESEL 0 R/W 4 — 0 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 SA1 0 R/W 0 SA0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. Only bit 1 and 0 is described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.2, LowPower Control Register (LPWRCR). LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 176 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator Bits 1 and 0⎯Subactive Mode Clock Select (SA1, SA0): Select CPU clock for subactive mode. In subactive mode, writes are disabled. Bit 1 SA1 0 Bit 0 SA0 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don't care Description CPU operating clock is φw/8 CPU operating clock is φw/4 CPU operating clock is φw/2 (Initial value) 9.3 Oscillator Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. 9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 9.2. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used. CL1 OSC1 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22pF OSC2 CL2 Figure 9.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) Crystal Resonator: Figure 9.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 9.2 and the same frequency as the system clock (φ). CL L OSC1 Rs OSC2 AT-cut parallel-resonance type C0 Figure 9.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 177 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator Table 9.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters 8 80 7 10 60 7 Frequency (MHz) RSmax (Ω) COmax (pF) Note on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 9.4. When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. Avoid CL2 Signal A Signal B This LSI OSC1 OSC2 CL1 Figure 9.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 178 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator 9.3.2 External Clock Input Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 9.5. If the OSC2 pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF. In example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. OSC1 OSC2 Open External clock input (a) OSC2 pin left open OSC1 OSC2 External clock input (b) Inverted-phase clock input at OSC2 pin Figure 9.5 External Clock Input (Examples) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 179 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator External Clock: The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the system clock (φ). Table 9.3 and figure 9.6 show the input conditions for the external clock. Table 9.3 External Clock Input Conditions VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V Item External clock input low pulse width External clock input high pulse width External clock rise time External clock fall time Symbol tEXL tEXH tEXr tEXf Min 40 40 ⎯ ⎯ Max ⎯ ⎯ 10 10 Unit ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figure 9.6 tEXH tEXL OSC1 tEXr tEXf Figure 9.6 External Clock Input Timing Table 9.4 shows the external clock output settling delay time, and figure 9.7 shows the external clock output settling delay timing. The oscillator and duty adjustment circuit have a function for adjusting the waveform of the external clock input at the OSC1 pin. When the prescribed clock signal is input at the OSC1 pin, internal clock signal output is fixed after the elapse of the external clock output settling delay time (tDEXT). As the clock signal output is not fixed during the tDEXT period, the reset signal should be driven low to maintain the reset state. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 180 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator Table 9.4 External Clock Output Settling Delay Time Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Item External clock output settling delay time Note: * Symbol tDEXT * Min 500 Max ⎯ Unit μs Notes Figure 9.7 tDEXT includes 20 tCYC of RES pulse width (tRESW). VCC 4.0 V OSC1 φ (Internal) RES tDEXT* Note: * tDEXT includes 20 tcyc of RES pulse width (tRESW). Figure 9.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 181 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator 9.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (φ). 9.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider The medium-speed divider divides the system clock to generate φ/16, φ/32, and φ/64 clocks. 9.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit The bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock (φ) or one of the medium-speed clocks (φ/16, φ/32 or φ/64) to be supplied to the bus master (CPU), according to the settings of bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SBYCR. 9.7 9.7.1 Subclock Oscillator Circuit Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator When using a subclock, connect a 32.768 kHz crystal resonator to X1 and X2 pins as shown in figure 9.8. For precautions on connecting, see Note on Board Design, in section 9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator. C1 X1 X2 C2 C1 = C2 = 15 pF (Typ) Figure 9.8 Connecting a 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 182 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator Figure 9.9 shows a crystal resonator equivalent circuit. CS Ls X1 Rs X2 C0 = 1.5 pF (Typ) RS = 14 kΩ (Typ) fW = 32.768 kHz Type: MX38T (Nihon Denpa Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Note: Values shown are the reference values. C0 Figure 9.9 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit 9.7.2 When Subclock Is Not Needed Connect X1 pin to VCL, and X2 pin should remain open as shown in figure 9.10. VCL X1 X2 Open Figure 9.10 Terminal When Subclock Is Not Needed 9.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit To eliminate noise in the subclock input from the X1 pin, this circuit samples the clock using a clock obtained by dividing the φ clock. The sampling frequency is set with the NESEL bit in LPWRCR. For details, see section 4.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR). The clock is not sampled in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 183 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator 9.9 Notes on the Resonator Resonator characteristics are closely related to the user board design. Perform appropriate assessment of resonator connection, mask version and F-ZTAT, by referring to the connection example given in this section. The resonator circuit rate differs depending on the free capacity of the resonator and the execution circuit, so consult with the resonator manufacturer before determination. Make sure the voltage applied to the resonator pin does not exceed the maximum rated voltage. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 184 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Section 10 I/O Port 10.1 10.1.1 Overview Port Functions This LSI has seven 8-bit I/O ports (including one CMOS high-current port), and one 8-bit input port. Table 10.1 shows the functions of each port. Each I/O part a port control register (PCR) that controls an input and output and a port data register (PDR) for storing output data. The input and output can be controlled in a unit of bit. The pin whose peripheral function is used both as an alternative function can set the pin function in a unit of bit by a port mode register (PMR). 10.1.2 Port Input • Reading a Port ⎯ When a general port of PCR = 0 (input) is read, the pin level is read. ⎯ When a general port of PCR = 1 (output) is read, the value of the corresponding PDR bit is read. ⎯ When the pins (excluding AN7 to AN0 and RPB7 to RP0 pins) set to the peripheral function are read, the results are as given in items (1) and (2) according to the PCR value. • Processing Input Pins The general input port or general I/O port is gated by read signals. Unused pins can be left open if they are not read. However, if an open pin is read, a feedthrough current may apply during the read period according to an intermediate level. The read period is about one-state. Relevant ports: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, and P8 When an alternative pin is set to an alternative function other than the general I/O, always set the pin level to a high or low level. If the pin is left open, a feedthrough current applies according to an intermediate level, which adversely affects reliability, causes malfunctions, and in the worst case may damage the pin. Because the PMR is not initialized in low power consumption mode, pay attention to the pin input level after the mode has been shifted to the low power consumption mode. Relevant pins: IC, IRQ0 to IRQ5, SCK1, SI1, SDA1, SCL1, SDA0*, SCL0*, SYNCI*, FTIA*, FTIB*, FTIC*, FTID*, RPTRG, TMBI, ADTRG, EXCTL, COMP, DPG, EXCAP, and EXTTRG Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 185 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Table 10.1 Port Functions Function Switching Register PMR0 PMR1 Port Port 0 Port 1 Description P07 to P00 inputonly ports Pins P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Alternative Functions Analog data input channels 7 to 0 Prescalar unit frequency division clock output Prescalar unit input capture input External interrupt request input Formatless serial clock input* 2 I C bus interface clock I/O* I C bus interface data I/O* 2 2 2 P17 to P10 I/O ports P17/TMOW (Built-in MOS pullup transistors) P16/IC P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 Port 2 P27 to P20 I/O ports P27/SYNCI (Built-in MOS pullP26/SCL0 up transistors) P25/SDA0 P24/SCL1 P23/SDA1 P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 STCR ICCR I C bus interface clock I/O I C bus interface data I/O SCI1 clock I/O SCI1 transmit data output SCI1 receive data input Timer J timer output Timer J buzzer output 8-bit PWM3 output* 8-bit PWM2 output* 8-bit PWM1 output 8-bit PWM0 output Servo monitor output PMR3 SMR SCR Port 3 P37 to P30 I/O ports P37/TMO (Built-in MOS pullP36/BUZZ up transistors) P35/PWM3 P34/PWM2 P33/PWM1 P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 Port 4 P47 to P40 I/O ports P47/RPTRG P46/FTOB P45/FTOA P44/FTID P43/FTIC P42/FTIB P41/FTIA P40/PWM14 Realtime output port trigger input Timer X output compare B output* Timer X output compare A output* Timer X input capture D input* Timer X input capture C input* Timer X input capture B input* Timer X input capture A input* 14-bit PWM output* PMR4 TOCR ⎯ PMR4 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 186 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Function Switching Register PMR6 PMRA Port Port 6 Description Pins Alternative Functions Realtime output port Timer B event output Realtime output port A/D conversion start external trigger input Realtime output port PPG output Realtime output port P63 to P60 I/O ports P67/RP7/ TMBI P66/RP6/ ADTRG P65/RP5 to P60/RP0 Port 7 P77 to P70 I/O ports P77/PPG7/ RPB to P74/ PPG4/RP8 P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 Port 8 P87 to P80 I/O ports P87/DPG P86/EXTTRG P85/COMP/B PMR7 PMRB PPG output DPG signal input External trigger signal input Pre-amplifier output result signal input Color signal output (B) PMR8 PMRC P84/H.Amp SW/G Pre-amplifier output select signal input Color signal output (G) P83/C.Rotary/R Control signal output for processing color signals Color signal output (R) P82/EXCTL P81/EXCAP/ YBO P80/YCO External CTL signal input External capstan signal input OSD character position output OSD character data output Notes: This LSI does not have port 5. * These alternative functions are not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 187 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors The MOS pull-up transistors in ports 1 to 3 can be switched on or off by the MOS pull-up select registers 1 to 3 (PUR1 to PUR3) in units of bits. Settings in PUR1 to PUR3 are valid when the pin function is set to an input by PCR1 to PCR3. If the pin function is set to an output, the MOS pullup transistor is turned off. Figure 10.1 shows the circuit configuration of a pin with a MOS pull-up transistor. STBY PUR VCC VCC PCR PDR VSS Input data Legend: STBY : Low power consumption mode signal (The pull-up MOS transistor is turned off by the STBY signal in low power consumption mode except for sleep mode) : MOS pull-up select register : Port control register : Port data register PUR PCR PDR Figure 10.1 Circuit Configuration of Pin with MOS Pull-Up Transistor Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 188 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.2 10.2.1 Port 0 Overview Port 0 is an 8-bit input-only port. Table 10.2 shows the port 0 configuration. Port 0 consists of pins that are used both as standard input ports (P07 to P00) and analog input channels (AN7 to AN0). It is switched by port mode register 0 (PMR0). Table 10.2 Port 0 Configuration Port Port 0 Function P07 (standard input port) P06 (standard input port) P05 (standard input port) P04 (standard input port) P03 (standard input port) P02 (standard input port) P01 (standard input port) P00 (standard input port) Alternative Function AN7 (analog input channel) AN6 (analog input channel) AN5 (analog input channel) AN4 (analog input channel) AN3 (analog input channel) AN2 (analog input channel) AN1 (analog input channel) AN0 (analog input channel) 10.2.2 Register Configuration Table 10.3 shows the port 0 register configuration. Table 10.3 Port 0 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 0 Port data register 0 Note: * Abbrev. PMR0 PDR0 R/W R/W R Size Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 ⎯ Address* H'FFCD H'FFC0 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 189 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR07 0 R/W 6 PMR06 0 R/W 5 PMR05 0 R/W 4 PMR04 0 R/W 3 PMR03 0 R/W 2 PMR02 0 R/W 1 PMR01 0 R/W 0 PMR00 0 R/W Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR0 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR0 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Pin Switching (PMR07 to PMR00): PMR07 to PMR00 set whether the P0n/ANn pin is used as a P0n input pin or an ANn pin for the analog input channel of an A/D converter. Bit n PMR0n 0 1 Note: Description The P0n/ANn pin functions as a P0n input pin The P0n/ANn pin functions as an ANn input pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 0 (PDR0) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR07 — R 6 PDR06 — R 5 PDR05 — R 4 PDR04 — R 3 PDR03 — R 2 PDR02 — R 1 PDR01 — R 0 PDR00 — R Port data register 0 (PDR0) reads the port states. When the corresponding bit of PMR0 is 0 (general input port), the pin state is read if PDR0 is read. When the corresponding bit of PMR0 is 1 (analog input channel), 1 is read if PDR0 is read. PDR0 is an 8-bit read-only register. When PDR0 is reset, its values become undefined. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 190 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.2.3 Pin Functions This section describes the pin functions of port 0 and their selection methods. P07/AN7 to P00/AN0: P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 are switched according to the PMR0n bit of PMR0 as shown below. PMR0n 0 1 Note: n = 7 to 0 Pin Function P0n input pin ANn input pin 10.2.4 Pin States Table 10.4 shows the pin 0 states in each operation mode. Table 10.4 Port 0 Pin States Pins P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Reset Highimpedance Active Highimpedance Sleep Highimpedance Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Highimpedance Subsleep Highimpedance Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 191 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.3 10.3.1 Port 1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.5 shows the port 1 configuration. Port 1 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P17 to P10) and frequency division clock output (TMOW), input capture input (IC), or external interrupt request inputs (IRQ5 to IRQ0). It is switched by port mode register 1 (PMR1) and port control register 1 (PCR1). Port 1 can select the functions of MOS pull-up transistors. Table 10.5 Port 1 Configuration Port Port 1 Function P17 (standard I/O port) P16 (standard I/O port) P15 (standard I/O port) P14 (standard I/O port) P13 (standard I/O port) P12 (standard I/O port) P11 (standard I/O port) P10 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function TMOW (frequency division clock output) IC (input capture input) IRQ5 (external interrupt request input) IRQ4 (external interrupt request input) IRQ3 (external interrupt request input) IRQ2 (external interrupt request input) IRQ1 (external interrupt request input) IRQ0 (external interrupt request input) 10.3.2 Register Configuration Table 10.6 shows the port 1 register configuration. Table 10.6 Port 1 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 1 Port control register 1 Port data register 1 Abbrev. PMR1 PCR1 PDR1 R/W R/W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFCE H'FFD1 H'FFC1 H'FFE1 MOS pull-up select register PUR1 1 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 192 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR17 0 R/W 6 PMR16 0 R/W 5 PMR15 0 R/W 4 PMR14 0 R/W 3 PMR13 0 R/W 2 PMR12 0 R/W 1 PMR11 0 R/W 0 PMR10 0 R/W Port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00. Note the following items when the pin functions are switched by PMR1. • If port 1 is set to an IC input pin and IRQ5 to IRQ0 by PMR1, the pin level needs be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. The pin level must not be set to an intermediate level. • When the pin functions of P16/IC and P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 are switched by PMR1, they are incorrectly recognized as edge detection according to the state of a pin signal and a detection signal may be generated. To prevent this, perform the operation in the following procedure. ⎯ Before switching the pin functions, inhibit an interrupt enable flag from being interrupted. ⎯ After having switched the pin functions, clear the relevant interrupt request flag to 0 by a single instruction. Program Example: : MOV.B R0L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt disabled MOV.B R1L,@PMR1 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Pin function change NOP BCLR m @IRQR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Optional instruction ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Applicable interrupt clear MOV.B R1L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt enabled : Bit 7⎯P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17): PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for the frequency division clock output. Bit 7 PMR17 0 1 Description The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW output pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 193 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bit 6⎯P16/IC Pin Switching (PMR16): PMR16 sets whether the P16/IC pin as a P16 I/O pin or an IC pin for the input capture input of the prescalar unit. The IC pin has a built-in noise cancel circuit. See section 21, Prescalar Unit. Bit 6 PMR16 0 1 Description The P16/IC pin functions as a P16 I/O pin The P16/IC pin functions as an IC input pin (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0⎯P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 Pin Switching (PMR15 to PMR10): PMR15 to PMR10 set whether the P1n/IRQn pin is used as a P1n I/O pin or an IRQn pin for the external interrupt request input. Bit n PMR1n 0 1 Note: Description The P1n/IRQn pin functions as a P1n I/O pin The P1n/IRQn pin functions as an IRQn input pin n = 5 to 0 (Initial value) Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR17 0 W 6 PCR16 0 W 5 PCR15 0 W 4 PCR14 0 W 3 PCR13 0 W 2 PCR12 0 W 1 PCR11 0 W 0 PCR10 0 W Port control register 1 (PCR1) controls the I/Os of pins P17 to P10 of port 1 in a unit of bit. When PCR1 is set to 1, the corresponding P17 to P10 pins become output pins, and when it is set to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR1, settings of PCR1 and PDR1 become valid. PCR1 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR1 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR1 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 194 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bits 7 to 0⎯P17 to P10 Pin Switching (PCR17 toPCR10) Bit n PCR1n 0 1 Note: Description The P1n pin functions as an input pin The P1n pin functions as an output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 1 (PDR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR17 0 R/W 6 PDR16 0 R/W 5 PDR15 0 R/W 4 PDR14 0 R/W 3 PDR13 0 R/W 2 PDR12 0 R/W 1 PDR11 0 R/W 0 PDR10 0 R/W Port data register 1 (PDR1) stores the data for the pins P17 to P10 of port 1. When PCR1 is 1 (output), the PDR1 values are directly read if port 1 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR1 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 1 is read. PDR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PDR1 is initialized to H'00. MOS Pull-Up Select Register 1 (PUR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PUR17 0 R/W 6 PUR16 0 R/W 5 PUR15 0 R/W 4 PUR14 0 R/W 3 PUR13 0 R/W 2 PUR12 0 R/W 1 PUR11 0 R/W 0 PUR10 0 R/W MOS pull-up selector register 1 (PUR1) controls the on and off of the MOS pull-up transistor of port 1. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR1 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. When the corresponding bit of PCR1 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR1 becomes invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off. PUR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PUR1 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P17 to P10 MOS Pull-Up Control (PCR17 to PCR10) Bit n PUR1n 0 1 Note: Description The P1n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor The P1n pin has a MOS pull-up pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 195 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.3.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 1 pin functions and their selection methods. P17/TMOW: P17/TMOW is switched as shown below according to the PMR17 bit in PMR1 and the PCR17 bit in PCR1. PMR17 0 PCR17 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P17 input pin P17 output pin TMOW output pin P16/IC: P16/IC is switched as shown below according to the PMR16 bit in PMR1, the NC on/off bit in prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR), and the PCR16 bit in PCR1. PMR16 0 PCR16 0 1 1 * 0 1 Legend: * Don’t care NC on/off * Pin Function P16 input pin P16 output pin IC input pin Noise cancel invalid Noise cancel valid P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0: P15/IRQ15 to P10/IRQ0 are switched as shown below according to the PMR1n bit in PMR1 and the PCR1n bit in PCR1. PMR1n 0 PCR1n 0 1 1 * Pin Function P1n input pin P1n output pin IRQn input pin Legend: * Don’t care. Notes: 1. n = 5 to 0 2. The IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pins can select the leading or falling edge as an edge sense (the IRQ0 pin can select both edges). See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register (IEGR). 3. IRQ1 or IRQ2 can be used as a timer J event input and IRQ3 can be used as a timer R input capture input. For details, see section 13, Timer J or section 15, Timer R. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 196 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.3.4 Pin States Table 10.7 shows the port 1 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.7 Port 1 Pin States Pins Reset Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Operation Subsleep Holding P17/TMOW Highimpedance P16/IC P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 Note: If the IC input pin and IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pins are set, the pin level need be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 197 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.4 10.4.1 Port 2 Overview Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.8 shows the port 2 configuration. Port 2 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P27 to P20) and SCI clock I/O 2 (SCK1), receive data input (SI1), send data output (SO1), I C bus interface clock I/O (SCL0, SCL1), or data I/O (SDA0, SDA1). It is switched by serial mode register (SMR), serial control register (SCR), and port control register 2 (PCR2). Port 2 can select the MOS pull-up function. Table 10.8 Port 2 Configuration Port Port 2 Function P27 (standard I/O port) P26 (standard I/O port) P25 (standard I/O port) P24 (standard I/O port) P23 (standard I/O port) P22 (standard I/O port) P21 (standard I/O port) P20 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function SYNCI (Formatless serial clock input) SCL0 (I C bus interface clock I/O) SDA0 (I C bus interface data I/O) SCL1 (I C bus interface clock I/O) SDA1 (I C bus interface data I/O) SCK1 (SCI1 clock I/O) SO1 (SCI1 transmit data output) SI1 (SCI1 receive data input) 2 2 2 2 Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SYNCI, SCL0, and SDA0 pin functions. 10.4.2 Register Configuration Table 10.9 shows the port 2 register configuration. Table 10.9 Port 2 Register Configuration Name Port control register 2 Port data register 2 MOS pull-up select register 2 Note: * Abbrev. PCR2 PDR2 PUR2 R/W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFD2 H'FFC2 H'FFE2 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 198 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Control Register 2 (PCR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR27 0 W 6 PCR26 0 W 5 PCR25 0 W 4 PCR24 0 W 3 PCR23 0 W 2 PCR22 0 W 1 PCR21 0 W 0 PCR20 0 W Port control register 2 (PCR2) controls the I/Os of pins P27 to P20 of port 2 in a unit of bit. When PCR2 is set to 1, the corresponding P27 to P20 pins become output pins, and when it is set to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O, settings of PCR2 and PDR2 are valid. PCR2 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR2 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR2 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P27 to P20 Pin Switching (PCR27 to PCR20) Bit n PCR2n 0 1 Note: Description The P2n pin functions as an input pin The P2n pin functions as an output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 2 (PDR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR27 0 R/W 6 PDR26 0 R/W 5 PDR25 0 R/W 4 PDR24 0 R/W 3 PDR23 0 R/W 2 PDR22 0 R/W 1 PDR21 0 R/W 0 PDR20 0 R/W Port data register 2 (PDR2) stores the data for the pins P27 to P20 of port 2. When PCR2 is 1 (output), the PDR2 values are directly read if port 2 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR2 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 2 is read. PDR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR2 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 199 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port MOS Pull-Up Select Register 2 (PUR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PUR27 0 R/W 6 PUR26 0 R/W 5 PUR25 0 R/W 4 PUR24 0 R/W 3 PUR23 0 R/W 2 PUR22 0 R/W 1 PUR21 0 R/W 0 PUR20 0 R/W MOS pull-up selector register 2 (PUR2) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor of port 2. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR2 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If the corresponding bit of PCR2 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR2 becomes invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off. PUR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR2 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P27 to P20 Pull-Up MOS Control (PUR27 to PUR20) Bit n PUR2n 0 1 Note: Description The P2n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor The P2n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) 10.4.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 2 pin functions and their selection methods. P27/SYNCI: P27/SYNCI is switched as shown below according to the PCR27 bit in PCR2. PCR27 0 1 Pin Function P27 input pin P27 output pin Notes: Because the SYNCI always functions, the alternative pin need always be set to the high or low level regardless of active mode or low power consumption mode. The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SYNCI pin function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 200 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P26/SCL0: P26/SCL0 is switched as shown below according to the PCR26 bit in PCR2 and the 2 ICE bit in the I C Bus control register 0 (ICCR0). ICE 0 PCR26 0 1 1 * Pin Function P26 input pin P26 output pin SCL0 I/O pin Legend: * Don’t care Notes: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SCL0 pin function. P25/SDA0: P25/SDA0 is switched as shown below according to the PCR25 bit in PCR2 and the 2 ICE bit in the I C Bus control register 0 (ICCR0). ICE 0 PCR25 0 1 1 * Pin Function P25 input pin P25 output pin SDA0 I/O pin Legend: * Don’t care Notes: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SDA0 pin function. P24/SCL1: P24/SCL1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR24 bit in PCR2 and the 2 ICE bit in the I C Bus control register 1 (ICCR1). ICE 0 PCR24 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P24 input pin P24 output pin SCL1 I/O pin P23/SDA1: P23/SDA1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR23 bit in PCR2 and the 2 ICE bit in the I C Bus control register 1 (ICCR1). ICE 0 PCR23 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 201 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Pin Function P23 input pin P23 output pin SDA1 I/O pin Section 10 I/O Port P22/SCK1: P22/SCK1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR22 bit in PCR2, the C/A bit in SMR, and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. CKE1 0 C/A 0 CKE0 0 PCR22 0 1 1 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care * SCK1 input pin * Pin Function P22 input pin P22 output pin SCK1 output pin P21/SO1: P21/SO1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR21 bit in PCR2 and the TE bit in SCR. TE 0 PCR21 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P21 input pin P21 output pin SO1 output pin P20/SI1: P20/SI1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR20 bit in PCR2 and the RE bit in SCR. RE 0 PCR20 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P20 input pin P20 output pin SI1 input pin Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 202 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.4.4 Pin States Table 10.10 shows the port 2 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.10 Port 2 Pin States Pins P27/SYNCI P26/SCL0 P25/SDA0 P24/SCL1 P23/SDA1 P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 Reset Highimpedance Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Operation Subsleep Holding Note: Because the SYNCI, SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and SDA1 always function, the alternative pin need always be set to the high or low level regardless of active mode or low power consumption mode. If the SCK1, and SI1 input pins are set, the pin level needs be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 203 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.5 10.5.1 Port 3 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.11 shows the port 3 configuration. Port 3 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P37 to P30) and timer J timer output (TMO), buzzer output (BUZZ), 8-bit PWM outputs (PWM3 to PWM0), SCI2 strobe output (STRB), or chip select input (CS). It is switched by port mode register 3 (PMR3) and port control register 3 (PCR3). Port 3 can select the MOS pull-up function. Table 10.11 Port 3 Configuration Port Port 3 Function P37 (standard I/O port) P36 (standard I/O port) P35 (standard I/O port) P34 (standard I/O port) P33 (standard I/O port) P32 (standard I/O port) P31 (standard I/O port) P30 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function TMO (timer J timer output) BUZZ (timer J buzzer output) PWM3 (8-bit PWM output) PWM2 (8-bit PWM output) PWM1 (8-bit PWM output) PWM0 (8-bit PWM output) SV2 (servo monitor output) SV1 (servo monitor output) Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 and PWM2 pin functions. 10.5.2 Register Configuration Table 10.12 shows the port 3 register configuration. Table 10.12 Port 3 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 3 Port control register 3 Port data register 3 MOS pull-up select register 3 Note: * Abbrev. PMR3 PCR3 PDR3 PUR3 R/W R/W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFD0 H'FFD3 H'FFC3 H'FFE3 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 204 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR37 0 R/W 6 PMR36 0 R/W 5 PMR35 0 R/W 4 PMR34 0 R/W 3 PMR33 0 R/W 2 PMR32 0 R/W 1 PMR31 0 R/W 0 PMR30 0 R/W Port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls switching of each pin function of port 3. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR3 is initialized to H'00. Bit 7⎯P37/TMO Pin Switching (PMR37): PMR37 sets whether the P37/TMO pin is used as a P37 I/O pin or a TMO pin for the timer J output timer. Bit 7 PMR37 0 1 Description The P37/TMO pin functions as a P37 I/O pin The P37/TMO pin functions as a TMO output pin (Initial value) Notes: If the TMO pin is used for remote control sending, a careless timer output pulse may be output when the remote control mode is set after the output has been switched to the TMO output. Perform the switching and setting in the following order. 1. Set the remote control mode. 2. Set the TMJ-1 and 2 counter data of the timer J. 3. Switch the P37/TMO pin to the TMO output pin. 4. Set the ST bit to 1. Bit 6⎯P36/BUZZ Pin Switching (PMR36): PMR36 sets whether the P36/BUZZ pin as a P36 I/O pin or an BUZZ pin for the timer J buzzer output. For the selection of the BUZZ output, see 13.2.2, Timer J Control Register (TMJC). Bit 6 PMR36 0 1 Description The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a P36 I/O pin The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a BUZZ output pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 205 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32): PMR35 to PMR32 set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as a P3n I/O pin or a PWMm pin for the 8-bit PWM output. Bit n PMR3n 0 1 Description The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a P3n I/O pin The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a PWMm output pin (Initial value) Notes: 1. n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0 2. The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 and PWM2 pin functions. Bit 1⎯P31/SV2 Pin Switching (PMR31): PMR31 sets whether the P31/SV2 pin is used as a P31 I/O pin or an SV2 pin for the servo monitor output. Bit 1 PMR31 0 1 Description The P31/SV2 pin functions as a P31 I/O pin The P31/SV2 pin functions as an SV2 output pin (Initial value) Bit 0⎯P30/SV1 Pin Switching (PMR30): PMR30 sets whether the P30/SV1 pin is used as a P30 I/O pin or an SV1 pin for servo monitor output. Bit 0 PMR30 0 1 Description The P30/SV1 pin functions as a P30 I/O pin The P30/SV1 pin functions as an SV1 output pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 206 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Control Register 3 (PCR3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR37 0 W 6 PCR36 0 W 5 PCR35 0 W 4 PCR34 0 W 3 PCR33 0 W 2 PCR32 0 W 1 PCR31 0 W 0 PCR30 0 W Port control register 3 (PCR3) controls the I/Os of pins P37 to P30 of port 3 in a unit of bit. When PCR3 is set to 1, the corresponding P37 to P30 pins become output pins, and when it is set to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR3, settings of PCR3 and PDR3 become valid. PCR3 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR3 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR3 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯Pin 37 to P30 Pin Switching (PCR37 to PCR30) Bit n PCR3n 0 1 Note: Description The P3n pin functions as an input pin The P3n pin functions as an output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 3 (PDR3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR37 0 R/W 6 PDR36 0 R/W 5 PDR35 0 R/W 4 PDR34 0 R/W 3 PDR33 0 R/W 2 PDR32 0 R/W 1 PDR31 0 R/W 0 PDR30 0 R/W Port data register 3 (PDR3) stores the data for the pins P37 to P30 of port 3. When PCR3 is 1 (output), the PDR3 values are directly read if port 3 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR3 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 3 is read. PDR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR3 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 207 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port MOS Pull-Up Select Register 3 (PUR3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PUR37 0 R/W 6 PUR36 0 R/W 5 PUR35 0 R/W 4 PUR34 0 R/W 3 PUR33 0 R/W 2 PUR32 0 R/W 1 PUR31 0 R/W 0 PUR30 0 R/W MOS pull-up selector register 3 (PUR3) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor of port 3. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR3 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If the corresponding bit of PCR3 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR3 becomes invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off. PUR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR3 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P37 to P30 MOS Pull-Up Control (PUR37 to PUR30) Bit n PCR3n 0 1 Note: Description The P3n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor The P3n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) 10.5.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 3 pin functions and their selection methods. P37/TMO: P37/TMO is switched as shown below according to the PMR37 bit in PMR3 and the PCR37 bit in PCR3. PMR37 0 PCR37 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P37 input pin P37 output pin TMO output pin Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 208 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P36/BUZZ: P36/BUZZ is switched as shown below according to the PMR36 bit in PMR3 and the PCR36 bit in PCR3. PMR36 0 PCR36 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P36 input pin P36 output pin BUZZ output pin P35/PWM3: P35/PWM3 is switched as shown below according to the PMR3n bit in PMR3 and the PCR3n bit in PCR3. PMR35 0 PCR35 0 1 1 * Pin Function P35 input pin P35 output pin PWM3 output pin Legend: * Don’t care Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 pin function. P34/PWM2: P34/PWM2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR34 bit in PCR3 and the PCR34 bit in PCR3. PMR34 0 PCR34 0 1 1 * Pin Function P34 input pin P34 output pin PWM2 output pin Legend: * Don’t care Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM2 pin function. P33/PWM1: P33/PWM1 is switched as shown below according to the PMR33 bit in PMR3 and the PCR33 bit in PCR3. PMR33 0 PCR33 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 209 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Pin Function P33 input pin P33 output pin PWM1 input pin Section 10 I/O Port P32/PWM0: P32/PWM0 is switched as shown below according to the PMR32 bit in PMR3 and the PCR32 bit in PCR. PMR32 0 PCR32 0 1 1 * Pin Function P32 input pin P32 output pin PWM0 output pin P31/SV2: P31/SV2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR31 bit in PMR3 and the PCR31 bit in PCR3. PMR31 0 PCR3 0 1 1 * Pin Function P31 input pin P31 output pin SV2 output pin P30/SV1: P30/SV1 is switched as shown below according to the PMR30 bit in PMR3 and the PCR30 bit in PCR3. PMR30 0 PCR30 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P30 input pin P30 output pin SV1 output pin 10.5.4 Pin States Table 10.13 shows the port 3 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.13 Port 3 Pin States Pins P37/TMO P36/BUZZ P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 P31/SV2 P30/SV1 Reset Highimpedance Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Operation Subsleep Holding Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 210 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.6 10.6.1 Port 4 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.14 shows the port 4 configuration. Port 4 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P47 to P40) and output compare output (FTOA, FTOB), input capture input (FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID) or 14-bit PWM output (PWM14). It is switched by port mode register 4 (PMR4), timer output compare control register (TOCR), and port control register 4 (PCR4). Table 10.14 Port 4 Configuration Port Port 4 Function P47 (standard I/O port) P46 (standard I/O port) P45 (standard I/O port) P44 (standard I/O port) P43 (standard I/O port) P42 (standard I/O port) P41 (standard I/O port) P40 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function RPTRG (realtime output port trigger input) FTOB (timer X1 output compare output) FTOA (timer X1 output compare output) FTID (timer X1 input capture input) FTIC (timer X1 input capture input) FTIB (timer X1 input capture input) FTIA (timer X1 input capture input) PWM14 (14-bit PWM output) Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOA, and FTOB pin functions. 10.6.2 Register Configuration Table 10.15 shows the port 4 register configuration. Table 10.15 Port 4 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 4 Port control register 4 Port data register 4 Note: * Abbrev. PMR4 PCR4 PDR4 R/W R/W W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'7E H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFDB H'FFD4 H'FFC4 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 211 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register 4 (PMR4) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR47 0 R/W 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 PMR40 0 R/W Port mode register 4 (PMR4) controls switching of the P47/RPTRG pin and the P40/PWM14 pin function. The switchings of the P46/FTOB and P45/FTOA functions are controlled by TOCR. See section 16, Timer X1. The FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function. PMR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR4 is initialized to H'7E. Because the RPTRG input always function, the alternative pin need always be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, each input uses the input edge to the alternative general I/O pins P44, P43, P42, and P41 as input signals. Bit 7⎯P47/RPTRG Pin Switching (PMR47): PMR47 sets whether the P47/RPTRG pin is used as a P40 I/O pin or a RPTRG pin for the realtime output port trigger input. Bit 7 PMR47 0 1 Description The P47/RPTRG pin functions as a P47 I/O pin The P47/RPTRG pin functions as a RPTRG I/O pin (Initial value) Bits 6 to 1⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid. Bit 0⎯P40/PWM14 Pin Switching (PMR40): PMR40 sets whether the P40/PWM14 pin is used as a P40 I/O pin or a PWM14 pin for the 14-bit PWM square wave output. Bit 0 PMR40 0 1 Description The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a P40 I/O pin The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a PWM14 output pin (Initial value) Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14 pin function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 212 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Control Register 4 (PCR4) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR47 0 W 6 PCR46 0 W 5 PCR45 0 W 4 PCR44 0 W 3 PCR43 0 W 2 PCR42 0 W 1 PCR41 0 W 0 PCR40 0 W Port control register 4 (PCR4) controls the I/Os of pins P47 to P40 of port 4 in a unit of bit. When PCR4 is set to 1, the corresponding P47 to P40 pins become output pins, and when it is set to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR4, settings of PCR4 and PDR4 become valid. PCR4 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR4 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR4 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P47 to P40 Pin Switching (PCR47 to PCR40) Bit n PCR4n 0 1 Note: Description The P4n pin functions as an input pin The P4n pin functions as an output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 4 (PDR4) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR47 0 R/W 6 PDR46 0 R/W 5 PDR45 0 R/W 4 PDR44 0 R/W 3 PDR43 0 R/W 2 PDR42 0 R/W 1 PDR41 0 R/W 0 PDR40 0 R/W Port data register 4 (PDR4) stores the data for the pins P47 to P40 of port 4. When PCR4 is 1 (output), the PDR4 values are directly read if port 4 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR4 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 4 is read. PDR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR4 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 213 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.6.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 4 pin functions and their selection methods. P47/RPTRG: P47/RPTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR47 bit in PMR4 and the PMR47 bit in PMR4 and the PCR47 bit in PCR4. PMR47 0 PCR47 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P47 input pin P47 output pin RPTRG input pin P46/FTOB: P46/FTOB is switched as shown below according to the PCR46 bit in PCR4 and the OEB bit in TOCR. OEB 0 PCR46 0 1 1 * Pin Function P46 input pin P46 output pin FTOB output pin Legend: * Don’t care Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTOB pin function. P45/FTOA: P45/FTOA is switched as shown below according to the PCR45 bit in PCR4 and the OEA bit in TOCR. OEA 0 PCR45 0 1 1 * Pin Function P45 input pin P45 output pin FTOA output pin Legend: * Don’t care Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTOA pin function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 214 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P44/FTID: P44/FTID is switched as shown below according to the PCR44 bit in PCR4. PCR44 0 1 Pin Function P44 input pin P44 output pin FTID input pin Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTID pin function. P43/FTIC: P43/FTIC is switched as shown below according to the PCR43 bit in PCR4. PCR43 0 1 Pin Function P43 input pin P43 output pin FTIC input pin Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIC pin function. P42/FTIB: P42/FTIB is switched as shown below according to the PCR42 bit in PCR4. PCR42 0 1 Pin Function P42 input pin P42 output pin FTIB input pin Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIB pin function. P41/FTIA: P41/FTIA is switched as shown below according to the PCR41 bit in PCR4. PCR41 0 1 Pin Function P41 input pin P41 output pin FTIA input pin Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIA pin function. P40/PWM14: P40/PWM14 is switched as shown below according to the PMR40 bit in PMR4 and the PCR40 bit in PCR4. PMR40 0 PCR40 0 1 1 * Pin Function P40 input pin P40 output pin PWM14 input pin Legend: * Don’t care Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14 pin function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 215 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.6.4 Pin States Table 10.16 shows the port 4 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.16 Port 4 Pin States Pins P47/RPTRG P46/FTOB P45/FTOA P44/FTID P43/FTIC P42/FTIB P41/FTIA P40/PWM14 Reset Highimpedance Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Operation Subsleep Holding Note: If the RPTRG input pin is set, the pin level must be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode or low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, the alternative pin need be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 216 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.7 10.7.1 Port 6 Overview Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.17 shows the port 6 configuration. Port 6 is a large current I/O port. The sink current is 20 mA maximum (VOL = 1.7 V) and four pins can be turned on at the same time. Port 6 consists of pins that are used as large current I/O ports (P67 to 60) and realtime output ports (RP7 to RP0). It is switched by port mode register 6 (PMR6), port mode register A (PMRA), and port control register 6 (PCR6). The realtime output function can instantaneously switch the output data by an external or internal trigger port. Table 10.17 Port 6 Configuration Port Port 6 Function P67 (large current I/O port) P66 (large current I/O port) P65 (large current I/O port) P64 (large current I/O port) P63 (large current I/O port) P62 (large current I/O port) P61 (large current I/O port) P60 (large current I/O port) Alternative Function RP7/TMBI (timer B event input) RP6/ADTRG (A/D conversion start external trigger input) RP5 (realtime output port pin) RP4 (realtime output port pin) RP3 (realtime output port pin) RP2 (realtime output port pin) RP1 (realtime output port pin) RP0 (realtime output port pin) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 217 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.7.2 Register Configuration Table 10.18 shows the port 6 register configuration. Table 10.18 Port 6 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 6 Port mode register A Port control register 6 Port data register 6 Realtime output trigger select register 1 Realtime output trigger edge select register Abbrev. PMR6 PMRA PCR6 PDR6 RTPSR1 2 RTPEGR* R/W R/W R/W W R/W R/W R/W ⎯ ⎯ Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'3F H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FC H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFDD H'FFD9 H'FFD6 H'FFC6 H'FFE5 H'FFE4 ⎯ ⎯ Port control register slave 6 PCRS6 Port data register slave 6 PDRS6 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. RTPEGR is also used by port 7. Port Mode Register 6 (PMR6) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR67 0 R/W 6 PMR66 0 R/W 5 PMR65 0 R/W 4 PMR64 0 R/W 3 PMR63 0 R/W 2 PMR62 0 R/W 1 PMR61 0 R/W 0 PMR60 0 R/W Port mode register 6 (PMR6) controls switching of each pin function of port 6. The switching is specified in units of bits. PMR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR6 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 Pin Switching (PMR67 to PMR60): PMR67 to PMR60 set whether the P6n/RPn pin is used as a P6n I/O pin or an RPn pin for the realtime output port. Bit n PMR6n 0 1 Note: Description The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n I/O pin The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 218 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register A (PMRA) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMRA7 0 R/W 6 PMRA6 0 R/W 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Port mode register A (PMRA) switches the pin functions in port 6. Switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMRA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, PMRA is initialized to H'3F. Bit 7⎯P67/RP7/TMBI Pin Switching (PMRA7): PMRA7 can be used as a P6n I/O pin or a TMBI pin for timer B event input. Bit 7 PMRA7 0 1 Description P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a P67/RP7 I/O pin P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a TMBI pin (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Timer B Event Input Edge Switching (PMRA6): PMRA6 selects the TMBI edge sense. Bit 6 PMRA6 0 1 Description Timer B event input detects falling edge Timer B event input detects rising edge Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 219 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Control Register 6 (PCR6) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR67 0 W 6 PCR66 0 W 5 PCR65 0 W 4 PCR64 0 W 3 PCR63 0 W 2 PCR62 0 W 1 PCR61 0 W 0 PCR60 0 W Port control register 6 (PCR6) selects the general I/O of port 6 and controls the realtime output in a unit of bit together with PMR6. When PMR6 = 0, the corresponding P67 to P60 pins become general output pins if PCR6 is set to 1, and they become general input pins if it is set to 0. When PMR6 = 1, PCR6 controls the corresponding RP7 to RP0 realtime output pins. For details, see section 10.7.4, Operation. PCR6 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR6 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR6 is initialized to H'00. PMR6 Bit n PMR6n 0 PCR6 Bit n PCR6n 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Note: n = 7 to 0 Description The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general I/O input pin (Initial value) The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general output pin The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn realtime output pin Port Data Register 6 (PDR6) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR67 0 R/W 6 PDR66 0 R/W 5 PDR65 0 R/W 4 PDR64 0 R/W 3 PDR63 0 R/W 2 PDR62 0 R/W 1 PDR61 0 R/W 0 PDR60 0 R/W Port data register 6 (PDR6) stores the data for the pins P67 to P60 of port 6. For PMR6 = 0, when PCR6 is 1 (output), the PDR6 values are directly read if port 6 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR6 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 6 is read. For PMR6 = 1, port 6 becomes a realtime output pin. For details, see section 10.7.4, Operation. PDR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR6 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 220 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Realtime Output Trigger Select Register (RTPSR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 1 0 2 4 3 7 6 5 RTPSR17 RTPSR16 RTPSR15 RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W The realtime output trigger select register (RTPSR1) sets whether the external trigger (RPTRG pin input) or the internal trigger (HSW) is used as an trigger input for the realtime output in a unit of bit. For the internal trigger HSW, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. RTPSR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPSR1 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯RP7 to RP0 Trigger Switching Bit n RTPSR1n 0 1 Note: Description Selects the external trigger (RPTRG pin input) as a trigger input Selects the internal trigger (HSW) a trigger input n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Real Time Output Trigger Edge Select Register (RTPEGR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 0 RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0 0 R/W 0 R/W The realtime output trigger edge select register (RTPEGR) specifies the edge sense of the external or internal trigger input for the realtime output. RTPEGR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPEGR is initialized to H'FC. Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 221 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bits 1 and 0⎯Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select (RTPEGR1, RTPEGR0): RTPEGR1 and RTPEGR0 select the edge sense of the external or internal trigger input for the realtime output. Bit 1 RTPEGR1 0 Bit 0 RTPEGR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Inhibits a trigger input Selects the rising edge of a trigger input Selects the falling edge of a trigger input Selects both the leading and falling edges of a trigger input (Initial value) 10.7.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 6 pin functions and their selection methods. P67/RP7/TMBI: P67/RP7/TMBI is switched as shown below according to the PMRA7 bit in PMRA, PMR67 bit in PMR6, and PCR67 bit in PCR6. PMRA7 0 PMR67 0 PCR67 0 1 1 0 1 1 * 0 1 TMBI input pin Pin Function P67 input pin P67 output pin RP7 output pin Output Value ⎯ PDR67 12 Hi-Z* * PDRS67* ⎯ 2 Value When PDR6n Was Read P67 pin PDR67 PDR67 P67 pin PDR67 Notes: 1. Hi-Z: High impedance 2. When PMR67 = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR67 setup value has been transferred to PCRS67 by a trigger input. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 222 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P66/RP6/ADTRG: P66/RP6/ADTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR66 bit in PMR6 and PCR66 bit in PCR6. The ADTRG pin function switching is controlled by the ADTSR. For details, refer to section 24, A/D converter. PMR66 0 PCR66 0 1 1 0 1 Pin Function P66 input pin P66 output pin RP6 output pin Output Value ⎯ PDR66 12 Hi-Z* * 2 PDRS66* Value When PDR66 Was Read P66 pin PDR66 PDR66 Notes: 1. Hi-Z: High impedance 2. When PMR66 = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR66 setup value has been transferred to PCRS66 by a trigger input. P65/RP5 to P60/RPD: P65/RP5 to P60/RPD are switched below according to the PMRAn bit in PMRA, PMR6n bit in PMR6, and PCR6n bit in PCR6. PMR6n 0 PCR6n 0 1 1 0 1 Pin Function P6n input pin P6n output pin RPn output pin RPn output pin Output Value ⎯ PDR6n Hi-Z* * 12 2 Value When PDR6n Was Read P6n pin PDR6n PDR6n PDRS6n* Notes: n = 5 to 0 1. Hi-Z: High impedance 2. When PMR6n = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR6n setup value has been transferred to PCRS6n by a trigger input. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 223 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.7.4 Operation Port 6 can be used as a realtime output port or general I/O output port by PMR6. Port 6 functions as a realtime output port when PMR6 = 1 and as a general I/O port when PMR6 = 0. The operation per port 6 function is shown below. (See figure 10.2.) Internal trigger HSW External trigger RPTRG Selection circuit RTPEGR write CK RTPEGR RTPSR write CK RTPSR1 RMR6 write Internal data bus CK PMR6 RDR6 write CK CK PDR6 RDR6 read Selection circuit RCR6 write CK RDRS6 P6/RP CK PCR6 PCRS6 Legend: PMR6 : Port mode register 6 PCR6 : Port control register 6 PDR6 : Port data register 6 PCRS6 : Port control register slave 6 PDRS6 : Port data register slave 6 RTPSR1 : Realtime output trigger select register RTPEGR : Realtime output trigger edge select register HSW : Internal trigger signal RPTRG : External trigger pin Figure 10.2 Port 6 Function Block Diagram Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 224 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port • Operation of the Realtime Output Port (PMR6 = 1) When PMR6 is 1, it operates as a realtime output port. When a trigger is input, the PDR6 data is transferred to PDRS6 and the PCR6 is transferred data to PCRS6, respectively. In this case, when PCRS6 is 1, the PDRS6 data of the corresponding bit is output to the RP pin. When PCRS6 is 0, the RP pin of the corresponding bit is output to the high-impedance state. In other words, the pin output state (high or low) or high-impedance state can instantaneously be switched by a trigger input. Adversely, when PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read regardless of the PCR6 and PCRS6 values. • Operation of the general I/O port (PMR6 = 0) When PMR6 is 0, it operates as a general I/O port. When data is written to PDR6, the same data is also written to PDRS6. Accordingly, because both PDR6 and PDRS6 and both PCR6 and PCRS6 can be handled as one register, respectively, they can be used in the same way as a normal general I/O port. In other words, if PCR6 is 1, the PDR6 data of the corresponding bit is output to the P6 pin. If PCR6 is 0, the P6 pin of the corresponding bit becomes an input. Adversely, assuming that PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read when PCR6 is 1 and the pin values are read when PCR6 is 0. 10.7.5 Pin States Table 10.19 shows the port 6 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.19 Port 6 Pin States Pins P67/RP7/TMBI P66/RP6/ADTRG P65/RP5 to P60/RP0 Reset Highimpedance Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Operation Subsleep Holding Note: If the TMBI and ADTRG input pins are set, the pin level must be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode or low power consumption mode. Note that pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 225 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.8 10.8.1 Port 7 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.20 shows the port 7 configuration. Port 7 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P77 to P70), HSW timing generation circuit (programmable pattern generator: PPG) outputs (PPG7 to PPG0), and realtime output port (RPB to RP8). It is switched by port mode register 7 (PMR7) and port control register 7 (PCR7). For the programmable generator (PPG), see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. Table 10.20 Port 7 Configuration Port Port 7 Function P77 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function PPG7 (HSW timing output) RPB (realtime output port) P76 (standard I/O port) PPG6 (HSW timing output) RPA (realtime output port) P75 (standard I/O port) PPG5 (HSW timing output) RP9 (realtime output port) P74 (standard I/O port) PPG4 (HSW timing output) RP8 (realtime output port) P73 (standard I/O port) P72 (standard I/O port) P71 (standard I/O port) P70 (standard I/O port) PPG3 (HSW timing output) PPG2 (HSW timing output) PPG1 (HSW timing output) PPG0 (HSW timing output) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 226 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.8.2 Register Configuration Table 10.21 shows the port 7 register configuration. Table 10.21 Port 7 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 7 Port mode register B Port control register 7 Port data register 7 Realtime output trigger select register 2 Realtime output trigger edge select register Abbrev. PMR7 PMRB PCR7 PDR7 RTPSR2 RTPEGR R/W R/W R/W W R/W R/W R/W ⎯ ⎯ Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'0F H'00 H'00 H'0F H'FC H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFDE H'FFDA H'FFD7 H'FFC7 H'FFE6 H'FFE4 ⎯ ⎯ Port control register slave 7 PCRS7 Port data register slave 7 Note: * PDRS7 Lower 16 bits of the address. Port Mode Register 7 (PMR7) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR77 0 R/W 6 PMR76 0 R/W 5 PMR75 0 R/W 4 PMR74 0 R/W 3 PMR73 0 R/W 2 PMR72 0 R/W 1 PMR71 0 R/W 0 PMR70 0 R/W Port mode register 7 (PMR7) controls switching of each pin function of port 7. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR7 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 Pin Switching (PMR77 to PMR70): PMR77 to PMR70 set whether the P7n/PPGn pin is used as a P7n I/O pin or a PPGn pin for the HSW timing generation circuit output. Bit n PMR7n 0 1 Note: Description The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a P7n I/O pin The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a PPGn output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 227 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Mode Register B (PMRB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMRB7 0 R/W 6 PMRB6 0 R/W 5 PMRB5 0 R/W 4 PMRB4 0 R/W 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Port mode register B (PMRB) controls switching of each pin function of port 7. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMRB is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMRB is initialized to H'0F. Bits 7 to 4⎯P77/RPB to P74/RP8 Pin Switching (PMRB7 to PMRB4): P77/RPB to P74/RP8 set whether the P7n/RPm pin is used as a P7n I/O pin or a RPm pin for the realtime output port. (n = 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, or 8) Bit n PMRBn 0 1 Note: Description P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n I/O pin P7n/RPm pin functions as a RPm I/O pin n = 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, and 8 (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid. Port Control Register 7 (PCR7) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR77 0 W 6 PCR76 0 W 5 PCR75 0 W 4 PCR74 0 W 3 PCR73 0 W 2 PCR72 0 W 1 PCR71 0 W 0 PCR70 0 W Port control register 7, together with PMRB, enable the general-purpose input/output of port 7 and controls realtime output in bit units. For details, refer to section 10.8.4. Operation. PCR7 is an 8-bit write-only register. When the PCR7 is read, 1 is always read. When reset, PCR7 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 228 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bits 7 to 0⎯P77 to P70 Pin I/O Switching (PCR77 to PCR70) PMRB Bitn PMRBn 0 PCR7 Bitn PCR7n 0 1 1 * Description P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n general input pin P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n general output pin P7n/RPm pin functions as a RPm realtime output pin (Initial Value) Legend: * Don’t care Note: n = 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, and 8 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR77 0 R/W 6 PDR76 0 R/W 5 PDR75 0 R/W 4 PDR74 0 R/W 3 PDR73 0 R/W 2 PDR72 0 R/W 1 PDR71 0 R/W 0 PDR70 0 R/W Port data register 7 (PDR7) stores the data for the pins P77 to P70 of port 7. If PCR7 is 1 (output) when PMRB = 0, the PDR7 values are directly read when port 7 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR7 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 7 is read. When PMRB = 1, port 7 pin functions as a realtime output pin. For details, refer to section 10.8.4, Operation. PDR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR7 is initialized to H'00. Realtime Output Trigger Select Register 2 (RTPSR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 4 7 6 5 RTPSR27 RTPSR26 RTPSR25 RTPSR24 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Realtime output trigger select register (RTPSR2) selects whether to use an external trigger (RPTRG pin input) or internal trigger (HSW) for the realtime output trigger input by specifying a unit of bit. For details on internal trigger HSW, refer to section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. RTPSR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPSR2 is initialized to H'0F. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 229 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bits 7 to 4⎯RPB to RP8 Pin Trigger Switching (RTPSR27 to RTPSR24) Bit7 RTPSR2n 0 1 Note: Description Selects external trigger (RPTRG pin input) for trigger input Selects internal trigger (HSW) for trigger input n = 7 to 4 (Initial value) Realtime Output Trigger Edge Selection Register (RTPEGR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 0 RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0 0 R/W 0 R/W The realtime output trigger edge selection register (RTPEGR) specifies the sensed edge(s) of external or internal trigger input for realtime output. RTPEGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. In a reset, RTPEGR is initialized to H'FC. Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bits 1 and 0⎯Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select (RTPEGR1, RTPEGR0): These bits select the sensed edge(s) of external or internal trigger input for realtime output. Bit 1 RTPEGR1 0 Bit 0 RTPEGR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Disables trigger input Selects trigger input rising edge Selects trigger input falling edge Selects trigger input rising and falling edges (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 230 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.8.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 7 pin functions and their selection methods. P77/PPG7/RPB to P74/PPG4/RP8: P77/PPG7/RPB to P74/PPG4/RP8 are switched as shown below according to the PMRBn bit in PMRB and the PCR7n bit in PCR7. PMRBn 0 PMR7n 0 PCR7n 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 * 0 1 RPm output pin 1 Hi-Z* 1 PDRS7n* Pin Function P7n input pin P7n output pin PPGn output pin Output Value ⎯ PDR7n PPGn Value Returned when PDR7n is Read P7n pin PDR7n P7n pin PDR7n PDR7n Legend: Hi-Z: High impedance * Don’t care Notes: n = 7 to 4, m = B, A, 9, 8 1. When PMRBn = 1 (realtime output pin), the state indicated is that after the PCR7n set value has been transferred to PCRS7n by trigger input. P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0: P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 are switched as shown below according to the PMR7n bit in PMR7 and the PCR7n bit in PCR7. PMR7n 0 PCR7n 0 1 1 Note: 0 1 n = 3 to 0 Pin Function P7n input pin P7n output pin PPGn output pin Output Value ⎯ PDR7n PPGn Value Returned when PDR7n Is Read P7n pin PDR7n P7n pin PDR7n Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 231 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.8.4 Operation Port 7 can be used by the PMRB as a realtime output port or an I/O port. Port 7 functions as a realtime output port when PMRB = 1 and functions as an I/O port when PMRB = 0. Figure 10.3 show the block diagram of port 7. Internal trigger HSW External trigger RPTRG RTPEGR write CK RTPEGR RTPSR2 write CK Select RTPSR2 PMRA write Internal data bus CK PMRB PDR7 write CK CK PDR7 PDR7 read Select PCR7 write CK PDRS7 P7/RP CK PCR7 PCRS7 Legend: PMRB: PCR7: PDR7: PCRS7: PDRS7: Port mode register B Port control register 7 Port data register 7 Port control register slave 7 Port data register slave 7 RTPSR2: RTPEGR: HSW: RPTRG: Realtime output trigger select register Realtime output trigger edge select register Internal trigger signal External trigger pin Figure 10.3 Block Diagram of Port 7 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 232 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port 7 functions as follows: 1. Realtime output port function (PMRB = 1) Port function as a realtime output port when PMRB is 1. After a trigger input, the PDR7 data is transferred to PDRS7 and PCR7 data is transferred to PCRS7. In this case, when PCRS7 is 1, the PDRS7 data of the corresponding bit is output from the RP pin. When PCRS7 is 0, the RP pin of the corresponding bit enters high-impedance state. In other words, the realtime output port function can instantaneously switch the pin output state (High or Low) or high-impedance by a trigger input. 2. I/O port function (PMRB = 0) Port 7 functions as an I/O port when PMRB is 0. After data is written to PDR7, the same data is written to PDRS7. After data is written to PCR7, the same data is written to PCRS7. Since PDR7 and PDRS7, and PCR7 and PCRS7 can be used as one register, the registers can be used as the I/O ports. In other words, if PCR7 is 1, the PDR7 data of the corresponding bit is output from the P7 pin. If PCR is 0, the P7 pin of the corresponding bit is an input pin. If PD7 is read, the PDR7 value is read when PCR7 is 1 and the pin value is read when PCR7 is 0. 10.8.5 Pin States Table 10.22 shows the port 7 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.22 Port 6 Pin States Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep P77/PPG7/RPB HighOperation Holding HighHighOperation Holding to impedance impedance impedance P74/PPG4/RP8 P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 233 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.9 10.9.1 Port 8 Overview Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.23 shows the port 8 configuration. Port 8 consists of pins that are used both as standard-current I/O ports (P87 to P80) and an external CTL signal input (EXCTL), a pre-amplifier output result signal input (COMP), color signal outputs (R, G, and B), a pre-amplifier output selection signal output (H.Amp SW), a control signal output for processing color signal (C.Rotary), a DPG signal input (DPG), a capstan external sync signal input (EXCAP), an OSD character display position output (YB0), an OSD character data output (YC0), and an external reference signal input (EXTTRG). It is switched by port mode register 8 (PMR8), port mode register C (PMRC), and port control register 8 (PCR8). Table 10.23 Port 8 Configuration Port Port 8 Function P87 (standard I/O port) P86 (standard I/O port) P85 (standard I/O port) Alternative Function DPG signal input External reference signal input Pre-amplifier output result signal input Color signal output P84 (standard I/O port) Pre-amplifier output selection signal output Color signal output P83 (standard I/O port) Control signal output for processing color signal Color signal output P82 (standard I/O port) P81 (standard I/O port) External CTL signal input Capstan external sync signal input OSD character display position output P80 (standard I/O port) OSD character data output Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 234 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.9.2 Register Configuration Table 10.24 shows the port 8 register configuration. Table 10.24 Port 8 Register Configuration Name Port mode register 8 Port mode register C Port control register 8 Port data register 8 Note: * Abbrev. PMR8 PMRC PCR8 PDR8 R/W R/W R/W W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'C5 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFDF H'FFE0 H'FFD8 H'FFC8 Lower 16 bits of the address. Port Mode Register 8 (PMR8) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PMR87 0 R/W 6 PMR86 0 R/W 5 PMR85 0 R/W 4 PMR84 0 R/W 3 PMR83 0 R/W 2 PMR82 0 R/W 1 PMR81 0 R/W 0 PMR80 0 R/W Port mode register 8 (PMR8) controls switching of each pin function of port 8. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR8 is initialized to H'00. If the EXCTL, COMP, DPG and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. Bit 7⎯P87/DPG Pin Switching (PMR87): PMR87 sets whether the P87/DPG pin is used as a P87 I/O pin or a DPG signal input pin. Bit 7 PMR87 0 1 Description P87/DPG pin functions as a P87 I/O pin (Drum control signals are input as an overlapped signal) P87/DPG pin functions as a DPG input pin (Drum control signals are input as separate signals) (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 235 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bit 6⎯P86/EXTTRG Pin Switching (PMR86): PMR86 sets whether the P86/EXTTRG pin is used as a P86 I/O pin or an external trigger signal input pin. Bit 6 PMR86 0 1 Description P86/EXTTRG pin functions as a P86 I/O pin P86/EXTTRG pin functions as a EXTTRG input pin (Initial value) Bit 5⎯P85/COMP Pin Switching (PMR85): PMR85 sets whether the P85/COMP pin is used as a P85 I/O pin or a COMP input pin of the preamplifier output result signal. Bit 5 PMR85 0 1 Description P85/COMP pin functions as a P85 I/O pin P85/COMP pin functions as a COMP input pin (Initial value) Bit 4⎯P84/H.Amp SW Pin Switching (PMR84): PMR84 sets whether the P84/H.Amp SW pin is used as a P84 I/O pin or H.Amp SW pin of the preamplifier output select signal output. Bit 4 PMR84 0 1 Description P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as a P84 I/O pin P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as a H.Amp SW output pin (Initial value) Bit 3⎯P83/C. Rotary Pin Switching (PMR83): PMR83 sets whether the P83/C. Rotary pin is used as a P83 I/O pin or a C.Rotary pin of a control signal output for processing color signal. Bit 3 PMR83 0 1 Description P83/C.Rotary pin functions as a P83 I/O pin P83/C.Rotary pin functions as a C.Rotary output pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 236 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bit 2⎯P82/EXCTL Pin Switching (PMR82): PMR82 sets whether the P82/EXCTL pin functions as a P82 I/O pin or a EXCTL input pin of external CTL signal input. Bit 2 PMR82 0 1 Description P82/EXCTL pin functions as a P82 I/O pin P82/EXCTL pin functions as a EXCTL input pin (Initial value) Bit 1⎯P81/EXCAP Pin Switching (PMR81): PMR81 sets whether the P81/EXCAP pin functions as a P81 I/O pin or a EXCAP pin of capstan external synchronous signal input. Bit 1 PMR81 0 1 Description P81/EXCAP pin functions as a P81 I/O pin P81/EXCAP pin functions as a EXCAP input pin (Initial value) Bit 0⎯P80/YCO Pin Switching (PMR80): PMR80 sets whether the P80/YCO pin functions as a P80 I/O pin or a YCO pin of OSD character data output. Bit 0 PMR80 0 1 Description P80/YCO pin functions as a P80 I/O pin P80/YCO pin functions as a YCO output pin (Initial value) Port Mode Register C (PMRC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 PMRC5 0 R/W 4 PMRC4 0 R/W 3 PMRC3 0 R/W 2 — 1 — 1 PMRC1 0 R/W 0 — 1 — Port mode register C (PMRC) controls switching of each pin function of port 8. The switching is specified in a unit of a bit. PMRC is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMRC is initialized to H'C5. Bits 7, 6, 2, and 0⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 237 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Bit 5⎯P85/B Pin Switching (PMRC5): PMRC5 sets whether to use the P85/B pin as a P85 I/O pin or a B pin of the OSD color signal output. Bit 5 PMRC5 0 1 Description P85/B pin functions as a P85 pin P85/B pin functions as a B output pin (Initial value) Bit 4⎯P84/G Pin Switching (PMRC4): PMRC4 sets whether to use the P84/G pin as a P84 I/O pin or a G pin of the OSD color signal output. Bit 4 PMRC4 0 1 Description P84/G pin functions as a P84 I/O pin P84/G pin functions as a G output pin (Initial value) Bit 3⎯P83/R Pin Switching (PMRC3): PMRC3 sets whether to use the P83/R pin as a P83 I/O pin or a R pin of the OSD color signal output. Bit 3 PMRC3 0 1 Description P83/R pin functions as a P83 I/O pin P83/R pin functions as a R output pin (Initial value) Bit 1⎯P81/YBO Pin Switching (PMRC1): PMRC1 sets whether to use the P81/YBO pin as a P81 I/O pin or a YBO pin of the OSD character display position output. Bit7 PMR1 0 1 Description P81/YBO pin functions as a P81 I/O pin P81/YBO pin functions as a YBO output pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 238 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port Port Control Register 8 (PCR8) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PCR87 0 W 6 PCR86 0 W 5 PCR85 0 W 4 PCR84 0 W 3 PCR83 0 W 2 PCR82 0 W 1 PCR81 0 W 0 PCR80 0 W Port control register 8 (PCR8) controls I/O of pins P87 to P80 of port 8. The I/O is specified in a unit of bit. When PCR8 is set to 1, the corresponding P87 to P80 pins become output pins, and when it is set to 0, they become input pins. When the pins are set as general I/O pins, the settings of PCR8 and PDR8 become valid. PCR8 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR8 is read, 1 is read. When reset PCR8 is initialized to H'00. Bits 7 to 0⎯P87 to P80 Pin I/O Switching Bit n PCR8n 0 1 Note: Description P8n pin functions as an input pin P8n pin functions as an output pin n = 7 to 0 (Initial value) Port Data Register 8 (PDR8) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PDR87 0 R/W 6 PDR86 0 R/W 5 PDR85 0 R/W 4 PDR84 0 R/W 3 PDR83 0 R/W 2 PDR82 0 R/W 1 PDR81 0 R/W 0 PDR80 0 R/W Port data register 8 (PDR8) stores the data of pins P87 to P80 port 8. When PCR is 1 (output), the pin states are read is port 8 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR8 is 0 (input), the pin states are read it port 8 is read. PDR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR8 is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 239 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port 10.9.3 Pin Functions This section describes the port 8 pin functions and their selection methods. P87/DPG: P87/DPG is switched as shown below according to the PMR87 bit in PMR8 and PCR87 bit in PCR8. PMR87 0 PCR87 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P87 input pin P87 output pin DPG input pin P86/EXTTRG: P86/EXTTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR86 bit in PMR8 and PCR86 bit in PCR8. PMR86 0 PCR86 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P86 input pin P86 output pin EXTTRG input pin P85/COMP/B: P85/COMP/B is switched as shown below according to the PMR85 bit in PMR8, PMRC5 bit in PMRC, and PCR85 bit in PCR8. PMRC5 0 PMR85 0 PCR85 0 1 * 1 1 0 * * Pin Function P85 input pin P85 output pin COMP input pin B output pin Legend: * Don’t care Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 240 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P84/H.Amp SW/G: P84/H.Amp SW/G is switched as shown below according to the PMR84 bit in PMR8, PMRC4 bit in PMRC, and PCR84 bit in PCR8. PMRC4 0 PMR84 0 PCR84 0 1 * 1 1 0 * * Pin Function P84 input pin P84 output pin H.Amp SW output pin G output pin Legend: * Don’t care P83/C.Rotary/R: P83/C.Rotary/R is switched as shown below according to the PMR83bit in PMR8, PMRC3 bit in PMRC, and PCR83 bit in PCR8. PMRC3 0 PMR83 0 PCR83 0 1 * 1 1 0 * * Pin Function P83 input pin P83 output pin C.Rotary output pin R output pin Legend: * Don’t care P82/EXCTL: P82/EXCTL is switched as shown below according to the PMR82 bit in PMR8 and PCR82 bit in PCR8. PMR82 0 PCR82 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P82 input pin P82 output pin EXCTL input pin Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 241 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 10 I/O Port P81/EXCAP/YBO: P81/EXCAP/YBO is switched as shown below according to the PMR81 bit in PMR8, PMRC1 bit in PMRC, and PCR81 bit in PCR8. PMRC1 0 PMR81 0 PCR81 0 1 * 1 1 0 * * Pin Function P81 input pin P81 output pin EXCAP output pin YBO output pin Legend: * Don’t care P80/YCO: P80/YCO is switched as shown below according to the PMR80 bit in PMR8 and PCR80 bit in PCR PMR80 0 PCR80 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Pin Function P80 input pin P80 output pin YCO output pin 10.9.4 Pin States Table 10.25 shows the port 8 pin states in each operation mode. Table 10.25 Port 8 Pin States Pins P87/DPG P86/EXTTRG P85/COMP/B P84/H.Amp SW/G P83/C.Rotary/R P82/EXCTL P81/EXCAP/YB0 P80/YCO Reset Highimpedance Active Operation Sleep Holding Standby Highimpedance Watch Highimpedance Subactive Subsleep Operation Holding Notes: 1. If the EXCTL, COMP, DPG, and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level. 2. As the DPG always functions, a high or low pin level must be input to the multiplexed pins regardless of whether active mode or power-down mode is in effect. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 242 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 11 Timer A Section 11 Timer A 11.1 Overview Timer A is an 8-bit interval timer. It can be used as a clock timer when connected to a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator. 11.1.1 Features Features of timer A are as follows: • Choices of eight different types of internal clocks (φ/16384, φ/8192, φ/4096, φ/1024, φ/512, φ/256, φ/64 and φ/16) are available for your selection. • Four different overflowing cycles (1 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, and 0.03125 s) are selectable as a clock timer. (When using a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator.) • Requests for interrupt will be output when the counter overflows. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 243 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 11 Timer A 11.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of timer A. φw/128 TCA ÷128* ÷256* Overflowing of the interval timer φ/16384, φ/8192, φ/4096, φ/1024, φ/512, φ/256, φ/64, φ/16 System φ clock Prescaler S (PSS) Prescaler unit ÷8* ÷64* Interrupting circuit Interrupt requests Legend: TMA : Timer mode register A TCA : Timer counter A Note: * Selectable only when the prescaler W output (φw/128) is working as the input clock to the TCA. Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer A 11.1.3 Register Configuration Table 11.1 shows the register configuration of timer A. Table 11.1 Register Configuration Name Timer mode register A Timer counter A Note: * Abbrev. TMA TCA R/W R/W R Size Byte Byte Initial Value H'30 H'00 Address* H'FFBA H'FFBB Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 244 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal data bus 32-kHz φw Crystal oscillator 1/4 Prescaler W (PSW) TMA Section 11 Timer A 11.2 11.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Mode Register A (TMA) Bit : 7 TMAOV 6 TMAIE 0 R/W 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 TMA3 0 R/W 2 TMA2 0 R/W 1 TMA1 0 R/W 0 TMA0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The timer mode register A (TMA) works to control the interrupts of timer A and to select the input clock. TMA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMA will be initialized to H'30. Bit 7⎯Timer A Overflow Flag (TMAOV): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the TCA is overflowing (H'FF → H'00). Bit 7 TMAOV 0 Description [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written to the TMAOV flag after reading the TMAOV flag under the status where TMAOV = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the TCA overflows Bit 6⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer A (TMAIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) when the TCA overflows and when the TMAOV of the TMA is set to 1. Bit 6 TMAIE 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) Permits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 245 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 11 Timer A Bit 3⎯Selection of the Clock Source and Prescaler (TMA3): This bit works to select the PSS or PSW as the clock source for the Timer A. Bit 3 TMA3 0 1 Description Selects the PSS as the clock source for the Timer A Selects the PSW as the clock source for the Timer A (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (TMA2 to TMA0): These bits work to select the clock to input to the TCA. In combination with the TMA3 bit, the choices are as follows: Bit 3 TMA3 0 Bit 2 TMA2 0 Bit 1 TMA1 0 Bit 0 TMA0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Note: φ = f osc 0 1 Prescaler Division Ratio (Interval Timer) or Overflow Cycle (Time Base) PSS, φ/16384 (Initial value) PSS, φ/8192 PSS, φ/4096 PSS, φ/1024 PSS, φ/512 PSS, φ/256 PSS, φ/64 PSS, φ/16 1s 0.5 s 0.25 s 0.03125 s Works to clear the PSW and TCA to H'00 Clock time base mode Operation Mode Interval timer mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 246 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 11 Timer A 11.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA) Bit : 7 TCA7 6 TCA6 0 R 5 TCA5 0 R 4 TCA4 0 R 3 TCA3 0 R 2 TCA2 0 R 1 TCA1 0 R 0 TCA0 0 R Initial value : R/W : 0 R The timer counter A (TCA) is an 8-bit up-counter that counts up on inputs from the internal clock. The inputting clock can be selected by TMA3 to TMA0 bits of the TMA When the TCA overflows, the TMAOV bit of the TMA is set to 1. The TCA can be cleared by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the TMA to 11. The TCA is always readable. When reset, the TCA will be initialized into H'00. 11.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode. When the MSTP15 bit is set to 1, the Timer A stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR will be initialized into H'FFFF. Bit 7⎯Module Stop (MSTP15): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer A. MSTPCRH Bit 7 MSTP15 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer A Sets the module stop mode of the Timer A (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 247 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 11 Timer A 11.3 Operation Timer A is an 8-bit interval timer. It can be used as a clock timer when connected to a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator. 11.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is cleared to 0, timer A works as an 8-bit interval timer. After reset, the TCA is cleared to H'00 and as the TMA3 bit is cleared to 0, the Timer A continues counting up as the interval counter without interrupts right after resetting. As the operation clock for timer A, selection can be made from eight different types of internal clocks being output from the PSS by the TMA2 to TMA0 bits of the TMA. When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCA reaches H'FF, timer A overflows and the TMAOV bit of the TMA will be set to 1. An interrupt occurs when the TMAIE bit of the TMA is 1. When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCA returns to H'00 before resuming counting up. Consequently, it works as the interval timer to produce overflow outputs periodically at every 256 input clocks. 11.3.2 Operation as Clock Timer When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is set to 1, timer A works as a time base for the clock. As the overflow cycles for timer A, selection can be made from four different types by counting the clock being output from the PSW by the TMA1 bit and TMA0 bit of the TMA. 11.3.3 Initializing the Counts When the TMA3 and TMA2 bits are set to 11, the PSW and TCA will be cleared to H'00 to come to a stop. At this state, writing 10 to the TMA3 bit and TMA2 bit makes timer A start counting from H'00 in the time base mode for clocks. After clearing the PSW and TCA using the TMA3 and TMA2 bits, writing 00 or 01 to the TMA3 bit and TMA2 bit to make timer A start counting from H'00 in the interval timer mode. However, the period to the first count is not constant, since the PSS is not cleared. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 248 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B Section 12 Timer B 12.1 Overview Timer B is an 8-bit up-counter. Timer B is equipped with two different types of functions namely, the interval function and the auto reloading function. 12.1.1 Features • Seven different types of internal clocks (φ/16384, φ/4096, φ/1024, φ/512, φ/128, φ/32, and φ/8) or an of external clock can be selected. • When the counter overflows, a interrupt request will be issued. 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of timer B. TMB Clock sources φ/16384 φ/1024 φ/512 φ/128 φ/32 φ/8 Re-loading TCB Overflowing TMBI TLB Interrupting circuit Legend: TMB TCB TLB TMBI : Timer mode register B : Timer counter B : Timer re-loading register B : Event input terminal of the Timer B Timer B Interrupt requests Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Timer B Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 249 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal data bus φ/4096 Section 12 Timer B 12.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 12.1 shows the pin configuration of timer B. Table 12.1 Pin Configuration Name Event inputs to timer B Abbrev. TMBI I/O Input Function Event input pin for inputs to the TCB 12.1.4 Register Configuration Table 12.2 shows the register configuration of timer B. The TCB and TLB are being allocated to the same address. Reading or writing determines the accessing register. Table 12.2 Register Configuration Name Timer mode register B Timer counter B Timer load register B Port mode register A Note: * Abbrev. TMB TCB TLB PMRA R/W R/W R W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'18 H'00 H'00 H'3F Address* H'D110 H'D111 H'D111 H'FFD9 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 250 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B 12.2 12.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Mode Register B (TMB) Bit : 7 TMB17 6 TMBIF 0 R/(W)* 5 TMBIE 0 R/W 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 TMB12 0 R/W 1 TMB11 0 R/W 0 TMB10 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The TMB is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the interrupts, to select the auto reloading function and to select the input clock. When reset, the TMB is initialized to H'18. Bit 7⎯Selecting the Auto Reloading Function (TMB17): This bit works to select the auto reloading function of the Timer B. Bit 7 TMB17 0 1 Description Selects the interval function Selects the auto reloading function (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Interrupt Requesting Flag for the Timer B (TMBIF): This is an interrupt requesting flag for the Timer B. It indicates the fact that the TCB is overflowing. Bit 6 TMBIF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When the TCB overflows (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 251 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B Bit 5⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer B (TMBIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of interrupt of timer B when the TCB overflows and when the TMBIF is set to 1. Bit 5 TMBIE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt of timer B Permits interrupt of timer B (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (TMB12 to TMB10): These bits work to select the clock to input to the TCB. Selection of the rising edge or the falling edge is workable with the external event inputs. Bit 2 TMB12 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Note: * Bit 1 TMB11 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 TMB10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Descriptions Internal clock: Counts at φ/16384 Internal clock: Counts at φ/4096 Internal clock: Counts at φ/1024 Internal clock: Counts at φ/512 Internal clock: Counts at φ/128 Internal clock: Counts at φ/32 Internal clock: Counts at φ/8 Counts at the rising edge and the falling edge of external event inputs (TMBI)* (Initial value) The edge selection for the external event inputs is made by setting the PMRA6 of the port mode register A (PMRA). See section 12.2.4, Port Mode Register A (PMRA). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 252 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B 12.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB) Bit : 7 TCB17 6 TCB16 0 R 5 TCB15 0 R 4 TCB14 0 R 3 TCB13 0 R 2 TCB12 0 R 1 TCB11 0 R 0 TCB10 0 R Initial value : R/W : 0 R The TCB is an 8-bit readable register which works to count up by the internal clock inputs and external event inputs. The input clock can be selected by the TMB12 to TMB10 of the TMB. When the TCB overflows (H'FF → H'00 or H'FF → TLB setting), a interrupt request of the Timer B will be issued. When reset, the TCB is initialized to H'00. 12.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB) Bit : 7 TLB17 Initial value : R/W : 0 W 6 TLB16 0 W 5 TLB15 0 W 4 TLB14 0 W 3 TLB13 0 W 2 TLB12 0 W 1 TLB11 0 W 0 TLB10 0 W The TLB is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading value of the TCB. When the reloading value is set to the TLB, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCB and the TCB starts counting up from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation, when the TCB overflows, the value of the TLB will be loaded to the TCB. Consequently, the overflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. When reset, the TLB is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 253 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B 12.2.4 Port Mode Register A (PMRA) Bit : 7 PMRA7 6 PMRA6 0 R/W 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The port mode register A (PMRA) works to changeover the pin functions of the port 6 and to designate the edge sense of the event inputs of timer B (TMBI). The PMRA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the PMRA will be initialized to H'3F. See section 10.7, Port 6 for other information than bit 6. Bit 6⎯Selecting the Edges of the Event Inputs to the Timer B (PMRA6): This bit works to select the input edge sense of the TMBI pins. Bit 6 PMRA6 0 1 Description Detects the falling edge of the event inputs to the Timer B Detects the rising edge of the event inputs to the Timer B (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 254 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B 12.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode. When the MSTP14 bit is set to 1, the Timer B stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module stop mode. When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF. Bit 6⎯Module Stop (MSTP14): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer B. MSTPCRH Bit 6 MSTP14 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer B Sets the module stop mode of the Timer B (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 255 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 12 Timer B 12.3 12.3.1 Operation Operation as the Interval Timer When the TMB17 bit of the TMB is set to 0, timer B works as an 8-bit interval timer. When reset, since the TCB is cleared to H'00 and as the TMB17 bit is cleared to 0, timer B continues counting up as the interval timer without interrupts right after resetting. As the clock source for timer B, selection can be made from seven different types of internal clocks being output from the prescaler unit by the TMB12 to TMB10 bits of the TMB or an external clock through the TMBI input pin can be chosen instead. When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, timer B overflows and the TMBIF bit of the TMB will be set to 1. At this time, when the TMBIE bit of the TMB is 1, interrupt occurs. When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCB returns to H'00 before resuming counting up. When a value is set to the TLB while the interval timer is in operation, the value which has been set to the TLB will be loaded to the TCB simultaneously. 12.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer When the TMB17 of the TMB is set to 1, the Timer B works as an 8-bit auto reload timer. When a reload value is set in the TLB, the value is loaded onto the TCB at the same time, and the TCB starts counting up from the value. When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, timer B overflows and the TLB value is loaded onto the TCB, then the TCB continues counting up from the loaded value. Accordingly, overflow interval can be set within the range of 1 to 256 clocks depending on the TLB value. Clock source and interrupts in the auto reload operation are the same as those in the interval operation. When the TLB value is re-set while the auto reload timer is in operation, the value which has been set to the TLB will be loaded onto the TCB simultaneously. 12.3.3 Event Counter Timer B works as an event counter using the TMBI pin as the event input pin. When the TMB12 to TMB10 are set to 111, the external event will be selected as the clock source and the TCB counts up at the leading edge or the trailing edge of the TMBI pin inputs. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 256 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Section 13 Timer J 13.1 Overview Timer J consists of twin counters. It carries different operation modes such as reloading and event counting. 13.1.1 Features Timer J consists of an 8-bit reloading timer and an 8-bit/16-bit selectable reloading timer. It has various functions as listed below. The two timers can be used separately, or they can be connected together to operate as a single timer. • Reloading timers • Event counters • Remote-controlled transmissions • Takeup/Supply reel pulse division 13.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 13.1 is a block diagram of timer J. Timer J consists of two reload timers namely, TMJ-1 and TMJ-2. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 257 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 TMJ-1 Interrupting circuit TMJ-2 Interrupting circuit φ/4096 φ/8192 BUZZ Output Control BUZZ Toggle TMO Interrupt request by the TMJ1I Interrupt request by the TMJ2I Section 13 Timer J PB/REC-CTL DVCTL TCA7 Monitor Output Control TMJ-1 TMJ-2 Toggle TGL TCJ Downcounter (8-bit) Under flow Down-counter (8/16-bit) TCK Underflow REMOout Clock sources IRQ2 φ/2048 φ/64 φ/128 φ/16384 φ/1024 TMO Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 258 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Reloading Reloading register TLJ Edge detection Clock sources IRQ1 φ/4 φ/256 φ/512 Reloading * T/R ST Synchronization PS11,10 Reloading register (Burst/space width register TLK Internal data bus Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer J PS22, 21,20 EXN 8/16 Note: * At the Low level under the timer mode. BUZZ TMO : Buzzer output : TMJ-1 timer output PS11,10 : TMJ-1 input clock selection PS22, 21,20 : TMJ-2 input clock selection ST 8/16 T/R EXN : Starting the remote controlled operation : 8-bit/16-bit operation changeover : Timer output/Remote controller output changeover : Expansion function switching Legend: TCJ : Timer counter J TLJ : Timer load register J TCK : Timer counter K TLK : Timer load register K REMOout : TMJ-2 toggle output (Remote controller transmission data) TGL : TMJ-2 toggle flag Section 13 Timer J 13.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 13.1 shows the pin configuration of timer J. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration Name Event input pin Event input pin Abbrev. IRQ1 IRQ2 I/O Input Input Function Event inputs to the TMJ-1 Event inputs to the TMJ-2 13.1.4 Register Configuration Table 13.2 shows the register configuration of timer J. The TCJ and TLJ or the TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address respectively. Reading or writing determines the accessing register. Table 13.2 Register Configuration Name Timer mode register J Timer J control register Timer J status register Timer counter J Timer counter K Timer load register J Timer load register K Abbrev. TMJ TMJC TMJS TCJ TCK TLJ TLK R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R W W 1 Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'09 H'3F H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF 2 Address* H'D13A H'D13B H'D13C H'D139 H'D138 H'D139 H'D138 Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. 2. Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 259 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2 13.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Mode Register J (TMJ) Bit : 7 PS11 6 PS10 0 R/W 5 ST 0 R/W 4 8/16 0 R/W 3 PS21 0 R/W 2 PS20 0 R/W 1 TGL 0 R 0 T/R 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The timer mode register J (TMJ) works to select the inputting clock for the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 and to set the operation mode. The TMJ is an 8-bit register and bit 1 is for read only. All the remaining bits are applicable to read/write. When reset, the TMJ is initialized to H'00. Under all other modes than the remote controlling mode, writing into the TMJ works to initialize the counters (TCJ and TCK) to H'FF. Bits 7 and 6⎯Selecting the Inputting Clock to the TMJ-1 (PS11, PS10): These bits work to select the clock to input to the TMJ-1. When the external clock is selected, the counted edge (rising or falling) can also be selected. Bit 7 PS11 0 Bit 6 PS10 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * Description Counting by the PSS, φ/512 Counting by the PSS, φ/256 Counting by the PSS, φ/4 Counting at the rising edge or the falling edge of the external clock inputs (IRQ1)* (Initial value) The edge selection for the external clock inputs is made by setting the IRQ edge select register (IEGR). See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register (IEGR) for more information. When using an external clock under the remote controlling mode, set the opposite edge with the IRQ1 and the IRQ2 when using an external clock under the remote controlling mode. (When IRQ1 falling, select IRQ2 rising and when IRQ1 rising, select IRQ2 falling) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 260 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Bit 5⎯Starting the Remote Controlled Operation (ST): This bit works to start the remote controlled operations. When this bit is set to 1, clock signal is supplied to the TMJ-1 to start signal transmissions. When this bit is cleared to 0, clock supply stops to discontinue the operation. The ST bit will be valid under the remote controlling mode, namely, when bit 0 (T/R bit) is 1 and bit 4 (8/16 bit) is 0. Under other modes than the remote controlling mode, it will be fixed to 0. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made during remote controlled operation, the ST bit will be cleared to 0. When resuming operation after returning to the active mode, write 1. Bit 5 ST 0 1 Description Works to stop clock signal supply to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode (Initial value) Works to supply clock signal to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode Bit 4⎯Switching Over Between 8-bit/16-bit Operations (8/16): This bit works to choose if using timer J as two units of 8-bit timer/counter or if using it as a single unit of 16-bit timer/counter. Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from the TMJ-1 will be valid. Bit 4 8/16 0 1 Description Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate separately (Initial value) Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate altogether as 16-bit timer/counter Bits 3 and 2⎯Selecting the Inputting Clock for the TMJ-2 (PS21, PS20): These bits, together with the PS22 bit in the timer J control register (TMJC), work to select the clock for the TMJ-2. When the external clock is selected, the counted edge (rising or falling) can also be selected. For details, refer to section 13.2.2, Timer J Control Register (TMJC). Bit 1⎯TMJ-2 Toggle Flag (TGL): This flag indicates the toggled status of the underflowing with the TMJ-2. Reading only is workable. It will be cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode. Bit 1 TGL 0 1 Description The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 0 The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 1 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 261 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Bit 0⎯Switching Over Between Timer Output/Remote Controlling Output (T/R): This bit works to select if using the timer outputs from the TMJ-1 as the output signal through the TMO pin or if using the toggle outputs (remote controlled transmission data) from the TMJ-2 as the output signal through the TMO pin. Bit 0 T/R 0 1 Description Timer outputs from the TMJ-1 Toggle outputs from the TMJ-2 (remote controlled transmission data) (Initial value) Selecting the Operation Mode The operating mode of timer J is determined by bit 3 (EXN) of the timer J control register (TMJC) and bits 4 (8/16) and 0 (T/R) of the timer mode register J (TMJ). TMJC Bit 3 EXN 0 Bit 4 8/16 0 TMJ Bit 0 T/R 0 1 1 1 0 * 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Description 8-bit timer + 16-bit timer Remote-controlling mode (TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit timer) 24-bit timer Two 8-bit timers (Initial value) Remote-controlling mode (TMJ-2 works as an 8-bit timer) 16-bit timer Writing to the TMJ in timer mode initializes the counters (TCJ and TCK) (H'FF). Consequently, write to the reloading registers (TLJ an TLK) after finishing settings with the TMJ. Under the remote controlling mode, although the TLJ and the TLK will not be initialized even when writing is made into the TMJ, follow the sequence listed below when starting a remote controlling operation: 1. Make setting to the remote controlling mode with the TMJ. 2. Write the data into the TLJ and TLK. 3. Start the remote controlled operation by use of the TMJ. (ST bit = 1). Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from the TMJ-1 will be valid. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 262 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC) Bit : 7 BUZZ1 6 BUZZ0 0 R/W 5 MON1 0 R/W 4 MON0 0 R/W 3 EXN 1 R/W 2 TMJ2IE 0 R/W 1 TMJ1IE 0 R/W 0 PS22 1 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The timer J control register (TMJC) works to select the buzzer output frequency and to control permission/prohibition of interrupts. The TMJC is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMJC is initialized to H'09. Bits 7 and 6⎯Selecting the Buzzer Output (BUZZ1, BUZZ0): These bits work to select if using the buzzer outputs as the output signal through the BUZZ pin or if using the monitor signals as the output signal through the BUZZ pin. When setting is made to the monitor signals, choose the monitor signal using the MON1 bit and MON0 bit. Bit 7 BUZZ1 0 Bit 6 BUZZ0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φ/4096 φ/8192 Works to output monitor signals Works to output BUZZ signals from timer J (Initial value) Frequency when φ = 10 MHz 2.44 kHz 1.22 kHz Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 263 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Bits 5 and 4⎯Selecting the Monitor Signals (MON1, MON0): These bits work to select the type of signals being output through the BUZZ pin for monitoring purpose. These settings are valid only when the BUZZ1 and BUZZ0 bits are being set to 10. When PB-CTL or REC-CTL is chosen, signal duties will be output as they are. In case of DVCTL signals, signals from the CTL dividing circuit will be toggled before being output. Signal waveforms divided by the CTL dividing circuit into n-divisions will further be divided into halves. (Namely, 2n divisions, 50% duty waveform). In case of TCA7, Bit 7 of the counter of the Timer A will be output. (50% duty) When prescaler W is being used with the Timer A, 1 Hz outputs are available. Bit 5 MON1 0 Bit 4 MON0 0 1 1 * Legend: * Don’t care Description PB or REC-CTL DVCTL Outputs TCA7 (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Expansion Function Control Bit (EXN): This bit enables or disables the expansion function of TMJ-2. When the expansion function is enabled, TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit counter, and further input clock sources and types can be selected. Bit 3 EXN 0 1 Description Enables the TMJ-2 expansion function Disables the TMJ-2 expansion function (Initial value Bit 2⎯Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ2I (TMJ2IE): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the TMJ2I. Bit 2 TMJ2IE 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt Permits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 264 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Bit 1⎯Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ1I (TMJ1IE): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the TMJ1I. Bit 1 TMJ1IE 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt Permits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt (Initial value) Bit 0⎯TMJ-2 Input Clock Selection (PS22): This bit, together with the PS21 and PS20 bits of the timer mode register J (TMJ), selects the TMJ-2 input clock source. TMJC Bit 3 EXN 0 Bit 0 PS22 1 Bit 3 PS21 0 TMJ Bit 2 PS20 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 * 0 * 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description PSS; count at φ/128 PSS; count at φ/64 Count at TMJ-1 underflow External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge* Reserved PSS; count at φ/16384 PSS; count at φ/2048 Count at TMJ-1 underflow External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge* PSS; count at φ/1024 PSS; count at φ/1024 Count at TMJ-1 underflow 1 External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge* 1 1 (Initial value) Legend: * Don’t care Note: 1. The external clock edge can be selected by the IRQ edge select register (IEGR). For details, refer to section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 265 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS) Bit : 7 TMJ2I 6 TMJ1I 0 R/(W)* 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The timer J status register (TMJS) works to indicate issuance of the interrupt request of timer J. The TMJS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMJS is initialized to H'3F. Bit 7⎯TMJ2I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ2I): This is the TMJ2I interrupt requesting flag. This flag is set out when the TMJ-2 underflows. Bit 7 TMJ2I 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When the TMJ-2 underflows (Initial value) Bit 6⎯TMJ1I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ1I): This is the TMJ1I interrupt requesting flag. This flag is set out when the TMJ-1 underflows. TMJ1I interrupt requests will also be made under a 16-bit operation. Bit 6 TMJ1I 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When the TMJ-1 underflows (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 266 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ) Bit : 7 TDR17 6 TDR16 1 R 5 TDR15 1 R 4 TDR14 1 R 3 TDR13 1 R 2 TDR12 1 R 1 TDR11 1 R 0 TDR10 1 R Initial value : R/W : 1 R The timer counter J (TCJ) is an 8-bit readable down-counter which works to count down by the internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by the PS11 and PS10 bits of the TMJ. TCJ values can be readout always. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), reading is possible under the word command only. At this time, the TCK of the TMJ-2 can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ can be read by the lower 8 bits. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TCJ can be read only in byte units. When the TCJ underflows (H'00 → Reloading value), regardless of the operation mode setting of the 8/16 bit, the TMJ1I bit of the TMJS will be set to 1 bit. The TCJ and TLJ are being allocated to the same address. When reset, the TCJ is initialized to H'FF. 13.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK) Bit : 7 TDR27 Initial value : R/W : 1 R 6 TDR26 1 R 5 TDR25 1 R 4 TDR24 1 R 3 TDR23 1 R 2 TDR22 1 R 1 TDR21 1 R 0 TDR20 1 R The timer counter K (TCK) is an 8-bit or a 16-bit readable down-counter which works to count down by the internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by the EXN and PS22 bits of the TMJC, and the PS21 and PS20 bits of the TMJ. TCK values can be readout always. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), reading is possible under the word command only. At this time, the TCK can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ of the TMJ-1 can be read by the lower 8 bits. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TCK works as a 16-bit counter and can be read only in word units. When the TCK underflows (H'00 → Reloading value), the TMJ2I bit of the TMJS will be set to 1. The TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address. When reset, the TCK is initialized to H'FF. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 267 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ) Bit : 7 TLR17 6 TLR16 1 W 5 TLR15 1 W 4 TLR14 1 W 3 TLR13 1 W 2 TLR12 1 W 1 TLR11 1 W 0 TLR10 1 W Initial value : R/W : 1 W The timer load register J (TLJ) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading value of the TCJ. When the reloading value is set to the TLJ, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCJ and the TCJ starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation, when the TCJ underflows, the value of the TLJ will be loaded to the TCJ. Consequently, the underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), writing is possible under the word command only. At this time, the upper 8 bits can be written into the TLK of the TMJ-2 and the lower 8 bits can be written into the TLJ. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TLJ can be written to only in byte units; an 8-bit reload value is written to TLJ. The TLJ and TCJ are being allocated to the same address. When reset, the TLJ is initialized to H'FF. 13.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK) Bit : 7 TLR27 Initial value : R/W : 1 W 6 TLR26 1 W 5 TLR25 1 W 4 TLR24 1 W 3 TLR23 1 W 2 TLR22 1 W 1 TLR21 1 W 0 TLR20 1 W The timer load register K (TLK) is an 8-bit or a 16-bit write only register which works to set the reloading value of the TCK. When the reloading value is set to the TLK, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCK and the TCK starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation, when the TCK underflows, the value of the TLK will be loaded to the TCK. Consequently, the underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), writing is possible under the word command only. At this time, the upper 8 bits can be written into the TLK and the lower 8 bits can be written into the TLJ of the TMJ-1. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TLK can be written to only in word units; a 16-bit reload value is written to TLK. The TLK and TCK are being allocated to the same address. When reset, the TLK is initialized to H'FF. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 268 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode. When the MSTP13 bit is set to 1, timer J stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF. Bit 5⎯Module Stop (MSTP13): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer J. MSTPCRH Bit 5 MSTP13 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of timer J Sets the module stop mode of timer J (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 269 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.3 13.3.1 Operation 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1) The TMJ-1 is an 8-bit reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock or edge signals through the IRQ1 pin are being used. By selecting the edge signals through the IRQ1 pin, it can also be used as an event counter. While it is working as an event counter, its reloading function is workable simultaneously. When data are written into the reloading register, these data will be written into the counters (event counter, timer counter) simultaneously. Also, when the event counter underflows, the event counter value is reset to the reload register value, and a TMJ1I interrupt request occurs. Every time the counter underflows, the output level toggles. This output can be used as a buzzer or the carrier frequency at remote-controlled transmission by selecting an appropriate divided clock. The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit or a 24-bit reload timer. Nonetheless, when they are being used, in combination, as a 16-bit timer, word command only is valid and the TCK works as the down counter for the upper 8 bits and the TCJ works as the down counter for the lower 8 bits, means a reloading register of total 16 bits. When data are written into a 16-bit reloading register, the same data will be written into the 16-bit down counter. Also, when the 16-bit down counter underflow signals, the data of the 16-bit reloading register will be reloaded into the down counter. When the EXN bit of TMJC is set to 0, the expansion function of TMJ-2 is enabled, that is, TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit reloading timer, and it can be connected to TMJ-1 to be a 24-bit reloading timer. In this case, TCK works as the upper 16-bit part and TCJ works as the lower 8-bit part of a 24-bit down counter, and TLK works as the upper 16-bit part and TLJ works as the lower 8-bit part of a 24-bit reloading register. Even when they are making a 16-bit or a 24-bit operation, the TMJ1I interrupt requests of the TMJ-1 and BUZZER outputs are effective. In case these functions are not necessary, make them invalid by programming. The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used for remote controlled data transmission. Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 13.3.3, Remote Controlled Data Transmission. 13.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2) The TMJ-2 is an 8-bit or a 16-bit down-counting reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock, edge signals through the IRQ2 pin or the underflow signals from the TMJ-1 are being used. By selecting the edge signals through the IRQ2 pin, it can also be used as an event counter. While it is working as an event counter, its reloading function is workable simultaneously. When data are written into the reloading register, these data will be written into the counter simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, reloading will be made to the data counter of Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 270 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J the reloading register. When the counter underflows, TMJ2I interrupt requests will be issued. The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit or a 24-bit reload timer. For more information on the 16-bit or 24-bit reload timer, see section 13.3.1, 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1). The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be operated by remote controlled data transmission. Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 13.3.3, Remote Controlled Data Transmission. 13.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission The Timer J is capable of making remote controlled data transmission. The carrier frequencies for the remote controlled data transmission can be generated by the TMJ-1 and the burst width duration and the space width duration can be setup by the TMJ-2. The data having been written into the reloading register TMJ-1 and into the burst/space duration register (TLK) of the TMJ-2 will be loaded to the counter at the same time as the remote controlled data transmission starts. (Remote controlled data transmission starting bit (ST) ← 1) While remote controlled data transmission is being made, the contents of the burst/space duration register will be loaded to the counter only while reloading is being made by underflow signals. Even when a writing is made to the burst/space duration register while remote controlled data transmission is being made, reloading operation will not be made until an underflow signal is issued. The TMJ-2 issues TMJ2I interrupt requests by the underflow signals. The TMJ-1 performs normal reloading operation (including the TMJ1I interrupt requests). Figure 13.2 shows the output waveform for the remote controlled data transmission function. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is effected while remote controlled data transmission is being made, the ST bit will be cleared to 0. When resuming the remote controlled data transmission after returning to the active mode, write 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 271 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J TMJ-1 can generate the carrier frequencies Remote controlled data transmission outputs Burst width TMJ-2 toggle output =1 Setting the remote controlled mode Setting the burst width ST bit ← 1 Setting the space width Underflow Space width TMJ-2 toggle output =0 Setting the burst width Burst width TMJ-2 toggle output = 1 Setting the space width Underflow Underflow Figure 13.2 Remote Controlled Data Transmission Output Waveform Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 272 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Figure 13.3 Timer Output Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 273 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Remote controlled data transmission output REMOout TMO (BUZZ) TMJ-1 TMJ-2 TMO UDF UDF Section 13 Timer J When the Timer J is set to the remote controlled operation mode, since the start bit (ST) is being set or cleared in synchronization with the inputting clock to the TMJ-2, a delay upto a cycle of the inputting clock at the maximum occurs, namely, after the ST bit has been set to 1 until the remote controlled data transmission starts. Consequently, when the TLK is updated during the period after setting the ST bit to 1 until the next cycle of the inputting clock comes, the initial burst width will be changed as shown in figure 13.4. Therefore, when making remote controlled data transmission, determine 1/0 of the TGL bit at the time of the first burst width control operation without fail. (Or, set the space width to the TLK after waiting for a cycle of the inputting clock.) After that, operations can be continued by interrupts. Similarly, pay attention to the control works when ending remote controlled data transmission. Example: 1) Set the burst width with the TLK. 2) ST bit ← 1. 3) Execute the procedure 4) if the TGL flag = 1. 4) Set the space width with the TLK under the status where the TGL flag = 1. 5) Make TMJ-2 interrupt. 6) Set the burst width with the TLK. : n) After making TMJ-2 interrupt, make setting of the ST ← 0 under the status where the TGL flag = 0. Inputting clock to the TMJ-2 Interrupt Interrupt TGL flag Burst width according to (B) Space width according to (S) ST ← 0 Delay ST ← 1 TLK setting (Burst width) (B) Remote controlled data transmission starts here. Delay The period during which the space width settig can be made. (S) If an updating is made with the TLK during this period, the burst width will be changed. Stopping the remote controlled data transmission Figure 13.4 Controls of the Remote Controlled Data Transmission Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 274 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J 13.3.4 TMJ-2 Expansion Function The TMJ-2 expansion function is enabled by setting the EXN bit in the timer J control register (TMJC) to 0. This function makes TMJ-2, which usually works as an 8-bit counter, work as a 16bit counter. When this function is selected, timer counter K (TCK) and timer load register K (TLK) must be accessed as follows: TCK Read: To read TCK, use the word-length MOV instruction. In this case, the upper 8 bits of TCK are read out to the lower byte of the on-chip data bus, and the lower 8 bits are read out to the upper byte of the on-chip data bus. That is, when MOV.W @TCK, Rn is executed, the lower 8 bits of TCK are stored in RnH and the upper 8 bits are stored in RnL. TLK Write: To write to TLK, use the word-length MOV instruction. In this case, the upper 8 bits are written to the lower byte of TLK, and the lower 8 bits are written to the upper byte of TLK. That is, when MOV.W Rn, @TLK is executed, the RnH data is written to the lower byte of TLK, and the RnL data is written to the upper byte of TLK. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 275 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 13 Timer J Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 276 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L Section 14 Timer L 14.1 Overview Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter using the control pulses or the CFG division signals as the clock source. 14.1.1 Features Features of timer L are as follows: • Two types of internal clocks (φ/128 and φ/64), DVCFG2 (CFG division signal 2), PB and REC-CTL (control pulses) are available for your selection. ⎯ When the PB-CTL is not available, such as when reproducing un-recorded tapes, tape count can be made by the DVCFG2. ⎯ Selection of the rising edge or the falling edge is workable with the CTL pulse counting. • Interrupts occur when the counter overflows or underflows and at occurrences of compare match clear. • Capable to switch over between the up-counting and down-counting functions with the counter. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 277 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of timer L. Internal clock φ/128 φ/64 LMR Read DVCFG2 PB and REC-CTL LTC OVF/UDF Reloading Match clear Comparator Interrupting circuit RCR Legend: DVCFG2 : Division signal 2 of the CFG PB and REC-CTL : Control pluses necessary when making reproduction and storage LMR : Timer L mode register LTC : Linear time counter RCR : Reload/compare match register OVF : Overflow UDF : Underflow Interrupt request Write Internal data bus Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Timer L Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 278 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.1.3 Register Configuration Table 14.1 shows the register configuration of timer L. The linear time counter (LTC) and the reload compare patch register (RCR) are being allocated to the same address. Reading or writing determines the accessing register. Table 14.1 Register Configuration Name Timer L mode register Linear time counter Reload/compare match register Note: * Abbrev. LMR LTC RCR R/W R/W R W Size Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'30 H'00 H'00 Address* H'D112 H'D113 H'D113 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 279 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.2 14.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer L Mode Register (LMR) Bit : 7 LMIF 6 LMIE 0 R/W 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 LMR3 0 R/W 2 LMR2 0 R/W 1 LMR1 0 R/W 0 LMR0 0 R/W Initial value : 0 R/W : R /(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The timer L mode register A (LMR) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the interrupts, to select between up-counting and down-counting and to select the clock source. When reset, the LMR is initialized to H'30. Bit 7⎯Timer L Interrupt Requesting Flag (LMIF): This is the Timer L interrupt requesting flag. It indicates occurrence of overflow or underflow of the LTC or occurrence of compare match clear. Bit 7 LMIF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When the LTC overflows, underflows or when compare match clear has occurred (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer L (LMIE): When the LTC overflows, underflows or when compare match clear has occurred, then LMIF is set to 1, this bit works to permit/prohibit the occurrence of an interrupt of timer L. Bit 6 LMIE 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of Timer L Permits occurrence of interrupt of Timer L (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3⎯Up-Count/Down-Count Control (LMR3): This bit is for selection if timer L is to be controlled to the up-counting function or down-counting function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 280 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 1. When Controlled to the Up-Counting Function ⎯ When any other values than H'00 are input to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00 before starting counting up. When the LTC value and the RCR value match, the LTC will be cleared to H'00. Also, interrupt requests will be issued by the match signal. (Compare match clear function) ⎯ When H'00 is set to the RCR, the counter makes 8-bit interval timer operation to issue a interrupt request when overflowing occurs. (Interval timer function) 2. When Controlled to the Down-Counting Function ⎯ When a value is set to the RCR, the set value is reloaded to the LTC and counting down starts from that value. When the LTC underflows, the value of the RCR will be reloaded to the LTC. Also, when the LTC underflows, a interrupt request will be issued. (Auto reload timer function) Bit 3 LMR3 0 1 Description Controlling to the up-counting function Controlling to the down-counting function (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (LMR2 to LMR0): The bits LMR2 to LMR0 work to select the clock to input to timer L. Selection of the leading edge or the trailing edge is workable for counting by the PB and the REC-CTL. Bit 2 LMR2 0 Bit 1 LMR1 0 Bit 0 LMR0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Legend: * Don't care. * * * Description Counts at the rising edge of the PB and REC-CTL (Initial value) Counts at the falling edge of the PB and REC-CTL Counts the DVCFG2 Counts at φ/128 of the internal clock Counts at φ/64 of the internal clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 281 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC) Bit : 7 LTC7 6 LTC6 0 R 5 LTC5 0 R 4 LTC4 0 R 3 LTC3 0 R 2 LTC2 0 R 1 LTC1 0 R 0 LTC0 0 R Initial value : R/W : 0 R The linear time counter (LTC) is a readable 8-bit up/down-counter. The inputting clock can be selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR. When reset, the LTC is initialized to H'00. 14.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR) Bit : 7 RCR7 Initial value : R/W : 0 W 6 RCR6 0 W 5 RCR5 0 W 4 RCR4 0 W 3 RCR3 0 W 2 RCR2 0 W 1 RCR1 0 W 0 RCR0 0 W The reload/compare match register (RCR) is an 8-bit write only register. When timer L is being controlled to the up-counting function, when a compare match value is set to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared at the same time and the LTC will then start counting up from the initial value (H'00). While, when the Timer L is being controlled to the down-counting function, when a reloading value is set to the RCR, the same value will be loaded to the LTC at the same time and the LTC will then start counting up from said value. Also, when the LTC underflows, the value of the RCR will be reloaded to the LTC. When reset, the RCR is initialized to H'00. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 282 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode. When the MSTP12 bit is set to 1, timer L stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF. Bit 4⎯Module Stop (MSTP12): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for timer L. MSTPCRH Bit 4 MSTP12 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of timer L Sets the module stop mode of timer L (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 283 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.3 Operation Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter. The inputting clock for Timer L can be selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR from the choices of the internal clock (φ/128 and φ/64), DVCDG2, PB and REC-CTL. Timer L is provided with three different types of operation modes, namely, the compare match clear mode when controlled to the up-counting function, the auto reloading mode when controlled to the down-counting function and the interval timer mode. Respective operation modes and operation methods will be explained below. 14.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation When the LMR3 bit of the LMR is cleared to 0, timer L will be controlled to the up-counting function. When any other values than H'00 are written into the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00 simultaneously before starting counting up. Figure 14.2 shows RCR writing and LTC clearing timing. When the LTC value and the RCR value match (compare match), the LTC readings will be cleared to H'00 to resume counting from H'00. Figure 14.3 indicated on the next page shows the compare match clear timing. 1 state φ Write signal RCR LTC N H' 00 Figure 14.2 RCR Writing and LTC Clearing Timing Chart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 284 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L φ PB-CTL Count-up signal Compare match clear signal RCR N LTC Interrupt request N-1 N H' 00 Figure 14.3 Compare Match Clearing Timing Chart (In case the rising edge of the PB-CTL is selected) 14.3.2 Auto-Reload Operation When 1 is written in bit LMR3 of LMR, LTC enters down-counting control mode. When a reload value is written in RCR, LTC is reloaded with the same value and starts counting down from that value. Figure 14.4 shows the timing of the writing and reloading of RCR. At underflow, LTC is reloaded with the RCR value. Figure 14.5 shows the reload timing. 1 state φ Write signal RCR LTC N N Figure 14.4 Timing of Writing and Reloading of RCR Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 285 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L φ PB-CTL Count-down signal Reload underflow RCR LTC Interrupt request H'01 N H'00 N Figure 14.5 Reload Timing (Rising Edge of PB-CTL Selected) 14.3.3 Interval Timer Operation When bit LMR3 is cleared to 0 in LMR, the timer L enters up-counting control mode. If H'00 is written in RCR, compare-match operations are not carried out. The counter functions as an interval timer (up-counter). 14.3.4 Interrupt Request The timer L generates an interrupt request when any of the following occurs: • Compare-match clear under up-counting control • Underflow under down-counting control • Overflow or underflow when the reload/compare-match register (RCR) value is H'00 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 286 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L 14.4 Typical Usage Figure 14.6 shows a typical usage of the timer L. H'FF Value written in RCR H'00 * * * Underflow (reload) LTC = RCR Underflow Compare match clear (reload) Value other than H'00 written in RCR under Down-counting control up-counting control (1 written in bit LMR3) (Record, playback, fast-forward, etc.) (Rewind, reverse, etc.) Note: * A downward-pointing arrow indicates an interrupt request. Figure 14.6 Typical Usage of Linear Time Counter 14.5 Reload Timer Interrupt Request Signal The timer counters with reload registers generate an underflow or overflow in the last cycle before being decremented or incremented. The underflow or overflow generates a reload signal and an interrupt request signal. If the value in the reload register is rewritten at the same time as the underflow or overflow (at the reload timing), an interrupt request is generated and the counter is reloaded at the same time. When rewriting the reload value in order to avoid an interrupt, leave an ample timing margin around the write to the reload register. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 287 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 14 Timer L Figure 14.7 shows a sample timing diagram of contention between an underflow and the rewriting of the reload register. 1 Bus cycle φ Write Reload register H'zz H'nn Counter H'01 H'00 H'nn Reload: disabled by write H'nn-1 UDF IRR Legend: Write: Reload register rewrite signal Reload: Reload signal Counter underflow UDF: Interrupt request signal IRR: Figure 14.7 Contention between Reload Timer Underflow and Rewriting of Reload Register Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 288 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Section 15 Timer R 15.1 Overview Timer R consists of triple 8-bit down-counters. It carries VCR mode identification function and slow tracking function in addition to the reloading function and event counter function. 15.1.1 Features The Timer R consists of triple 8-bit reloading timers. By combining the functions of three units of reloading timers/counters and by combining three units of timers, it can be used for the following applications: • Applications making use of the functions of three units of reloading timers. • For identification of the VCR mode. • For reel controls. • For acceleration and braking of the capstan motor when being applied to intermittent movements. • Slow tracking mono-multi applications. 15.1.2 Block Diagram Timer R consists of three units of reload timer counters, namely, two units of reload timer counters equipped with capturing function (TMRU-1 and TMRU-2) and a unit of reload timer counter (TMRU-3). Figure 15.1 is a block diagram of timer R. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 289 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus TMRL1 TMRL2 Reloading register (8 bits) Acceleration Acceleration/ braking Section 15 Timer R RLD AC/BR Reloading Available/ not available CPS PS11,10 Clock selection (2 bits) RLD/ CAP Reloading register (8 bits) RLCK Reloading clock selection TMRI2 Interrupt request braking Clock sources φ /4 φ /256 φ /512 R Down-counter (8 bits) TMRU-1 *2 TMRCP1 Under flow Clock source φ /64 φ /128 φ /256 Under flow Down-counter (8 bits) TMRU-2 Capture register (8 bits) Q S CFG mask F/F Interrupting circuit CAPF Res Res CP/ SLM Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 290 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 TMRI1 Interrupt request Underflow TMRCP2 Capture register (8 bits) *1 RQ S LAT Latch clock selection PS21,20 Clock selection (2 bits) Resetting Available/ Not available CFG↑ External signals IRQ3 TMRU-3 Down-counter (8 bits) TMRL3 Reloading register (8 bits) Clock sources φ /1024 φ /2048 φ /4096 TMRI3 Interrupt request Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of Timer R SLW CLR2 DVCTL Clock selection (2 bits) PS31,30 Internal bus Notes: 1. When the DVCTL is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made when the counter underflows and when the dividing clock is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made by the DVCTL. 2. When the LAT bit = 0, the capture signal against the TMRU-1 will not be output. Section 15 Timer R 15.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 15.1 shows the pin configuration of timer R. Table 15.1 Pin Configuration Name Input capture inputting pin Abbrev. IRQ3 I/O Input Function Input capture inputting for the Timer R 15.1.4 Register Configuration Table 15.2 shows the register configuration of timer R. Table 15.2 Register Configuration Name Timer R mode register 1 Timer R mode register 2 Timer R control/status register Timer R capture register 1 Timer R capture register 2 Timer R load register 1 Timer R load register 2 Timer R load register 3 Abbrev. TMRM1 TMRM2 TMRCS TMRCP1 TMRCP2 TMRL1 TMRL2 TMRL3 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R W W W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'03 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF Address H'D118 H'D119 H'D11F H'D11A H'D11B H'D11C H'D11D H'D11E Note: Memories of respective registers will be preserved even under the low power consumption mode. Nonetheless, the CAPF flag and SLW flag of the TMRM2 will be cleared to 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 291 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.2 15.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1) Bit : 7 CLR2 6 AC/BR 0 R/W 5 RLD 0 R/W 4 RLCK 0 R/W 3 PS21 0 R/W 2 PS20 0 R/W 1 RLD/CAP 0 R/W 0 CPS 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) works to control the acceleration and braking processes and to select the inputting clock for the TMRU-2. This is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMRM1 is initialized to H'00. Bit 7⎯Selecting Clearing/Not Clearing of TMRU-2 (CLR2): This bit is used for selecting if the TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared or not as it is captured. Bit 7 CLR2 0 1 Description TMRU-2 counter reading is not to be cleared as soon as it is captured. (Initial value) TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared as soon as it is captured Bit 6⎯Acceleration/Braking Processing (AC/BR): This bit works to control occurrences of interrupt requests to detect completion of acceleration or braking while the capstan motor is making intermittent revolutions. For more information, see section 15.3.6, Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor. Bit 6 AC/BR 0 1 Description Braking Acceleration (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 292 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Bit 5⎯Using/Not Using the TMRU-2 for Reloading (RLD): This bit is used for selecting if the TMRU-2 reload function is to be turned on or not. Bit 5 RLD 0 1 Description Not using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer Using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Reloading Timing for the TMRU-2 (RLCK): This bit works to select if the TMRU-2 is reloading by the CFG or by underflowing of the TMRU-2 counter. This choice is valid only when the bit 5 (RLD) is being set to 1. Bit 4 RLCK 0 1 Description Reloading at the rising edge of the CFG Reloading by underflowing of the TMRU-2 (Initial value) Bits 3 and 2⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-2 (PS21, PS20): These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-2. Bit 3 PS21 0 Bit 2 PS20 0 1 1 0 1 Description Counting by underflowing of the TMRU-1 Counting by the PSS, φ/256 Counting by the PSS, φ/128 Counting by the PSS, φ/64 (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Operation Mode of the TMRU-1 (RLD/CAP): This bit works to select if the operation mode of the TMRU-1 is reload timer mode or capture timer mode. Under the capture timer mode, reloading operation will not be made. Also, the counter reading will be cleared as soon as capture has been made. Bit 1 RLD/CAP 0 1 Description The TMRU-1 works as the reloading timer The TMRU-1 works as the capture timer (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 293 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Bit 0⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-1 (CPS): In combination with the LAT bit (Bit 7) of the TMRM2, this bit works to select the capture signals of the TMRU-1. This bit becomes valid when the LAT bit is being set to 1. It will also become valid when the RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set to 1. Nonetheless, it will be invalid when the RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set to 0. Bit 0 CPS 0 1 Description Capture signals at the rising edge of the CFG Capture signals at the edge of the IRQ3 (Initial value) 15.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2) Bit : 7 LAT 6 PS11 0 R/W 5 PS10 0 R/W 4 PS31 0 R/W 3 PS30 0 R/W 2 CP/SLM 0 R/W 1 CAPF 0 R/(W)* 0 SLW 0 R/(W)* Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to identify the operation mode and to control the slow tracking processing. When reset, the TMRM2 is initialized to H'00. Note: * The CAPF bit and the SLW bit, respectively, works to latch the interrupt causes and writing 0 only is valid. Consequently, when these bits are being set to 1, respective interrupt requests will not be issued. Therefore, it is necessary to check these bits during the course of the interrupt processing routine to have them cleared. Also, priority is given to the set and, when an interrupt cause occur while the a clearing command (BCLR, MOV, etc.) is being executed, the CAPF bit and the SLW bit will not be cleared respectively and it thus becomes necessary to pay attention to the clearing timing. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 294 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Bit 7⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-2 (LAT): In combination with the CPS bit (Bit 0) of the TMRM1, this bit works to select the capture signals of the TMRU-2. TMRM2 Bit 7 LAT 0 1 TMRM1 Bit 0 CPS * 0 1 Legend: * Don't care. Description Captures when the TMRU-3 underflows Captures at the rising edge of the CFG Captures at the edge of the IRQ3 (Initial value) Bits 6 and 5⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-1 (PS11, PS10): These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-1. Bit 6 PS11 0 Bit 5 PS10 0 1 1 0 1 Description Counting at the rising edge of the CFG Counting by the PSS, φ/4 Counting by the PSS, φ/256 Counting by the PSS, φ/512 (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-3 (PS31, PS30): These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-3. Bit 4 PS31 0 Bit 3 PS30 0 1 1 0 1 Description Counting at the rising edge of the DVCTL from the dividing circuit. (Initial value) Counting by the PSS, φ/4096 Counting by the PSS, φ/2048 Counting by the PSS, φ/1024 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 295 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Bit 2⎯Interrupt Causes (CP/SLM): This bit works to select the interrupt causes for the TMRI3. Bit 2 CP/SLM 0 1 Description Makes interrupt requests upon the capture signals of the TMRU-2 valid (Initial value) Makes interrupt requests upon ending of the slow tracking mono-multi valid Bit 1⎯Capture Signal Flag (CAPF): This is a flag being set out by the capture signal of the TMRU-2. Although both reading/writing are possible, 0 only is valid for writing. Also, priority is being given to the set and, when the capture signal and writing 0 occur simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the interrupt request will not be issued and it is necessary to be attentive about this fact. When the CP/SLM bit (bit 2) is being set to 1, this CAPF bit should always be set to 0. The CAPF flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode. Bit 1 CAPF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] At occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals while the CP/SLM bit is set to 0 (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Slow Tracking Mono-multi Flag (SLW): This is a flag being set out when the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends. Although both reading/writing are possible, 0 only is valid for writing. Also, priority is being given to the set and, when ending of the slow tracking mono-multi processing and writing 0 occur simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the interrupt request will not be issued and it is necessary to be attentive about this fact. When the CP/SLM bit (bit 2) is being set to 0, this SLW bit should always be set to 0. The SLW flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode. Bit 0 SLW 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends while the CP/SLM bit is set to 1 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 296 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS) Bit : 7 TMRI3E 6 TMRI2E 0 R/W 5 TMRI1E 0 R/W 4 TMRI3 0 R/(W)* 3 TMRI2 0 R/(W)* 2 TMRI1 0 R/(W)* 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The timer R control/status register (TMRCS) works to control the interrupts of timer R. The TMRCS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'03. Bit 7⎯Enabling the TMRI3 Interrupt (TMRI3E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI3 interrupt when an interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2 has occurred, such as occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals or when the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends, and the TMRI3 has been set to 1. Bit 7 TMRI3E 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts Permits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Enabling the TMRI2 Interrupt (TMRI2E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI2 interrupt when the TMRI2 has been set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of the TMRU-2 or by ending of the slow tracking mono-multi processing. Bit 6 TMRI2E 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts Permits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Enabling the TMRI1 Interrupt (TMRI1E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI1 interrupt when the TMRI1 has been set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of the TMRU-1. Bit 5 TMRI1E 0 1 Description Prohibits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts Permits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 297 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 (Initial value) Section 15 Timer R Bit 4⎯TMRI3 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI3): This is the TMRI3 interrupt requesting flag. It indicates occurrence of an interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2, such as occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals or ending of the slow tracking mono-multi processing. Bit 4 TMRI3 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] At occurrence of the interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2 (Initial value) Bit 3⎯TMRI2 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI2): This is the TMRI2 interrupt requesting flag. It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration/braking processing of the capstan motor. Bit 3 TMRI2 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] At occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration /braking processing of the capstan motor (Initial value) Bit 2⎯TMRI1 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI1): This is the TMRI1 interrupt requesting flag. It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-1 underflow signals. Bit 2 TMRI1 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1. [Setting condition] When the TMRU-1 underflows. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 298 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Bits 1 and 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 15.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMRC17 TMRC16 TMRC15 TMRC14 TMRC13 TMRC12 TMRC11 TMRC10 Initial value : R/W : 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R The timer R capture register 1 (TMRCP1) works to store the captured data of the TMRU-1. During the course of the capturing operation, the TMRU-1 counter readings are captured by the TMRCP1 at the CFG edge or the IRQ3 edge. The capturing operation of the TMRU-1 is performed using 16 bits, in combination with the capturing operation of the TMRU-2. The TMRCP1 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'FF. Notes: 1. When the TMRCP1 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out. 2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made while the capturing operating is in progress, the counter reading becomes unstable. After returning to the active mode, always write H'FF into the TMRL1 to initialize the counter. 15.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMRC27 TMRC26 TMRC25 TMRC24 TMRC23 TMRC22 TMRC21 TMRC20 Initial value : R/W : 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R The timer R capture register 2 (TMRCP2) works to store the capture data of the TMRU-2. At each CFG edge, IRQ3 edge, or at occurrence of underflow of the TMRU-3, the TMRU-2 counter readings are captured by the TMRCP2. The TMRCP2 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS will be initialized into H'FF. Notes: 1. When the TMRCP2 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out. 2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made, the counter reading becomes unstable. After returning to the active mode, always write H'FF into the TMRL2 to initialize the counter. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 299 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1) Bit : 7 TMR17 6 TMR16 1 W 5 TMR15 1 W 4 TMR14 1 W 3 TMR13 1 W 2 TMR12 1 W 1 TMR11 1 W 0 TMR10 1 W Initial value : R/W : 1 W The timer R load register 1 (TMRL1) is an 8-bit write-only register which works to set the load value of the TMRU-1. When a load value is set to the TMRL1, the same value will be set to the TMRU-1 counter simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter underflows during the course of the reload timer operation, the TMRL1 value will be set to the counter. When reset, the TMRL1 is initialized to H'FF. 15.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2) Bit : 7 TMR27 Initial value : R/W : 1 W 6 TMR26 1 W 5 TMR25 1 W 4 TMR24 1 W 3 TMR23 1 W 2 TMR22 1 W 1 TMR21 1 W 0 TMR20 1 W The timer R load register 2 (TMRL2) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load value of the TMRU-2. When a load value is set to the TMRL2, the same value will be set to the TMRU-2 counter simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter underflows or a CFG edge is detected during the course of the reload timer operation, the TMRL2 value will be set to the counter. When reset, the TMRL2 is initialized to H'FF. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 300 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3) Bit : 7 TMR37 6 TMR36 1 W 5 TMR35 1 W 4 TMR34 1 W 3 TMR33 1 W 2 TMR32 1 W 1 TMR31 1 W 0 TMR30 1 W Initial value : R/W : 1 W The timer R load register 3 (TMRL3) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load value of the TMRU-3. When a load value is set to the TMRL3, the same value will be set to the TMRU-3 counter simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter underflows or a DVCTL edge is detected, the TMRL2 value will be set to the counter. (Reloading will be made by the underflowing signals when the DVCTL signal is selected as the clock source, and reloading will be made by the DVCTL signals when the dividing clock is selected as the clock source.) When reset, the TMRL3 is initialized to H'FF. 15.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode. When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, timer R stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF. Bit 3⎯Module Stop (MSTP11): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer R. MSTPCRH Bit 3 MSTP11 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of timer R Sets the module stop mode of timer R (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 301 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.3 15.3.1 Operation Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1 TMRU-1 is a reload timer counter equipped with capturing function. It consists of an 8-bit downcounter, a reloading register and a capture register. The clock source can be selected from among the leading edge of the CFG signals and three types of dividing clocks. It is also selectable whether using it as a reload counter or as a capture counter. Even when the capturing function is selected, the counter readings can be updated by writing the values into the reloading register. When the counter underflows, the TMRI1 interrupt request will be issued. The initial values of the TMRU-1 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF. • Operation of the Reload Timer When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the counter simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, the reloading register value will be reloaded to the counter. The TMRU-1 is a dividing circuit for the CFG. In combination with the TMRU-2 and TMRU-3, it can also be used for the mode identification purpose. • Capturing Operation Capturing operation is carried out in combination with the TMRU-2 using the combined 16 bits. It can be so programmed that the counter may be cleared by the capture signal. The CFG edges or IRQ3 edges are used as the capture signals. It is possible to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request by the capture signal. In addition to the capturing function being worked out in combination with the TMRU-2, the TMRU-1 can be used as a 16-bit CFG counter. Selecting the IRQ3 as the capture signal, the CFG within the duration of the reel pulse being input into the IRQ3 pin can be counted by the TMRU-1. 15.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2 TMRU-2 is a reload timer counter equipped with capturing function. It consists of an 8-bit downcounter, a reloading register and a capture register. The clock source can be selected from among the undedrflowing signal of the TMRU-1 and three types of dividing clocks. Also, although the reloading function is workable during its capturing operation, equipping or not of the reloading function is selectable. Even when without-reloadingfunction is chosen, the counter reading can be updated by writing the values to the reloading register. When the counter underflows, the TMRI2 interrupt request will be issued. The initial values of the TMRU-2 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 302 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R • Operation of the Reload Timer When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the counter, simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows or when a CFG edge is detected, the reloading register value will be reloaded to the counter. The TMRU-2 can make acceleration and braking work for the capstan motor using the reload timer operation. • Capturing Operation Using the capture signals, the counter reading can be latched into the capturing register. As the capture signal, you can choose from among edges of the CFG, edges of the IRQ3 or the underflow signals of the TMRU-3. It is possible to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request by the capture signal. The capturing function (stopping the reloading function) of the TMRU-2, in combination with the TMRU-1 and TMRU-3, can also be used for the mode identification purpose. 15.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3 The reload counter timer TMRU-3 consists of an 8-bit down-counter and a reloading register. Its clock source can be selected from between the undedrflowing signal of the counter and the edges of the DVCTL signals. (When the DVCTL signal is selected as the clock source, reloading will be effected by the underflowing signals and when the dividing clock is selected as the clock source, reloading will be effected by the DVCTL signals.) The reloading signal works to reload the reloading register value into the counter. Also, when a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the counter, simultaneously. The initial values of the counter and the reloading register are H'FF. The underflowing signals can be used as the capturing signal for the TMRU-2. The TMRU-3 can also be used as a dividing circuit for the DVCTL. Also, in combination with the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2 (capturing function), the TMRU-3 can be used for the mode identification purpose. Since the divided signals of the DVCTL are being used as the clock source, CTL signals (DVCTL) conforming to the double speed can be input when making searches. These DVCTL signals can also be used for phase controls of the capstan motor. Also, by selecting the dividing clock as the clock source, it is possible to make a delay with the edges of the DVCTL to provide the slow tracking mono-multi function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 303 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.3.4 Mode Identification When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of timer R should be used. Timer R will become to the aforementioned status after a reset. Under the aforementioned status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-1 and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-3. When the TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such capturing register value represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle. As aforementioned, the Timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to n times of DVCTL's or to identify the mode being searched. For register settings, see section 15.5.1, Mode Identification. 15.3.5 Reeling Controls CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2. Choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal and counting the CFG within the duration of the reel pulse being input through the IRQ3 pin affect reeling controls. For register settings, see section 15.5.2, Reeling Controls. 15.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan motor. The acceleration and braking processes functions to check if the revolution of a capstan motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the TMRU-2 (reloading function) should be used. When making accelerations: • Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to acceleration (set to 1). Also, use the rising edge of the CFG as the reloading signal. • Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to determine if the acceleration has been finished, into the reloading register. • The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data. • In case the acceleration has not been finished (in case the CFG signal is not input even when the prescribed time has elapsed = underflowing of down-counting has occurred), such underflowing works to set to CFG mask F/F (masking movement) and the reload timer will be cleared by the CFG. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 304 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R • When the acceleration has been finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed time has elapsed = reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows), an interrupt request will be issued because of the CFG. When making breaking: • Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to braking (clear to 0). Also, use the rising edge of the CFG as the reloading signal. • Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to determine if the braking has been finished, into the reloading register. • The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data. • If the braking has not finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed time has elapsed and reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows), the reload timer movement will continue. • When the acceleration has finished (when the CFG signal is not input even when the prescribed time has elapsed and underflowing of down-counting has occurred), interrupt request will be issued because of the underflowing signal. The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions, in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function outlined in section 15.3.7, Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function. For register settings, see section 15.5.4, Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor. 15.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi function works to measure the time from the rising edge of the DVCTL signal down to the desired point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used to activate the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time measurements for the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be made using the TMRU-2. Figure 15.2 shows the time series movements when a slow reproduction is being performed. For register settings, see section 15.5.3, Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 305 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Compensation for vertical vibrations (Supplementary V-pulse) HSW FG acceleration detection Accelerating the capstan motor Acceleration process Hi-Z DVCTL↑ Interrupt Slow tracking mono-multi Slow tracking delay Reverse rotation Forward rotation Reloading FG stopping detection Braking the capstan motor Braking process Braking the drum motor Servo Compensation for horizontal vibrations Compensation for horizontal vibrations Frame feeds H.AmpSW C.Rotary In case of 4-head SP mode. In case of 2-head application, H.AmpSW and C.Rotary should be "Low". Legend: Hi-Z : High impedance state Figure 15.2 Time Series Movements when a Slow Reproduction Is Being Performed Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 306 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.4 Interrupt Cause In timer R, bits TMRI1 to TMRI3 of the timer R control/status register cause interrupts. The following are descriptions of the interrupts. 1. Interrupts caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-1 (TMRI1) These interrupts will constitute the timing for reloading with the TMRU-1. 2. Interrupts caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-2 or by an end of the acceleration or braking process (TMRI2) When interrupts occur at the reload timing of the TMRU-2, clear the AC/BR (acceleration/braking) bit of the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) to 0. 3. Interrupts caused by the capture signals of the TMRU-2 and by ending the slow tracking mono-multi process (TMRI3) Since these two interrupt causes are constituting the OR, it becomes necessary to determine which interrupt cause is occurring using the software. Respective interrupt causes are being set to the CAPF flag or the SLW flag of the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2), have the software determine which. Since the CAPF flag and the SLW flag will not be cleared automatically, program the software to clear them. (Writing 0 only is valid for these flags.) Unless these flags are cleared, detection of the next cause becomes unworkable. Also, if the CP/SLM bit is changed leaving these flags uncleared as they are, these flags will get cleared. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 307 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.5 15.5.1 Settings for Respective Functions Mode Identification When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of the timer R should be used. Timer R will be initialized to this mode identification status after a reset. Under this status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-1 and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-3. When the TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such capturing register value represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle. Thus, timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to n times of DVCTL's or to identify the mode being searched. Settings • Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) ⎯ CLR2 bit (bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture. ⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 0: Sets the TMRU-2 without reloading function. ⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2. ⎯ RLD/CAP bit (bit 1) = 0: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the reload timer operation. • Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) ⎯ LAT bit (bit 7) = 0: The underflowing signals of the TMRU-3 are to be used as the capture signal for the TMRU-2. ⎯ PS11 and PS10 (bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the CFG signal is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-1. ⎯ PS31 and PS30 (bits 4 and 3) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the DVCTL signal is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-3. ⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request. • Setting the timer R load register 1 (TMRL1) ⎯ Set the dividing value for the CFG. The set value should become (n −1) when divided by n. • Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3) ⎯ Set the dividing value for the DVCTL. The set value should become (n −1) when divided by n. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 308 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.5.2 Reeling Controls CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2. By choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal, and by counting the CFG within the duration of the reel pulse being input through the IRQ3 pin, reeling controls, etc. can be effected. Settings • Setting P13/IRQ3 pin as the IRQ3 pin ⎯ Set the PMR13 bit (bit 3) of the port mode register 1 (PMR1) to 1. See section 6.2.6, Port Mode Register (PMR1). • Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) ⎯ CLR2 bit (bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture. ⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2. ⎯ RLD/CAP bit (bit 1) = 1: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the capturing operation. ⎯ CPS bit (bit 0) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2. • Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) ⎯ LAT bit (bit 7) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2. ⎯ PS11 and PS10 (bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The rising edge of the CFG signal is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-1. ⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 309 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi function works to measure the time from the leading edge of the DVCTL signal down to the desired point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used to activate the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time measurements for the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be made using the TMRU-2. Settings • Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) ⎯ PS31 and PS30 (bits 4 and 3) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-3. ⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 1: The slow tracking delay signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request. • Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3) ⎯ Set the slow tracking delay value. When the delay count is n, the set value should be (n – 1). ⎯ Regarding the delaying duration, see figure 15.2. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 310 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R 15.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan motor. The acceleration and braking processes will function to check if the revolution of a capstan motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the TMRU-2 (reloading function) should be used. The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions, in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function. Settings for the acceleration process • Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) ⎯ AC/BR bit (bit 6) = 1: Acceleration process ⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer. ⎯ RLCK bit (bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG. ⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2. • Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2) ⎯ Set the count reading for the duration until the acceleration process finishes. When the count is n, the set value should be (n − 1). ⎯ Regarding the duration until the acceleration process finishes, see figure 15.2. Settings for the braking process • Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) ⎯ AC/BR bit (bit 6) = 0: Braking process ⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer. ⎯ RLCK bit (bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG. ⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2. • Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2) ⎯ Set the count reading for the duration until the braking process finishes. When the count is n, the set value should be (n – 1). ⎯ Regarding the duration until the braking process finishes, see figure 15.2. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 311 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 15 Timer R Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 312 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Section 16 Timer X1 Note: The Timer X1 is not (incorporated in) provided for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. 16.1 Overview Timer X1 is capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms using a 16-bit free running counter (FRC) as the basic means and it is also applicable to measurements of the durations of input pulses and the cycles external clocks. 16.1.1 Features Timer X1 has the following features: • Four different types of counter inputting clocks. Three different types of internal clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and φ/64) and the DVCFG. • Two independent output comparing functions Capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms. • Four independent input capturing functions The rising edge or falling edge can be selected for use. The buffer operation can also be designated. • Counter clearing designation is workable. The counter readings can be cleared by compare match A. • Seven types of interrupt causes Comparing match × 2 causes, input capture × 4 causes and overflow × 1 cause are available for use and they can make respective interrupt requests independently. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 313 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer X1. FTIA* (HSW) FTIB* (VD) FTIC* (DVCTL) FTID* (NHSW) ICRA Input capture control ICRB ICRC ICRD TCRX OCRB Comparison circuit FRC (DVCFG) φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 Output comparing output FTOA FTOB Comparison circuit OCRA TOCR TCSRX TIER Interrupt request × 7 : Timer interrupt enabling register : Timer control/status register X : Free running counter : Output comparing register A : Output comparing register B : Timer control register X TOCR ICRA ICRB ICRC ICRD : Output comparing control register : Input capture register A : Input capture register B : Input capture register C : Input capture register D Legend: TIER TCSRX FRC OCRA OCRB TCRX Note: * stands for the external terminal. ( ) stands for the internal signal. Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of Timer X1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 314 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal data bus Section 16 Timer X1 16.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 16.1 shows the pin configuration of timer X1. Table 16.1 Pin Configuration Name Output comparing A output-pin Output comparing B output-pin Input capture A input-pin Input capture B input-pin Input capture C input-pin Input capture D input-pin Abbrev. FTOA FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID I/O Output Output Input Input Input Input Function Output pin for the output comparing A Output pin for the output comparing B Input-pin for the input capture A Input-pin for the input capture B Input-pin for the input capture C Input-pin for the input capture D Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 315 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.1.4 Register Configuration Table 16.2 shows the register configuration of timer X1. Table 16.2 Register Configuration Name Timer interrupt enabling register Timer control/status register X Free running counter H Free running counter L Output comparing register AH Output comparing register AL Output comparing register BH Output comparing register BL Timer control register X Timer output comparing control register Input capture register AH Input capture register AL Input capture register BH Input capture register BL Input capture register CH Input capture register CL Input capture register DH Input capture register DL Abbrev. TIER TCSRX FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRAL OCRBH OCRBL TCRX TOCR ICRAH ICRAL ICRBH ICRBL ICRCH ICRCL ICRDH ICRDL R/W R/W 1 R/ (W)* Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 3 Address* H'D100 H'D101 H'D102 H'D103 H'D104* 2 H'D105* 2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R R R R H'D104* 2 H'D105* 2 H'D106 H'D107 H'D108 H'D109 H'D10A H'D10B H'D10C H'D10D H'D10E H'D10F Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1. Bit 0 is readable/writable. 2. The addresses of the OCRA and OCRB are the same. Changeover between them are to be made by use of the TOCR bit and OCRS bit. 3. Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 316 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.2 16.2.1 Register Descriptions Free Running Counter (FRC) Free running counter H (FRCH) Free running counter L (FRCL) FRC Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W FRCH FRCL The FRC is a 16-bit read/write up-counter which counts up by the inputting internal clock/external clock. The inputting clock is to be selected from the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX. By the setting of the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX, the FRC can be cleared by comparing match A. When the FRC overflows (H'FFFF → H'0000), the OVF of the TCSRX will be set to 1. At this time, when the OVIE of the TIER is being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. Reading/writing can be made from and to the FRC through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit. The FRC is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. 16.2.2 Output Comparing Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB) Output comparing register AH and BH (OCRAH and OCRBH) Output comparing register AL and BL (OCRAL and OCRBL) OCRA, OCRB Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRAH, OCRBH OCRAL, OCRBL The OCR consists of twin 16-bit read/write registers (OCRA and OCRB). The contents of the OCR are always being compared with the FRC and, when the value of these two match, the OCFA and OCRB of the TCSRX will be set to 1. At this time, if the OCIAE and OCIB of the TIER are Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 317 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. When performing compare matching, if the OEA and OEB of the TOCR are set to 1, the level value set to the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins. After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until the first compare matching occurs. Reading/writing can be made from and to the OCR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit. The OCR is cleared to H'FFFF when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. 16.2.3 Input Capture Registers A through D (ICRA through ICRD) Input capture register AH to DH (ICRAH to ICRDH) Input capture register AL to DL (ICRAL to ICRDL) ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, ICRD Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W : 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R ICRAH, ICRBH, ICRCH, ICRDH ICRAL, ICRBL, ICRCL, ICRDL The ICR consists of four 16-bit read-only registers (ICRA through ICRD). When the falling edge of the input capture input signal is detected, the value is transferred to the ICRA through ICRD. The ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1 simultaneously. If the IDIAE through IDIDE of the TCRX are all set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. The edge of the input signal can be selected by setting the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX. The ICRC and ICRD can also be used as the buffer register, of the ICRA and ICRB, respectively by setting the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX to perform buffer operations. Figure 16.2 shows the connections necessary when using the ICRC as the buffer register of the ICRA. (BUFEA = 1) When the ICRC is used as the buffer of the ICRA, by setting IEDGA ≠ IEDGC, both of the rising and falling edges can be designated for use. In case of IEDGA = IEDGC, either one of the rising edge or the falling edge only is usable. Regarding selection of the input signal edge, see table 16.3. Note: Transference from the FRC to the ICR will be performed regardless of the value of the ICF. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 318 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 IEDGA BUFEA IEDGC FTIA Edge detection and capture signal generating circuit. ICRC ICRA FRC Figure 16.2 Buffer Operation (Example) Table 16.3 Input Signal Edge Selection when Making Buffer Operation IEDGA 0 IEDGC 0 1 1 0 1 Captures at the rising edge of the input capture input A Selection of the Input Signal Edge Captures at the falling edge of the input capture input A (Initial value) Captures at both rising and falling edges of the input capture input A Reading can be made from the ICR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit. For stable input capturing operation, maintain the pulse duration of the input capture input signals at 1.5 system clock (φ) or more in case of single edge capturing and at 2.5 system clock (φ) or more in case of both edge capturing. The ICR is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. 16.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER) Bit : 7 ICIAE Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 ICIDE 0 R/W 3 OCIAE 0 R/W 2 OCIBE 0 R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W 0 ICSA 0 R/W The TIER is an 8-bit read/write register that controls permission/prohibition of interrupt requests. The TIER is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 319 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 7⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt A (ICIAE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA when the ICFA of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 7 ICIAE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA Permits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt B (ICIBE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB when the ICFB of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 6 ICIBE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB Permits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt C (ICICE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC when the ICFC of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 5 ICICE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC Permits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt D (ICIDE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD when the ICFD of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 4 ICIDE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD Permits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 320 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 3⎯Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt A (OCIAE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA when the OCFA of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 3 OCIAE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA Permits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt B (OCIBE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB when the OCFB of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 2 OCIBE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB Permits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Enabling the Timer Overflow Interrupt (OVIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF when the OVF of the TCSRX is being set to 1. Bit 1 OVIE 0 1 Description Prohibits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF Permits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Selecting the Input Capture A Signals (ICSA): This bit works to select the input capture A signals. Bit 0 ICSA 0 1 Description Selects the FTIA pin for inputting of the input capture A signals Selects the HSW for inputting of the input capture A signals (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 321 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX) Bit : 7 ICFA 6 ICFB 0 R/(W)* 5 ICFC 0 R/(W)* 4 ICFD 0 R/(W)* 3 OCFA 0 R/(W)* 2 OCFB 0 R/(W)* 1 OVF 0 R/(W)* 0 CCLRA 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1. The TCSRX is an 8-bit register which works to select counter clearing timing and to control respective interrupt requesting signals. The TCSRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. Meanwhile, as for the timing, see section 16.3, Operation. The FTIA through FTID pins are for fixed inputs inside the LSI under the low power consumption mode excluding the sleep mode. Consequently, when such shifts as active mode → low power consumption mode → active mode are made, wrong edges may be detected depending on the pin status or on the type of the detecting edge. To avoid such error, clear the interrupt requesting flag once immediately after shifting to the active mode from the low power consumption mode. Bit 7⎯Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals. When the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFA indicates the status that the FRC value has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals and that the ICRA value before being updated has been transferred to the ICRC. This flag should be cleared by use of of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 7 ICFA 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] [Setting condition] When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals (Initial value) When 0 is written into the ICFA after reading the ICFA under the setting of ICFA = 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 322 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 6⎯Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals. When the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFB indicates the status that the FRC value has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals and that the ICRB value before being updated has been transferred to the ICRC. This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 6 ICFB 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] [Setting condition] When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals (Initial value) When 0 is written into the ICFB after reading the ICFB under the setting of ICFB = 1 Bit 5⎯Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRC by the input capture signals. When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, although the ICFC will be set out, data transference to the ICRC will not be performed. Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFC can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICICE bit to 1. This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 5 ICFC 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] [Setting condition] When the input capture signal has occurred (Initial value) When 0 is written into the ICFC after reading the ICFC under the setting of ICFC = 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 323 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 4⎯Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRD by the input capture signals. When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, although the ICFD will be set out, data transference to the ICRD will not be performed. Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFD can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICIDE bit to 1. This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 4 ICFD 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] [Setting condition] When the input capture signal has occurred (Initial value) When 0 is written into the ICFD after reading the ICFD under the setting of ICFD = 1 Bit 3⎯Output Comparing Flag A (OCFA): This status flag indicates the fact that the FRC and the OCRA have come to a comparing match. This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 3 OCFA 0 Description [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written into the OCFA after reading the OCFA under the setting of OCFA = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the FRC and the OCRA have come to the comparing match Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 324 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 2⎯Output Comparing Flag B (OCFB): This status flag indicates the fact that the FRC and the OCRB have come to a comparing match. This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 2 OCFB 0 Description [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written into the OCFB after reading the OCFB under the setting of OCFB = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the FRC and the OCRB have come to the comparing match Bit 1⎯Timer Over Flow (OVF): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the FRC overflowed. (H'FFFF → H'0000). This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software. Bit 1 OVF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] [Setting condition] When the FRC value has become H'FFFF → H'0000 (Initial value) When 0 is written into the OVF after reading the OVF under the setting of OVF = 1 Bit 0⎯Counter Clearing (CCLRA): This bit works to select if or not to clear the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A (matching signal of the FRC and OCRA). Bit 0 CCLRA 0 1 Description Prohibits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A Permits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 325 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX) Bit : 7 IEDGA 6 IEDGB 0 R/W 5 IEDGC 0 R/W 4 IEDGD 0 R/W 3 BUFEA 0 R/W 2 BUFEB 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The TCRX is an 8-bit read/write register that selects the input capture signal edge, designates the buffer operation, and selects the inputting clock for the FRC. The TCRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. Bit 7⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection A (IEDGA): This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal A (FTIA). Bit 7 IEDGA 0 1 Description Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal A Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal A (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection B (IEDGB): This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal B (FTIB). Bit 6 IEDGB 0 1 Description Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal B Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal B (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection C (IEDGC): This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal C (FTIC). However, when the DVCTL has been selected as the signal for the input capture signal edge selection C, this bit will not influence the operation. Bit 5 IEDGC 0 1 Description Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal C Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal C (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 326 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 4⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection D (IEDGD): This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal D (FTID). Bit 4 IEDGD 0 1 Description Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal D Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal D (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Buffer Enabling A (BUFEA): This bit works to select whether or not to use the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA. Bit 3 BUFEA 0 1 Description Not using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA Using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Buffer Enabling B (BUFEB): This bit works to select whether or not to use the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB. Bit 2 BUFEB 0 1 Description Not using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB Using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Select (CKS1, CKS0): These bits work to select the inputting clock to the FRC from among three types of internal clocks and the DVCFG. The DVCFG is the edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer. Bit 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Description Internal clock: Counts at φ/4 Internal clock: Counts at φ/16 Internal clock: Counts at φ/64 DVCFG: The edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 327 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR) Bit : 7 ICSB 6 ICSC 0 R/W 5 ICSD 0 R/W 4 OCRS 0 R/W 3 OEA 0 R/W 2 OEB 0 R/W 1 OLVLA 0 R/W 0 OLVLB 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The TOCR is an 8-bit read/write register that select input capture signals and output comparing output level, permits output comparing outputs, and controls switching over of the access of the OCRA and OCRB. See section 16.2.4, Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER) regarding the input capture inputs A. The TOCR is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode. Bit 7⎯Selecting the Input Capture B Signals (ICSB): This bit works to select the input capture B signals. Bit 7 ICSB 0 1 Description Selects the FTIB pin for inputting of the input capture B signals Selects the VD as the input capture B signals (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Selecting the Input Capture C Signals (ICSC): This bit works to select the input capture C signals. The DVCTL is the edge detecting pulse selected by the CTL dividing timer. Bit 6 ICSC 0 1 Description Selects the FTIC pin for inputting of the input capture C signals Selects the DVCTL as the input capture C signals (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Selecting the Input Capture D Signals (ICSD): This bit works to select the input capture D signals. Bit 5 ICSD 0 1 Description Selects the FTID pin for inputting of the input capture D signals Selects the NHSW as the input capture D signals (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 328 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 4⎯Selecting the Output Comparing Register (OCRS): The addresses of the OCRA and OCRB are the same. The OCRS works to control which register to choose when reading/writing this address. The choice will not influence the operation of the OCRA and OCRB. Bit 4 OCRS 0 1 Description Selects the OCRA register Selects the OCRB register (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Enabling the Output A (OEA): This bit works to control the output comparing A signals. Bit 3 OEA 0 1 Description Prohibits the output comparing A signal outputs Permits the output comparing A signal outputs (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Enabling the Output B (OEB): This bit works to control the output comparing B signals. Bit 2 OEB 0 1 Description Prohibits the output comparing B signal outputs Permits the output comparing B signal outputs (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit works to select the output level to output through the FTOA pin by use of the comparing match A (matching signal between the FRC and OCRA). Bit 1 OLVLA 0 1 Description Low level High level (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 329 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Bit 0⎯Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit works to select the output level to output through the FTOB pin by use of the comparing match B (matching signal between the FRC and OCRB). Bit 0 OLVLB 0 1 Description Low level High level (Initial value) 16.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 0 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR consists of twin 8-bit read/write registers that control the module stop mode. When the MSTP10 bit is set to 1, the Timer X1 stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF. Bit 2⎯Module Stop (MSTP10): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for timer X1. MSTPCRH Bit 2 MSTP10 0 1 Description Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer X1 Sets the module stop mode of the Timer X1 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 330 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.3 16.3.1 Operation Operation of Timer X1 • Output Comparing Operation Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting clock can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external clock by setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX. The contents of the FRC are always being compared with the OCRA and OCRB and, when the value of these two match, the level set by the the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR is output through the FTOA pin and FTOB pin. After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until the first compare matching occurs. Also, when the CCLRA of the TCSRX is being set to 1, the FRC will be cleared to H'0000 when the comparing match A occurs. • Input Capturing Operation Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting clock can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external clock by setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX. The inputs are transferred to the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX through the FTIA through FTID pins and, at the same time, the ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1. At this time, if the ICIAE through ICIED of the TIER are being set to 1, due interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. When the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX are set to 1, the ICRC and ICRD work as the buffer register, respectively, of the ICRA and ICRB. When the edge selected by setting the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX is input through the FTIA and FTIB pins, the value at the time of the FRC is transferred to the ICRA and ICRB and, at the same time, the values of the ICRA and ICRB before updating are transferred to the ICRC and ICRD. At this time, when the ICFA and ICFB are being set to 1 and if the ICIAE and ICIBE of the TIER are being set to 1, due interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 331 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC The FRC is counted up by the inputting clock. By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX, the inputting clock can be selected from among three different types of clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and φ/64) and the DVCFG. • Internal Clock Operation By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX, three types of internal clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and φ/64), generated by dividing the system clock (φ) can be selected. Figure 16.3 shows the timing chart. φ Internal clock FRC input clock N−1 FRC N N+1 Figure 16.3 Count Timing for Internal Clock Operation • DVCFG Clock Operation By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX to 1, DVCFG clock input can be selected. The DVCFG clock makes counting by use of the edge detecting pulse being selected by the CFG dividing timer. Figure 16.4 shows the timing chart. φ CFG DVCFG FRC input clock FRC N N+1 Figure 16.4 Count Timing for CFG Clock Operation Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 332 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing When a comparing match occurs, the output level having been set by the OLVL of the TOCR is output through the output comparing signal outputting pins (FTOA and FTOB). Figure 16.5 shows the timing chart for the output comparing signal outputting A. φ FRC N N+1 N N+1 OCRA N N Comparing match signal ↓ Clearing* OLVLA FTOA Output comparing signal outputting A pin Note: * Execution of the command is to be designated by the software. Figure 16.5 Output Comparing Signal Outputting A Timing 16.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing The FRC can be cleared when the comparing match A occurs. Figure 16.6 shows the timing chart. φ Comparing match A signal FRC N H' 0000 Figure 16.6 Clearing Timing by Occurrence of the Comparing Match A Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 333 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing • Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing As for the input capture signal inputting, rising or falling edge is selected by settings of the IEDGA through IEDGD bits of the TCRX. Figure 16.7 shows the timing chart when the rising edge is selected (IEDGA through IEDGD = 1). φ Input capture signal inputting pin Input capture signal Figure 16.7 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing (under Normal State) • Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing when Making Buffer Operation Buffer operation can be made using the ICRC or ICRD as the buffer of the ICRA or ICRB. Figure 16.8 shows the input capture signal inputting timing chart in case both of the rising and falling edges are designated (IEDGA = 1 and IEDGC = 0, or IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1), using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA (BUFEA = 1). φ FTIA Input capture signal FRC n n+1 N ICRA M n n N ICRC m M M n Figure 16.8 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing Chart under the Buffer Mode (under Normal State) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 334 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Even when the ICRC or ICRD is used as the buffer register, the input capture flag will be set up corresponding to the designated edge change of respective input capture signals. For example, when using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA, when an edge change having been designated by the IEDGC bit is detected with the input capture signals C and if the ICIEC bit is duly set, an interrupt request will be issued. However, in this case, the FRC value will not be transferred to the ICRC. 16.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing The input capture signal works to set the ICFA through ICFD to 1 and, simultaneously, the FRC value is transferred to the corresponding ICRA through ICRD. Figure 16.9 shows the timing chart. φ Input capture signal ICFA to ICFD FRC N ICRA to ICRD N Figure 16.9 ICFA through ICFD Setting Up Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 335 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing The OCFA and OCFB are being set to 1 by the comparing match signal being output when the values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match. The comparing match signal is generated at the last state of the value match (the timing of the FRC's updating the matching count reading). After the values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match, up until the count up clock signal is generated, the comparing match signal will not be issued. Figure 16.10 shows the OCFA and OCFB setting timing chart. φ FRC N N+1 OCRA, OCRB N Comparing match signal OCFA, OCFB Figure 16.10 OCF Setting Up Timing 16.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing The OVF is set to when the FRC overflows (H'FFFF → H'0000). Figure 16.11 shows the timing chart. φ FRC H'FFFF H'0000 Overflowing signal OVF Figure 16.11 OVF Setting Up Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 336 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.4 Operation Mode of Timer X1 Table 16.4 indicated below shows the operation mode of Timer X1. Table 16.4 Operation Mode of Timer X1 Operation Mode Reset FRC OCRA, OCRB ICRA to ICRD TIER TCRX TOCR TCSRX Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Active Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Sleep Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Functions Watch Subactive Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Standby Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Subsleep Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Module Stop Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset 16.5 Interrupt Causes Total seven interrupt causes exist with Timer X1, namely, ICIA through ICID, OCIA, OCIB and FOVI. Table 16.5 lists the contents of interrupt causes. Interrupt requests can be permitted or prohibited by setting interrupt enabling bits of the TIER. Also, independent vector addresses are allocated to respective interrupt causes. Table 16.5 Interrupt Causes of Timer X1 Abbreviations of the Interrupt Causes ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI Priority Degree Interrupt request by the ICFA Interrupt request by the ICFB Interrupt request by the ICFC Interrupt request by the ICFD Interrupt request by the OCFA Interrupt request by the OCFB Interrupt request by the OVF Low Contents High Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 337 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.6 Exemplary Uses of Timer X1 Figure 16.12 shows an example of outputting at optional phase difference of the pulses of the 50% duty. For this setting, follow the procedures listed below. 1. Set the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX to 1. 2. Each time a comparing match occurs, the OLVLA bit and the OLVLB bit are reversed by use of the software. FRC Clearing the counter H'FFFF OCRA OCRB H'0000 FTOA FTOB Figure 16.12 Pulse Outputting Example Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 338 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.7 Precautions when Using Timer X1 Pay great attention to the fact that the following competitions and operations occur during operation of timer X1. 16.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC When a counter clearing signal is issued under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing cycle, writing into the FRC will not be effected and the priority will be given to clearing of the FRC. Figure 16.13 shows the timing chart. Writing cycle with the FRC T1 φ T2 Address FRC address Internal writing signal Counter clearing signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 16.13 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 339 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC When a counting up cause occurs under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing cycle, the counting up will not be effected and the priority will be given to count writing. Figure 16.14 shows the timing chart. Writing cycle with the FRC T1 φ T2 Address FRC address Internal writing signal Inputting clock to the FRC FRC N M Writing data Figure 16.14 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 340 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR When a comparing match occurs under the T2 state where the OCRA and OCRB are under the writing cycle, the priority will be given to writing of the OCR and the comparing match signal will be prohibited. Figure 16.15 shows the timing chart. Writing cycle with the OCR T1 φ T2 Address OCR address Internal writing signal FRC N N+1 OCR N M Writing data Comparing match signal Will be prohibited Figure 16.15 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 341 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 16.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations Depending on the timing of changing over the internal clocks, the FRC may count up. Table 16.6 shows the relations between the timing of changing over the internal clocks (Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0) and the FRC operations. When using an internal clock, the counting clock is being generated detecting the falling edge of the internal clock dividing the system clock (φ). For this reason, like Item No. 3 of table 16.6, count clock signals are issued deeming the timing before the changeover as the falling edge to have the FRC to count up. Also, when changing over between an internal clock and the external clock, the FRC may count up. Table 16.6 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and the FRC Operation No. 1 Rewriting Timing for the CKS1 and CKS0 Low → low level changeover FRC Operation Clock before the changeover Clock after the changeover Count clock FRC N N+1 Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0 2 Low → High level changeover Clock before the changeover Clock after the changeover Count clock FRC N N+1 N+2 Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 342 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Rewriting Timing for the CKS1 and CKS0 High → low level changeover No. 3 FRC Operation Clock before the changeover Clock after the changeover Count clock * FRC N N+1 N+2 Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0 4 High → high level changeover Clock before the changeover Clock after the changeover Count clock FRC N N+1 N+2 Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0 Note: * The count clock signals are issued determining the changeover timing as the falling edge to have the FRC to count up. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 343 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 16 Timer X1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 344 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.1 Overview This LSI has an on-chip watchdog timer with one channel (WDT) for monitoring system operation. The WDT outputs an overflow signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal or internal NMI interrupt signal. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. 17.1.1 Features WDT features are listed below. • Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode ⎯ WOVI interrupt generation in interval timer mode • Internal reset or internal interrupt generated when the timer counter overflows ⎯ Choice of internal reset or NMI interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode • Choice of 8 counter input clocks ⎯ Maximum WDT interval: system clock period × 131072 × 256 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 345 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 17.1 shows block diagram of WDT. WOVI (Interrupt request signal) Internal NMI interrupt request signal Interrupt control Overflow Clock · Reset control Clock select Internal reset signal* φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Internal clock source WTCNT WTCSR Module bus WDT Legend: WTCSR : Timer control/status register WTCNT : Timer counter Note: * The internal reset signal can be generated by means of a register setting. Bus interface Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of WDT Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 346 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.1.3 Register Configuration The WDT has two registers, as described in table 17.1. These registers control clock selection, WDT mode switching, the reset signal, etc. Table 17.1 WDT Registers Address* Name Watchdog timer control/status register Watchdog timer counter System control register Abbrev. WTCSR WTCNT SYSCR R/W 3 R/ (W)* 1 Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'09 2 Write* Read H'FFBC H'FFBD H'FFE8 H'FFBC H'FFBC H'FFE8 R/W R/W Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details of write operations, see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 17.2 17.2.1 Register Descriptions Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Bit : 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : WTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. When the TME bit is set to 1 in WTCSR, WTCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF flag in WTCSR is set to 1. WTCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0. Note: * WTCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 347 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR) Bit : 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 — 0 — 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. WTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to WTCNT, and the timer mode. WTCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Note: * WTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access. Bit 7⎯Overflow Flag (OVF): A status flag that indicates that WTCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] 1. Write 0 in the TME bit 2. Read WTCSR when OVF = 1*, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] When WTCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset Note: * When OVF is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled, OVF=1 must be read at least twice. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 348 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Bit 6⎯Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when WTCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset or NMI interrupt when WTCNT overflows. Bit 6 WT/IT 0 1 Description Interval timer mode: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when WTCNT overflows (Initial value) Watchdog timer mode: Sends the CPU a reset or NMI interrupt request when WTCNT overflows Bit 5⎯Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether WTCNT runs or is halted. Bit 5 TME 0 1 Description WTCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted WTCNT counts (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Reserved: This bit should not be set to 1. Bit 3⎯Reset or NMI (RST/NMI): Specifies whether an internal reset or NMI interrupt is requested on WTCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode. Bit 3 RST/NMI 0 1 Description An NMI interrupt request is generated An internal reset request is generated (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 349 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select an internal clock source, obtained by dividing the system clock (φ) for input to WTCNT. WDT Input Clock Selection Bit 2 CSK2 0 Bit 1 CSK1 0 Bit 0 CSK0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Note: * 0 1 Description Clock φ/2 (Initial value) φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Overflow Period* (when φ = 10 MHz) 51.2 μs 1.6 ms 3.3 ms 13.1 ms 52.4 ms 209.7 ms 838.9 ms 3.36 s The overflow period is the time from when WTCNT starts counting up from H'00 until overflow occurs. 17.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit : 7 — 0 — 6 — 0 — 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 1 — Initial value : R/W : Only bit 3 is described here. For details on functions not related to the watchdog timer, see sections 3.2.2 and 6.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. Bit 3⎯External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow in addition to external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset, and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST 0 1 Description Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow Reset is generated by external reset input (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 350 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.2.4 Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's WTCNT and WTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. • Writing to WTCNT and WTCSR These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to with byte transfer instructions. Figure 17.2 shows the format of data written to WTCNT and WTCSR. WTCNT and WTCSR both have the same write address. For a write to WTCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to WTCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to WTCNT or WTCSR. 15 Address : H'FFBC 0 H'5A 87 Write data 0 15 Address : H'FFBC 0 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Figure 17.2 Format of Data Written to WTCNT and WTCSR • Reading WTCNT and WTCSR These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFBC for WTCSR, and H'FFBD for WTCNT. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 351 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.3 17.3.1 Operation Watchdog Timer Operation To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits in WTCSR to 1. Software must prevent WTCNT overflows by rewriting the WTCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. This ensures that WTCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. If WTCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt is generated, for 518 system clock periods (518 φ). This is illustrated in figure 17.3. An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and reset input from the RES pin are handled via the same vector. The reset source can be identified from the value of the XRST bit in SYSCR. If a reset caused by an input signal from the RES pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur simultaneously, the RES pin reset has priority, and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1. WTCNT value Overflow H'FF H'00 WT/IT = 1 TME = 1 H'00 written to WTCNT OVF = 1* Internal reset generated Time WT/IT = 1 H'00 written TME = 1 to WTCNT Internal reset signal 518 system clock period Legend: WT/IT : Timer mode select bit TME : Timer enable bit Note: * Cleared to 0 by an internal reset when OVF is set to 1. XRST is cleared to 0. Figure 17.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode (when Reset) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 352 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.3.2 Interval Timer Operation To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in WTCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time WTCNT overflows, provided that the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 17.4. This function can be used to generate interrupt requests at regular intervals. WTCNT value H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow H'00 WT/IT = 0 TME = 1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Time WOVI : Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 17.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 353 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) The OVF bit in WTCSR is set to 1 if WTCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 17.5. If NMI request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, when WTCNT overflows the OVF bit in WTCSR is set to 1 and at the same time an NMI interrupt is requested. CK WTCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF Figure 17.5 Timing of OVF Setting 17.4 Interrupts During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in WTCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When NMI interrupt request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, an overflow generates an NMI interrupt request. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 354 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.5 17.5.1 Usage Notes Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a WTCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 17.6 shows this operation. WTCNT write cycle T1 T2 Internal φ Internal address Internal write signal WTCNT input clock WTCNT N M Counter write data Figure 17.6 Contention between WTCNT Write and Increment 17.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 355 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 17.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is operating, correct operation cannot be guaranteed. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 356 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM Section 18 8-Bit PWM 18.1 Overview The 8-bit PWM incorporates 4 channels of the duty control method (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 2 channels). Its outputs can be used to control a reel motor or loading motor. 18.1.1 Features • Conversion period: 256-state • Duty control method 18.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit PWM (1 channel). Internal data bus PW8CR PWRn PWMn Polarity specification R Q S Match signal Comparator OVF 27 20 φ Free-running counter (FRC) Legend: PWRn PWMn OVF Note: : 8-bit PWM data register n : 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin n : Overflow signal from FRC lower 8-bit n = 3 to 0 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n = 1 and 0) PW8CR : 8-bit PWM control register Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit PWM (1 channel) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 357 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM 18.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 18.1 shows the 8-bit PWM pin configuration. Table 18.1 Pin Configuration Name 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 0 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 1 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 2 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 3 Abbrev. PWM0 PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 I/O Output Output Output Output Function 8-bit PWM square-wave output 0 8-bit PWM square-wave output 1 8-bit PWM square-wave output 2 8-bit PWM square-wave output 3 18.1.4 Register Configuration Table 18.2 shows the 8-bit PWM register configuration. Table 18.2 8-Bit PWM Registers Name 8-bit PWM data register 0 8-bit PWM data register 1 8-bit PWM data register 2 8-bit PWM data register 3 8-bit PWM control register Port mode register 3 Note: * Abbrev. PWR0 PWR1 PWR2 PWR3 PW8CR PMR3 R/W W W W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'F0 H'00 Address* H'D126 H'D127 H'D128 H'D129 H'D12A H'FFD0 Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 358 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM 18.2 18.2.1 PWR0 Register Descriptions 8-bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PW07 0 W 6 PW06 0 W 5 PW05 0 W 4 PW04 0 W 3 PW03 0 W 2 PW02 0 W 1 PW01 0 W 0 PW00 0 W PWR1 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PW17 0 W 6 PW16 0 W 5 PW15 0 W 4 PW14 0 W 3 PW13 0 W 2 PW12 0 W 1 PW11 0 W 0 PW10 0 W PWR2 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PW27 0 W 6 PW26 0 W 5 PW25 0 W 4 PW24 0 W 3 PW23 0 W 2 PW22 0 W 1 PW21 0 W 0 PW20 0 W PWR3 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 PW37 0 W 6 PW36 0 W 5 PW35 0 W 4 PW34 0 W 3 PW33 0 W 2 PW32 0 W 1 PW31 0 W 0 PW30 0 W 8-bit PWM data registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3) control the duty cycle at 8bit PWM pins. The data written in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 correspond to the high-level width of one PWM output waveform cycle (256 states). When data is set in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3, the contents of the data are latched in the PWM waveform generators, updating the PWM waveform generation data. PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are 8-bit write-only registers. When read, all bits are always read as 1. PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are initialized to H'00 by a reset. Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWR2 and PWR3. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 359 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM 18.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 PWC3 0 R/W 2 PWC2 0 R/W 1 PWC1 0 R/W 0 PWC0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The 8-bit PWM control register (PW8CR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls PWM functions. PW8CR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset. Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 3 to 0⎯Output Polarity Select (PWC3 to PWC0): These bits select the output polarity of PWMn pin between positive or negative (reverse). Bit n PWCn 0 1 Description PWMn pin output has positive polarity PWMn pin output has negative polarity (Initial value) Note: n = 3 to 0 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n = 1 and 0). 18.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) Bit : 7 PMR37 0 R/W 6 PMR36 0 R/W 5 PMR35 0 R/W 4 PMR34 0 R/W 3 PMR33 0 R/W 2 PMR32 0 R/W 1 PMR31 0 R/W 0 PMR30 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls function switching of each pin in the port 3. Switching is specified for each bit. The PMR3 is a 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset. For bits other than 5 to 2, see section 10.5, Port 3. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 360 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32): These bits set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as I/O pin or it is used as 8-bit PWM output PWMm pin. Bit n PMR3n 0 1 Description P3n/PMWm pin functions as P3n I/O pin P3n/PMWm pin functions as PWMm output pin (Initial value) Note: n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0. The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM2 and PWM3 pin functions. 18.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode. When MSTP4 bit is set to 1, the 8-bit PWM stops its operation upon completion of the bus cycle and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. Bit 4⎯Module Stop (MSTP4): This bit sets the module stop mode of the 8-bit PWM. MSTPCRL Bit 4 MSTP4 0 1 Description 8-bit PWM module stop mode is released 8-bit PWM module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 361 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 18 8-Bit PWM 18.3 8-Bit PWM Operation The 8-bit PWM outputs PWM pulses having a cycle length of 256 states and a pulse width determined by the data registers (PWR). The output PWM pulse can be converted to a DC voltage through integration in a low-pass filter. Figure 18.2 shows the output waveform example of 8-bit PWM. The pulse width (Twidth) can be obtained by the following expression: Twidth = (1/φ) × (PWR setting value) FRC lower 8-bit value H'FF PWRn setting value H'00 PWRn pin output (n = 3 to 0) (Positive polarity) Pulse width T width Pulse width T width (Negative polarity) T width Pulse cycle (256 states) T width Pulse cycle (256 states) Figure 18.2 8-bit PWM Output Waveform (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 362 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM Section 19 12-Bit PWM 19.1 Overview The 12-bit PWM incorporates 2 channels of the pulse pitch control method and functions as the drum and capstan motor controller. 19.1.1 Features Two on-chip 12-bit PWM signal generators are provided to control motors. These PWMs use the pulse-pitch control method (periodically overriding part of the output). This reduces lowfrequency components in the pulse output, enabling a quick response without increasing the clock frequency. The pitch of the PWM signal is modified in response to error data (representing lead or lag in relation to a preset speed and phase). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 363 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM 19.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the 12-bit PWM (1 channel). The PWM signal is generated by combining quantizing pulses from a 12-bit pulse generator with quantizing pulses derived from the contents of a data register. Low-frequency components are reduced because the two quantizing pulses have different frequencies. The error data is represented by an unsigned 12-bit binary number. φ/2 φ/4 φ/8 φ/16 φ/32 φ/64 φ/128 CAPPWM or DRMPWM Counter Pulse generator Output control circuit PWM data register PWM control register Error data DFUCR* Internal data bus Legend: CAPPWM DRMPWM : Capstan mix pin : Drum mix pin Digital filter circuit PTON CP/DP Note: * Refer to section 26, Servo Circuits. Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of 12-Bit PWM (1 channel) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 364 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM 19.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 19.1 shows the 12-bit PWM pin configuration. Table 19.1 Pin Configuration Name Capstan mix Drum mix Abbrev. CAPPWM DRMPWM I/O Output Function 12-bit PWM square-wave output 19.1.4 Register Configuration Table 19.2 shows the 12-bit PWM register configuration. Table 19.2 12-Bit PWM Registers Name 12-bit PWM control register Abbrev. CPWCR DPWCR 12-bit PWM data register Note: * CPWDR DPWDR Lower 16 bits of the address. R/W W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Word Word Initial Value H'42 H'42 H'F000 H'F000 Address* H'D07B H'D07A H'D07C H'D078 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 365 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM 19.2 19.2.1 CPWCR Register Descriptions 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CPOL 0 W 6 CDC 1 W 5 CHiZ 0 W 4 CH/L 0 W 3 CSF/DF 0 W 2 CCK2 0 W 1 CCK1 1 W 0 CCK0 0 W DPWCR Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 DPOL 0 W 6 DDC 1 W 5 DHiZ 0 W 4 DH/L 0 W 3 DSF/DF 0 W 2 DCK2 0 W 1 DCK1 1 W 0 DCK0 0 W CPWCR is the PWM output control register for the capstan motor. DPWCR is the PWM output control register for the drum motor. Both are 8-bit writable registers. CPWCR and DPWCR are initialized to H'42 by a reset, or when in a power-down state except for active medium-speed mode. Bit 7⎯Polarity Invert (POL): This bit can invert the polarity of the modulated PWM signal for noise suppression and other purposes. This bit is invalid when fixed output is selected (when bit DC is set to 1). Bit 7 POL 0 1 Description Output with positive polarity Output with inverted polarity (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Output Select (DC): Selects either PWM modulated output, or fixed output controlled by the pin output bits (bits 5 and 4). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 366 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM Bits 5 and 4⎯PWM Pin Output (Hi-Z, H/L): When bit DC is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM output pins (CAPPWM, DRMPWM) output a value determined by the Hi-Z and H/L bits. The output is not affected by bit POL. In power-down modes, the 12-bit PWM circuit and pin statuses are retained. Before making a transition to a power-down mode, first set bits 6 (DC), 5 (Hi-Z), and 4 (H/L) of the 12-bit PWM control registers (CPWCR and DPWCR) to select a fixed output level. Choose one of the following settings: Bit 6 DC 1 Bit 5 Hi-Z 0 Bit 4 H/L 0 1 1 0 * Legend: * Don't care * * Output state Low output High output High-impedance Modulation signal output (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Output Data Select (SF/DF): Selects whether the data to be converted to PWM output is taken from the data register or from the digital filter circuit. Bit 3 SF/DF 0 1 Description Modulation by error data from the digital filter circuit Modulation by error data written in the data register (Initial value) Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and phase filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the CAPPWM and DRMPWM pins. However, it is possible to output only drum phase filter results from CAPPWM pin and only capstan phase filter result from DRMPWM pin, by DFUCR settings of the digital filter circuit. See section 26.11, Digital Filters. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 367 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM Bits 2 to 0⎯Carrier Frequency Select (CK2 to CK0): Selects the carrier frequency of the PWM modulated signal. Do not set them to 111. Bit 2 CK2 0 Bit 1 CK1 0 Bit 0 CK0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φ2 φ4 φ8 φ16 φ32 φ64 φ128 (Do not set) (Initial value) 19.2.2 CPWDR 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (DPWDR, CPWDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 — 1 — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CPWDR11 CPWDR10 CPWDR9 CPWDR8 CPWDR7 CPWDR6 CPWDR5 CPWDR4 CPWDR3 CPWDR2 CPWDR1 CPWDR0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W DPWDR Bit : 15 — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DPWDR11 DPWDR10 DPWDR9 DPWDR8 DPWDR7 DPWDR6 DPWDR5 DPWDR4 DPWDR3 DPWDR2 DPWDR1 DPWDR0 Initial value : 1 R/W : — 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W The 12-bit PWM data registers (DPWDR and CPWDR) are 12-bit readable/writable registers in which the data to be converted to PWM output is written. The data in these registers is converted to PWM output only when bit SF/DF of the corresponding control register is set to 1. When the SF/DF bit is 0, the error data from the digital filter circuit is written in the data register, and then modulated by PWM. At this time, the error data from the digital filter circuit can be monitored by reading the data register. These registers can be accessed by word only, and cannot be accessed by byte. Byte access gives unassured results. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 368 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM Both registers are initialized to H'F000 by a reset or in a power-down state except for active medium speed mode. 19.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : Initial value : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode. When MSTP1 bit is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM stops its operation upon completion of the bus cycle and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. Bit 1⎯Module Stop (MSTP1): This bit sets the module stop mode of the 12-bit PWM. MSTPCRL Bit 1 MSTP1 0 1 Description 12-bit PWM and servo circuit module stop mode is released 12-bit PWM and servo circuit module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 369 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM 19.3 19.3.1 Operation Output Waveform The PWM signal generator combines the error data with the output from an internal pulse generator to produce a pulse-width modulated signal. When Vcc/2 is set as the reference value, the following conditions apply: 1. When the motor is running at the correct speed and phase, the PWM signal is output with a 50% duty cycle. 2. When the motor is running behind the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically holding part of the PWM signal low. The part held low depends on the size of the error. 3. When the motor is running ahead of the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically holding part of the PWM signal high. The part held high depends on the size of the error. When the motor is running at the correct speed and phase, the error data is a 12-bit value representing 1/2 (1000 0000 0000), and the PWM output has the same frequency as the selected division clock. After the error data has been converted into a PWM signal, the PWM signal can be smoothed into a DC voltage by an external low-pass filter (LPF). The smoothe error data can be used to control the motor. Figure 19.2 shows sample waveform outputs. The 12-bit PWM pin outputs a low-level signal upon reset, in power-down mode or at modulestop. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 370 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C10 C11 C12 C13 Pulse Generator Corresponds to Pwr3 = 1 Corresponds to Pwr2 = 1 Corresponds to Pwr1 = 1 Corresponds to Pwr0 = 1 Figure 19.2 Sample Waveform Output by 12-Bit PWM (4 Bits) PWM data register Pwr3 2 1 0 "L" 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 371 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 19 12-Bit PWM Section 19 12-Bit PWM Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 372 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM Section 20 14-Bit PWM Note: The 14-Bit PWM is not (incorporated in) provided for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. 20.1 Overview The 14-bit PWM is a pulse division type PWM that can be used for electronic tuner control, etc. 20.1.1 Features Features of the 14-bit PWM are given below: • Choice of two conversion periods A conversion period of 32768/φ with a minimum modulation width of 2/φ, or a conversion period of 16384/φ with a minimum modulation width of 1/φ, can be selected. • Pulse division method for less ripple Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 373 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM 20.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the 14-bit PWM. PWCR Internal data bus PWDRL PWDRU φ/4 φ/2 Legend: PWM waveform generator PWM14 PWCR : PWM control register PWDRL : PWM data register L PWDRU: PWM data register U PWM14 : PWM14 output pin Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM 20.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 20.1 shows the 14-bit PWM pin configuration. Table 20.1 Pin Configuration Name PWM 14-bit square-wave output pin Note: * Abbrev. PWM14* I/O Output Function 14-bit PWM square-wave output This pin also functions as P40 general I/O pin. When using this pin, set the pin function by the port mode register 4 (PMR4). For details, see section 10.6, Port 4. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 374 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM 20.1.4 Register Configuration Table 20.2 shows the 14-bit PWM register configuration. Table 20.2 14-Bit PWM Registers Name PWM control register PWM data register U PWM data register L Note: * Abbrev. PWCR PWDRU PWDRL R/W R/W W W Size Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'FE H'C0 H'00 Address* H'D122 H'D121 H'D120 Lower 16 bits of the address. 20.2 20.2.1 Register Descriptions PWM Control Register (PWCR) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 PWCR0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The PWM control register (PWCR) is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the 14-bit PWM functions. PWCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset. Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 0⎯Clock Select (PWCR0): Selects the clock supplied to the 14-bit PWM. Bit 0 PWCR0 0 1 Description The input clock is φ/2 (tφ = 2/φ) The input clock is φ/4 (tφ = 4/φ) The conversion period is 32768/φ, with a minimum modulation width of 2/φ Note: t/φ: Period of PWM clock input (Initial value) The conversion period is 16384/φ, with a minimum modulation width of 1/φ Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 375 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM 20.2.2 PWDRU PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWDRU5 PWDRU4 PWDRU3 PWDRU2 PWDRU1 PWDRU0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W PWDRL Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWDRL7 PWDRL6 PWDRL5 PWDRL4 PWDRL3 PWDRL2 PWDRL1 PWDRL0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU and PWDRL) indicate high level width in one PWM waveform cycle. PWDRU and PWDRL form a 14-bit write-only register, with the upper 6 bits assigned to PWDRU and the lower 8 bits to PWDRL. The value written in PWDRU and PWDRL gives the total highlevel width of one PWM waveform cycle. Both PWDRU and PWDRL are accessible by byte access only. Word access gives unassured results. When 14-bit data is written in PWDRU and PWDRL, the contents are latched in the PWM waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated. When writing the 14-bit data, follow these steps: 1. Write the lower 8 bits to PWDRL. 2. Write the upper 6 bits to PWDRU. Write the data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU. PWDRU and PWDRL are write-only registers. When read, all bits always read 1. PWDRU and PWDRL are initialized to H'C000 by a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 376 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM 20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The module stop control register (MSTPCR) consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the module stop mode functions. When the MSTP5 bit is set to 1, the 14-bit PWM operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. Bit 5⎯Module Stop (MSTP5): Specifies the module stop mode of the 14-bit PWM. MSTPCRL Bit 5 MSTP5 0 1 Description 14-bit PWM module stop mode is released 14-bit PWM module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 377 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 20 14-Bit PWM 20.3 14-Bit PWM Operation When using the 14-bit PWM, set the registers in this sequence: 1. Set bit PWM40 to 1 in port mode register 4 (PMR4) so that pin P40/PWM14 is designated for PWM output. 2. Set bit PWCR0 in the PWM control register (PWCR) to select a conversion period of either 32768/φ (PWCR0 = 1) or 16384/φ (PWCR0 = 0). 3. Set the output waveform data in PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL). Be sure to write byte data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU. When the data is written in PWDRU, the contents of these registers are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the PWM waveform generation data is updated in synchronization with internal signals. One conversion period consists of 64 pulses, as shown in figure 20.2. The total high-level width during this period (TH) corresponds to the data in PWDRU and PWDRL. This relation can be expressed as follows: TH = (data value in PWDRU and PWDRL + 64) × tφ/2 where to is the period of PWM clock input: 2/φ (bit PWCR0 = 0) or 4/φ (bit PWCR0 = 1). If the data value in PWDRU and PWDRL is from H'3FC0 to H'3FFF, the PWM output stays high. When the data value is H'C000, TH is calculated as follows: TH = 64 × tφ/2 = 32 ⋅ tφ 1 conversion period t f1 t f2 t f63 t f64 t H1 t H2 t H3 t H63 t H64 T H = t H1 + t H2 + t H3 + ... + t H64 t f1 = t f2 = t f3 = ... = t f64 Figure 20.2 Waveform Output by 14-Bit PWM Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 378 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.1 Overview The prescalar unit (PSU) has a 18-bit free running counter (FRC) that uses φ as a clock source and a 5-bit counter that uses φW as a clock source. 21.1.1 Features • Prescalar S (PSS) Generates frequency division clocks that are input to peripheral functions. • Prescalar W (PSW) When a timer A is used as a clock time base, the PSW frequency-divides subclocks and generates input clocks. • Stable oscillation wait time count During the return from the low power consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, the FRC counts the stable oscillation wait time. • 8-bit PWM The lower 8 bits of the FRC is used as 8-bit PWM cycle and duty cycle generation counters. (Conversion cycle: 256 states) • 8-bit input capture by IC pins Catches the 8 bits of 2 to 2 of the FRC according to the edge of the IC pin for remote control receiving. 15 8 • Frequency division clock output Can output the frequency division clock for the system clock or the frequency division clock for the subclock from the frequency division clock output pin (TMOW). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 379 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the prescalar unit. PWM3 PWM2 PWM1 PWM0 212 27 8 bits 20 LSB 18-bit free running counter (FRC) 215 IC pin Interrupt request ICR1 8 bits 28 φ/32 φ/16 φ/8 φ/4 Stable oscillation wait time count output Prescalar S φ/131072 to φ/2 MSB 217 6 bits φ φw/32 φw/16 TMOW pin φw/8 Prescalar W φw/128 MSB 5-bit counter PCSR LSB φw/4 Internal data bus Legend: ICR1 : Input capture register 1 PCSR : Prescalar unit control/status register IC : Input capture input pin TMOW : Frequency division clock output pin Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of Prescalar Unit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 380 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 21.1 shows the pin configuration of the prescalar unit. Table 21.1 Pin Configuration Name Input capture input Frequency division clock output Abbrev. IC TMOW I/O Input Output Function Prescalar unit input capture input pin Prescalar unit frequency division clock output pin 21.1.4 Register Configuration Table 21.2 shows the register configuration of the prescalar unit. Table 21.2 Register Configuration Name Input capture register 1 Prescalar unit control/status register Note: * Abbrev. ICR1 PCSR R/W R R/W Size Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'08 Address* H'D12C H'D12D Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 381 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.2 21.2.1 Registers Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1) Bit : 7 ICR17 0 R 6 ICR16 0 R 5 ICR15 0 R 4 ICR14 0 R 3 ICR13 0 R 15 8 2 ICR12 0 R 1 ICR11 0 R 0 ICR10 0 R Initial value : R/W : Input capture register 1 (ICR1) captures 8-bit data of 2 to 2 of the FRC according to the edge of the IC pin. ICR1 is an 8-bit read-only register. The write operation becomes invalid. The ICR1 values are undefined until the first capture is generated after the mode has been set to the standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleeve mode. When reset, ICR1 is initialized to H'00. 21.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 ICIF 0 R/(W)* 6 ICIE 0 R/W 5 ICEG 0 R/W 4 NCon/off 0 R/W 3 — 1 — 2 DCS2 0 R/W 1 DCS1 0 R/W 0 DCS0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR) controls the input capture function and selects the frequency division clock that is output from the TMOW pin. PCSR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PCSR is initialized to H'08. Bit 7⎯Input Capture Interrupt Flag (ICIF): Input capture interrupt request flag. This indicates that the input capture was performed according to the edge of the IC pin. Bit 7 ICIF 0 1 Description [Clear condition] When 0 is written after 1 has been read [Set condition] When the input capture was performed according to the edge of the IC pin (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 382 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit Bit 6⎯Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): When ICIF was set to 1 by the input capture according to the edge of the IC pin, ICIE enables and disables the generation of an input capture interrupt. Bit 6 ICIE 0 1 Description Disables the generation of an input capture interrupt Enables the generation of an input capture interrupt (Initial value) Bit 5⎯IC Pin Edge Select (ICEG): ICEG selects the input edge sense of the IC pin. Bit 5 ICEG 0 1 Description Detects the falling edge of the IC pin input Detects the rising edge of the IC pin input (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Noise Cancel ON/OFF (NCon/off): NCon/off selects enable/disable of the noise cancel function of the IC pin. For the noise cancel function, see section 21.3, Noise Cancel Circuit. Bit 4 NCon/off 0 1 Description Disables the noise cancel function of the IC pin Enables the noise cancel function of the IC pin (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 383 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit Bits 2 to 0⎯Frequency Division Clock Output Select (DCS2 to DCS0): DCS2 to DCS0 select eight types of frequency division clocks that are output from the TMOW pin. Bit 2 DCS2 0 Bit 1 DCS1 0 Bit 0 DCS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Outputs PSS, φ/32 Outputs PSS, φ/16 Outputs PSS, φ/8 Outputs PSS, φ/4 Outputs PSW, φW/32 Outputs PSW, φW/16 Outputs PSW, φW/8 Outputs PSW, φW/4 (Initial value) 21.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) Bit : 7 PMR17 0 R/W 6 PMR16 0 R/W 5 PMR15 0 R/W 4 PMR14 0 R/W 3 PMR13 0 R/W 2 PMR12 0 R/W 1 PMR11 0 R/W 0 PMR10 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The switching is specified in a unit of bit. PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00. For details, refer to Port Mode Register 1 in section 10.3.2 Register Configuration. Bit 7⎯P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17): PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for division clock output. Bit 7 PMR17 0 1 Description The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW output function (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 384 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit Bit 6⎯P16/IC Pin Switching (PMR16): PMR16 sets whether the P16/IC pin is used as a P16 I/O pin or an IC pin for the input capture input of the prescalar unit. Bit 6 PMR16 0 1 Description The P16/IC pin functions as a P16 I/O pin The P16/IC pin functions as an IC input function (Initial value) 21.3 Noise Cancel Circuit The IC pin has a built-in a noise cancel circuit. The circuit can be used for noise protection such as remote control receiving. The noise cancel circuit samples the input values of the IC pin twice at an interval of 256 states. If the input values are different, they are assumed to be noise. The IC pin can specify enable/disable of the noise cancel function according to the bit 4 (NCon/off) of the prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR). 21.4 21.4.1 Operation Prescalar S (PSS) The PSS is a 17-bit counter that uses the system clock (φ=fosc) as an input clock and generates the frequency division clocks (φ/131072 to φ/2) of the peripheral function. The low-order 17 bits of the 18-bit free running counter (FRC) correspond to the PSS. The FRC is incremented by one clock. The PSS output is shared by the timer and serial communication interface (SCI), and the frequency division ratio can independently be set by each built-in peripheral function. When reset, the FRC is initialized to H'00000, and starts increment after reset has been released. Because the system clock oscillator is stopped in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, the PSS operation is also stopped. In this case, the FCR is also initialized to H'00000. The FRC cannot be read and written from the CPU. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 385 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW) PSW is a counter that uses the subclock as an input clock. The PSW also generates the input clock of the timer A. In this case, the timer A functions as a clock time base. When reset, the PSW is initialized to H'00, and starts increment after reset has been released. Even if the mode has been shifted to the standby mode*, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and subsleep mode*, the PSW continues the operation as long as the clocks are supplied by the X1 and X2 pins. The PSW can also be initialized to H'00 by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the timer mode register A (TMA) to 11. Note: * When the timer A is in module stop mode, the operation is stopped. Figure 21.2 shows the supply of the clocks to the peripheral function by the PSS and PSW. φ/131072 to φ/2 OSC1 System fosc clock oscillator System clock duty correction circuit φ Prescalar S Timer SCI OSC2 Intermediate speed clock frequency divider φw/4 TMOW pin X1 Subclock oscillator X2 (fx) φw Subclock frequency dividers (1/2, 1/4, and 1/8) φw/128 Prescalar W Timer A CPU ROM RAM Peripheral register I/O port System clock selection Figure 21.2 Clock Supply 21.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count For the count of the stable oscillation stable wait time during the return from the low power consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, see section 4, Power-Down State. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 386 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit 21.4.4 8-bit PWM This 8-bit PWM controls the duty control PWM signal in the conversion cycle 256 states. It counts 7 0 the cycle and the duty cycle at 2 to 2 of the FRC. It can be used for controlling reel motors and loading motors. For details, see section 18, 8-Bit PWM. 21.4.5 8-bit Input Capture Using IC Pin 15 8 This function catches the 8-bit data of 2 to 2 of the FRC according to the edge of the IC pin. It can be used for remote control receiving. For the edge of the IC pin, the rising and falling edges can be selected. The IC pin has a built-in noise cancel circuit. See section 21.3, Noise Cancel Circuit. An interrupt request is generated due to the input capture using the IC pin. Note: Rewriting the ICEG bit, NCon/off bit, or PMR16 bit is incorrectly recognized as edge detection according to the combinations between the state and detection edge of the IC pin and the ICIF bit may be set after up to 384φ seconds. 21.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output The frequency division clock can be output from the TMOW pin. For the frequency division clock, eight types of clocks can be selected according to the DCS2 to DCS0 bits in PCSR. The clock in which the system clock was frequency-divided is output in active mode and sleep mode and the clock in which the subclock was frequency-divided is output in active mode*, sleep mode*, and subactive mode. Note: * When timer A is in module stop mode, no clock is output. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 387 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 21 Prescalar Unit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 388 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.1 Overview The serial communication interface (SCI) can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). 22.1.1 Features SCI1 features are listed below. • Choice of asynchronous or synchronous serial communication mode ⎯ Asynchronous mode • Serial data communication is executed using an asynchronous system in which synchronization is achieved character by character Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA) • A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data communication with a number of processors • Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 • Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors • Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the SI1 pin level directly in case of a framing error ⎯ Clock synchronous mode • Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous communication function • One serial data transfer format Data length: 8 bits • Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 389 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Full-duplex communication capability ⎯ The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously ⎯ Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data • Built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected • Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from SCK1 pin • Four interrupt sources ⎯ Four interrupt sources (transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive error) that can issue requests independently Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 390 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Module data bus RDR1 TDR1 SCMR1 SSR1 SCR1 BRR1 φ Baud rate generator φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 Clock SI1 RSR1 TSR1 SO1 Parity generation Parity check SCK1 SMR1 Transmission/ reception control External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Legend: RSR1 RDR1 TSR1 TDR1 SMR1 SCR1 SSR1 SCMR1 BRR1 : Receive shift register 1 : Receive data register 1 : Transmit shift register 1 : Transmit data register 1 : Serial mode register 1 : Serial control register 1 : Serial status register 1 : Serial interface mode register 1 : Bit rate register 1 Figure 22.1 Block Diagram of SCI Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 391 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal data bus Bus interface Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 22.1 shows the serial pins used by the SCI. Table 22.1 SCI Pins Channel 1 Pin Name Serial clock pin 1 Receive data pin 1 Transmit data pin 1 Symbol SCK1 SI1 SO1 I/O I/O Input Output Function SCI1 clock input/output SCI1 receive data input SCI1 transmit data output 22.1.4 Register Configuration The SCI1 has the internal registers shown in table 22.2. These registers are used to specify asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control the transmitter/receiver. Table 22.2 SCI Registers Channel 1 Name Serial mode register 1 Bit rate register 1 Serial control register 1 Transmit data register 1 Serial status register 1 Receive data register 1 Serial interface mode register 1 Common Module stop control register Abbrev. SMR1 BRR1 SCR1 TDR1 SSR1 RDR1 SCMR1 MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R/W R/W R/W 2 1 Initial Value Address* H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 H'FF H'FF H'D148 H'D149 H'D14A H'D14B H'D14C H'D14D H'D14E H'FFEC H'FFED Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 392 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2 22.2.1 Bit : R/W : Register Descriptions Receive Shift Register 1 (RSR1) 7 — 6 — 5 — 4 — 3 — 2 — 1 — 0 — RSR1 is a register used to receive serial data. The SCI sets serial data input from the SI1 pin in RSR1 in the order received, starting with the LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR1 cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 22.2.2 Receive Data Register 1 (RDR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R RDR1 is a register that stores received serial data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR1 to RDR1 where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR1 is receiveenabled. Since RSR1 and RDR1 function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can be performed. RDR1 is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 393 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.3 Bit : R/W : Transmit Shift Register 1 (TSR1) 7 — 6 — 5 — 4 — 3 — 2 — 1 — 0 — TSR1 is a register used to transmit serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR1 to TSR1, then sends the data to the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0). When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR1 to TSR1 is not performed if the TDRE bit in SSR1 is set to 1. TSR1 cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 22.2.4 Transmit Data Register 1 (TDR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W TDR1 is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR1 is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR1 to TSR1 and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next transmit data to TDR1 during serial transmission of the data in TSR1. TDR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. TDR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 394 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.5 Serial Mode Register 1 (SMR1) Bit : 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : SMR1 is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. SMR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SMR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Communication Mode (C/A): Selects asynchronous mode or clock synchronous mode as the SCI operating mode. Bit 7 C/A 0 1 Description Asynchronous mode Clock synchronous mode (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting. Bit 6 CHR 0 1 Note: * Description 8-bit data 7-bit data* (Initial value) When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR1 is not transmitted, and LSBfirst/MSB-first selection is not available. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 395 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 5⎯Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is used, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the PE bit setting. Bit 5 PE 0 1 Note: * Description Parity bit addition and checking disabled Parity bit addition and checking enabled* When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit. (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Parity Mode (O/E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and checking. The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, when parity bit addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is used. Bit 4 O/E 0 1 Description Even parity* 2 Odd parity* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even. 2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 396 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 3⎯Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode. The STOP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If synchronous mode is set the STOP bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added. Bit 3 STOP 0 1 Description 1 stop bit* 1 2 (Initial value) 2 stop bits* Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. 2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. Bit 2⎯Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode; it is invalid in synchronous mode. For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 22.3.3, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Bit 2 MP 0 1 Description Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 397 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from φ, φ/4, φ/16, and φ/64, according to the setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0. For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see section 22.2.8, Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1). Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φ clock φ/4 clock φ/16 clock φ/64 clock (Initial value) 22.2.6 Serial Control Register 1 (SCR1) Bit : 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : SCR1 is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source. SCR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SCR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and the TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1. Bit 7 TIE 0 1 Note: * Description Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled* Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 398 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 6⎯Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 and the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1. Bit 6 RIE 0 1 Note: * Description Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request disabled* (Initial value) Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request enabled RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0. Bit 5⎯Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI. Bit 5 TE 0 1 Description Transmission disabled* 2 Transmission enabled* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR1 is fixed at 1. 2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR1 and the TDRE flag in SSR1 is cleared to 0. SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the TE bit to 1. Bit 4⎯Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI. Bit 4 RE 0 1 Description Reception disabled* 2 Reception enabled* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE bit to 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 399 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 3⎯Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when receiving with the MP bit in SMR1 set to 1. The MPIE bit setting is invalid in clock synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 MPIE 0 Description Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) [Clearing conditions] 1. When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 1 2. When data with MPB = 1 is received Multiprocessor interrupts enabled* Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR1 are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. Note: * When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR1 to RDR1, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR1, is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR1 is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled. (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request generation if there is no valid transmit data in TDR when the MSB is transmitted. Bit 2 TEIE 0 1 Note: * Description Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request disabled* Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request enabled* (Initial value) TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR1, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 400 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or the serial clock input pin. The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, and in the case of external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). Note that the SCI's operating mode must be decided using SMR1 before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits. For details of clock source selection, see table 22.9. Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 Description Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as I/O 1 port* Clock synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial 1 clock output* 1 Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock 2 output* Clock synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial clock output 1 0 Asynchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock 3 input* Clock synchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial clock input Asynchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock 3 input* Clock synchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial clock input Notes: 1. Initial value. 2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 401 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.7 Serial Status Register 1 (SSR1) Bit : 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. SSR1 is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and multiprocessor bits. SSR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified. SSR1 is initialized to H'84 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and the next serial data can be written to TDR1. Bit 7 TDRE 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 [Setting conditions] 1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0 2. When data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and data can be written to TDR1 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 402 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 6⎯Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR1. Bit 6 RDRF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 Note: RDR1 and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. Bit 5 ORER 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1* [Setting condition] 2 When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1* 1 (Initial value)* 1 Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. 2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR1, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 403 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 4⎯Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 4 FER 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 1 When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1* (Initial value) [Setting condition] When the SCI checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception 2 ends, and the stop bit is 0* Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. 2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 1; the second stop bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Bit 3⎯Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 4 PER 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 1 When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1* (Initial value) [Setting condition] When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does 2 not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR1* Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. 2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 404 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Bit 2⎯Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended. The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified. Bit 2 TEND 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 [Setting conditions] 1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0 2. When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified. Bit 1 MPB 0 1 Note: * Description [Clearing condition] When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received* [Setting condition] When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor format. (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data. The MPBT bit setting is invalid when a multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting, and in synchronous mode. Bit 0 MPBT 0 1 Description Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 405 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1) Bit : 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Initial value : R/W : BRR1 is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR1. BRR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. BRR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Table 22.3 shows sample BRR1 settings in asynchronous mode, and table 22.4 shows sample BRR1 settings in synchronous mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 406 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Table 22.3 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 2 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0 ⎯ N 141 103 207 103 51 25 12 ⎯ ⎯ 1 ⎯ Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 ⎯ ⎯ 0.00 ⎯ 2.097152 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ N 148 108 217 108 54 26 13 6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 2.4576 Error (%) n −0.04 0.21 0.21 0.21 −0.71 1.12 −2.54 −2.54 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 3 ⎯ 1 3 Error (%) n −0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ⎯ 0.00 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ N 212 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 4 2 ⎯ Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 −2.40 −2.40 −2.40 0.00 ⎯ Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 3.6864 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 0 N 64 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 5 ⎯ 2 Error (%) 0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ⎯ 0.00 4 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 0 ⎯ N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 ⎯ 3 ⎯ Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 ⎯ 0.00 ⎯ 4.9152 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) n 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −1.73 0.00 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 Error (%) −0.25 0.16 129 0.16 64 0.16 129 0.16 64 32 15 7 4 3 0.16 −1.38 1.70 1.70 0.00 1.70 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 407 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 6 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 Error (%) −0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 −2.40 −2.40 0.00 −2.40 6.144 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.34 0.00 7.3728 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ 0 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 ⎯ 5 8 Error (%) n −0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ⎯ 0.00 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 ⎯ Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 ⎯ Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 9.8304 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) −0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 −1.73 0.00 10 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 Error (%) −0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 −1.38 1.70 0.00 1.70 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 408 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Table 22.4 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5 k 5k 10 k 25 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1M 2.5 M 5M Legend: Blank: Cannot be set. ⎯: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%. 2 n 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* 4 n ⎯ 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N ⎯ 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0 0* ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 8 n N 10 n N Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 409 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) The BRR1 setting is found from the following equations. • Asynchronous mode: N= φ 64 × 22n −1× B × 10 6 − 1 • Synchronous mode: N= φ 8 × 22n −1 × B × 10 6 − 1 Where B: N: φ: n: Bit rate (bits/s) BRR1 setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255) Operating frequency (MHz) Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3) (See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.) SMR1 Setting n 0 1 2 3 Clock φ φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following equation: Error (%) = { (N + 1) × B × 64 × 22n −1 φ × 10 6 −1 } × 10 Table 22.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 22.6 and 22.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 410 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Table 22.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) φ (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 62500 65536 76800 93750 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 307200 312500 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 411 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Table 22.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) 0.5000 0.5243 0.6144 0.7500 0.9216 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 1.5000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 31250 32768 38400 46875 57600 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 153600 156250 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 Table 22.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) 0.3333 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 333333.3 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2 4 6 8 10 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 412 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register 1 (SCMR1) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 SDIR 0 R/W 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 — 1 — 0 SMIF 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : SCMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select SCI functions. SCMR1 is initialized to H'F2 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3⎯Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. Bit 3 SDIR 0 1 Description TDR1 contents are transmitted LSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR1 LSB-first TDR1 contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR1 MSB-first (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the O/E bit in SMR1. Bit 2 SINV 0 1 Description TDR1 contents are transmitted without modification Receive data is stored in RDR1 without modification TDR1 contents are inverted before being transmitted Receive data is stored in RDR1 in inverted form (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 0⎯Reserved: 1 should not be written in this bit. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 413 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : Initial value : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 MSTP0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 1 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When bit MSTP8 is set to 1, SCI1 operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. Bit 0⎯Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 0 MSTP8 0 1 Description SCI1 module stop mode is cleared SCI1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 414 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.3 22.3.1 Operation Overview The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using SMR1 as shown in table 22.8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit in SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1, as shown in table 22.9. • Asynchronous Mode ⎯ Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits ⎯ Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length) ⎯ Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception ⎯ Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source • When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as the bit rate can be output • When external clock is selected: A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the built-in baud rate generator is not used) • Clock Synchronous Mode ⎯ Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data ⎯ Detection of overrun errors during reception ⎯ Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source • When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip • When external clock is selected: The built-in baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 415 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Table 22.8 SMR1 Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection SMR1 Settings Bit 7 C/A 0 Bit 6 CHR 0 Bit 2 MP 0 Bit 5 PE 0 Bit 3 STOP 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ⎯ ⎯ 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 1 ⎯ 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ⎯ Asynchronous mode (multiprocessor format) 8-bit data 7-bit data No Yes No 7-bit data No Mode Asynchronous mode SCI Transfer Format Data Length 8-bit data Multiprocessor Bit No Parity Bit No Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits Yes 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits Yes 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 8-bit Clock synchronous data mode Table 22.9 SMR1 and SCR1 Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection SMR1 SCR1 Setting Bit 7 C/A 0 Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Clock synchronous mode Internal Mode Asynchronous mode Clock Source Internal SCI Transfer Clock SCK Pin Function SCI does not use SCK pin Outputs clock with same frequency as bit rate External Inputs clock with frequency of 16 times the bit rate Outputs serial clock External Inputs serial clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 416 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the start of communication and followed by one or two stop bits indicating the end of communication. Serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-bycharacter basis. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 22.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSBfirst order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level). In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit. Idle state (mark state) 1 Serial data 0 Start bit LSB D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 MSB D7 0/1 P arity bit 1 1 Stop bit(s) 1 Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bits 1 bit 1 bit, 1 or 2 bits or none One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 22.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 417 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Data Transfer Format Table 22.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected by settings in SMR1. Table 22.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR1 Settings CHR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 PE 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 — — — — MP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 STOP 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 S Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP 11 12 8-bit data S 8-bit data STOP STOP S 8-bit data P STOP S 8-bit data P STOP STOP S 7-bit data STOP S 7-bit data STOP STOP S 7-bit data P STOP S 7-bit data P STOP STOP S 8-bit data MPB STOP S 8-bit data MPB STOP STOP S 7-bit data MPB STOP S 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP Legend: S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiproccesor bit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 418 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Clock Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 22.9. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is at the center of each transmit data bit, as shown in figure 22.3. 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 22.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 419 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Data Transfer Operations ⎯ SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR1 is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR1. When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including initialization, since operation is uncertain. Figure 22.4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. Start initialization [1] Set the clock selection in SCR1. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR1 settings are made. [1] [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR1. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the SO1 and SI1 pins to be used. Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1 (TE, RE bits 0) Set data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1 Set value in BRR1 Wait [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] Figure 22.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 420 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 22.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SO1 pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1 and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR1, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set PCR for the port corresponding to the SO1 pin to 1, clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR1 to 0. Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [1] No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR1 and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR1 No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1 [4] Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 421 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1. 2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output. A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 422 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Figure 22.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 1 Parity Stop bit bit Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 Parity bit Stop bit 0 0/1 1 0 0/1 1 Idle state 1 (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR1 and request TDRE flag cleared to 0 generated in TXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 22.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 423 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) Figures 22.7 and 22.8 show sample flowcharts for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SI1 pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2][3] Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if any of these flags are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the value of the input port corresponding to the SI1 pin. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR1 and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR1, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Read ORER, PER, FER flags in SSR1 [2] PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1 No Yes [3] Error handling (Continued on next page) Read RDRF flag in SSR1 [4] No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1, and clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > [5] Figure 22.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 424 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) [3] Error handling No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0 No PER = 1 Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 425 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal synchronization and starts reception. 2. The received data is stored in RSR1 in LSB-to-MSB order. 3. The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks. a. Parity check: The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity (even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR1. b. Stop bit check: The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. c. Status check: The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from RSR1 to RDR1. If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR1. If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 22.11. 4. If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred. Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be cleared to 0. Table 22.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence Receive Error Overrun error Abbrev. ORER Occurrence Condition When the next data reception is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1 When the stop bit is 0 When the received data differs from the parity (even or odd) set in SMR1 Data Transfer Receive data is not transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 Receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 Receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1 Framing error Parity error FER PER Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 426 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Figure 22.9 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 1 Parity Stop bit bit Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0 0/1 1 0 0/1 0 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt RDR1 data read and RDRF flag request cleared to 0 in generation RXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame ERI interrupt request generated by framing error Figure 22.9 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) 22.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using a multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing transmission lines. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors. Figure 22.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using a multiprocessor format. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 427 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 1. Data Transfer Format There are four data transfer formats. When a multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid. For details, see table 22.10. 2. Clock See the section on asynchronous mode. Transmitting station Serial communication line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) Receiving station C (ID = 03) Receiving station D (ID = 04) H'01 (MPB = 1) ID transmission cycle: receiving station specification H'AA (MPB = 0) Data transmission cycle: data transmission to receiving station specified by ID Legend: MPB : Multiprocessor bit Figure 22.10 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) 3. Data Transfer Operations a. Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Figure 22.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 428 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SO1 pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1. Set the MPBT bit in SSR1 to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR1, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set the port PCR to 1, clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR1 to 0. Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [2] No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR1 and set MPBT bit in SSR1 Clear TDRE flag to 0 No Transmission end? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR1 No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes [4] Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 429 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1. 2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the SO2 pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Multiprocessor bit One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 430 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Figure 22.12 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using a multiprocessor format. Multiprocessor Stop bit bit Multiprocessor Stop bit bit 1 1 Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 Start bit Data D0 D1 D7 0 0/1 1 0 0/1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR1 and TDRE flag cleared to 0 request in TXI interrupt handling general routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 22.12 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) b. Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Figures 22.13 and 22.14 show sample flowcharts for multiprocessor serial reception. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 431 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SI1 pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1. [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR1 and compare it with this station's ID. If the data is not this station's ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station's ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR1. [5] Receive error handling and break detectioon: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are both cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the SI1 in value. Set MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1 Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1 FER ∨ ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR1 No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1 No This station's ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1 [2] Yes [3] FER ∨ ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR1 Yes [4] No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > (Continued on next page) [5] Error handling Figure 22.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 432 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) [5] Error handling No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0 Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 433 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Figure 22.15 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. Start bit Data (ID1) D0 D1 D7 1 Stop 1 MPB bit 1 Start bit Data (Data 1) D0 D1 D7 0 Stop MPB bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) 0 0 MPIE RDRF RDR1 value MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR1 data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ID1 If not this station's ID, MPIE bit is set to 1 again RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR1 retains its state (a) Data does not match station's ID 1 Start bit Data (ID2) D0 D1 D7 1 Stop MPB bit 1 Start bit Data (Data 2) D0 D1 D7 0 Stop MPB bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) 0 0 MPIE RDRF RDR1 value ID1 MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR1 data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ID2 Matches this station's ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt handling routine Data2 MPIE bit set to 1 again (b) Data matches station's ID Figure 22.15 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 434 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode In synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 22.16 shows the general format for synchronous serial communication. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * * Synchronous clock LSB MSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Serial data Don't care Bit 0 Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Figure 22.16 Data Format in Synchronous Communication In synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rising edge of the serial clock. In synchronous serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB and ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. • Data Transfer Format A fixed 8-bit data format is used. No parity or multiprocessor bits are added. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 435 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Clock Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external serial clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details on SCI clock source selection, see table 22.9. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. To perform receive operations in units of one character, select an external clock as the clock source. • Data Transfer Operations ⎯ SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR1 is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the settings of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR1. Figure 22.17 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 436 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) [1] Set the clock selection in SCR1. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE, to 0. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1. [1] [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR1. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the SO1 and SI1 pins to be used. Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1 (TE, RE bits 0) Set data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1 Set value in BRR1 Wait [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] Note: For simultaneous data transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 22.17 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 437 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Serial Data Transmission (Synchronous Mode) Figure 22.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SO1 pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1 and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR1, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [2] No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR1 and clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR1 No TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.18 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 438 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1. 2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock. The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with the MSB (bit 7). 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the SO1 pin maintains its state. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. 4. After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state. Figure 22.19 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission. Transfer direction Synchronous clock Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR1 and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 22.19 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 439 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Serial Data Reception (Synchronous Mode) Figure 22.20 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to synchronous, be sure to check that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor receive operations will be possible. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 440 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The SI1 pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2][3] Receive error handling: IF a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR1, and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by and RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Read ORER flag in SSR1 Yes ORER = 1 No [2] [3] Error handling (Continued below) Read RDRF flag in SSR1 [4] No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1, and clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0 < End > [3] Error handling [5] Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag in SSR1 to 0 < End > Figure 22.20 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 441 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output. 2. The received data is stored in RSR1 in LSB-to-MSB order. After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be transferred from RSR1 to RDR1. If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR1. If a receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 22.11. Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error has been found in the error check. 3. If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. Figure 22.21 shows an example of SCI operation in reception. Synchronous clock Serial data RDRF ORER Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 RXI interrupt request generated RDR1 data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Figure 22.21 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 442 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Synchronous Mode) Figure 22.22 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. Initialization Start transfer [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR1 No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR1 and clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0 [2] [1] SCI initialization: The SO1 pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the SI1 pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1 and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. [3] Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR1, and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR1 and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Read ORER flag in SSR1 Yes [3] Error handling ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR1 No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1, and clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0 [4] No All data received? Yes Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0 [5] < End > Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously. Figure 22.22 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 443 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt (ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request. Table 22.12 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in SCR1. Each kind of interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently. When the TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. When the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Table 22.12 SCI Interrupt Sources Channel 1 Interrupt Source ERI RXI TXI TEI Description Interrupt by receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Interrupt by receive data register full (RDRF) Interrupt by transmit data register empty (TDRE) Interrupt by transmit end (TEND) Low Priority High The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt will have priority for acceptance, and the TDRE flag and TEND flag may be cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be accepted in this case. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 444 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) 22.5 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the SCI. • Relation between Writes to TDR1 and the TDRE Flag The TDRE flag in SSR1 is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from TDR1 to TSR1. When the SCI transfers data from TDR1 to TSR1, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Data can be written to TDR1 regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is written to TDR1 when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR1 will be lost since it has not yet been transferred to TSR1. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR1. • Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR1 is as shown in table 22.13. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR1 to RDR1, and the receive data is lost. Table 22.13 State of SSR1 Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data SSR1 Status Flags RDRF 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Notes: ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 X X X Receive Data Transfer RSR1 to RDR1 X Receive Error Status Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error : Receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1. X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR1 to RDR1. • Break Detection and Processing When framing error (FER) detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the SI1 pin value directly. In a break, the input from the SI1 pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 445 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) • Sending a Break The SO1 pin has a dual function as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) is determined by PDR and PCR. This can be used to send a break. Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is replaced by the value of PDR (the pin does not function as the SO1 pin until the TE bit is set to 1). Consequently, PCR and PDR for the port corresponding to the SO1 pin are first set to 1. To send a break during serial transmission, first clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the SO1 pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the SO1 pin. • Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. • Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock. This is illustrated in figure 22.23. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal basic clock 7 15 0 7 15 0 Receive data Start bit D0 D1 Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Figure 22.23 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 446 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below. M = | (0.5 – 1 2N ) – (L – 0.5) F – | D – 0.5 | N (1 + F) | × 100% ... Formula (1) Where M N D L F : Reception margin (%) : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) : Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) : Frame length (L = 9 to 12) : Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin of 46.875% is given by formula (2) below. When D = 0.5 and F = 0, M = (0.5 – = 46.875% 1 2 × 16 ) × 100% ... Formula (2) However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. • Operation in Case of Mode Transition ⎯ Transmission Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. TSR1, TDR1, and SSR1 are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode depend on the port settings, and becomes high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started by setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence: SSR1 read → TDR1 write → TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after clearing the relevant mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 22.24 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states are shown in figures 22.25 and 22.26. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 447 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ⎯ Reception Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. RSR1, RDR1, and SSR1 are reset. If a transition is made without stopping operation, the data being received will be invalid. To continue receiving without changing the reception mode after the relevant mode is cleared, set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a different receive mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 22.27 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception. All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR1 No [1] [1] Data being transmitted is interrupted. After exiting software standby mode, etc., normal CPU transmission is possible by setting TE to 1, reading SSR1, writing TDR1, and clearing TDRE to 0. [2] If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear them to 0 in the same way. [3] Includes module stop mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode. TEND = 1 Yes TE = 0 [2] No Transition to standby mode, etc. Exit from standby mode, etc. Change operating mode? Yes Initialization [3] No TE = 1 Figure 22.24 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 448 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) End of transmission Transition to standby Exit from standby Start of transmission TE bit SCK1 output pin Port input/output SO1 output pin Port input/output Port High output Start SCI TxD output Stop Port input/output Port High output SCI TxD output Figure 22.25 Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock End of transmission Transition to standby Exit from standby Start of transmission TE bit SCK1 output pin Port input/output SO1 output pin Port input/output Port Marking output SCI TxD output Last TxD bit held Port input/output Port High output* SCI TxD output Note: * Initialized by software standby. Figure 22.26 Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 449 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) Read RDRF flag in SSR1 No [1] [1] Receive data being received becomes invalid. RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR1 RE = 0 Transition to standby mode, etc. Exit from standby mode, etc. Change operating mode? Yes Initialization [2] [2] Includes module stop mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode. No RE = 1 Figure 22.27 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 450 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 23.1 Overview 2 2 This LSI incorporates a 2-channel I C bus interface (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 1 channel). The I C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I C bus (inter-IC bus) 2 interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I C bus differs partly from the Philips configuration, however. 2 Each I C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer data, saving board and connector space. 23.1.1 Features 2 2 • Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format ⎯ I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation 2 ⎯ Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only • Conforms to Philips I C bus interface (I C bus format) 2 2 • Two ways of setting slave address (I C bus format) 2 • Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I C bus format) 2 • Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I C bus format) 2 • Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I C bus format) 2 • Wait function in master mode (I C bus format) 2 ⎯ A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag. • Wait function in slave mode (I C bus format) 2 ⎯ A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible. • Three interrupt sources ⎯ Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I C bus format and address reception after loss of master arbitration) 2 ⎯ Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in 2 slave receive mode (I C bus format) ⎯ Stop condition detection • Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 451 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 • Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins) ⎯ Four pins P26/SCL0, P25/SDA0, P24/SCL1 and P23/SDA1 (normally CMOS pins) function as NMOS-only outputs when the bus drive function is selected. 23.1.2 Block Diagram 2 Figure 23.1 shows a block diagram of the I C bus interface. Figure 23.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. I/O pins are driven only by NMOS and apparently function as NMOS open-drain outputs. However, applicable voltages to input pins depend on the power (Vcc) voltage of this LSI. φ SCL PS Clock control ICCR Noise canceller ICMR Bus state decision circuit Arbitration decision circuit ICSR ICDRT ICDRS ICDRR SDA Output data control circuit Noise canceler Address comparator SAR, SARX Legend: ICCR ICMR ICSR ICDR SAR SARX PS : I2C control register : I2C mode register : I2C status register : I2C data register : Slave address register : Slave address register X : Prescaler 2 Interrupt generator Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of I C Bus Interface Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 452 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal data bus Interrupt request Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 VCC SCLin SCLout SCL SCL SDAin SDAout SDA SDA SCL SDA (Master) This LSI SCLin SCLout SCLin SCLout SDAin SDAout (Slave 1) 2 SDAin SDAout (Slave 2) Figure 23.2 I C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This Chip as Master) 23.1.3 Pin Configuration 2 Table 23.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I C bus interface. Table 23.1 I C Bus Interface Pins Channel 0 Name Serial clock pin Serial data pin Formatless serial clock pin 1 Notes: * Serial clock pin Serial data pin Abbrev.* I/O SCL0 SDA0 SYNCI SCL1 SDA1 Function 2 Input/output IIC0 serial clock input/output Input/output IIC0 serial data input/output Input IIC0 formatless serial clock input Input/output IIC1 serial clock input/output Input/output IIC1 serial data input/output In this section, channel numbers in the abbreviated register names are omitted; SCL0 and SCL1 are collectively referred to as SCL, and SDA0 and SDA1 as SDA. Channel 0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 453 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 SCL SDA Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.1.4 Register Configuration 2 Table 23.2 summarizes the registers of the I C bus interface. Table 23.2 Register Configuration Channel 0* 3 Name I C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register I C bus mode register Slave address register Second slave address register 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Abbrev. ICCR0 ICSR0 ICDR0 ICMR0 SAR0 SARX0 ICCR1 ICSR1 ICDR1 ICMR1 SAR1 SARX1 DDCSWR MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'01 H'00 ⎯ H'00 H'00 H'01 H'01 H'00 ⎯ H'00 H'00 H'01 H'0F H'FF H'FF 1 Address* H'D0E8 H'D0E9 H'D0EE* 2 H'D0EF* H'D0EF* 2 2 2 H'D0EE* H'D158 H'D159 1 I C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register I C bus mode register Slave address register Second slave address register 2 H'D15E* 2 H'D15F* H'D15F* 2 2 H'D15E* 0 and 1 DDC switch register Module stop control register H'D0E5 H'FFEC H'FFED MSTPCRH R/W Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2 2. The registers that can be read from or written to depend on the ICE bit in the I C bus control register. The slave address registers can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the 2 I C bus mode registers can be accessed when ICE = 1. 3. Channel 0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 454 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.2 23.2.1 Register Descriptions I C Bus Data Register (ICDR) Bit : 7 ICDR7 6 ICDR6 — R/W 5 ICDR5 — R/W 4 ICDR4 — R/W 3 ICDR3 — R/W 2 ICDR2 — R/W 1 ICDR1 — R/W 0 ICDR0 — R/W 2 Initial value : R/W : — R/W ICDRR Bit : 7 ICDRR7 Initial value : R/W : — R 6 ICDRR6 — R 5 ICDRR5 — R 4 ICDRR4 — R 3 ICDRR3 — R 2 ICDRR2 — R 1 ICDRR1 — R 0 ICDRR0 — R ICDRS Bit : 7 ICDRS7 Initial value : R/W : — — 6 ICDRS6 — — 5 ICDRS5 — — 4 ICDRS4 — — 3 ICDRS3 — — 2 ICDRS2 — — 1 ICDRS1 — — 0 ICDRS0 — — ICDRT Bit : 7 ICDRT7 Initial value : R/W : — W 6 ICDRT6 — W 5 ICDRT5 — W 4 ICDRT4 — W 3 ICDRT3 — W 2 ICDRT2 — W 1 ICDRT1 — W 0 ICDRT0 — W TDRE, RDRF (Internal flag) Bit : — TDRE Initial value : R/W : 0 — — RDRF 0 — ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read or written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 455 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF. 2 After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I C bus is in transmit mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRT 2 to ICDRS. After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I C bus is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset. The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags. TDRE 0 Description The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot be started [Clearing conditions] (Initial value) 1. When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1) 2. When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is 2 issued with the I C bus format or serial format selected 3. When a stop condition is detected with the I C bus format selected 4. In receive mode (TRS = 0) (A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an acknowledge bit) 1 The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT) [Setting conditions] 1. In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line 2 state after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I C bus format or serial format selected 2. In transmit mode (TRS = 1) when formatless transfer is selected 3. When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS (Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS is empty) 4. When a switch is made from receive mode (TRS = 0) to transmit mode (TRS = 1) after detection of a start condition 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 456 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) RDRF 0 Description The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid [Clearing condition] When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode 1 The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read [Setting condition] When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR (Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0 and RDRF = 0) (Initial value) 2 23.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) Bit : 7 SVA6 6 SVA5 0 R/W 5 SVA4 0 R/W 4 SVA3 0 R/W 3 SVA2 0 R/W 2 SVA1 0 R/W 1 SVA0 0 R/W 0 FS 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bits 7 to 1⎯Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, 2 differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I C bus. Bit 0⎯Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. • I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit 2 • Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only • Formatless transfer (only for channel 0): non-addressing with or without an acknowledge bit and without detection of start or stop condition, for slave mode only. The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 457 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) DDCSWR Bit 6 SW 0 SAR Bit 0 FS 0 SARX Bit 0 FSX 0 1 Operating Mode I C bus format • 2 2 2 SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized (Initial value) SAR slave address recognized SARX slave address ignored SAR slave address ignored SARX slave address recognized SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored I C bus format • • 1 0 I C bus format • • 2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * Synchronous serial format • Formatless transfer (start and stop conditions are not detected) • With acknowledge bit Formatless transfer* (start and stop conditions are not detected) • Without acknowledge bit Do not use this setting when automatically switching the mode from formatless transfer 2 to I C bus format by setting DDCSWR. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 458 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) Bit : 7 SVAX6 6 SVAX5 0 R/W 5 SVAX4 0 R/W 4 SVAX3 0 R/W 3 SVAX2 0 R/W 2 SVAX1 0 R/W 1 SVAX0 0 R/W 0 FSX 1 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is assigned to the same address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1⎯Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0): Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to 2 SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I C bus. Bit 0⎯Format Select X (FSX): Used together with the FX bit in SAR and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. • I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit 2 • Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only • Formatless transfer: non-addressing with or without an acknowledge bit and without detection of start or stop condition, for slave mode only. The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in section 23.2.2, Slave Address Register (SAR). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 459 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 2 23.2.4 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) Bit : 7 MLS 6 WAIT 0 R/W 5 CKS2 0 R/W 4 CKS1 0 R/W 3 CKS0 0 R/W 2 BC2 0 R/W 1 BC1 0 R/W 0 BC0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency and the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bit 7⎯MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or LSB-first. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. 2 Do not set this bit to 1 when the I C bus format is used. Bit 7 MLS 0 1 Description MSB-first LSB-first (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 460 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 6⎯Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data 2 and the acknowledge bit, in master mode with the I C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins (with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the WAIT setting. The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode. Bit 6 WAIT 0 1 Description Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 461 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bits 5 to 3⎯Transfer Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the IICX1 bit (for channel 1) or IICX0 bit (for channel 0) in STCR, select the serial clock frequency in master mode. They should be set according to the required transfer rate. STCR Bits 5, 6 IICX 0 Bit 5 CKS2 0 Bit 4 CKS1 0 Bit 3 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Clock φ/28 φ/40 φ/48 φ/64 φ/80 φ/100 φ/112 φ/128 φ/56 φ/80 φ/96 φ/128 φ/160 φ/200 φ/224 φ/256 Transfer Rate φ = 8 MHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz 143 kHz 100 kHz 83.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 35.7 kHz 31.3 kHz φ = 10 MHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 462 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bits 2 to 0⎯Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be 2 transferred next. With the I C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL line is low. The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. Bit 2 BC2 0 Bit 1 BC1 0 Bit 0 BC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bits/Frame Synchronous Serial Format 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I C Bus Format 9 (Initial value) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 463 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 2 23.2.5 I C Bus Control Register (ICCR) Bit : 7 ICE 6 IEIC 0 R/W 5 MST 0 R/W 4 TRS 0 R/W 3 ACKE 0 R/W 2 BBSY 0 R/W 1 IRIC 0 R/(W)* 0 SCP 1 W Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I C bus interface, enables or disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or disables 2 acknowledgement, confirms the I C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions, and performs interrupt flag confirmation. ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset. Bit 7⎯I C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not the I C bus interface is to be used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, the IIC stops and its internal status is initialized. The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers can be accessed when ICE is 1. 2 2 2 Bit 7 ICE 0 Description I C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function The internal status of the IIC is initialized SAR and SARX can be accessed (Initial value) I C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SDA are driving the bus) ICMR and ICDR can be accessed 2 2 2 2 1 Bit 6⎯I C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I C bus interface to the CPU. Bit 6 IEIC 0 1 Description Interrupts disabled Interrupts enabled (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 464 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bits 5 and 4⎯Master/Slave Select (MST) and Transmit/Receive Select (TRS): MST selects 2 whether the I C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode. 2 TRS selects whether the I C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode. 2 In master mode with the I C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition. Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer. MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows. Bit 5 MST 0 Bit 4 TRS 0 1 1 0 1 Description Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode Master receive mode Master transmit mode (Initial value) Bit 5 MST 0 Description Slave mode [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master mode 1 Master mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition 2) 2. When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition 2) 2 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 465 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Bit 4 TRS 0 Description Receive mode [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition 3) 2. When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of setting condition 3) 3. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master mode 4. When the SW bit in DDCSWR changes from 1 to 0 1 Transmit mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions 3) 2. When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions 3) 3. When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I C bus format slave mode 2 2 2 (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE): Specifies whether the value of the 2 acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when using the I C bus format is to be ignored and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be aborted and error handling, etc., performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is 0, the value of the received acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always 0. When the ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission, regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 0, and the IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 1. Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no significance. Bit 3 ACKE 0 1 Description The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed (Initial value) If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 466 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 2⎯Bus Busy (BBSY): The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I C bus (SCL, SDA) is busy or free. In master mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions. A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition, clearing BBSY to 0. To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. 2 It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I C bus interface must be set to master transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS should both be set to 1 before writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. 2 Bit 2 BBSY 0 Description Bus is free [Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected 1 Bus is busy [Setting condition] When a start condition is detected (Initial value) Bit 1⎯I C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost in master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is detected. IRIC is set at different times depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 23.3.6, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR. IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC. When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously without CPU intervention. 2 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 467 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Bit 1 IRIC 0 Description Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1 (1) Interrupt requested [Setting conditions] • I C bus format master mode 1. When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission) 2. When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1 3. At the end of data transfer (at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock pulse, or at the fall of the 8th transmit/receive clock pulse when using wait insertion) 4. When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost (when the AL flag is set to 1) 5. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) 2 I C bus format slave mode 1. When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches (when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When the general call address is detected (when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 3. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) 4. When a stop condition is detected (when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1) Synchronous serial format 1. At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When a start condition is detected with serial format selected When a condition, other than the above, that sets the TDRE or RDRF flag to 1 is detected 2 2 (Initial value) • • • Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 468 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 When, with the I C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer. When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. The IRTR flag (the DTC start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address 2 match in I C bus format slave mode. Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set. The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in continuous transfer using the DTC. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed. Table 23.3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states. Note: * This LSI does not incorporate DTC. 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 469 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Table 23.3 Flags and Transfer States MST 1/0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 TRS 1/0 1 1 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 1/0 BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 AASX AL 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 AAS 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1 1 0 0 ADZ 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 1 0 0 ACKB State 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 0 0 0/1 Idle state (flag clearing required) Start condition issuance Start condition established Master mode wait Master mode transmit/receive end Arbitration lost SAR match by first frame in slave mode General call address match SARX match Slave mode transmit/receive end (except after SARX match) Slave mode transmit/receive end (after SARX match) Stop condition detected 0 0 0 1/0 1 1/0 1 1 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1/0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0/1 Bit 0⎯Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored. Bit 0 SCP 0 1 Description Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag Reading always returns a value of 1 Writing is ignored (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 470 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.2.6 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR) Bit : 7 ESTP 6 STOP 0 R/(W)* 5 IRTR 0 R/(W)* 4 AASX 0 R/(W)* 3 AL 0 R/(W)* 2 AAS 0 R/(W)* 1 ADZ 0 R/(W)* 0 ACKB 0 R/W 2 Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge confirmation and control. ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bit 7⎯Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP): Indicates that a stop condition has been 2 detected during frame transfer in I C bus format slave mode. Bit 7 ESTP 0 Description No error stop condition [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 • In I C bus format slave mode: Error stop condition detected 2 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer • In other modes: No meaning Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 471 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 6⎯Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP): Indicates that a stop condition has been 2 detected after completion of frame transfer in I C bus format slave mode. Bit 6 STOP 0 Description No normal stop condition [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 • In I C bus format slave mode: Error stop condition detected 2 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer • 2 In other modes:No meaning Bit 5⎯I C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag 2 (IRTR): Indicates that the I C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception for which DTC activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1 at the same time. IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared automatically when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. Note: * This LSI does not incorporate DTC. Bit 5 IRTR 0 Description Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 Continuous transfer state [Setting conditions] • • In I C bus interface slave mode: When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1 In other modes: When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 2 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 472 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 4⎯Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX. AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected. 2 Bit 4 AASX 0 Description Second slave address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1 2. When a start condition is detected 3. In master mode 1 Second slave address recognized [Setting condition] When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX=0 (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The 2 I C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at 2 nearly the same time, if the I C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 3 AL 0 Description Bus arbitration won (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1 1 Arbitration lost [Setting conditions] 1. If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode 2. If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 473 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 2⎯Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected. AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. 2 Bit 2 AAS 0 Description Slave address or general call address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1 3. In master mode 1 Slave address or general call address recognized [Setting condition] When the slave address or general call address is detected when FS = 0 in slave receive mode (Initial value) Bit 1⎯General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00). ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. 2 Bit 1 ADZ 0 Description General call address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1 3. In master mode 1 General call address recognized [Setting condition] If the general call address is detected when FSX = 0 or FS = 0 is selected in the slave receive mode. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 474 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 0⎯Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the transmitting device. When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line (returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal software is read. Bit 0 ACKB 0 Description Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value) Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (signal is 0) 1 Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data (signal is 1) 23.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit : 7 — 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 — 0 — 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 OSROME 0 R/W 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — Initial value : R/W : 0 — STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the IIC operating mode. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Bit 7⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0. Bits 6 and 5⎯I C Transfer Select 1, 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to 2 CKS0 in ICMR of IIC, select the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 23.2.4, I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR). 2 Bit 3⎯Flash Memory Control Resister Enable (FLSHE): This bit selects the control resister of the flash memory. For details, refer to section 7.3.5, Serial/Timer Control Resister (STCR). Bit 2⎯OSD ROM Enable (OSROME): This bit controls the OSD ROM. For details, refer to section 7, ROM. Bits 4, 1, and 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 475 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) Bit : 7 SWE*3 6 SW*3 0 R/W 5 IE*3 0 R/W 4 IF*3 0 R/(W)*1 3 CLR3 1 W*2 2 CLR2 1 W*2 1 CLR1 1 W*2 0 CLR0 1 W*2 Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. 2. Always read as 1. 3. These bits are not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. DDCSWR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls automatic format switching for IIC channel 0 and IIC internal latch clearing. DDCSWR is initialized to H'0F by a reset or in hardware standby mode. Bit 7⎯DDC Mode Switch Enable (SWE): Enables or disables automatic switching from 2 formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer for IIC channel 0. Bit 7 SWE 0 1 Description Disables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer for IIC channel 0. (Initial value) Enables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer for IIC channel 0. 2 2 2 Bit 6⎯DDC Mode Switch (SW): Selects formatless transfer or I C bus format transfer for IIC channel 0. Bit 6 SW 0 Description I C bus format is selected for IIC channel 0. [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1 1 Formatless transfer is selected for IIC channel 0. [Setting condition] When 1 is written after SW = 0 is read 2 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 476 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Bit 5⎯DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Enable Bit (IE): Enables or disables an interrupt request to the CPU when the format for IIC channel 0 is automatically switched. Bit 5 IE 0 1 Description Disables an interrupt at automatic format switching Enables an interrupt at automatic format switching (Initial value) Bit 4⎯DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Flag (IF): Indicates the interrupt request to the CPU when the format for IIC channel 0 is automatically switched. Bit 4 IF 0 Description Interrupt has not been requested [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after IF = 1 is read 1 Interrupt has been requested [Setting condition] When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1 (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0⎯IIC Clear 3 to 0 (CLR3 to CLR0): Control the IIC0 and IIC1 initialization. These are write-only bits and are always read as 1. Writing to these bits generates a clearing signal for the internal latch circuit which initializes the IIC status. The data written to these bits are not held. When initializing the IIC, be sure to use the MOV instruction to write to all the CLR3 to CLR0 bits at the same time; do not use bit manipulation instructions such as BCLR. When reinitializing the module status, the CLR3 to CLR0 bits must be rewritten. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 477 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Bit 3 CLR3 0 Bit 2 CLR2 0 1 Bit 1 CLR1 ⎯ 0 Bit 0 CLR0 ⎯ 0 1 1 ⎯ ⎯ 0 1 1 ⎯ Description The setting is invalid The setting is invalid IIC0 internal latch cleared IIC1 internal latch cleared IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared This setting is invalid 2 23.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the corresponding bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, operation of the corresponding IIC channel is halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. It is not initialized in standby mode. MSTPCRL Bit 7⎯Module Stop (MSTP7): Specifies the module stop mode for IIC channel 0. MSTPCRL Bit 7 MSTP7 0 1 Description Module stop mode for IIC channel 0 is cleared Module stop mode for IIC channel 0 is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 478 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 MSTPCRL Bit 6⎯Module Stop (MSTP6): Specifies the module stop mode for IIC channel 1. MSTPCRL Bit 6 MSTP6 0 1 Description Module stop mode for IIC channel 1 is cleared Module stop mode for IIC channel 1 is set (Initial value) 23.3 23.3.1 2 Operation I C Bus Data Format 2 2 The I C bus interface has serial and I C bus formats. 2 The I C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in figures 23.3(1) and (2). The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. Formatless transfer can be selected only for IIC channel 0. The formatless transfer data is shown in figure 23.3 (3). The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 23.4. 2 Figure 23.5 shows the I C bus timing. The symbols used in figures 23.3 to 23.5 are explained in table 23.4. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 479 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) (1) FS = 0 or FSX = 0 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 P 1 2 Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) Transfer frame count (m = 1 or above) (2) Start condition transmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0 S 1 SLA 7 R/W 1 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/A 1 S 1 SLA 7 R/W 1 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 A/A 1 P 1 Upper: Transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8) Lower: Transfer frame count (m1 and m2 = 1 or above) (3) Formatless (IIC channel 0 only, FS = 0 or FSX = 0) DATA 8 A 1 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) Transfer frame count (m = 1 or above) 2 Figure 23.3 I C Bus Data Formats (I C Bus Formats) FS = 1 and FSX = 1 S 1 DATA 8 1 DATA n m P 1 Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) Transfer frame count (m = 1 or above) 2 Figure 23.4 I C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) 2 SDA SCL 1-7 S SLA 8 R/W 9 A 1-7 DATA 2 8 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A/A P Figure 23.5 I C Bus Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 480 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Table 23.4 I C Bus Data Format Symbols Symbol S SLA R/W A DATA P Description Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is hig Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0 Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the master in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first or LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high 2 23.3.2 2 Master Transmit Operation In I C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations synchronize with the ICDR writing are described below. [1] Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX in STCR, according to the operating mode. [2] Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free. [3] Set bits MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode. [4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and generates the start condition. [5] Then IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. [6] Write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR. After the start condition instruction has been issued and the start condition has been generated, write data to ICDR. If this procedure is not 2 followed, data may not be output correctly. With the I C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been transmitted before the IRIC clearing, it can not be determine the end of transmission. The master device sequentially sends the transmission clock and the data written to ICDR using the timing shown in figure 23.6. The selected slave device (i.e. the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 481 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 [7] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [8] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that ACKB is cleared to 0. When the slave device has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission, and retry the transmit operation. [9] Write the transmit data to ICDR. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other interrupt handling routine. The master device sequentially sends the transmission clock and the data written to ICDR. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the internal clock. [10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [11] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR and confirm ACKB is cleared to 0. When there is data to be transmitted, go to the step [9] to continue next transmission. When the slave device has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is set to 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission. [12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. And write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Start condition Geberation SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) IRIC IRTR ICDR Note: Data write timing in ICDR ICDR Writing prohibited address + R/W [5] 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 R/W [7] A 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 Slave address Data 1 Data 1 ICDR Writing enable User processing [4] Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 (start condition issuance) [6] ICDR write [6] IRIC clear [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously. Figure 23.6 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 482 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.3.3 Master Receive Operation In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an 2 acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data. I C bus interface module consists of the data buffers of ICDRR and ICDRS, so data can be received continuously in master receive mode. For this construction, when stop condition issuing timing delayed, it may occurs the internal contention between stop condition issuance and SCL clock output for next data receiving, and then the extra SCL clock would be outputted automatically or the SDA line would be held to low. And 2 for I C bus interface system, the acknowledge bit must be set to 1 at the last data receiving, so the change timing of ACKB bit in ICSR should be controlled by software. To take measures against these problems, the wait function should be used in master receive mode. The reception procedure and operations with the wait function in master receive mode are described below. [1] Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode, and set the WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. Also clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). [2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output, and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. In order to detect wait operation, set the IRIC flag in ICCR must be cleared to 0. After reading ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been received before the IRIC clearing, it can not be determine the end of reception. [3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If the first frame is the last receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception. [4] Clear the IRIC flag to release from the Wait State. The master device outputs the 9th clock and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal. [5] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag in ICCR and the IRTR flag in ICSR are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. The master device outputs SCL clock to receive next data. [6] Read ICDR. [7] Clear the IRIC flag to detect next wait operation. From clearing of the IRIC flag to negation of a wait as described in step [4] (and [9]) to clearing of the IRIC flag as described in steps [5], [6], and [7], must be performed within the time taken to transfer one byte. [8] The IRIC flags set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If this frame is the last receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception. [9] Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to cancel wait operation. The master device outputs the 9th clock and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal. Data can be received continuously by repeating step [5] to [9]. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 483 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 [10] Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 so as to return “No acknowledge” data. Also set the TRS bit to 1 to switch from receive mode to transmit mode. [11] Clear IRIC flag to 0 to release from the Wait State. [12] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. [13] Clear the WAIT bit to 0 to switch from wait mode to no wait mode. Read ICDR and the IRIC flag to 0. Clearing of the IRIC flag should be after the WAIT = 0. [14] Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Master transmit mode Master receive mode SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) 9 A 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 6 Bit2 7 Bit1 8 Bit0 [3] A 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 Data 1 SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR [5] Data 2 Data 1 User processing [2] IRIC clearance [1] TRS cleared to 0 [2] ICDR read (dummy read) WAIT set to 1 ACKB cleared to 0 [4] IRC clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 1) [7] IRIC clearance These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously. Figure 23.7 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 484 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) Data 2 SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 2 8 Bit0 [8] A 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 6 Bit2 7 Bit1 8 Bit0 [8] A 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 Data 4 [5] Data 3 [5] User processing [9] IRIC clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 2) [7] IRIC clearance [9] IRIC Clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 3) [7] IRIC clearance These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously. Figure 23.8 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) Continued 23.3.4 Slave Receive Operation In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The receive procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below. 1. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according to the operating mode. 2. A start condition output by the master device sets the BBSY flag to 1 in ICCR. 3. After the slave device detects the start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address, it functions as the slave device designated as the master device. If the 8th bit data (R/W) is 0, TRS bit in ICCR remains 0 and executes slave receive operation. 4. At the ninth clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR. If IEIC is 1 in ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. If the RDRF internal flag is 0, it is set to 1 and continuous reception is performed. If the RDRF internal flag is 1, the slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until it has read the data in ICDR. 5. Read ICDR and clear IRIC to 0 in ICCR. At this time, the RDRF flag is cleared to 0. Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated to receive data continuously. When a stop condition is detected (a low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 485 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Start condition issurance SCL (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 Slave address R/W [4] A Data 1 RDRF IRIC Interrupt request generated ICDRS Address + R/W ICDRR Address + R/W User processing [5] Read ICDR [5] Clear IRIC Figure 23.9 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 486 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) SCL (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Master output) 2 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Data 1 SDA (Slave output) [4] Data 2 [4] A A RDRF IRIC Interrupt request generated Data 1 Interrupt request generated Data 2 ICDRS ICDRR Data 1 Data 2 User processing [5] Read ICDR [5] Clear IRIC Figure 23.10 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 487 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, and the master device outputs the transmit clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmit procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. 1. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according to the operating mode. 2. After the slave device detects a start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address, at the ninth clock pulse the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and if the IEIC bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the eighth data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1 in ICCR, automatically causing a transition to slave transmit mode. The slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR. 3. Clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write data in ICDR. The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. Clear IRIC to 0, then write the next data in ICDR. The slave device outputs the written data serially in step with the clock output by the master device, with the timing shown in figure 23.11. 4. When one frame of data has been transmitted, at the rise of the ninth transmit clock pulse IRIC is set to 1 in ICCR. If the TDRE internal flag is 1, the slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR. The master device drives SDA low at the ninth clock pulse to acknowledge the data. The acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, and can be used to check whether the transfer was carried out normally. If TDRE internal flag is set to 0, the data written in ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, then transmission starts and TDRE internal flag and IRIC and IRTR flags are all set to 1 again. 5. To continue transmitting, clear IRIC to 0, then write the next transmit data in ICDR. At this time, the TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0. Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated to transmit continuously. To end the transmission, write H'FF in ICDR so that the SDA may be freed on the slave side. When a stop condition is detected (a low-tohigh transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag will be cleared to 0 in ICCR. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 488 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Slave receive mode SCL (Master output) SCL (Slave output) Slave transmit mode 2 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 SDA (Slave output) SDA (Master output) R/W A [2] Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Data 1 A Data 2 TDRE [3] Interrupt request generated Data 2 IRIC Interrupt request generated Interrupt request generated Data 1 ICDRT ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 User processing [3] Clear IRIC [3] Write ICDR [3] Write ICDR [5] Clear IRIC [5] Write ICDR Figure 23.11 Example of Timing in Slave Transmit Mode (MLS = 0) 23.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the internal clock. Figure 23.12 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 489 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) (a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait) SCL 7 8 9 1 2 SDA 7 8 A 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) (b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted) SCL 8 9 1 SDA 8 A 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) (c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format) SCL 7 8 1 SDA 7 8 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) Figure 23.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 490 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 2 23.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Transfer to I C Bus Format Transfer Setting the SW bit in DDCSWR to 1 selects the IIC0 formatless transfer operation. When an SCL 2 falling edge is detected, the operating mode automatically switches from formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer (slave mode). For automatic switching to be possible, the following four conditions must be observed: 1. The same data pin (SDA) is used in common for formatless transfer and I C bus format transfer. 2. Separate clock pins are used for formatless transfer and I C bus format transfer (SYNC1 for 2 formatless, and SCL for I C bus format) 3. The SCL pin is kept high during formatless transfer. 4. Register bits other than the TRS bit in ICCR are set to appropriate values so that I C bus format transfer can be performed. The operating mode is automatically switched from formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer when an SCL falling edge is detected and the SW bit in DDCSWR is automatically cleared to 0. 2 To switch the mode from I C bus format transfer to formatless transfer, set the SW bit to 1 by software. During formatless transfer, do not modify the bits that control the I C bus interface operating 2 mode, such as the MSL or TRS bit. When switching from the I C bus format transfer to formatless transfer, specify the formatless transfer direction (transmit or receive) by setting or clearing the 2 TRS bit, then set the SW bit to 1. After the automatic switching from formatless transfer to I C bus format transfer (slave mode), the TRS bit is automatically cleared to 0 to enter the slave address receive wait state. If an SCL falling edge is detected during formatless transfer, the I C does not wait for the stop condition but switches the operating mode immediately. Note: The IIC0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 491 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.3.8 Noise Canceler The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched internally. Figure 23.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit. The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held. Sampling clock SCL or SDA input signal C D Latch Q D C Q Latch Match detector Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock period Sampling clock Figure 23.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler 23.3.9 Sample Flowcharts 2 Figures 23.14 to 23.17 show sample flowcharts for using the I C bus interface in each mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 492 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Start Initialize Read BBSY in ICCR No BBSY = 0? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCR Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [3] Select master transmit mode. [1] Initialize [2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines. [4] Start condition issuance Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR ACKB = 0? Yes Transmit mode? Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No No No [5] Wait for a start condition generation [6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W). (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) [7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. [8] Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from slave device. Master receive mode [9] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) [10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR [11] Test for end of transfer No End of transmission or ACKB = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End [12] Stop condition issuance Figure 23.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 493 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Last receive ? No Clear IRIC in ICCR [4] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock. (to end the wait insertion) [5] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (9th clock risig edge) Yes [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. After reading ICDR, please clear IRIC immediately. [1] Select receive mode [3] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (8th clock falling edge) Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [6] Read the received data. [7] Clear IRIC Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Yes Last receive ? No Read IRIC in ICCR [8] Wait for the next data to be received. (8th clock falling edge) [9] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock. (to end the wait insertion) Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Set TRS = 1 in ICCR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No [10] Set ACKB = 1 so as to return No acknowledge, or set TRS = 1 so as not to issue Extra clock. [11] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock. (to end the wait insertion) [12] Wait for 1 byte to be received. IRIC = 1? Yes Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End [14] Stop condition issuance. [13] Set WAIT = 0. Read ICDR. Clear IRIC. (Note: After setting WAIT = 0, IRIC should be cleared to 0) Figure 23.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 494 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Start Initialize Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read AAS and ADZ flags in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ = 0? Yes Read TRS bit in ICCR TRS = 0? Yes Last receive? No Read ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [4] IRIC = 1? Yes [3] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [7] IRIC = 1? Yes Read ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR End [8] [8] Read the last receive data. [5] [4] Wait for the transfer to end. [6] [5] Set acknowledge data for the last receive. [6] Start the last receive. [7] Wait for the transfer to end. [2] Wait for 1 byte to be received (slave address) Yes No Slave transmit mode No General call address processing *Description omitted [2] [1] [3] [1] Select slave receive mode. Figure 23.16 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 495 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Slave transmit mode Clear IRIC in ICCR [1] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. [2] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [1] [3] Test for end of transfer. [4] Select slave receive mode. [5] Dummy read (to release the SCL line). [2] IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB bit in ICSR No End of transmission (ACKB = 1)? [3] Yes Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Read ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR End [4] [5] Figure 23.17 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example) 23.3.10 Initializing Internal Status The I C can forcibly initialize the I C internal status when a dead lock occurs during communication. Initialization is enabled by (1) setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits in DDCSWR, or (2) clearing the ICE bit. For details on CLR3 to CLR0 settings, refer to section 23.2.8, DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR). (1) Initialized Status This function initializes the following: ⎯ TDRE and RDRF internal flags ⎯ Transmit/receive sequencer and internal clock counter ⎯ Internal latches (wait, clock, or data output) which holds the levels output from the SCL and SDA pins This function does not initialize the following: ⎯ Register contents (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, DDCSWR, and STCR) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 496 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 2 2 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 ⎯ Internal latches which holds the register read information to set or clear the flags in ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, and DDCSWR ⎯ Bit counter (BC2 to BC0) value in ICMR ⎯ Sources of interrupts generated (interrupts that has been transferred to the interrupt controller) (2) Notes on Initialization ⎯ Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared; clear them by software if necessary. ⎯ Other register flags cannot be assumed to be cleared, either; clear them by software if necessary. ⎯ When initialization is specified by the DDCSWR settings, the data written to the CLR3 to 2 CLR0 bits are not held. When initializing the I C, be sure to use the MOV instruction to write to all the CLR3 to CLR0 bits at the same time; do not use bit manipulation instructions such as BCLR. When reinitializing the module status, all the CLR3 to CLR0 bits must be rewritten to at the same time. ⎯ If a flag is cleared during transfer, the I C module stops transfer immediately, and releases the control of the SCL and SDA pins. Before starting again, set the registers to appropriate values to make a correct communication if necessary. 2 This module initializing function does not modify the BBSY bit value, but in some cases, depending on the SCL and SDA pin status and the release timing, the signal waveforms at the SCL and SDA pins may indicate the stop condition, and accordingly the BBSY bit may be cleared. Other bits or flags may be affected in the same way by module initialization. To avoid these problems, take the following procedure to initialize the I C: 1. Initialize the I C by setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits or the ICE bit. 2. Execute a stop condition issuing instruction to clear the BBSY bit to 0 (writing 0 to BBSY and SCP), and wait for two cycles of the transfer clock. 3. Initialize the I C again by setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits or the ICE bit. 4. Set the registers in I C to appropriate values. 2 2 2 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 497 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 23.4 Usage Notes 1. In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that the SCL may briefly remain at a high level immediately after BBSY is cleared to 0. 2. Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these conditions when reading or writing to ICDR. a. Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS) b. Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR) 3. Table 23.5 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance. Table 23.5 I C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output) Item SCL output cycle time SCL output high pulse width SCL output low pulse width SDA output bus free time Start condition output hold time Retransmission start condition output setup time Stop condition output setup time Data output setup time (master) Data output setup time (slave) Data output hold time Note: * tSDAHO 6 tcyc when IICX is 0, 12 tcyc when 1. Symbol tSCLO tSCLHO tSCLLO tBUFO tSTAHO tSTASO tSTOSO tSDASO Output Timing 28 tcyc to 256 tcyc 0.5 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc 1 tSCLO 0.5 tSCLO +2 tcyc 1 tSCLLO –3 tcyc 1 tSCLL –(6 tcyc or 12 tcyc*) 3 tcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Figure 31.8 (reference) 2 4. SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing 2 therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in table 31.6. Note that the I C bus interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 498 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 5. The I C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for high2 speed mode). In master mode, the I C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds 2 the time determined by the input clock of the I C bus interface, the high period of SCL is extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in table 23.6. Table 23.6 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values Time Indication [ns] I C Bus Specification (Max.) Normal mode High-speed mode 1 17.5 tcyc Normal mode High-speed mode 1000 300 1000 300 2 2 IICX 0 tcyc Indication 7.5 tcyc φ = 8 MHz 937 ← ← ← φ = 10 MHz 750 ← ← ← 6. The I C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns 2 and 300 ns. The I C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tcyc, as shown in 2 table 23.5. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I C bus interface specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 23.7 shows output timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of rise and fall times. 2 tBUFO fails to meet the I C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 μs) between issuance of a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing 2 permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I C bus. 2 tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I C bus interface specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices whose input 2 timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I C bus. 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 499 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 7. Precautions on reading ICDR at the end of master receive mode When terminating the master receive mode, set TRS bit to 1, and select "write" for ICCR BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0. This forces to move SDA from low to high level when SCL is at high level, thereby generating the stop condition. Now you can read received data from ICDR. If, however, any data is remaining on the buffer, received data on ICDRS is not transferred to ICDR, thus you won't be able to read the second byte data. When it is required to read the second byte data, issue the stop condition from the master receive state (TRS bit is 0). Before reading data from ICDR register, make sure that BBSY bit on ICCR register is 0, stop condition is generated and bus is made free. If you try to read received data after the stop condition issue instruction (setting ICCR's BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 to write) has been executed but before the actual stop condition is generated, clock may not be appropriately signaled when the next master sending mode is turned on. Thus, reasonable care is needed for determining when to read the received data. After the master receive is complete, if you want to re-write IIC control bit (such as clearing MST bit) for switching the sending/receiving mode or modifying settings, it must be done during period (a) indicated in figure 23.18 (after making sure ICCR register BBSY bit is cleared to 0). Start condition Stop condition (a) SDA SCL Internal clock BBSY bit Master receive mode ICDR read inhibit period Bit 0 8 A 9 The stop condition issue instruction (BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 set to write) is executed Generation of the stop condition is checked (BBSY = 0 is set to read) Start condition is issued Figure 23.18 Precautions on Reading the Master Receive Data Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 500 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 8. Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission Figure 23.19 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. After start condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit data to ICDR. [1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer IRIC = 1 ? Yes Clear IRIC in ICSR Start condition issuance? Yes Read SCL pin No [2] No No [1] [2] Determine wheter SCL is low [3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission Other processing [4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not [5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W) SCL = Low ? Yes Write BBSY = 1, SCP = 0 (ICSR) Note: Program so that processing instruction [3] to [5] is executed continuously. [3] [4] IRIC = 1 ? Yes Write transmit data to ICDR [5] No Start condition (retransmission) SCL 9 SDA ACK bit 7 IRIC [5] ICDR write (next transmit data) [4] IRIC determination [3] Issue restart condition instruction for retransmission [2] Determination of SCL=Low [1] IRIC determination Figure 23.19 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for Retransmission Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 501 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 9. Notes on I C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance If the rise time of the 9th SCL acknowledge exceeds the specification because the bus load capacitance is large, or if there is a slave device of the type that drives SCL low to effect a wait, issue the stop condition instruction after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as shown below. 9th clock VIH High period secured 2 SCL As waveform rise is late, SCL is detected as low SDA Stop condition IRIC [1] Determination of SCL = low [2] Stop condition instruction issuance Figure 23.20 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 502 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Table 23.7 I C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf) Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] tSr/tSf Influence (Max.) Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode Normal mode High-speed mode 2 2 Item tSCLHO tcyc Indication 0.5 tSCLO (–tSr) 0.5 tSCLO (–tSf) 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc (–tSr) 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc (–tSf) 1 tSCLO (–tSr) 0.5 tSCLO +2 tcyc (–tSr) 1 tSCLLO*3 –3 tcyc (-tSr) 1 tSCLL*3–12 tcyc*2 (–tSr) 3 tcyc I2C Bus Specification (Min.) φ = 8 MHz 4000 600 4700 1300 4700 1300 4000 600 4700 600 4000 600 250 100 250 100 0 0 ← ← ← ← 3875*1 825*1 4625 875 9000 2200 4250 1200 3325 625 2200 −500*1 375 ↑ φ = 10 MHz ← ← ← ← 3900*1 850*1 4650 900 9000 2200 4200 1150 3400 700 2500 −200*1 300 ↑ −1000 −300 −250 −250 −1000 −300 −250 −250 −1000 −300 −1000 −300 −1000 −300 −1000 −300 0 0 tSCLLO tBUFO tSTAHO tSTASO tSTOSO tSDASO (master) tSDASO (slave) tSDAHO Notes: 1. Does not meet the I C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate; (d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing. The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the 2 maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I C bus interface specifications are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions. 2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (tSCLL – 6 tcyc). 2 3. Calculated using the I C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; highspeed mode: 1300 ns min.). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 503 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 10. Notes on WAIT Function ⎯ Conditions to cause this phenomenon When both of the following conditions are satisfied, the clock pulse of the 9th clock could be outputted continuously in master mode using the WAIT function due to the failure of the WAIT insertion after the 8th clock fall. (1) Setting the WAIT bit of the ICMR register to 1 and operating WAIT, in master mode (2) If the IRIC bit of interrupt flag is cleared from 1 to 0 between the fall of the 7th clock and the fall of the 8th clock. ⎯ Error phenomenon Normally, WAIT State will be cancelled by clearing the IRIC flag bit from 1 to 0 after the fall of the 8th clock in WAIT State. In this case, if the IRIC flag bit is cleared between the 7th clock fall and the 8th clock fall, the IRIC flag clear- data will be retained internally. Therefore, the WAIT State will be cancelled right after WAIT insertion on 8th clock fall. ⎯ Restrictions Please clear the IRIC flag before the rise of the 7th clock (the counter value of BC2 through BC0 should be 2 or greater), after the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rise of the 9th clock. If the IRIC flag-clear is delayed due to the interrupt or other processes and the value of BC counter is turned to 1 or 0, please confirm the SCL pins are in L’ state after the counter value of BC2 through BC0 is turned to 0, and clear the IRIC flag. (See figure 23.21.) ASD SCL BC2–BC0 IRIC (operation example) A 9 0 1 7 2 6 Transmit/receive data A 7 2 1 8 SCL = ‘L’ confirm 0 IRIC clear 9 Transmit/receive data 1 7 2 6 3 5 When BC2-0 ≥ 2 IRIC clear 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear unavailable Figure 23.21 IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 504 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 11. Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode In a transmit operation in the slave mode of the I C bus interface, do not read the ICDR register or read or write to the ICCR register during the period indicated by the shaded portion in figure 23.22. Normally, when interrupt processing is triggered in synchronization with the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle, the period in question has already elapsed when the transition to interrupt processing takes place, so there is no problem with reading the ICDR register or reading or writing to the ICCR register. To ensure that the interrupt processing is performed properly, one of the following two conditions should be applied. (1) Make sure that reading received data from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the ICCR register, is completed before the next slave address receive operation starts. (2) Monitor the BC2 to BC0 counter in the ICMR register and, when the value of BC2 to BC0 is 000 (8th or 9th clock cycle), allow a waiting time of at least 2 transfer clock cycles in order to involve the problem period in question before reading from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the ICCR register. Waveforms if problem occurs SDA SCL TRS R/W 8 Address received Period when ICDR reads and ICCR reads and writes are prohibited (6 system clock cycles) A 9 Data transmission ICDR write Bit 7 2 Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Figure 23.22 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 505 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 12. Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode From the detection of the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or of a stop condition to when the rising edge of the next SCL pin signal is detected (the period indicated as (a) in figure 23.23) 2 in the slave mode of the I C bus interface, the value set in the TRS bit in the ICCR register is effective immediately. However, at other times (indicated as (b) in figure 23.23) the value set in the TRS bit is put on hold until the next rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or stop condition is detected, rather than taking effect immediately. This results in the actual internal value of the TRS bit remaining 1 (transmit mode) and no acknowledge bit being sent at the 9th clock cycle address receive completion in the case of an address receive operation following a restart condition input with no stop condition intervening. When receiving an address in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the period indicated as (a) in figure 23.23. To cancel the holding of the SCL bit low by the wait function in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 and then perform a dummy read of the ICDR register. Restart condition (a) SDA SCL TRS 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (b) A 9 Data transmission Address reception TRS bit setting hold time ICDR dummy read TRS bit set Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Figure 23.23 TRS Bit Setting Timing in Slave Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 506 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 13. Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode The I C bus interface recognizes the data in transmit/receive frame as an address when arbitration is lost in master mode and a transition to slave receive mode is automatically carried out. When arbitration is lost not in the first frame but in the second frame or subsequent frame, transmit/receive data that is not an address is compared with the value set in the SAR or SARX register as an address. If the receive data matches with the address in the SAR or SARX 2 register, the I C bus interface erroneously recognizes that the address call has occurred. (See figure 23.24.) In multi-master mode, a bus conflict could happen. When The I C bus interface is operated in master mode, check the state of the AL bit in the ICSR register every time after one frame of data has been transmitted or received. When arbitration is lost during transmitting the second frame or subsequent frame, take avoidance measures. • Arbitration is lost • The AL flag in ICSR is set to 1 C bus interface (Master transmit mode) I2 S SLA R/W A DATA1 Transmit data does not match DATA2 A DATA3 A 2 2 Transmit data match Transmit timing match Other device (Master transmit mode) S SLA R/W A Data contention I2C bus interface (Slave receive mode) S SLA R/W A SLA R/W A DATA4 A • Receive address is ignored • Automatically transferred to slave receive mode • Receive data is recognized as an address • When the receive data matches to the address set in the SAR or SARX register, the I2C bus interface operates as a slave device Figure 23.24 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost Though it is prohibited in the normal I C protocol, the same problem may occur when the MST bit is erroneously set to 1 and a transition to master mode is occurred during data transmission or reception in slave mode. In multi-master mode, pay attention to the setting of the MST bit when a bus conflict may occur. In this case, the MST bit in the ICCR register should be set to 1 according to the order below. (a) Make sure that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 and the bus is free before setting the MST bit. (b) Set the MST bit to 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 507 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 2 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 (c) To confirm that the bus was not entered to the busy state while the MST bit is being set, check that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 immediately after the MST bit has been set. 14. Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception ⎯ Conditions to cause this failure The IRIC flag is set to 1 when both of the following conditions are satisfied. • 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data and the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1 • Rising edge of the 9th transmit/receive clock is input to the SCL pin When the above two conditions are satisfied in slave receive mode, an unnecessary interrupt occurs. Figure 23.25 shows the note on interrupt occurrence in slave mode after receiving 1 as the acknowledge bit (ACKB = 1). (1) For the last transmit data in master transmit mode or slave transmit mode, 1 is received as the acknowledge bit. If the ACKE bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this time, the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1. (2) After switching to slave receive mode, the start condition is input, and address reception is performed next. (3) Even if the received address does not match the address set in SAR or SARX, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock, thus causing an interrupt to occur. Note that if the slave address matches, an interrupt is to be generated at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock as normal operation, so this is not erroneous operation. ⎯ Restriction In a transmit operation of the I C bus interface module, carry out the following countermeasures. (1) After 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR to 0 to clear the ACKB bit to 0. (2) To enable acknowledge bit reception afterwards, set the ACKE bit to 1 again. 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 508 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Master transmit mode or slave transmit mode Stop condition Start condition Slave reception mode (2) Address that does not match is received. SDA N Address A Data SCL 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 ACKB bit IRIC flag Countermeasure: Clear the ACKE bit to 0 to clear the ACKB bit. (3) Unnecessary interrupt occurs (received address is invalid). Stop condition detection (1) Acknowledge bit is received and the ACKB bit is set to 1. Figure 23.25 Note on Interrupt Occurrence in Slave Mode after ACKB = 1 Reception 15. Notes on TRS Bit Setting and ICDR Register Access ⎯ Conditions to cause this failure Low-fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled incorrectly when the following conditions are satisfied. (1) Master mode Figure 23.26 shows the notes on ICDR reading (TRS = 1) in master mode. (1) When previously received 2-bytes data remains in ICDR unread (ICDRS are full). (2) Reads ICDR register after switching to transmit mode (TRS = 1). (RDRF = 0 state) (3) Sets to receive mode (TRS = 0), after transmitting Rev.1 frame of issued start condition by master mode. (2) Slave mode Figure 23.27 shows the notes on ICDR writing (TRS = 0) in slave mode. (1) Writes ICDR register in receive mode (TRS = 0), after entering the start condition by slave mode (TDRE = 0 state). Address match with Rev.1 frame, receive 1 by R/W bit, and switches to transmit mode (TRS = 1). When these conditions are satisfied, the low fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled without ICDR register access after Rev.1 frame is transferred. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 509 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 ⎯ Restriction Please carry out the following countermeasures when transmitting/receiving via the IIC bus interface module. (1) Please read the ICDR registers in receive mode, and write them in transmit mode. (2) In receiving operation with master mode, please issue the start condition after clearing the internal flag of the IIC bus interface module, using CLR3 to CLR0 bit of the DDCSWR register on bus-free state (BBSY = 0). Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer Stop condition Start condition Cancel condition of SCL = Low fixation is set. SDA SCL TRS bit RDRF bit ICDRS data full A 8 9 1 2 3 Address 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 Data 1 2 3 (3) TRS = 0 (2) RDRF = 0 (1) ICDRS data full ICDR read Detection of 9th clock rise (TRS = 1) TRS = 0 setting Figure 16.26 Notes on ICDR Reading with TRS = 1 Setting in Master Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 510 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer Stop condition Start condition Cancel condition of SCL = Low fixation 2 SDA SCL TRS bit TDRE bit 8 A 9 1 2 3 Address 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 1 2 Data 3 4 (2) TRS = 1 (1) TDRE = 0 ICDR write TRS = 0 setting Automatic TRS = 1 setting by receiving R/W = 1 Figure 16.27 Notes on ICDR Writing with TRS = 0 Setting in Slave Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 511 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 23 I C Bus Interface (IIC) 2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 512 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Section 24 A/D Converter 24.1 Overview This LSI incorporates a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter that allows up to 12 analog input channels to be selected. 24.1.1 Features A/D converter has the following features. • 10-bit resolution • 12 input channels • Sample and hold function • Choice of software, hardware (internal signal) triggering or external triggering for A/D conversion start. • A/D conversion end interrupt request generation Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 513 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 24.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. Internal data bus Reference Voltage AVCC Successive approximation register A D R A H R 10-bit D/A A D C S R A D C R AVSS Hardware control circuit A D T S R AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB ADTRG (HSW timing generator) Vref Analog multiplexer + Chopper type comparator Control circuit DFG ADTRG Sample-andhold circuit φ/2 φ/4 Interrupt request Legend: ADR : Software trigger A/D result register AHR : Hardware trigger A/D result register ADCR : A/D control register ADCSR: A/D control/status register ADTSR: A/D trigger selection register ADTRG, DFG : Hardware trigger ADTRG : A/D external trigger input Figure 24.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 514 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 24.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. Table 24.1 A/D Converter Pins Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 Analog input pin 8 Analog input pin 9 Analog input pin A Analog input pin B A/D external trigger input pin Abbrev. AVCC AVSS AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB ADTRG I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Function Analog block power supply and A/D conversion reference voltage Analog block ground and A/D conversion reference voltage Analog input channel 0 Analog input channel 1 Analog input channel 2 Analog input channel 3 Analog input channel 4 Analog input channel 5 Analog input channel 6 Analog input channel 7 Analog input channel 8 Analog input channel 9 Analog input channel A Analog input channel B External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 515 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.1.4 Register Configuration Table 24.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter. Table 24.2 A/D Converter Registers Name Software trigger A/D result register H Software trigger A/D result register L Hardware trigger A/D result register H Hardware trigger A/D result register L A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D trigger selection register Port mode register 0 Abbrev. ADRH ADRL AHRH AHRL ADCR ADCSR ADTSR PMR0 R/W R R R R R/W R (W)* R/W R/W 1 Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value Address* H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'40 H'01 H'FC H'00 H'D130 H'D131 H'D132 H'D133 H'D134 H'D135 H'D136 H'FFCD 2 Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag. Bits 3 to 1 are read-only. 2. Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 516 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.2 24.2.1 Register Descriptions Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR) ADRH Bit : 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 — 0 — ADRL 4 — 0 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0 Initial value : R/W : The software-triggered A/D result register (ADR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D conversion started by software. The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of software-triggered A/D conversion, the 10-bit result data is transferred to ADR and the data is retained until the next softwaretriggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are stored in the upper bytes (bits 15 to 8) of ADR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes (bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0. ADR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADR value during A/D conversion is not fixed. The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 24.3, Interface to Bus Master. ADR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode. 24.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR) AHRH Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 — 0 — AHRL 4 — 0 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2 AHR1 AHR0 The hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D conversion started by hardware (internal signal: ADTRG and DFG) or by external trigger input (ADTRG). The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, the 10-bit result data is transferred to AHR and the data is retained until the next hardware- or external- triggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are stored in the upper bytes (bits 15 to 8) of AHR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes (bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 517 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter AHR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the AHR value during A/D conversion is not fixed. The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 24.3, Interface to Bus Master. AHR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode. 24.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CK 0 R/W 6 — 1 — 5 HCH1 0 R/W 4 HCH0 0 R/W 3 SCH3 0 R/W 2 SCH2 0 R/W 1 SCH1 0 R/W 0 SCH0 0 R/W ADCR is a register that sets A/D conversion speed and selects analog input channel. When executing ADCR setting, make sure that the SST and HST flags in ADCSR is set to 0. ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode. Bit 7⎯Clock Select (CK): Sets A/D conversion speed. Bit 7 CK 0 1 Description Conversion frequency is 266 states Conversion frequency is 134 states (Initial value) Note: A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST, or when HST is set to 1. The conversion period is the time from when this start flag is set until the flag is cleared at the end of conversion. Actual sample-and-hold takes place (repeatedly) during the conversion frequency shown in figure 24.2. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 518 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter States Instruction execution WRITE MOV.B Start flag Conversion frequency Conversion period (134 or 266 states) Interrupt request flag IRQ sampling (CPU) Note: IRQ sampling; When conversion ends, the start flag is cleared and the interrupt request flag is set. The CPU recognizes the interrupt in the last execution state of an instruction, and executes interrupt exception handling after completing the instruction. Figure 24.2 Internal Operation of A/D Converter Bit 6⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 5 and 4⎯Hardware Channel Select (HCH1, HCH0): These bits select the analog input channel that is converted by hardware triggering or triggering by an external input. Only channels AN8 to ANB are available for hardware- or external-triggered conversion. Bit 5 HCH1 0 Bit 4 HCH0 0 1 1 0 1 Analog Input Channel AN8 AN9 ANA ANB (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 519 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Bits 3 to 0⎯Software Channel Select (SCH3 to SCH0): These bits select the analog input channel that is converted by software triggering. When channels AN0 to AN7 are used, appropriate pin settings must be made in port mode register 0 (PMR0). For pin settings, see section 24.2.6, Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0). Bit 3 SCH3 0 Bit 2 SCH2 0 Bit 1 SCH1 0 Bit 0 SCH0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 * * Analog Input Channel AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 AN8 AN9 ANA ANB No channel selected for software-triggered conversion (Initial value) Legend: * Don't care. Note: If conversion is started by software when SCH3 to SCH0 are set to 11**, the conversion result is undetermined. Hardware- or external-triggered conversion, however, will be performed on the channel selected by HCH1 and HCH0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 520 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) Bit : 7 SEND 0 R/(W)* 6 HEND 0 R/(W)* 5 ADIE 0 R/W 4 SST 0 R/W 3 HST 0 R 2 BUSY 0 R 1 SCNL 0 R 0 — 1 — Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag. The A/D status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit register that can be used to start or stop A/D conversion, or check the status of the A/D converter. A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST flag. A/D conversion can also start by setting HST flag to 1 by hardware- or external-triggering. For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator in hardware triggering, see section 26.4, HSW (Headswitch) Timing Generator. When conversion ends, the converted data is stored in the software-triggered A/D result register (ADR) or hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR), and the SST or HST bit is cleared to 0. If software-triggering and hardware- or external-triggering are generated at the same time, priority is given to hardware- or external-triggering. ADCSR is an 8-bit register which is initialized to H'01 by a reset, and in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode. Bit 7⎯Software A/D End Flag (SEND): Indicates the end of A/D conversion. Bit 7 SEND 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] Software-triggered A/D conversion has ended (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 521 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Bit 6⎯Hardware A/D End Flag (HEND): Indicates that hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has ended. Bit 6 HEND 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has ended (Initial value) Bit 5⎯A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enable or disable of interrupt (ADI) generation upon A/D conversion end. Bit 5 ADIE 0 1 Description Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is disabled Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Software A/D Start Flag (SST): Indicates or controls the start and end of softwaretriggered A/D conversion. This bit remains 1 during software-triggered A/D conversion. When 0 is written in this bit, software-triggered A/D conversion operation can forcibly be aborted. Bit 4 SST 0 Description Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion has ended or been stopped (Initial value) Write: Software-triggered A/D conversion is aborted 1 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion is in progress Write: Starts software-triggered A/D conversion Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 522 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Bit 3⎯Hardware A/D Status Flag (HST): Indicates the status of hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion. When 0 is written in this bit, A/D conversion is aborted regardless of whether it was hardware-triggered or external-triggered. Bit 3 HST 0 Description Read: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is not in progress (Initial value) Write: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is aborted 1 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is in progress Bit 2⎯Busy Flag (BUSY): During hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, if software attempts to start A/D conversion by writing to the SST bit, the SST bit is not modified and instead the BUSY flag is set to 1. This flag is cleared when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is read. Bit 2 BUSY 0 1 Description No contention for A/D conversion (Initial value) Indicates an attempt to execute software-triggered A/D conversion while hardwareor external-triggered A/D conversion was in progress Bit 1⎯Software-Triggered Conversion Cancel Flag (SCNL): Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion was canceled by the start of hardware-triggered A/D conversion. This flag is cleared when A/D conversion is started by software. Bit 1 SCNL 0 1 Description No contention for A/D conversion (Initial value) Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion was canceled by the start of hardware-triggered A/D conversion Bit 0⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 523 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 TRGS1 0 R/W 0 TRGS0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The trigger select register (ADTSR) selects hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion start factor. ADTSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'FC by a reset, and in module stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode. Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 1 and 0⎯Trigger Select (TRGS1, TRGS0): These bits select hardware- or externaltriggered A/D conversion start factor. Set these bits when A/D conversion is not in progress. Bit 1 TRGS1 0 Bit 0 TRGS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is disabled (Initial value) Hardware-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion is selected Hardware-triggered (DFG) A/D conversion is selected External-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion is selected 24.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0) Bit : 7 PMR07 0 R/W 6 PMR06 0 R/W 5 PMR05 0 R/W 4 PMR04 0 R/W 3 PMR03 0 R/W 2 PMR02 0 R/W 1 PMR01 0 R/W 0 PMR00 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. Switching is specified for each bit. PMR0 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 524 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Bits 7 to 0⎯P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Pin Switching (PMR07 to PMR00): These bits set the P0n/ANn pin as the input pin for P0n or as the ANn pin for A/D conversion analog input channel. Bit n PMR0n 0 1 Description P0n/ANn functions as a general-purpose input port P0n/ANn functions as an analog input channel (Initial value) Note: n = 7 to 0 24.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 MSTPCRL 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR consists of 8-bit readable/writable registers and performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP2 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset Bit 2⎯Module Stop (MSTP2): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 2 MSTP2 0 1 Description A/D converter module stop mode is cleared A/D converter module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 525 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.3 Interface to Bus Master ADR and AHR are 16-bit registers, but the data bus to the bus master is only 8 bits wide. Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is accessed via a temporary register (TEMP). A data reading from ADR and AHR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU. When reading ADR and AHR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. Figure 24.3 shows the data flow for ADR access. The data flow for AHR access is the same. Upper byte read Module data bus Bus master (H'AA) Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADRH (H'AA) Lower byte read ADRL (H'40) Bus master (H'40) Bus interface Module data bus TEMP (H'40) ADRH (H'AA) ADRL (H'40) Figure 24.3 ADR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 526 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. 24.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion A/D conversion starts when software sets the software A/D start flag (SST bit) to 1. The SST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. Conversion can be software-triggered on any of the 12 channels provided by analog input pins AN0 to ANB. Bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR select the analog input pin used for softwaretriggered A/D conversion. Pins AN8 to ANB are also available for hardware- or external-triggered conversion. When conversion ends, SEND flag in ADCSR bit is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set to 1, an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs. If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the SST bit to 0 to halt A/D conversion. If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is read. If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered conversion is in progress, the software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the SST flag is cleared to 0, and SCNL flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The SCNL flag is cleared when software writes 1 in the SST bit to start conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 527 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion The system contains the hardware trigger function that allows to turn on A/D conversion at a specified timing by use of the hardware trigger (internal signals: ADTRG and DFG) and the incoming external trigger (ADTRG). This function can be used to measure an analog signal that varies in synchronization with an external signal at a fixed timing. To execute hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, select appropriate start factor in TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits in ADTSR. When the selected triggering occurs, HST flag in ADCSR is set to 1 and A/D conversion starts. The HST flag remains 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator in hardware triggering, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. Setting of the analog input pins on four channels from AN8 to ANB can be modified with the hardware trigger or the incoming external trigger. Setting is done from HCH1 and HCH0 bits on ADCR. Pins AN8 to ANB are also available for software-triggered conversion. When conversion ends, HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set to 1, an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs. If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the HST flag to 0 to halt A/D conversion. If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is read. If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered conversion is in progress, the software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the SST flag is cleared to 0, and SCNL flag in ADCSR is set to 1 (the SCNL flag is cleared when software writes 1 in the SST bit to start conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends). The analog input channel changes automatically from the channel that was undergoing software-triggered conversion (selected by bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR) to the channel selected by bits HCH1 and HCH0 in ADCR for hardware- or external-triggered conversion. After the hardware- or external-triggered conversion ends, the channel reverts to the channel selected by the software-triggered conversion channel select bits in ADCR. Hardware- or external-triggered conversion has priority over software-triggered conversion, so the A/D interrupt-handling routine should check the SCNL and BUSY flags when it processes the converted data. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 528 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter 24.5 Interrupt Sources When A/D conversion ends, SEND or HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) can be enabled or disabled by ADIE bit in ADCSR. Figure 24.4 shows the block diagram of A/D conversion end interrupt. A/D control/status register (ADCSR) SEND HEND ADIE A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) To interrupt controller Figure 24.4 Block Diagram of A/D Conversion End Interrupt Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 529 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 24 A/D Converter Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 530 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.1 Overview The address trap controller (ATC) is capable of generating interrupt by setting an address to trap, when the address set appears during bus cycle. 25.1.1 Features Address to trap can be set independently at three points. 25.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 25.1 shows a block diagram of the address trap controller. Modules bus Bus interface ATCR TAR0 TAR1 TAR2 Trap condition comparator Internal bus Interrupt request Legend: ATCR TAR0 to 2 : Address trap control register : Trap address register 0 to 2 Figure 25.1 Block Diagram of ATC Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 531 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.1.3 Register Configuration Table 25.1 Register List Name Address trap control register Trap address register 0 Trap address register 1 Trap address register 2 Note: * Abbrev. ATCR TAR0 TAR1 TAR2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'F8 H'F00000 H'F00000 H'F00000 Address* H'FFB9 H'FFB0 to H'FFB2 H'FFB3 to H'FFB5 H'FFB6 to H'FFB8 Lower 16 bits of the address. 25.2 25.2.1 Register Descriptions Address Trap Control Register (ATCR) Bit : 7 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 TRC2 0 R/W 1 TRC1 0 R/W 0 TRC0 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : 1 — Bits 7 to 3⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2⎯Trap Control 2 (TRC2): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 2. Bit 2 TRC2 0 1 Description Address trap function 2 disabled Address trap function 2 enabled (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Trap Control 1 (TRC1): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 1. Bit 1 TRC1 0 1 Description Address trap function 1 disabled Address trap function 1 enabled (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 532 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) Bit 0⎯Trap Control 0 (TRC0): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 0. Bit 0 TRC0 0 1 Description Address trap function 0 disabled Address trap function 0 enabled (Initial value) 25.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0) Bit : 7 A23 6 A22 0 R/W 6 A14 0 R/W 6 A6 0 R/W 5 A21 0 R/W 5 A13 0 R/W 5 A5 0 R/W 4 A20 0 R/W 4 A12 0 R/W 4 A4 0 R/W 3 A19 0 R/W 3 A11 0 R/W 3 A3 0 R/W 2 A18 0 R/W 2 A10 0 R/W 2 A2 0 R/W 1 A17 0 R/W 1 A9 0 R/W 1 A1 0 R/W 0 A16 0 R/W 0 A8 0 R/W 0 — 0 — Initial value : R/W : Bit : 0 R/W 7 A15 Initial value : R/W : Bit : 0 R/W 7 A7 Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W The TAR is composed of three 8-bit readable/writable registers (TARnA, B, and C) (n = 2 to 0) The TAR sets the address to trap. The function of the TAR2 to TAR0 is the same. The TAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset. TARA bits 7 to 0: Addresses 23 to 16 (A23 to A16) TARB bits 7 to 0: Addresses 15 to 8 (A15 to A8) TARC bits 7 to 0: Addresses 7 to 1 (A7 to A1) If the value installed in this register and internal address buses A23 to A1 match as a result of comparison, an interruption occurs. For the address to trap, set to the address where the first byte of an instruction exists. In the case of other addresses, it may not be considered that the condition has been satisfied. Bit 0 of this register is fixed at 0. The address to trap becomes an even address. The range where comparison is made is H'000000 to H'FFFFFE. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 533 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3 Precautions in Usage Address trap interrupt arises 2 states after prefetching the trap address. Trap interrupt may occur after the trap instruction has been executed, depending on a combination of instructions immediately preceding the setting up of the address trap. If the instruction to trap immediately follows the branch instruction or the conditional branch instruction, operation may differ, depending on whether the condition was satisfied or not, or the address to be stacked may be located at the branch. Figures 25.2 to 25.22 show specific operations. For information as to where the next instruction prefetch occurs during the execution cycle of the instruction, see appendix A.5, Bus Status during Instruction Execution of this manual or section 2.7 Bus State during Execution of Instruction of the H8S/2600 and H8S/2000 Series Software Manual. (R: W NEXT is the next instruction prefetch.) 25.3.1 Basic Operations After terminating the execution of the instruction being executed in the second state from the trap address prefetch, the address trap interrupt exception handling is started. 1. Figure 25.2 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is that of 3 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in the state before the last 2 states. The address to be stacked is 0260. MOV NOP Internal instruc- instruc- operation tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Data read Start of exception handling (ER3 = H'0000) Immediately Address preceding → 025E MOV.B @ER3+,R2L Instruction * 0260 NOP 0262 NOP 0264 NOP φ Address bus 025E 0260 0000 0262 MOV execution Interrupt request signal * Trap setting address The underlines address is the one to be actually stacked. Note: In the figure above, the NOP instruction is used as the typical example of instruction with execution cycle of 1 state. Other instructions with the execution cycle of 1 state also apply (Ex. MOV.B, Rs, Rd). Figure 25.2 Basic Operations (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 534 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 2. Figure 25.3 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is that of 2 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in the second state from the last. The address to be stacked is 0268. MOV NOP Data instruc- instruc- read tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch NOP instruction pre-fetch Start of exception handling φ Address bus 0266 0268 0000 026A MOV execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address NOP execution 026C Immediately Address preceding → 0266 MOV.B instruction R2L, @0000 * 0268 NOP 026A NOP 026C NOP Figure 25.3 Basic Operations (2) 3. Figure 25.4 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is that of 1 state or 2 states or more and the prefetch occurs in the last state. The address to be stacked is 025C. NOP NOP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling φ Address bus 0256 0258 025A 025C NOP NOP NOP execu- execu- execution tion tion Address Immediately → 0256 NOP * 0258 NOP preceding 025A NOP instruction 025C NOP 025E NOP 025E Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.4 Basic Operations (3) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 535 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3.2 Enabling The address trap function becomes valid after executing one instruction following the setting of the enable bit of the address trap control register (ATCR) to 1. 029C *029E 02A0 02A2 02A4 02A6 BSET #0, @TRCR MOV.W R0, R1 MOV.B R1L, R3H NOP CMP.W R0, R1 NOP After executing the MOV instruction, the address trap interrupt does not arise, and the next instruction is executed. Note: * Trap setting address Figure 25.5 Enabling 25.3.3 Bcc Instruction 1. When the condition is satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement) If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is satisfied by the Bcc instruction and then branched, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after executing the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02A8. BEQ NOP CMP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling (NEXT = H'02A6) 029C * 029E 02A0 02A2 02A4 02A6 02A8 BEQ NEXT:8 NOP NOP NOP NOP CMP.W R0, R1 NOP φ Address bus 029C 029E 02A6 02A8 BEQ execution CMP execution 02AA Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.6 When the Condition Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-Bit Displacement) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 536 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 2. When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement) If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after executing the trap address instruction and prefetching the next instruction. The address to be stacked is 02A2. BEQ NOP CMP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling (NEXT = H'02A8) 029E * 02A0 02A2 02A4 02A6 NEXT: 02A8 02AA BEQ NEXT:8 NOP NOP NOP NOP CMP.W R0, R1 NOP φ Address bus 029E 02A0 02A8 02A2 BEQ execution NOP execution 02A4 Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.7 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-Bit Displacement) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 537 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 3. When condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (16-bit displacement) If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after executing the trap address instruction (if the trap address instruction is that of 2 states or more. If the instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions). The address to be stacked is 02C0. BEQ instruction pre-fetch Data fetch Internal operation NOP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling (NEXT = H'02C4) 02B8 BEQ NEXT:16 * 02BC NOP 02BE NOP 02C0 NOP 02C2 NOP NEXT: 02C4 NOP φ Address bus 02B8 02BA 02BC 02BE 02C0 NOP NOP execu- execution tion 02C2 BEQ execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.8 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (16-Bit Displacement) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 538 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 4. When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (Trap address at branch) When the trap address is at the branch of the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made into the address trap interrupt after executing the next instruction (if the next instruction is that of 2 states or more. If the next instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions). The address to be stacked is 0262. BEQ NOP CMP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling (NEXT = H'0266) 025C 025E 0260 0262 0264 NEXT: * 0266 0268 BEQ NEXT:8 NOP NOP NOP NOP CMP.W R0, R1 NOP φ Address bus 025C 025E 0266 0260 0262 BEQ execution NOP NOP execu- execution tion 0264 Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.9 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (Trap Address at Branch) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 539 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3.4 BSR Instruction 1. BSR Instruction (8-bit displacement) When the trap address is the next instruction to the BSR instruction and the addressing mode is an 8-bit displacement, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C2. BSR NOP MOV instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Stack saving Start of exception handling 0294 * 0296 0298 : (@ER0 = H'02C2) BSR @ER0 NOP NOP : MOV.W R4, @OUT NOP φ Address bus 0294 0296 02C2 SP−2 SP−4 BSR execution 02C4 02C2 02C4 Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.10 BSR Instruction (8-Bit Displacement) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 540 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3.5 JSR Instruction 1. JSR Instruction (Register indirect) When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode is a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C8. JSR NOP MOV instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Stack saving Start of exception handling (@ER0 = H'02C8) 029A * 029C 029E : JSR @ER0 NOP NOP : MOV.W R4, @OUT NOP φ Address bus 029A 029C 02C8 SP−2 SP−4 JSRexecution 02CA 02C8 02CE Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.11 JSR Instruction (Register Indirect) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 541 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 2. JSR Instruction (Memory indirect) When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode is memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02EA. JSR NOP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Data fetch Stack saving NOP instruction pre-fetch Start of exception handling 006C : 0294 * 0296 0298 : 02EA 02EC H'02EA : JSR @@H'6C:8 NOP NOP : NOP NOP φ Address bus 0294 0296 006C 006E SP−2 SP−4 02EA JSR execution 02EC Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.12 JSR Instruction (Memory Indirect) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 542 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3.6 JMP Instruction 1. JMP Instruction (Register indirect) When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode is a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02AA. JMP NOP MOV instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Data fetch NOP instruction pre-fetch Start of exception handling (@ER0 = H'02A4) 029A * 029C 029E 02A0 02A2 02A4 02AA JMP @ER0 NOP NOP NOP NOP MOV.L #DATA, ER1 NOP φ Address bus 029A 029C 02A4 02A6 02A8 02AA JMP execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address MOV.L execution 02AC Figure 25.13 JMP Instruction (Register Indirect) 2. JMP Instruction (Memory indirect) When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode is memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02E4. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 543 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) JMP NOP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Data fetch Internal NOP opera- instruction tion pre-fetch Start of exception handling 006C : 0294 * 0296 0298 : 02E4 02E6 H'02E4 : JMP @@H'6C:8 NOP NOP : NOP NOP φ Address bus 0294 0296 006C 006E 006C 02E4 JMP execution 02E6 Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.14 JMP Instruction (Memory Indirect) 25.3.7 RTS Instruction When the trap address is the next instruction to the RTS instruction, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after reading the CCR and PC from the stack and prefetching the instruction at the return location. The address to be stacked is 0298. RTS NOP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Stack saving Internal NOP opera- instruction tion pre-fetch Start of exception handling (@ER0 = H'02C8) 0296 0298 029A BSR SUB NOP NOP : 02AC * 02AE : RTS NOP φ Address bus 02AC 02AE SP SP+2 SP 0298 029A RTS execution Break interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address Figure 25.15 RTS Instruction Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 544 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 25.3.8 SLEEP Instruction 1. SLEEP Instruction 1 When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 2 states or more and prefetch does not occur in the last state, the SLEEP instruction is not executed and transition is made to the address trap interrupt without going into SLEEP mode. The address to be stacked is 0274. MOV SLEEP Data NOP instruc- instrucinstrucwrite tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling φ Address bus 0272 0274 FFF9 MOV execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address 0276 SLEEP cancel SP−2 SP−4 0272 * 0274 0276 0278 : MOV.B R2L, @FFF8 SLEEP NOP NOP : Figure 25.16 SLEEP Instruction (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 545 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 2. SLEEP Instruction 2 When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state 2 states or more and prefetch occurs in the last state, this puts in the SLEEP mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction, and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by the address trap interrupt and transition is made to the exception handling. The address to be stacked is 0264. NOP SLEEP NOP instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling φ Address bus 0260 0262 NOP SLEEP execution execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address 0264 SLEEP mode SP−2 SP−4 0260 * 0262 0264 0266 : NOP SLEEP NOP NOP : Figure 25.17 SLEEP Instruction (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 546 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 3. SLEEP Instruction 3 When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the SLEEP mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction, and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by the address trap interrupt and transition is made to the exception handling. The address to be stacked is 0282. SLEEP NOP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of exception handling φ Address bus 0280 SLEEP execution Interrupt request signal Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked. * Trap setting address 0282 SLEEP mode SP−2 SP−4 027E 0280 * 0282 0284 : NOP SLEEP NOP NOP : Figure 25.18 SLEEP Instruction (3) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 547 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 4. SLEEP Instruction 4 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting) When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state or 2 states or more and prefetch occurs in the last state, this puts in the standby (watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After that, if the standby (watch) mode is cancelled by the NMI interrupt, transition is made to NMI interrupt following the CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector reading. However, if the address trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI interrupt processing, transition is made to the address trap exception handling. The address to be stacked is the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing. NOP SLEEP NOP instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch NMI interrupt Address trap interruption φ Address bus 0262 0264 0266 SLEEP Standby execution mode Interrupt request signal Note: * Trap setting address SP−2 SPCA SP−2 0262 * 0264 0266 NOP SLEEP NOP Figure 25.19 SLEEP Instruction (4) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 548 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 5. SLEEP Instruction 5 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting) When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the standby (watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After that, if the standby (watch) mode is cancelled by the NMI interruption, transition is made to the NMI interrupt following the CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector reading. However, if the address trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI interrupt processing, transition is made to the address trap exception handling. The address to be stacked is the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing. NOP SLEEP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch NMI interruption Address trap interrupt φ Address bus 0280 0282 0284 SLEEP Standby execution mode Interrupt request signal Note: * Trap setting address SP−2 SPCA SP−2 0280 0282 * 0284 NOP SLEEP NOP Figure 25.20 SLEEP Instruction (5) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting) 25.3.9 Competing Interrupt 1. General Interrupt (Interrupt other than NMI) When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the general interrupt request, the interruption appears to take place in the ATC at the timing earlier than usual, because higher priority is assigned to the ATC interrupt processing (Simultaneous interrupt with the general interrupt has no effect on processing). The address to be stacked is 029E. For comparison, the case where the trap address is set at 02A0 if no general interrupt request was made is shown in (2). The address to be stacked is 02A4. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 549 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port 029A NOP 029C NOP Set one of these to the 029E NOP 02A0 NOP trap address 02A2 NOP 02A4 NOP Start of general (1) NOP MOV instruc- Data instruction tion read pre-fetch pre-fetch Data write interrupt processing NOP NOP instruc- instruction tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Range of start of ATC interrupt processing φ Address bus 0296 0298 029A Port 029C 029E 02A0 SP−2 SP−4 Vector Vector MOV execution NOP NOP execu- execution tion General Interrupt request signal (A) Interrupt request signal Address to be stacked (2) 0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port 029A NOP 029C NOP 029E NOP 02A0 NOP Trap address 02A2 NOP 02A4 NOP MOV NOP instruc- Data instruction read tion pre-fetch pre-fetch Data write NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of ATC interrupt processing φ Address bus 0296 0298 029A Port 029C 029E 02A0 02A2 02A4 02A6 SP−2 MOV execution NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP execu- execu- execu- execu- execution tion tion tion tion Interrupt request signal Figure 25.21 Competing Interrupt (General Interrupt) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 550 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) 2. In case of NMI When the NMI interruption request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the ATC interrupt request, the interrupt appears to take place in NMI at the timing earlier than usual, because higher priority is assigned to the NMI interrupt processing. The ATC interrupt processing starts after fetching the instruction at the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing. The address to be stacked is 02E0 for the NMI and 340 for the ATC. When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (2) (B) against the NMI interrupt request, the ATC interrupt processing starts after fetching the instruction at the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing. The address to be stacked is 02E6 for the NMI and 0340 for the ATC. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 551 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 (1) NMI interrupt processing Start of ATC interrupt processing NOP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of ATC interrupt processing NOP instruction pre-fetch φ 02E2 NMI vector read SP−2 SP−4 Vector Vector Vector 0340 0342 SP−6 SP−8 Vector Address bus 02DC 02DE 02E0 NOP NOP execu- execution tion (A) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 552 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 02DC 02DE 02E0 02E2 02E4 02E6 02E8 : : 0340 NOP (1) Set to the trap address NOP NOP NOP NOP (2) Set one of these to NOP the trap address NOP : : The starting address of NMI interrupt NMI interrupt processing NOP instruction pre-fetch Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC) NMI interrupt request signal ATC interrupt request signal (2) NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction tion tion tion tion tion pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch pre-fetch Start of ATC Interrupt processing φ 02E8 SP−2 SP−4 Vector Vector Vector 0340 0342 Address bus 02DC 02DE 02E0 02E2 02E4 02E6 Figure 25.22 Competing Interrupt (In Case of NMI) (B) NMI interrupt request signal ATC interrupt request signal Section 26 Servo Circuits Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.1 26.1.1 Overview Functions Servo circuits for a video cassette recorder are included on-chip. The functions of the servo circuits can be divided into four groups, as listed in table 26.1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 553 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Table 26.1 Servo Circuit Functions Group Function Description Gain variable input amplifier Output amplifier with rewrite mode Duty accuracy: 50 ±2% (Zero cross type comparator) Overlap input available: Three-level input method, DFG noise mask function V compensation, field detection, external signal sync, V sync in REC mode, REF30 signal output to outside Head-switching signals, FIFO 20 stages Compatible with DFG counter soft-reset Chroma-rotary/head-amplifier switching output Improved speed of carrier frequency With CFG mask, no CFG for phase or CTL mask Noise count, field discrimination, Hsync compensation, Hsync detection noise mask Lock detector function, pause at the counter overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function Latch signal selectable, R/W error latch register Lock detector function, pause at the counter overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function R/W error latch register (Separate setting available) Computations performed automatically by hardware Output gain variable: ×2 to ×64 (exponents of 2) -1 (Partial write in Z (high-order 8 bits) available) Valid in special playback Duty discrimination circuit, CTL head R/W control, compatible with wide aspect (1) Input and CTL I/O amplifier output circuits CFGDuty compensation input DFG, DPG separation/overlap input Reference signal generators HSW timing generator Four-head high-speed switching circuit for special playback 12-bit PWM Frequency division circuit Sync detection circuit (2) Error detectors Drum speed error detector Drum phase error detector Capstan speed error detector Capstan phase error detector X-value adjustment and tracking adjustment circuit (3) Phase and Digital filter computation circuit gain compensation (4) Other circuits Additional V signal circuit CTL circuit 26.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.1 shows a block diagram of the servo circuits. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 554 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PPG0 to 7/ (P70 to 77) PPG0 to 7/ (P70 to 77) RP0 to B/ (P60 to 67, P74 to 77) EXTTRG(P86) Csync COMP(P85) C.Rotary(P83) H.Amp SW(P84) RP0 to B/ (P60 to 67, P74 to 77) 4-head special playback controller Sync separator OSCH VD System clock REC:ON Res Drum system reference signal Capstan system reference signal Vpulse Additional V pulse generator XE:ON AudioFF VideoFF Head-switch timing generator ADTRIG (HSW) REF30P(PB:30Hz,REC:1/2VD) Phase error detector DPG(P87) DFG Ep Noise Det. Digital filter Speed error detector Es Digital filter Gain up. + + DRM PWM PWM A/D converter AN pins PWM Gain up. Frequency divider DVCFG + Es CFG Speed error detector DVCFG2 CREF CAP PWM Digital filter + Timer X1 Timer L Timer R REF30,REF30X,CREF, CTLMONI,DVCFG, DFG,DPG,DFG,etc Internal signal monitor controller DVCTL SV1(P30) ( ) SV2(P31) ( ) EXCTL(P82) ) REC Phase error detector Ep Digital filter PB.ASM (NTSC) PB. ASM REC X-value adjustment Frequency divider CTLFB PB.CTL (PAL) REF30X CTL Amp +-+ Gain control by register setting VISS circuit (Duty deter- DutyI/O minator) REC-CTL generator (Assemble recording) CTL Head + CTL Head -+ REC-CTL EXCAP(P81) Figure 26.1 Block Diagram of Servo Circuits Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 555 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.2 26.2.1 Servo Port Overview This LSI is equipped with seventeen pins dedicated to the servo circuit and twenty-nine pins multiplexed with general-purpose ports. It also has an input amplifier to amplify CTL signals, a CTL output amplifier, a CTL Schmitt comparator, and a CFG zero cross type comparator. The CTL input amplifier allows gain adjustment by software. DFG and DPG signals, which control the drum, can be input as separate signals or an overlapped signal. SV1 and SV2 pins allow internal signals of the servo circuit to be output for monitoring. The signals to be output can be selected out of eight kinds of signals. See the description of Servo Monitor Control Register (SVMCR) in section 26.2.5, Register Description. 26.2.2 Block Diagram 1. DFG and DPG Input Circuit The DFG and DPG input pins have on-chip Schmit circuits. Figure 26.2 shows the input circuit of DFG and DPG. DPG SW DFG DFG DPG DPG RES+LPM DPG SW Figure 26.2 Input Circuit of DFG and DPG Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 556 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 2. CFG Input Circuit The CFG input pin has an amplifier and a zero cross type comparator. Figure 26.3 shows the input circuit of CFG. + VREF P250 BIAS REF M250 S O R stp F/F CFGCOMP CFGCOMP CFG + + CFG VREF - RES+ModuleSTOP Figure 26.3 CFG Input Circuit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 557 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 3. CTL Input Circuit The CTL input pin has an amplifier. Figure 26.4 shows the input circuit of CTL. AMPON (PB-CTL) AMPSHORT (REC-CTL) CTLGR3 to 1 CTLFB CTLGR0 -+ + - - + PB-CTL(+) PB-CTL(-) CTL(-) CTL(+) CTLREF CTLBias CTLFB CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) Note Note: Be sure to connect a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i) Figure 26.4 CTL Input Circuit 26.2.3 Pin Configuration Table 26.2 shows the pin configuration of the servo circuit. P30, P31, P6n, P7n, and P81 to P87 are general-purpose ports. As for P3, P6, P7, and P8, see section 10, I/O Port. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 558 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Table 26.2 Pin Configuration Name Servo Vcc pin Servo Vss pin Audio head switching pin Video head switching pin Capstan mix pin Drum mix pin Additional V pulse pin Color rotary signal output pin Head amplifier switching pin Compare signal input pin CTL (+) I/O pin CTL (-) I/O pin CTL Bias input pin CTL Amp (O) output pin CTL SMT (I) input pin CTL FB input pin CTL REF output pin Capstan FG amplifier input pin Drum FG input pin Drum PG input pin External CTL signal input pin Composite sync signal input pin Abbrev. SVCC SVSS Audio FF Video FF CAPPWM DRMPWM Vpulse P83/C.Rotary I/O Input Input Output Output Output Output Output I/O, Output Function Power source pin for servo circuit Power source pin for servo circuit Audio head switching signal output Video head switching signal output 12-bit PWM square wave output 12-bit PWM square wave output Additional V signal output General-purpose port/control signal output port for processing color signals General-purpose port/pre-amplifier output selection signal input General-purpose port/pre-amplifier output result signal input CTL signal input/output CTL signal input/output CTL primary amplifier bias supply CTL amplifier output CTL Schmitt amplifier input CTL amplifier high-range characteristics control CTL amplifier reference voltage output CFG signal amplifier input DFG signal input General-purpose port/DPG signal input General-purpose port/external CTL signal input/ Composite sync signal input General-purpose port/external reference signal input General-purpose port/external capstan signal input General-purpose port/servo monitor signal output General-purpose port/servo monitor signal output General-purpose port/PPG output General-purpose port/RTP output P84/H.Amp SW I/O, Output P85/COMP CTL (+) CTL (-) CTLBias CTLAMP (O) CTLSMT (I) CTLFB CTLREF CFG DFG P87/DPG P82/EXCTL Csync I/O, Input I/O I/O Input Output Input Input Output Input Input I/O, Input I/O, Input Input I/O, input I/O, input I/O, output I/O, output I/O, output I/O, output External reference signal input pin P86/EXTTRG External capstan signal input pin Servo monitor signal output pin 1 Servo monitor signal output pin 2 PPG output pin RTP output pin P81/EXCAP P30/SV1 P31/SV2 P7n/PPGn P6n/RPn, P7n/RPn Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 559 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.2.4 Register Configuration Table 26.3 shows the register configuration of the servo port section. Table 26.3 Register Configuration Name Servo port mode register Servo monitor control register CTL gain control register Abbrev. SPMR SVMCR CTLGR R/W R/W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'5F H'C0 H'C0 Address H'D0A0 H'D0A3 H'D0A4 26.2.5 Register Description Servo Port Mode Register (SPMR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CTLSTOP 0 R/W 6 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 5 CFGCOMP 0 R/W 4 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 3 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 2 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 0 ⎯ 1 ⎯ SPMR is an 8-bit read/write register that switches the CFG input system. It is initialized to H'5F by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bit 7⎯CTLSTOP Bit (CTLSTOP): Controls whether the CTL circuit is operated or stopped. Bit 7 CTLSTOP 0 1 Description CTL circuit operates CTL circuit stops operation (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 560 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯CFG Input System Switching Bit (CFGCOMP) : Selects whether the CFG input signal system is set to the zero cross type comparator system or digital signal input system. Bit 5 CFGCOMP Description 0 1 CFG signal input system is set to the zero cross type comparator system. (Initial value) CFG signal input system is set to the digital signal input system. Bits 4 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Servo Monitor Control Register (SVMCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 4 3 2 1 0 SVMCR5 SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W SVMCR is an 8-bit read/write register that selects the monitor signal output from the SV1 and SV2 pins when the P30/SV1 pin is used as the SV1 monitor output pin or when the P31/SV2 pin is used as the SV2 monitor output pin. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 5 to 3⎯SV2 Pin Servo Monitor Output Control(SVMCR5 to SVMCR3): select the servo monitor signal output from the SV2 pin. Bit 5 SVMCR5 0 Bit 4 SVMCR4 0 Bit 3 SVMCR3 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Outputs REF30 signal to SV2 output pin. (Initial value) Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs CREF signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs DVCFG signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs CFG signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs DFG signal to SV2 output pin. Outputs DPG signal to SV2 output pin. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 561 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 2 to 0⎯SV1 Pin Servo Monitor Output Control (SVMCR2 to SVMCR0): Select the servo monitor signal output from the SV1 pin. Bit 2 SVMCR2 0 Bit 1 SVMCR1 0 Bit 0 SVMCR0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Outputs REF30 signal to SV1 output pin. (Initial value) Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs CREF signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs DVCFG signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs CFG signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs DFG signal to SV1 output pin. Outputs DPG signal to SV1 output pin. CTL Gain Control Register (CTLGR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 CTLE/A 0 R/W 4 CTLFB 0 R/W 3 CTLGR3 0 R/W 2 CTLGR2 0 R/W 1 CTLGR1 0 R/W 0 CTLGR0 0 R/W CTLGR is an 8-bit read/write register that turns on or off the CTLFB switch in the CTL amplifier circuit and specifying the CTL amplifier gain. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 5⎯CTL Selection Bit (CTLE/A): Controls whether the amplifier output or EXCTL is used as the CTLP signal supplied to the CTL circuit. Bit 5 CTLE/A 0 1 Description AMP output EXCTL (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 562 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 4⎯SW Bit of the Feedback Section of CTL Amplifier (CTLFB): Turns on or off the switch of the feedback section to adjust the gain. See figure 26.4. Bit 4 CTLFB 0 1 Description Turns off CTLFB SW Turns on CTLFB SW (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0⎯CTL Amplifier Gain Setting Bits (CTLGR3 to CTLGR0): Set the output gain of the CTL amplifier. Bit 3 CTLGR3 0 Bit 2 CTLGR2 0 Bit 1 CTLGR1 0 Bit 0 CTLGR0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Note: * 0 1 CTL Output Gain 34.0 dB 36.5 dB 39.0 dB 41.5 dB 44.0 dB 46.5 dB 49.0 dB 51.5 dB 54.0 dB 56.5 dB 59.0 dB 61.5 dB 64.0 dB 66.5 dB* 69.0 dB* 71.5 dB* (Initial value) With a setting of 65.0 dB or more, the CTLAMP is in a very sensitive status. When configuring the set board, take a countermeasure against noise around the control head signal input port. Also, consider well the setting of the filter between the CTLAMP and the CTLSMT. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 563 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals DFG and DPG signals can be input either as separate signals or as an overlapped signal. When the latter is selected (PMR87 = 1), take care to control the input levels of DFG and DPG. Figure 26.5 shows DFG/DPG input signals. DPG DPG Schmitt level 3.45/3.55 VIL/VIH DFG DFG Schmitt level 1.85/1.95 VIL/VIH (1) DPG/DFG separate input (PMR87 = 0) DFG/DPG DPG Schmitt level DFG Schmitt level (2) DPG/DFG overlapped input (PMR87 = 1) Figure 26.5 DFG/DPG Input Signals Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 564 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.3 26.3.1 Reference Signal Generators Overview The reference signal generators consist of a REF30 signal generator and a CREF signal generator and create the reference signals (REF30 and CREF signals) used in phase comparison, etc. The REF30 signal is used to control the phase of the drum and capstan. The CREF signal is used if REF30 signal cannot be used as the reference signal to control the phase of the capstan in REC mode. Each signal generator consists of a 16-bit counter which uses the servo clock φ s/2 (or φ s/4) as its clock source, a reference period register, and a comparator. The value set in the reference period register should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period. 26.3.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.6 shows the block diagram of REF30 signal generator. Figure 26.7 shows that of CREF signal generator. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 565 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus R/W W FDS OD/EV Edge detection ↑,↓ PB Video FF VST VEG R/W W W Section 26 Servo Circuits W RCS REF30 counter register (16 bits) φs/2 Mask PB→REC Toggle Counter (16 bits) Field VD detection signal Clear Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 566 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 ↑ Edge detection REF30P Match External frequency signal (EXTTRG) ASM REC/PB REF30 V noise detection signal REX Dummy read W W Internal bus R/W W W TBC VNA CVS φs/4 Comparator (16 bits) Figure 26.6 REF30 Signal Generator Reference period register 1 (16 bits) Reference period buffer 1 (16 bits) φs = fosc/2 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB(ASM) ↓ REC QS Counter clear φs/2 R DVCFG2 Counter (16 bits) φs/4 Clear Comparator (16 bits) Match Toggle ↑ Edge detection CREF Reference period register 2 (16 bits) RCS W Reference period buffer 2 (16 bits) Dummy read CRD W W Internal bus φs = fosc/2 Figure 26.7 Block Diagram of CREF Signal Generator 26.3.3 Register Configuration Table 26.4 shows the register configuration of the reference signal generators. Table 26.4 Register Configuration Name Reference period mode register Reference period register 1 Reference period register 2 REF30 counter register Reference period mode register 2 Abbrev. RFM RFD CRF RFC RFM2 R/W W W W R/W R/W Size Byte Word Word Word Byte Initial Value H'00 H'FFFF H'FFFF H'0000 H'FE Address H'D096 H'D090 H'D092 H'D094 H'D097 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 567 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.3.4 Register Description Reference Period Mode Register (RFM) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 RCS 0 W 6 VNA 0 W 5 CVS 0 W 4 REX 0 W 3 CRD 0 W 2 OD/EV 0 W 1 VST 0 W 0 VEG 0 W RFM is an 8-bit write-only register which determines the operational state of the reference signal generators. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes. RFM is accessible in byte units only. If accessed by a word, correct operation is not guaranteed. Bit 7⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (RCS): Selects the clock source supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 7 RCS 0 1 Description φs/2 φs/4 (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Mode Selection Bit (VNA): Selects the mode for controlling transition to free-run operation when the REF30 signal is generated synchronously with the VD signal in REC mode: automatic mode which controls the transition by the V noise detection signal detected by the sync signal detection circuit, or manual mode which controls the transition by software. Bit 6 VNA 0 1 Description Manual mode Automatic mode (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 568 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯Manual Selection Bit (CVS): Selects whether the REF30 signal is generated synchronously with VD or it is operated in free-run state in the manual mode (VNA = 0). (This selection is ignored in PB mode except in TBC mode.) Bit 5 CVS 0 1 Description Synchronous with VD Free-run operation (Initial value) Bit 4⎯External Signals Sync Selection Bit (REX): Selects whether the REF30 signal is generated synchronously with VD, in free-run state or synchronously with the external signal. (Valid in both PB and REC modes.) Bit 4 REX 0 1 Description VD signal or free-run Synchronous with external signal (Initial value) Bit 3⎯DVCFG2 Sync Selection Bit (CRD): Selects whether the reset timing in the CREF signal generation is immediately after switching the mode or it is synchronous with the DVCFG2 signal immediately after the mode switching. Bit 3 CRD 0 1 Description On switching the mode Synchronous with DVCFG2 signal (Initial value) Bit 2⎯ODD/EVEN Edge Switching Selection Bit (OD/EV): Selects whether the REF30P signal is generated by the rising edge (even) or falling edge (odd) of the field signal in REC mode. Bit 2 OD/EV 0 1 Description Generated at the rising edge of the field signal Generated at the falling edge of the field signal (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 569 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 1⎯Video FF Counter Set (VST): Selects whether the REF30 counter register value is set on or off by the Video FF signal when the drum phase is in FIX on in the PB mode. Bit 1 VST 0 1 Description Counter set off by Video FF signal Counter set on by Video FF signal (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Video FF Edge Selection Bit (VEG): Selects the edge at which REF30 counter is set (VST = 1) by the Video FF signal. Bit 0 VEG 0 1 Description Set at the rising edge of Video FF signal Set at the falling edge of Video FF signal (Initial value) Reference Period Register 1 (RFD) Bit : 15 1 W 14 1 W 13 1 W 12 1 W 11 1 W 10 1 W 9 1 W 8 1 W 7 1 W 6 1 W 5 1 W 4 1 W 3 1 W 2 1 W 1 1 W 0 1 W REF15 REF14 REF13 REF12 REF11 REF10 REF9 REF8 REF7 REF6 REF5 REF4 REF3 REF2 REF1 REF0 Initial value : R/W : The reference period register 1 (RFD) is a buffer register which generates the reference signal (REF30) for playback, VD compensation for recording, and the reference signals for free-running. It is an 16-bit write-only register accessible in word units only. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. The value set in RFD should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period. Care is required when VD is unstable, such as when the field is weak (synchronization with VD cannot be acquired if a value less than 1/2 is set in REC). When data is written in RFD, it is stored in the buffer once, and then fetched into RFD by a match signal of the comparator. (The data which generates the reference signal is updated by the match signal.) A forcible write, such as initial setting, etc., should be done by a dummy read of RFD. If a byte-write in RFD is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. RFD is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in stand-by and module stop modes. Use bit 7 (ASM) and bit 6 (REC/PB) in the CTL mode register (CTLM) in the CTL circuit to switch between record and playback modes. Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR) to switch between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase control. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 570 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Reference Period Register 2 (CRF) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 1 W 14 1 W 13 1 W 12 1 W 11 1 W 10 1 W 9 1 W 8 1 W 7 1 W 6 1 W 5 1 W 4 1 W 3 1 W 2 1 W 1 1 W 0 1 W CRF15 CRF14 CRF13 CRF12 CRF11 CRF10 CRF9 CRF8 CRF7 CRF6 CRF5 CRF4 CRF3 CRF2 CRF1 CRF0 The reference period register 2 (CRF) is an 16-bit write-only buffer register which generates the reference signals to control the capstan phase (CREF). CRF is accessible in word units only. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. The value set in CRF should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period. When data is written in CRF, it is stored in the buffer once, and then fetched into CRF by a match signal of the comparator. (The data which generates the reference signal is updated by the match signal.) A forcible write, such as initial setting, etc., should be done by a dummy read of CRF. If a byte-write in CRF is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CRF is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes. Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR) to switch between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase control. See section 26.9, Capstan Phase Error Detector. REF30 Counter Register (RFC) Bit : Initial value : 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 RFC15 RFC14 RFC13 RFC12 RFC11 RFC10 RFC9 RFC8 RFC7 RFC6 RFC5 RFC4 RFC3 RFC2 RFC1 RFC0 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The REF30 counter register (RFC) is a register which determines the initial value of the free-run counter when it generates REF30 signals in playback. When data is written in RFC, its value is written in the counter by a match signal of the comparator. If the bit 1 (VST) of RFM is set to 1, the counter is set by the Video FF signal when the drum phase is in FIX ON. The counter setting by the Video FF signal should be done by setting bit 1 (VST) and bit 0 (VEG) of the RFM. Do not set the RFC to a value greater than 1/2 of the reference period register 1 (RFD) value. RFC is a read/write register. If a read is attempted, the value of the counter is read out. If a byteaccess is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. RFC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 571 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Reference Period Mode Register 2 (RFM2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 TBC 1 R/W 6 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 5 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 4 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 3 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 2 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 0 FDS 0 R/W REM2 is an 8-bit read/write register which determines the operational state of the reference signal generators. It is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes. RFM2 is a byte accessonly register; if accessed by a word, correct operation is not guaranteed. Bit 7⎯TBC Selection Bit (TBC): Selects whether the reference signal in PB mode is generated by the VD signal or by the free-run counter. Bit 7 TBC 0 1 Description Generated by the VD signal Generated by the free-run counter (Initial value) Bits 6 to 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 0⎯Field Selection Bit (FDS): Determines whether selection between ODD or EVEN is made for the field signal when PB mode was switched over to REC mode, or these signals are synchronized with VD signals within a phase error of 90° immediately after the switching over. Bit 0 FDS 0 1 Description Generated by the VD signal of ODD or EVEN selected Generated by the VD signal within mode transition phase error of 90° (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 572 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.3.5 Operation • Operation of REF30 Signal Generator The REF30 signal generator generates the reference signals required to control the phase of the drum and capstan. To generate the REF30 signal, set the 1/2 the reference period to the reference period register 1 (RFD) corresponding to the 50 percent duty cycle. In playback mode, the REF30 signal is generated by free-running the REF30 signal generator. The generator has the external signal synchronization function, and if the bit 4 (REX) of the reference period mode register (RFM) is set to 1, it generates the REF30 signal from the external signal (EXTTGR). In record mode, the reference signal is generated from the VD signal generated in the sync detector. Any VD drop-out caused by weak field intensity, etc., is compensated by a value set in RFD. To cope with the VD noises, the generator automatically masks the VD for a period about 75% of the RFD setting after REF30 signal was changed due to VD. In record mode, the generation of the reference signal either by VD or free-run operation can be controlled automatically using the V noise detection signal detected in the sync signal detection circuit or manually by software. Select which is used by setting bit 6 (VNA) or 5 (CVS) of RFM. The phase of the toggle output of the REF30 signal is cleared to L level when the mode shifts from PB to REC (ASM). Also the frame servo function can be set, allowing for control of the phase of REF30 signals with the field signal detected in the sync signal detection circuit. Use bit 2 (OD/EV) of RFM for such control. See the description of CTL mode register (CTLM) in section 26.13.5, Register Description, as for switching over between PB, ASM and REC. • Operation of the Mask Circuit The REF30 signal generator has a toggle mask circuit and a counter mask (counter set signal mask) circuit built-in. Each mask circuit masks irregular VD signals which may occur when the VD signal is unstable because of weak field intensity, etc., in record mode. The toggle mask and counter mask circuits mask the VD automatically for about 75% of double the period set in the reference period register 1 (RFD) after VD signal was detected (see figure 26.9). If a VD signal dropped out and V was compensated, the toggle mask circuit begins masking, but the counter mask circuit does not begin masking for about 25% of the period. If VD signal was detected during such a period, the circuit does masking for about 75% of the period after the VD detection. If not detected, it does masking for about 75% of the period after V was compensated (see figures 26.10 and 26.11). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 573 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Timing of the REF30 Signal Generation Figures 26.8 to 26.12 show the timing of the generation of REF30 and REF30P signals. Counter set Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) REF30 Counter set Counter set REF30P Figure 26.8 REF30 Signals in Playback Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 574 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Field signal VD Selected VD (OD/EV = 0) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (clear signal mask) Masking period Masking period About 75% REF30 REF30P HSW Drum phase counter Sampling T Sampling Sampling Figure 26.9 Generation of Reference Signal in Record Mode (Normal Operation) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 575 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Field signal VD Selected VD (OD/EV = 0) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Cleared Cleared Cleared Drop-out of V Masking period About 75% Counter mask (clear signal mask) Masking period About 75% About 75% About 75% About 25% REF30 REF30P HSW Drum phase counter Sampling T Sampling Sampling Figure 26.10 Generation of the Reference Signal when in REC (V Dropped Out) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 576 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Field signal Dislocation of V VD Selected VD (OD/EV = 0) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Cleared Cleared Cleared Masking period About 75% Counter mask (clear signal mask) Masking period About 75% About 75% About 75% REF30 REF30P HSW Drum phase counter Sampling T Sampling Sampling Figure 26.11 Generation of the Reference Signal when in REC (V Dislocated) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 577 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits External sync signal Cleared Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Reset REF30 Cleared REF30P Figure 26.12 Generation of REF30 Signal by the External Sync Signal • CREF Signal Generator The CREF signal generator generates the CREF signal which is the reference signal to control the phase of capstan. To generate the CREF signal, set the 1/2 the reference period to the reference period register 2 (CRF). If the set value matches the counter value, a toggle waveform is generated corresponding to the 50 percent duty cycle, and a one-shot pulse is output at each rising edge of the waveform. The counter of CREF signal generator is initialized to H'0000 and the phase of the toggle is cleared to L level when the mode shifts from PB (ASM) to REC. The timing of clearing is selectable between immediately after the transition from PB (ASM) to REC and the timing of DVCFG2 after the transition. Use bit 3 (CRD) of the reference period mode register (RFM) for this selection. In the capstan phase error detection circuit, either REF30 signal or CREF signal can be selected for the reference signal. Use either of them according to the use of the system. Use the CREF signal to control the phase of the capstan at a period which is different from the period used to control the phase of the drum. For the switching between REF30 and CREF in the capstan phase control, see the description of capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR) in section 26.9.4, Register Description. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 578 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Timing Chart of the CREF Signal Generation Figures 26.13 to 26.15 show the generation of CREF signal. Cleared Value set in reference period register 2 (CRF) Counter Cleared Cleared Toggle signal CREF Figure 26.13 Generation of CREF Signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 579 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Cleared Value set in reference period register 2 (CRF) Counter Cleared Cleared REC/PB Toggle signal Period set in CRF CREF PB(ASM) REC Figure 26.14 CREF Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 0) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 580 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Cleared Value set in reference period register 2 (CRF) Counter Cleared Cleared REC/PB DVCFG2 Toggle signal Period set in CRF CREF PB(ASM) REC Figure 26.15 CREF Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 581 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Figures 26.16 and 26.17 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC. PB Field signal VD (except in PB) Selected VD* (OD/EV = 0) REC/PB Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period Masking period Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared REC(ASM) About 75% Cleared REF30 REF30P Note: * In the field discrimination mode Figure 26.16 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 582 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB Field signal VD (except in PB) Selected VD (OD/EV = 0) REC/PB Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period Masking period About 50% Cleared REC(ASM) Cleared Cleared Cleared REF30 REF30P Figure 26.17 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 583 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Figures 26.18 to 26.21 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC (where FDS bit = 1). PB REC/PB VD (except in PB) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period REC(ASM) Cleared Cleared Cleared Masking period REF30 REF30P FDS bit = 1 Figure 26.18 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC where RFD Bit Is 1 (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 584 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB REC/PB VD (except in PB) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period REC(ASM) Masking period 25% 25% 25% REF30 REF30P FDS bit = 1 Figure 26.19 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC where RFD Bit Is 1 (when VD Signal Is Not Detected) (2) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 585 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB REC/PB VD (except in PB) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period REC(ASM) Cleared Cleared Masking period 25% max. REF30 REF30P FDS bit = 1 Figure 26.20 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC where RFD Bit Is 1 (3) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 586 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB REC/PB VD (except in PB) Value set in reference period register 1 (RFD) Counter Value set in REF30 counter register (RFC) Toggle mask Counter mask (Clear signal mask) Masking period REC(ASM) Cleared Cleared Masking period 25% max. REF30 REF30P FDS bit = 1 Figure 26.21 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC where RFD Bit Is 1 (4) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 587 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.4 26.4.1 HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator Overview The HSW timing generator consists of a 5-bit DFG counter, a 16-bit timer counter, a matching circuit, and two 31-bit 10-stage FIFOs. The 5-bit counter counts the DFG pulses following a DPG pulse. Each of them determines the timing to reset the 16-bit timer counter for each field. The 16-bit timer counter is a timer clocked by a φ s/4 clock source, and can be used as a programmable pattern generator (PPG) as well as a free-running counter (FRC). If used as a free-running counter, it is cleared by overflow of the prescaler unit. Accordingly, two FRCs operate synchronously. The matching circuit compares the timing data in the most significant 16 bits of FIFO with the 16-bit timer counter, and controls the output of the pattern data set in the least significant 15 bits of FIFO. 26.4.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.22 shows a block diagram of the HSW timing generator. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 588 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus WW FPDRA FIFO output pattern register 1 R/W FPDRB HSM1 FLA,B EMPA,B OVWA,B CLRA,B FTPRA FIFO timing pattern register 1 FIFO timing pattern register 2 R/W R HSM2 LOP SOFG OFG FTPRB R R/W R/W R/W R/W R W W W W FIFO output pattern register 2 HSLP EDG HSW loop stage number setting register 16 bits Control circuit 15 bits 16 bits 15 bits FIFO2 (31 bits × 10 stages) FIFO 1 (31 bits × 10 stages) 16 bits DFCRA DFG reference register 1 DFCRB DFG reference register 2 15 bits FIFO output selector & output buffer P77 to 70 (PPG output) Comparator (5 bits) Comparator (5 bits) Compare circuit (16 bits) STRIG ADTRG Vpulse Mlevel NHSW HSW IRRHSW1 DFCTR 5-bit counter NCDFG Cleared Edge detector VideoFF ↑, ↓ CLK DFCRA CCLR FGR20FF FRT CKSL φ s/8 φ s/4 R W R/W R/W W HSM2 DFCRA FRCOVF Cleared 16-bit timer counter Capture IRRHSW2 AudioFF HSM2 FTCTR (16 bits) VFF/NFF HSM2 ISEL1 DFCRA ISEL2 Figure 26.22 Block Diagram of the HSW Timing Generator R Internal bus VD PB R/W R/W W Section 26 Servo Circuits Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 589 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 DPG ↑ Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.4.3 HSW Timing Generator Configuration The HSW timing generator is composed of the elements shown in table 26.5. Table 26.5 Configuration of the HSW Timing Generator Element HSW mode register 1 (HSM1) HSW mode register 2 (HSM2) HSW loop stage number setting register (HSLP) FIFO output pattern register 1 (FPDRA) FIFO output pattern register 2 (FPDRB) FIFO timing pattern register 1 (FTPRA) FIFO timing pattern register 2 (FTPRB) DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA) DFG reference register 2 (DFCRB) FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR) DFG reference count register (DFCTR) FIFO control circuit DFG count compare circuit (×2) 16-bit timer counter 31-bit x 20 stage FIFO 31-bit FIFO data buffer 16-bit compare circuit Function Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating status Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating status Setting of number of loop stages in loop mode Output pattern register of FIFO1 Output pattern register of FIFO2 Output timing register of FIFO1 Output timing register of FIFO2 Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO1 Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO2 Capture register of timer counter DFG edge count FIFO status control Detection of match between DFCR and DFG counters 16-bit free-run timer counter First In First Out data buffer Data storing buffer for the first stage of FIFO Detection of match between timer counter and FIFO data buffer FPDRA and FPDRB are intermediate buffers; an FTPRA and FTPRB write results in simultaneous writing of all 31 bits to the FIFO. The FIFO has two 31-bit x 10-stage data buffers; its operating status is controlled by HSM1 and HSM2. Data is stored in the 31-bit data buffer. The values of FTPRA/FTPRB and the timer counter are compared, and if they match, the 15-bit pattern data is output to each function. AudioFF, VideoFF, and PPG (P70 to P77) are outputs from the corresponding pins, ADTRG is the A/D converter hardware start signal, Vpulse and Mlevel signals are the signals for generating the additional V pulses, and HSW and NHSW signals are the same as VideoFF signals used for the phase control of the drum. The 16-bit timer counter is initialized by the overflow of the prescaler unit in the free-run mode (FRT bit of HSM2 = 1), or by Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 590 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits a signal indicating a match between DFCRA/DFCRB and the 5-bit DFG counter in DFG reference mode. 26.4.4 Register Configuration Table 26.6 shows the register configuration of the HSW timing generator. Table 26.6 Register Configuration Name HSW mode register 1 HSW mode register 2 HSW loop stage number setting register FIFO output pattern register 1 FIFO timing pattern register 1* FIFO output pattern register 2 FIFO timing pattern register 2 DFG reference register 1* DFG reference register 2 FIFO timer capture register* DFG reference count register* Note: * Abbrev. HSM1 HSM2 HSLP FPDRA FTPRA FPDRB FTPRB DFCRA DFCRB FTCTR DFCTR R/W R/W R/W R/W W W W W W W R R Size Byte Byte Byte Word Word Word Word Byte Byte Word Byte Initial Value H'30 H'00 Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'FFFF Undetermined Undetermined H'0000 H'E0 Address H'D060 H'D061 H'D062 H'D064 H'D066 H'D068 H'D06A H'D06C H'D06D H'D066 H'D06C FTPRA and FTCTR, as well as DFCRA and DFCTR, are allocated to the same addresses. 26.4.5 Register Description HSW Mode Register 1 (HSM1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 FLB 0 R 6 FLA 0 R 5 EMPB 1 R 4 EMPA 1 R 3 OVWB 0 R/(W)* 2 OVWA 0 R/(W)* 1 CLRB 0 R/W 0 CLRA 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written HSM1 is an 8-bit register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing generator. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 591 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 7 to 4 are read-only bits, and write is disabled. All the other bits accept both read and write. It is initialized to H'30 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bit 7⎯FIFO2 Full Flag (FLB): When the FLB bit is 1, it indicates that the FIFO2 is full of the timing pattern data and the output pattern data. If a write is attempted in this state, the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag (bit 3) is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO2, then write again. Bit 7 FLB 0 1 Description FIFO2 is not full, and can accept data input. FIFO2 is full of data. (Initial value) Bit 6⎯FIFO1 Full Flag (FLA): When the FLA bit is 1, it indicates that the FIFO1 is full of the timing pattern data and the output pattern data. If a write is attempted in this state, the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag (bit 2) is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO1, then write again. Bit 6 FLA 0 1 Description FIFO1 is not full, and can accept data input. FIFO1 is full of data. (Initial value) Bit 5⎯FIFO2 Empty Flag (EMPB): Indicates that FIFO2 has no data, or that all the data has been output in single mode. Bit 5 EMPB 0 1 Description FIFO2 contains data. FIFO2 contains no data. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 592 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 4⎯FIFO1 Empty Flag (EMPA): Indicates that FIFO1 has no data, or that all the data has been output in single mode. Bit 4 EMPA 0 1 Description FIFO1 contains data. FIFO1 contains no data. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯FIFO2 Overwrite Flag (OVWB): If a write is attempted when the FIFO2 is full of the timing pattern data and the output pattern data (FLB bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO2, then write again. Write 0 to clear the OVWB flag, because it is not cleared automatically. Bit 3 OVWB 0 1 Description Normal operation. (Initial value) Indicates that a write in FIFO2 was attempted when FIFO2 was full of data. Clear this flag by writing 0 to this bit. Bit 2⎯FIFO1 Overwrite Flag (OVWA): If a write is attempted when the FIFO1 is full of the timing pattern data and the output pattern data (FLA bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO1, then write again. Write 0 to clear the OVWA flag, because it is not cleared automatically. Bit 2 OVWA 0 1 Description Normal operation. (Initial value) Indicates that a write in FIFO1 was attempted when FIFO1 was full. Clear this flag by writing 0 to this bit. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 593 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 1⎯FIFO2 Pointer Clear (CLRB): Clears the FIFO2 write position pointer. After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect. Bit 1 CLRB 0 1 Description Normal operation. Clears the FIFO2 pointer. (Initial value) Bit 0⎯FIFO1 Pointer Clear (CLRA): Clears the FIFO1 write position pointer. After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect. Bit 0 CLRA 0 1 Description Normal operation Clears the FIFO1 pointer (Initial value) HSW Mode Register 2 (HSM2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 FRT 0 R/W 6 FGR2OFF 0 R 5 LOP 0 R/W 4 EDG 0 R/W 3 ISEL1 0 R/W 2 SOFG 0 R/W 1 OFG 0 R 0 VFF/NFF 0 W HSM2 is an 8-bit register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing generator. Bit 1 is a read-only bit, and write is disabled. Bit 0 is a write-only bit, and if a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. All the other bits accept both read and write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bit 7⎯Free-run Bit (FRT): Selects whether the matching timing is determined by the DPG counter and timer, or by the FRC. Bit 7 FRT 0 1 Description 5-bit DFG counter + 16-bit timer counter 16-bit FRC (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 594 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 6⎯FRG2 Clear Stop Bit (FGR2OFF): Disables clearing of the counter by the DFG register 2. The FIFO group, including both FIFO1 and FIFO2, is available. Bit 6 FGR2OFF 0 1 Description Enables clearing of the16-bit timer counter by DFG register 2 Disables clearing of the16-bit timer counter by DFG register 2 (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Mode Selection Bit (LOP): Selects the output mode of FIFO. If the loop mode is selected, LOB3 to LOB0 bits and LOA3 to LOA0 bits become valid. If the LOP bit is modified, the pointer which counts the writing position of FIFO is cleared. In this case, the last output data is kept. Bit 5 LOP 0 1 Description Single mode Loop mode (Initial value) Bit 4⎯DFG Edge Selection Bit (EDG): Selects the edge by which to count DFG pulses. Bit 4 EDG 0 1 Description Counts by the rising edge of DFG Counts by the falling edge of DFG (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL1): Selects the interrupt source. (IRRHSW1) Bit 3 ISEL1 0 1 Description Generates an interrupt request by the rising edge of the STRIG signal of FIFO (Initial value) Generates an interrupt request by the matching signal of FIFO Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 595 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 2⎯FIFO Output Group Selection Bit (SOFG): Selects whether 20 stages of FIFO1 + FIFO2 or only 10 stages of FIFO1 are used. If 20-stage output mode is used in single mode, data must be written to FIFO1 and FIFO2. Monitor the output FIFO group flag (OFG) and control data writing by software. All the data of FIFO1 is output, then all the data of FIFO2 is output. These steps are repeated. If 10-stage output mode is used, the data of FIFO2 is not reflected. Modifying the SOFG bit from 0 to 1, then again to 0 initializes the control signal of the FIFO output stage to the FIFO1 side. Bit 2 SOFG 0 1 Description 20-stage output of FIFO1 + FIFO2 10-stage output of FIFO1 only (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Output FIFO Group Flag (OFG): Indicates the FIFO group which is outputting. Bit 1 OFG 0 1 Description Pattern is being output by FIFO1 Pattern is being output by FIFO2 (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Output Switching Bit between VideoFF and NarrowFF (VFF/NFF): Switches the signal output from the VideoFF pin. Bit 0 VFF/NFF 0 1 Description VideoFF output NarrowFF output (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 596 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits HSW Loop Stage Number Setting Register (HSLP) Bit : 7 LOB3 Initial value : R/W : * R/W 6 LOB2 * R/W 5 LOB1 * R/W 4 LOB0 * R/W 3 LOA3 * R/W 2 LOA2 * R/W 1 LOA1 * R/W 0 LOA0 * R/W HSLP is an 8-bit read/write register that sets the number of the loop stages when the HSW timing generator is in loop mode. It is valid when bit 5 (LOP) of HSM2 is 1. Bits 7 to 4 set the number of FIFO2 stages. Bits 3 to 0 set the number of FIFO1 stages. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to set the number of the stages when the loop mode is used. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 597 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 7 to 4⎯FIFO2 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOB3 to LOB0): Set the number of FIFO2 stages in loop mode. They are valid only when the loop mode is set (LOP bit of HSM2 is 1). HSM2 Bit 5 LOP 0 1 HSLP Bit 7 LOB3 * 0 Bit 6 LOB2 * 0 Bit 5 LOB1 * 0 Bit 4 LOB0 * 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Legend: * Don't care. 0 1 Description Single mode Only 0th stage of FIFO2 is output 0th and 1st stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 2nd stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 3rd stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 4th stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 5th stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 6th stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 7th stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 8th stages of FIFO2 are output 0th to 9th stages of FIFO2 are output Setting prohibited (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 598 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 3 to 0⎯FIFO1 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOA3 to LOA0): Set the number of FIFO1 stages in loop mode. They are valid only when the loop mode is set (LOP bit of HSM2 is 1). HSM2 Bit 5 LOP 0 1 HSLP Bit 3 LOA3 * 0 Bit 2 LOA2 * 0 Bit 1 LOA1 * 0 Bit 0 LOA0 * 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Legend: * Don’t care. 0 1 Description Single mode Only 0th stage of FIFO1 is output 0th and 1st stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 2nd stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 3rd stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 4th stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 5th stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 6th stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 7th stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 8th stages of FIFO1 are output 0th to 9th stages of FIFO1 are output Setting prohibited (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 599 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 (FPDRA) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 — 1 — 7 PPGA7 * W 14 ADTRGA * W 6 PPGA6 * W 13 12 STRIGA NarrowFFA * W 5 PPGA5 * W * W 4 PPGA4 * W 11 VFFA * W 3 PPGA3 * W 10 AFFA * W 2 PPGA2 * W 9 VpulseA * W 1 PPGA1 * W 8 MlevelA * W 0 PPGA0 * W Note : * Undefined FPDRA is a buffer register for the FIFO1 output pattern register. The output pattern data written in FPDRA is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO1 pointed by the buffer pointer. Be sure to write the output pattern data in FPDRA before writing it in FTPRA. FPDRA is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Bit 15⎯Reserved: Cannot be read or modified. Bit 14⎯A/D Trigger A Bit (ADTRGA): Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D converter. Bit 13⎯S-TRIGA Bit (STRIGA): Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt. When the STRIGB is selected by the ISEL, modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt. Bit 12⎯NarrowFFA Bit (NarrowFFA): Controls the narrow video head. Bit 11⎯VideoFFA Bit (VFFA): Controls the video head. Bit 10⎯AudioFFA Bit (AFFA): Controls the audio head. Bit 9⎯VpulseA Bit (VpulseA): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator. Bit 8⎯MlevelA Bit (MlevelA): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator. Bits 7 to 0⎯PPG Output Signal A Bits (PPGA7 to PPGA0): Used for outputting a timing control signal from port 7 (PPG). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 600 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 — 1 — 14 ADTRGB * W 6 PPGB6 * W 13 12 STRIGB NarrowFFB * W 5 PPGB5 * W * W 4 PPGB4 * W 11 VFFB * W 3 PPGB3 * W 10 AFFB * W 2 PPGB2 * W 9 VpulseB * W 1 PPGB1 * W 8 MlevelB * W 0 PPGB0 * W 7 PPGB7 * W Note : * Undefined FPDRB is a buffer register for the FIFO2 output pattern register. The output pattern data written in FPDRB is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO2 pointed by the buffer pointer. Be sure to write the output pattern data in FPDRB before writing it in FTPRB. FPDRB is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Bit 15⎯Reserved: Cannot be read or modified. Bit 14⎯A/D Trigger B Bit (ADTRGB): Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D converter. Bit 13⎯S-TRIGB Bit (STRIGB): Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt. When the STRIGB is selected by the ISEL, modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt. Bit 12⎯NarrowFFB Bit (NarrowFFB): Controls the narrow video head. Bit 11⎯VideoFFB Bit (VFFB): Controls the video head. Bit 10⎯AudioFFB Bit (AFFB): Controls the audio head. Bit 9⎯VpulseB Bit (VpulseB): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator. Bit 8⎯MlevelB Bit (MlevelB): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator. Bits 7 to 0⎯PPG Output Signal B Bits (PPGB7 to PPGB0): Used for outputting a timing control signal from port 7 (PPG). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 601 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits FIFO Timing Pattern Register 1 (FTPRA) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 FTPRA15 FTPRA14 FTPRA13 FTPRA12 FTPRA11 FTPRA10 FTPRA9 * W 7 FTPRA7 * W * W 6 FTPRA6 * W * W 5 FTPRA5 * W * W 4 FTPRA4 * W * W 3 FTPRA3 * W * W 2 FTPRA2 * W * W 1 FTPRA1 * W 8 FTPRA8 * W 0 FTPRA0 * W Note : * Undefined FTPRA is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO1. The timing data written in FPDRA is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO1 pointed by the buffer pointer together with the buffer data of FPDRA. FTPRA is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Note: The same address is assigned to the FTPRA and the FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR). Accordingly, the value of FTCTR is read out if a read is attempted. FIFO Timing Pattern Register 2 (FTPRB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 9 10 12 11 15 14 13 FTPRB15 FTPRB14 FTPRB13 FTPRB12 FTPRB11 FTPRB10 FTPRB9 * W 7 FTPRB7 * W * W 6 FTPRB6 * W * W 5 FTPRB5 * W * W 4 FTPRB4 * W * W 3 FTPRB3 * W * W 2 FTPRB2 * W * W 1 FTPRB1 * W 8 FTPRB8 * W 0 FTPRB0 * W Note : * Undefined FTPRB is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO2. The timing data written in FPDRB is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO2 pointed by the buffer pointer together with the buffer data of FPDRB. FTPRB is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 602 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits DFG Reference Register 1 (DFCRA) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 ISEL2 0 W 6 CCLR 0 W 5 CKSL 0 W 4 DFCRA4 * W 3 DFCRA3 * W 2 1 DFCRA2 DFCRA1 * W * W 0 DFCRA0 * W Note : * Undefined DFCRA is a register which determines the operation of the HSW timing generator as well as the starting point of the timing of FIFO1. DFCRA is an 8-bit write-only register. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Note: The same address is assigned to the DFCRA and the DFG reference counter register (DFCTR). Accordingly, the value of DFCTR is read out in the low-order five bits if a read is attempted. Bit 7⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL2): Selects the interrupt source. (IRRHSW2) Bit 7 ISEL2 0 1 Description Generates an interrupt request by the clear signal of the 16-bit timer counter (Initial value) Generates an interrupt request by the VD signal in PB mode Bit 6⎯DFG Counter Clear Bit (CCLR): Forcibly clears the 5-bit DFG counter by software. After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect. Bit 6 CCLR 0 1 Description Normal operation Clears the 5-bit DFG counter (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 603 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯16-bit Timer Counter Clock Source Selection Bit (CKSL): Selects the clock source of the 16-bit timer counter. Bit 5 CKSL 0 1 Description φs/4 φs/8 (Initial value) Bits 4 to 0⎯FIFO1 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRA4 to DFCRA0): Determines the starting point of the timing of FIFO1. The initial value is undetermined. Be sure to set a value after a reset or stand-by. It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0. DFG Reference Register 2 (DFCRB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 6 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 5 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 4 DFCRB4 * W 3 DFCRB3 * W 2 DFCRB2 * W 1 DFCRB1 * W 0 DFCRB0 * W Note : * Undefined DFCRB is a register which determines the starting point of the timing of FIFO2. DFCRB is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use. Bits 4 to 0⎯FIFO2 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRB4 to DFCRB0): Sets the starting point of the timing of FIFO2. The value after reset or after stand-by mode is entered is undetermined; be sure to write data before use. It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 604 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits FIFO Timer Capture Register (FTCTR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 9 10 12 11 15 14 13 FTCTR15 FTCTR14 FTCTR13 FTCTR12 FTCTR11 FTCTR10 FTCTR9 0 R 7 FTCTR7 0 R 0 R 6 FTCTR6 0 R 0 R 5 FTCTR5 0 R 0 R 4 FTCTR4 0 R 0 R 3 FTCTR3 0 R 0 R 2 FTCTR2 0 R 0 R 1 FTCTR1 0 R 8 FTCTR8 0 R 0 FTCTR0 0 R FTCRT is a register to display the count of the 16-bit timer counter. FTCRT is an 16-bit read-only register. It captures the counter value when the VD signal is detected in PB mode. Only a word access is accepted. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. It is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Note: The same address is assigned to the FTCTR and the FIFO timing pattern register 1 (FTPRA). Accordingly, if a write is attempted, the value is written in FTPRA. DFG Reference Count Register (DFCTR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 6 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 5 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 4 DFCTR4 0 R 3 DFCTR3 0 R 2 DFCTR2 0 R 1 DFCTR1 0 R 0 DFCTR0 0 R DFCTR is a register to count DFG pulses. DFCTR is an 8-bit read-only register. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Note: The same address is assigned to the DFCTR and the DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA). Accordingly, if a write is attempted, the value is written in DFCRA. Bits 4 to 0—DFG Pulse Count Bits (DFCTR4 to DFCTR0): These bits count DFG pulses. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 605 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.4.6 Operation 5-Bit DFG Counter: The 5-bit DFG counter increments the count at the DFG edges selected by the EDG bit of HSW Mode Register 2. The DFG counter is cleared by a DPG rising edge, or by writing to the CCLR bit of the DFG reference register 1. 16-Bit Timer Counter: The 16-bit timer counter can operate in DFG reference mode or in freerunning mode. • DFG Reference Mode The timer counter operates by referencing the DFG signal. When the 5-bit DFG counter value matches the value specified in the DFG reference register 1 or 2, the 16-bit timer counter is initialized; this is the start point of the FIFO output timing. In DFG reference mode, the start point specifying method can be selected by the FGR2OFF bit of the HSW mode register 2: one way is to specify both FIFO1 and FIFO2 by only one register (DFG reference register 1), and the other is to specify FIFO1 and FIFO2 by DFG reference registers 1 and 2, respectively. When only the DFG reference register 1 is used, the continuous values must be set to FIFO1 and FIFO2 as the timing patters. • Free-Running Mode The timer counter operates in association with the prescaler unit. When the 18-bit free-running counter in the prescaler unit overflows, the 16-bit timer counter in the HSW timing generator is initialized; this is the start point of the FIFO output timing. Compare Circuit: The compare circuit compares the 16-bit timer counter value with the FIFO timing pattern, and when they match, the compare circuit generates a trigger signal for outputting the next-stage FIFO data. FIFO: The FIFO generates a head switch signal for VCR and patterns for servo control. Data is set to FIFO by using the FIFO timing pattern registers 1 and 2, and FIFO output pattern registers 1 and 2. The FIFO operates in single mode and loop mode. In these two modes, the number of output stages can be selected by the FIFO output group selection bit: 20-stage output using both FIFO1 and FIFO2 or 10-stage output using only FIFO1. • Single Mode The output pattern data is output when the timing pattern matches the counter value. The data, once output, is lost, and the internal pointer is decrementd by 1. After the last data is output, the FIFO stops operation until data is written again. When 20-stage output is used, writing in FIFO1 and FIFO2 must be controlled by software. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 606 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Loop Mode The data output cycle is repeated from stage 0 to the final stage selected in the HSW loop number setting register. As in single mode, the output pattern data is output when the timing pattern matches the counter value. In loop mode, the FIFO data is retained. Data in each FIFO group can be modified in loop mode. The FIFO group currently outputting data can be checked by the OFG bit of the HSW mode register 2; after checking the outputting FIFO group, clear the FIFO group which is not outputting data, then write new data to it. Writing new data must be completed before the FIFO group starts operation. The FIFO cannot be modified partially because the write pointer is outside the loop stages. Figures 26.23 and 26.24 show examples of the timing waveform and operation of the HSW timing generator. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 607 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 10 11 0 1 2 tA1 8 tA3 tB1 9 Figure 26.23 Example of Timing Waveform of HSW (for 12 DFG Pulses) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 608 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Example of setting: DFCRA = H'02, DFCRB = H'08, HSLP = H'21, DFG falling edge 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 tA1 tA2 3 Clear A Clear B DPG V.FF A.FF DFG Section 26 Servo Circuits Internal bus W W FPDRA W W FPDRB FTPRA tA0 PA9 FTPRB tB0 PB9 FIFO1 tA5 tA4 tA3 tA2 tA1 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 tB5 tB4 tB3 tB2 tB1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 FIFO2 Output select buffer Output data buffer Comparator φs/4 Timer counter Output pattern data Figure 26.24 Example of Operation of the HSW Timing Generator Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 609 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Example of operation in single mode (20 stages of FIFO used) 1. Set to single mode (LOP = 0) 2. Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA. 3. Write the output timing (tA1) to FTPRA. tA1 is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This initializes the output pattern data to PA0. 4. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set. 5. Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB. 6. Write the output timing (tB1) to FTPRB. tB1 is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This initializes the output pattern data to PB0. 7. Repeat these steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set. By step 3, the pattern data of PA0 is output. If tA1 matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA1 is output. If tA2 matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA2 is output. . . . After this sequence is repeated and all the pattern data set in FIFO1 is output, the pattern data of FIFO2 is output. After the pattern data is output, the pointer is decremented by 1. Care is required, however, because matching of tA0 is not detected until data is written in FIFO2. Matching of tB0 also is not detected until data is written in FIFO1 again. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 610 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Example of the operation in loop mode mode 1. Set the number of loop stages in HSLP register (e.g. HSLP = H'44) 2. Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA. 3. Write the output timing (tA1) to FTPRA. tA1 is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This initializes the output pattern data to PA0. 4. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set. 5. Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB. 6. Write the output timing (tB1) to FTPRB. tB1 is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This initializes the output pattern data to PB0. 7. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set. By step 3, the pattern data PA0 is output. If tA1 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA1 is output. If tA2 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA2 is output. . . . If tA4 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA4 is output. If tA5 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB0 is output. If tB1 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB1 is output. . . . If tB4 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB4 is output. If tB5 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA0 is output. . . . Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 611 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.4.7 Interrupts The HSW timing generator generates interrupts under the following conditions. 1. IRRHSW1 occurs when pattern data is written (OVWA, OVWB = 1) while FIFO is full (FULL). 2. IRRHSW1 occurs when matching is detected while the STRIG bit of FIFO is 1. 3. IRRHSW1 occurs when the values of the 16-bit timer counter and 16-bit timing pattern register match. 4. IRRHSW2 occurs when the 16-bit timer counter is cleared. 5. IRRHSW2 occurs when a VD signal (capture signal of the timer capture register) is received in PB mode. Condition 2 or 3, as well as 4 or 5, are selected by ISEL1 and ISEL2. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 612 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.4.8 Cautions • When both the 5-bit DFG counter and 16-bit timer counter are operating, the latter is not cleared if input of DPG and DFG signals is stopped. This leads to free-running of the 16-bit timer counter, and periodical detection of matching by the 16-bit timer counter. In such a case, the period of the output from the HSW timing generator is independent from DPG or DFG. • Specify the mode setting bit (LOP) of the HSW mode register 2 (HSM2) immediately before writing the FIFO data. • Input the rising edge of DPG and DFG count edge at different timings. If they are input at the same timing, counting up DFG and clearing the 5-bit DFG counter occur simultaneously. In this case, the latter will take precedence. This leads to the DFG counter lag by 1. Figure 26.25 shows the input timing of DPG and DFG. • If stop of the drum system is required when FIFO output is being used in the 20-stage output mode, modify the SOFG bit of HSM2 register from 0 to 1, then again to 0 by software, and be sure to initialize the FIFO output stage to the FIFO1 side. Also clear and rewrite the data of FIFO1 and FIFO2. I ±Tp · FG | > φ (1 state) DPG DFG Tp · FG Note: When the 5-bit DFG counter increments count at the rising edge of DFG Figure 26.25 Input Timing of DPG and DFG Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 613 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.5 26.5.1 High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback Overview This high-speed switching circuit generates a color rotary signal (C.Rotary) and head-amplifier switching signal (H.Amp SW) for use in four-head special playback. A pre-amplifier output comparison result signal is input from the COMP pin. The signal output to the C.Rotary pin is a chroma signal processing control signal. The signal output at the H.Amp SW pin is a pre-amplifier output select signal. To reduce the width of noise bars, the C.Rotary and H.Amp SW signals are synchronized to the horizontal sync signal (OSCH). OSCH is made by adding supplemented H, which has been separated from Csync signal in the sync signal detector circuit. For more details of OSCH, see section 26.15, Sync Signal Detector. If the VCR system does not require this circuit, C.Rotary, H.Amp SW, and COMP pins can be used as the I/O port. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 614 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.5.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.26 shows the block diagram of this circuit. Internal bus W CHCR SIG3 to 0 W CRH W CHCR HAH OSCH (Synchronization) Synchronization control C.Rotary Decoding circuit COMP H.Amp SW NarrowFF VideoFF V/N CHCR W Internal bus W HSWPOL CHCR RTP0 Figure 26.26 High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback 26.5.3 Pin Configuration Table 26.7 summarizes the pin configuration of the high-speed switching circuit for four-head special playback. If this circuit is not used, the pins can be used as I/O port. See section 26.2, Servo Port. Table 26.7 Pin Configuration Namea Compare input pin Color rotary signal output pin Head amplifier switch pin Abbrev. COMP C.Rotary H.Amp SW I/O Input Output Output Function Input of pre-amplifier output result signal Output of chroma processing control signal Output of pre-amplifier output select signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 615 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.5.4 Register Description Register Configuration Table 26.8 shows the register configuration of the high-speed switching circuit for four-head special playback. Table 26.8 Register Configuration Name Special playback control register Abbrev. CHCR R/W W Size Byte Initial Value H'00 Address H'D06E Special Playback Control Register (CHCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 V/N 0 W 6 HSWPOL 0 W 5 CRH 0 W 4 HAH 0 W 3 SIG3 0 W 2 SIG2 0 W 1 SIG1 0 W 0 SIG0 0 W CHCR is an 8-bit write-only register. It cannot be read. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in standby or module stop mode. Bits 7⎯HSW Signal Select Bit (V/N): Selects the HSW signal to be used at special playback. Bit 7 V/N 0 1 Description Video FF signal output Narrow FF signal output (Initial value) Bit 6⎯COMP Polarity Select Bit (HSWPOL): Selects the polarity of the COMP signal. Bit 6 HSWPOL 0 1 Description Positive Negative (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 616 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯C.Rotary Synchronization Control Bit (CRH): Synchronizes C.Rotary signal with the OSCH signal. Bit 5 CRH 0 1 Description Synchronous Asynchronous (Initial value) Bit 4⎯H.AmpSW Synchronization Control Bit (HAH): Synchronizes H.AmpSW signal with the OSCH signal. Bit 4 HAH 0 1 Description Synchronous Asynchronous (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0⎯Signal Control (SIG3 to SIG0): These bits, combined with the state of the COMP input pin, control the outputs at the C.Rotary and H.AmpSW pins. Bit 3 SIG3 0 Bit 2 SIG2 0 1 Bit 1 SIG1 * 0 Bit 0 SIG0 * 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Legend: * Don’t care. 0 1 * Output pins C.Rotary L HSW HSW L H H.Amp SW L L H HSW HSW COMP RTP0 (Initial value) HSW EX-OR COMP COMP HSW EX-NOR COMP HSW E-OR RTP0 HSW EX-NOR RTP0 RTP0 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 617 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.6 26.6.1 Drum Speed Error Detector Overview Drum speed error control holds the drum at a constant revolution speed, by measuring the period of the DFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed error against a preset value. The speed error data is processed and added to phase error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed and phase of the drum. The DFG input signal is reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit, and sent to the speed error detector as the DFG signal. The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DFG signal, and detects the error against a preset data value. The preset data is the value that results from measuring the DFG signal period with the clock signal when the drum motor is running at the correct speed. The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DFG signal. The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on. The digital filter processes and adds the speed error data to phase error data from the drum phase control system, then sends the result to the PWM as drum error data. 26.6.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.27 shows a block diagram of the drum speed error detector. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 618 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus W DFVCR DFOVF S F/F QR DFRCS1,0 DFRVCR R/W W (R)/W R DFVCR DF-R/UNR R/W DFVCR DFCS1,0 Preset R F/F QS Counter (16 bits) OVF Lock 1 up S R Clear DFER DFRLOR Lock range data 1 (16 bits) Error data limiter control circuit DFUCR DFESS DFEFON DFVCR DFVCR DPCNT Error data (16 bits) Lock counter (2 bits) Lock range detector Lock 2 up Latch Q F/F DFPR Preset data (16 bits) DFRUDR Lock range data 2 (16 bits) IRRDRM1 φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 NCDFG ↑, ↓ Edge detector IRRDRM2 UDF ADDFGN Error data (16 bits) To DFU FGCR DRF To DROCKON DFU R/W R/W R/W Internal bus W R/W Figure 26.27 Block Diagram of the Drum Speed Error Detector Section 26 Servo Circuits Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 619 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 W Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.6.3 Register Configuration Table 26.9 shows the register configuration of the drum speed error detector. Table 26.9 Register Configuration Name Specified DFG speed preset data register DFG speed error data register DFG lock upper data register DFG lock lower data register Drum speed error detection control register Abbrev. DFPR DFER DFRUDR DFRLDR DFVCR R/W W R/W W W R/W Size Word Word Word Word Byte Initial Value H'0000 H'0000 H'7FFF H'8000 H'00 Address H'D030 H'D032 H'D034 H'D036 H'D038 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 620 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.6.4 Register Description Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 DFPR15 0 W 7 DFPR7 0 W 14 DFPR14 0 W 6 DFPR6 0 W 13 DFPR13 0 W 5 DFPR5 0 W 12 DFPR12 0 W 4 DFPR4 0 W 11 DFPR11 0 W 3 DFPR3 0 W 10 DFPR10 0 W 2 DFPR2 0 W 9 DFPR9 0 W 1 DFPR1 0 W 8 DFPR8 0 W 0 DFPR0 0 W The DFG speed preset data is set in DFPR. When data is written, the 16-bit preset data is sent to the preset circuit. The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'8000* as the reference value. Specified DFG speed preset data = H'8000 − ( φs/n − 2) DFG frequency φ s: Servo clock frequency (fosc/2) in Hz DFG frequency: In Hz Constant 2 is the presetting interval (see figure 26.28). φ s/n Clock source of the selected counter DFPR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. DFPR cannot be read. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read. DFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the DFG speed error data register (DFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 621 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits DFG Speed Error Data Register (DFER) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 DFER15 0 R*/W 7 DFER7 0 R*/W 14 DFER14 0 R*/W 6 DFER6 0 R*/W 13 DFER13 0 R*/W 5 DFER5 0 R*/W 12 DFER12 0 R*/W 4 DFER4 0 R*/W 11 DFER11 0 R*/W 3 DFER3 0 R*/W 10 DFER10 0 R*/W 2 DFER2 0 R*/W 9 DFER9 0 R*/W 1 DFER1 0 R*/W 8 DFER8 0 R*/W 0 DFER0 0 R*/W Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read. DFER is a 16-bit read/write register that stores 16-bit DFG speed error data. When the drum motor speed is correct, the data latched in DFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the speed is faster than the specified speed, and positive data if the speed is slower than the specified speed. The DFER value is sent to the digital filter either automatically or by software. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. DFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. Refer to the note Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR) in section 26.6.4, Register Description. DFG Lock Upper Data Register (DFRUDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DFRUDR15 DFRUDR14 DFRUDR13 DFRUDR12 DFRUDR11 DFRUDR10 DFRUDR9 DFRUDR8 0 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DFRUDR7 DFRUDR6 DFRUDR5 DFRUDR4 DFRUDR3 DFRUDR2 DFRUDR1 DFRUDR0 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W DFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when drum speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when limiter function is in use. Set a signed data to DFRUDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit). When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter which has been set by DFRCS 1 and 0 bits of DFVCR register decrements the count. If the set value of DFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the DFG speed error data exceeds the DFRUDR value within the limiter function is in use, the DFRUDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 622 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. DFG Lock LOWER Data Register (DFRLDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DFRLDR15 DFRLDR14 DFRLDR13 DFRLDR12 DFRLDR11 DFRLDR10 DFRLDR9 DFRLDR8 1 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DFRLDR7 DFRLDR6 DFRLDR5 DFRLDR4 DFRLDR3 DFRLDR2 DFRLDR1 DFRLDR0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W DFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when drum speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when limiter function is in use. Set a signed data to DFRLDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit). When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter which has been set by DFRCS 1 and 0 bits of DFVCR register decrements the count. If the set value of DFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the DFG speed error data is under the DFRLDR value when the limiter function is in use, the DFRLDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register (DFVCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 DFCS1 0 R/W 6 DFCS0 0 R/W 5 DFOVF 0 R/(W)*1 4 3 DFRFON DF-R/UNR 0 R/W 0 R 2 DPCNT 0 R/W 1 DFRCS1 0 (R)*2/W 0 DFRCS0 0 (R)*2/W Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written. 2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out. DFVCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of drum speed error detection. Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 623 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bits (DFCS1, DFCS0): DFCS1 and DFCS0 select the clock to be supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 7 DFCS1 0 Bit 6 DFCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (DFOVF): DFOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 16-bit timer counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Bit 5 DFOVF 0 1 Description Normal state. Indicates that overflow has occurred in the counter. (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (DFRFON): Enables the error data limit function. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data registers (DFRUDR and DFRLDR)). Bit 4 DFRFON 0 1 Description Disables limit function. Enables limit function. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Drum Lock Flag (DF-R/UNR): Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the drum lock counter. Bit 3 DF-R/UNR 0 1 Description Indicates that the drum speed system is not locked. Indicates that the drum speed system is locked. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 624 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 2⎯Drum Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (DPCNT): Enables the filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the drum lock counter. Bit 2 DPCNT 0 1 Description Disables the filter computation by detection of the drum lock. (Initial value) Enables the filter computation of the phase system when drum lock is detected. Bits 1 and 0⎯Drum Lock Counter Setting Bits (DFRCS1, DFRCS0): Set the number of times to detect drum locks (which means the number of times DFG is detected in the range set by the lock range data register). The drum lock flag is set when the specified number of drum locks is detected. If the NCDFG signal is detected outside the lock range after data is written in DFRCS1 and DFRCS0, the data will be stored in the lock counter. Note: If DFRCS1 or DFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (drum lock flag) is 1 and the drum lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the drum speed system is locked. The drum lock counter stops until lock is released after underflow. Bit 1 DFRCS1 0 Bit 0 DFRCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Underflow occurs after lock was detected once. Underflow occurs after lock was detected twice. Underflow occurs after lock was detected three times. Underflow occurs after lock was detected four times. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 625 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.6.5 Operation The drum speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the DFG specified speed preset register (DFPR). The reference value set in DFPR is preset in the counter by NCDFG signal, and the counter decrements the count by the selected clock. The timing of the counter presetting and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or falling edge of NCDFG signal. See section 26.14.4, DFG Noise Removal Circuit. The error data detected is sent to the digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binaries. The data takes a positive number (+) if the speed is slower than the specified speed, a negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if it had no error (revolving at the specified speed). Figure 26.28 shows an example of operation to detect the drum speed. • Setting the error data limit A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit using the DFG lock data register (DFRUDR, DFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in DFRUDR and the lower limit in DFRLDR, and write 1 in DFRFON bit. If the error data is outside the limit range, the DFRLDR value is sent to the digital filter circuit if a negative number is latched, or the DFRUDR value if a positive number is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off the limit setting (DFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit setting on (DFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured. • Lock detection If an error data is detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the drum lock flag (DF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of locking set by DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits, and an interrupt is requested (IRRDRM2) at the same time. The number of the occurrence of locking (once to 4 times) before the flag is set can be specified. Use DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits for this purpose. The on/off status of the phase system digital filter computation can be controlled automatically by the status of lock detection when bit 5 (DPHA bit) of the drum system digital filter control register (DFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off) and DPCNT bit is 1. • Drum system speed error detection counter The drum system speed error detection counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag (DFOVF) when an overflow occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRDRM1). To clear DFOVF, write 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 626 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Interrupt request IRRDRM1 is generated by the NCDFG signal latch and the overflow of the error detection counter. IRRDRM2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the specified number of times of locking). NCDFG signal Error data latch signal (DFG ↑) Preset data load signal Preset period (2 counts) Specified speed value Counter Preset value –value+value Latch data 0 (no error) Figure 26.28 Example of the Drum Speed Error Detection (When the Rising Edge of DFG Is Selected) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 627 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.6.6 fH Correction in Trick Play Mode In trick play mode, the tape speed relative to the video head changes. This change alters the horizontal sync signal (fH), causing skew. To correct the skew, the drum motor speed must be shifted to a different speed in each trick play mode, so as to obtain the normal horizontal sync frequency. To shift the drum motor speed, software should modify the value written in the specified DFG speed preset data register in the speed error detector. This fH correction can be expressed in terms of the basic frequency fF of the drum as follows. fF = N0 ×f N0 + αH (1 − n) F0 Legend: n: αH: N0: fF0: Speed multiplier (FWD = positive, REV = negative) H alignment (1.5H in standard mode, 0.75H in 2x mode, and 0.5H in 3x mode for VHS and β systems; 1H for an 8-mm VCR) Standard H numbers within field Field frequency NTSC: N0 = 262.5, fF0 = 59.94 PAL: N0 = 312.5, fF0 = 50.00 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 628 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.7 26.7.1 Drum Phase Error Detector Overview The drum phase control system must start after the drum motor has reached the specified revolution speed by the speed control system. Drum phase control works as follows in record and playback mode. • Record Mode: Phase is controlled so that the vertical blanking intervals of the video signal to be recorded will line up along the bottom edge of the tape. • Playback Mode: Phase is controlled so as to trace the recorded tracks accurately. A counter detects the phase error against a preset value. The phase error data is processed and added to speed error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution phase and speed of the drum. The DPG signal from the drum motor is reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit, and sent to the phase error detector. The phase error detector compares the phase of the DPG pulse (tach pulse), which contains video head phase information, with a reference signal. In the actual circuit, the comparison is carried out by comparing the head-switching (HSW) signal, which is delayed by a counter that is reset by DPG, with a reference signal value. The reference signal is the REF30 signal, which differs between record and playback as follows: • Record: Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded (frame rate signal, actually 1/2 Vsync). • Playback: 30 Hz or 25 Hz signal divided from the system clock. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 629 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 26.7.2 Internal bus W DPPR1 Preset data Preset data R/W DPGCR DPOVF LSB Preset W DPPR2 (16 bits) DPGCR R/(W) DPCS1,0 (4 bits) MSB Section 26 Servo Circuits Block Diagram REF30P Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 630 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 S F/F QR Counter (20 bits) OVF Sequence controller Latch φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 HSW (Video FF) ↑, ↓ Edge detector IRRDRM3 Figure 26.29 shows a block diagram of the drum phase error detector. NHSW (Narrow FF) DPGCR MSB DFUCR DFEPS LSB Error data (20 bits) To DFU Figure 26.29 Block Diagram of Drum Phase Error Detector DPGCR HSWES DPER1 Error data (4 bits) DPER2 Error data (16 bits) R/W R/W R/W Internal bus φs = fosc/2 R/W R/W N/V Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.7.3 Register Configuration Table 26.10 shows the register configuration of the drum phase error detector. Table 26.10 Register Configuration Name Specified drum phase preset data register 1 Specified drum phase preset data register 2 Drum phase error data register 1 Drum phase error data register 2 Drum phase error detection control register Abbrev. DPPR1 DPPR2 DPER1 DPER2 DPGCR R/W W W R/W R/W R/W Size Byte Word Byte Word Byte Initial Value H'F0 H'0000 H'F0 H'0000 H'07 Address H'D03C H'D03A H'D03D H'D03E H'D039 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 631 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.7.4 Register Description Drum Phase Preset Data Registers (DPPR1, DPPR2) DPPR1 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 DPPR19 0 W 2 DPPR18 0 W 1 DPPR17 0 W 0 DPPR16 0 W DPPR2 Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 DPPR15 0 W 7 DPPR7 0 W 14 DPPR14 0 W 6 DPPR6 0 W 13 DPPR13 0 W 5 DPPR5 0 W 12 DPPR12 0 W 4 DPPR4 0 W 11 DPPR11 0 W 3 DPPR3 0 W 10 DPPR10 0 W 2 DPPR2 0 W 9 DPPR9 0 W 1 DPPR1 0 W 8 DPPR8 0 W 0 DPPR0 0 W The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified drum phase is set in DPPR1 and DPPR2. The 20 bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of DPPR1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPPR2 is the LSB. When data is written to DPPR2, the 20-bit preset data, including DPPR1, is loaded into the preset circuit. Write to DPPR1 first, and DPPR2 next. The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'80000* as the reference value. Target phase difference = (reference signal frequency/2) − 6.5H Drum phase preset data = H'80000 - (φs/n × target phase difference) φs: φs/n: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2) Clock source of selected counter Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. DPPR1 and DPPR2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the error value is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the drum phase error data registers (DPER1 and DPER2), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'00000. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 632 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Drum Phase Error Data Registers (DPER1, DPER2) DPER1 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 DPER19 0 R*/W 2 DPER18 0 R*/W 1 DPER17 0 R*/W 0 DPER16 0 R*/W DPER2 Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 DPER15 0 R*/W 7 DPER7 0 R*/W 14 DPER14 0 R*/W 6 DPER6 0 R*/W 13 DPER13 0 R*/W 5 DPER5 0 R*/W 12 DPER12 0 R*/W 4 DPER4 0 R*/W 11 DPER11 0 R*/W 3 DPER3 0 R*/W 10 DPER10 0 R*/W 2 DPER2 0 R*/W 9 DPER9 0 R*/W 1 DPER1 0 R*/W 8 DPER8 0 R*/W 0 DPER0 0 R*/W Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read. DPER1 and DPER2 constitute a 20-bit drum phase error data register. The 20 bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of DPER1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPER2 is the LSB. When the rotational phase is correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the drum leads the correct phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in DPER1 and DPER 2 are transferred to the digital filter circuit. DPER1 and DPER are 20-bit read/write registers. When writing data to DPER 1 and DPER2, write to DPER1 first, and then write to DPER2. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. DPER1 and DPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. See the note on the drum phase preset data registers (DPPR1 and DPPR2). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 633 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Drum Phase Error Detection Control Register (DPGCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 DPCS1 0 R/W 6 DPCS0 0 R/W 5 DPOVF 0 R/(W)* 4 N/V 0 R/W 3 HSWES 0 R/W 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Note: * Only 0 can be written. DPGCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of drum phase error detection. Bits 2-0 are reserved, bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (DPCS1, DPCS0): These bits select the clock supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 7 DPCS1 0 Bit 6 DPCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (DPOVF): DPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Bit 5 DPOVF 0 1 Description Normal state Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Error Data Latch Signal Selection Bit (N/V): Selects the latch signal of error data. Bit 4 N/V 0 1 Description HSW (VideoFF) signal NHSW (NarrowFF) signal (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 634 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Edge Selection Bit (HSWES): Selects the edge of the error data latch signal (HSW or NHSW). Bit 3 HSWES 0 1 Description Latches at the rising edge Latches at the falling edge (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 26.7.5 Operation The drum phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the drum specified phase preset data registers 1 and 2 (DPPR1 and DPPR2). The reference values set in DPPR1 and DPPR2 are preset in the counter by REF30P signal, and counted up by the clock selected. The latch of the error data can be selected between the rising or falling edge of HSW (NHSW). The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (DFEPS bit of DFUCR = 0) is sent to the digital filter circuits automatically. In soft transmission mode (DFEPS bit of DFUCR = 1), the data written in DPER1 and DPER2 is sent to the digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the specified phase, a negative number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no phase error (revolving at the specified phase). Figures 26.30 and 26.31 show examples of operation to detect a drum phase error. Drum Phase Error Detection Counter: The drum phase error detection counter stops counting when an overflow or latch occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRDRM3), and sets the overflow flag (DPOVF) if an overflow occurred. To clear DPOVF, write 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Interrupt Request: IRRDRM3 is generated by the HSW (NHSW) signal latch and the overflow of the error detection counter. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 635 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REF30P HSW (NHSW)* Preset Counter Preset value Note: * Edge selectable Latch Preset Latch Preset value Figure 26.30 Drum Phase Control in Playback Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected) VD Reset REF30P Reset HSW (NHSW)* Preset Counter Preset value Preset Latch Preset value Latch Note: * Edge selectable Figure 26.31 Drum Phase Control in Record Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 636 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.7.6 Phase Comparison The phase comparison circuit measures the difference of time between the reference signal and the comparing signal with a digital counter. REF30 signal is used for the reference signal, and HSW signal (VideoFF) or NHSW signal (NarrowFF) from the HSW timing generator is used for the comparing signal. In record mode, however, the phase of REF30 signal is the same as that of the vertical sync signal (Vsync) because the reference signal generator (REF30 generator) is reset by the vertical sync signal (Vsync) in the video signals. The error detection counter latches data at the rising or falling edge of HSW signal. The digital filter circuit performs computation using this data as 20-bit phase error data. After processing and adding the phase error data and the speed error data from the drum speed control system, the digital filter circuit sends the data as the error data of the drum system to the PWM modulation circuit. 26.8 26.8.1 Capstan Speed Error Detector Overview Capstan speed control holds the capstan motor at a constant revolution speed, by measuring the period of the CFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed error against a preset value. The speed error data is added to phase error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed and phase of the capstan motor. The CFG input signal is downloaded by the comparator circuit, then reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit, divided by the CFG divider, and sent to the speed error detector as the DVCFG signal. The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DVCFG signal, and detects the error against a preset data value. The preset data is the value that results from measuring the DVCFG signal period with the clock signal when the capstan motor is running at the correct speed. The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DVCFG signal. The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on. The digital filter adds the speed error data to phase error data from the capstan phase control system, then sends the result to the PWM as capstan error data. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 637 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 26.8.2 Internal bus W CFPR CFRUDR Lock range data (16 bits) R/W CFVCR CFRVCR CFRCS1,0 CF-R/UNR CFOVF S F/F QR CFVCR R/W W (R)/W R Section 26 Servo Circuits Block Diagram CFVCR Preset data (16 bits) Preset CFCS1,0 R F/F QS Counter (16 bits) OVF Lock 1 up Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 638 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 IRRCAP1 S R Clear Lock counter (2 bits) φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 Lock range detector Lock 2 up Latch Q F/F DVCFG CFER Error data (16 bits) CFRLDR Lock range data (16 bits) IRRCAP2 UDF Error data (16 bits) To DFU CFUCR CFESS CFRFON CFVCR Error data limiter control circuit CFVCR CPCNT CROCKON To DFU R/W Internal bus R/W R/W W R/W Figure 26.32 shows a block diagram of the capstan speed error detector. Figure 26.32 Block Diagram of Capstan Speed Error Detector Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.8.3 Register Configuration Table 26.11 shows the register configuration of the capstan speed error detector. Table 26.11 Register Configuration Name Specified CFG speed preset data register CFG speed error data register CFG lock upper data register CFG lock lower data register Abbrev. CFPR CFER CFRUDR CFRLDR R/W W R/W W W R/W Size Word Word Word Word Byte Initial Value Address H'0000 H'0000 H'7FFF H'8000 H'00 H'D050 H'D052 H'D054 H'D056 H'D058 Capstan speed error detection control CFVCR register Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 639 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.8.4 Register Description Specified CFG Speed Preset Data Register (CFPR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 CFPR15 0 W 7 CFPR7 0 W 14 CFPR14 0 W 6 CFPR6 0 W 13 CFPR13 0 W 5 CFPR5 0 W 12 CFPR12 0 W 4 CFPR4 0 W 11 CFPR11 0 W 3 CFPR3 0 W 10 CFPR10 0 W 2 CFPR2 0 W 9 CFPR9 0 W 1 CFPR1 0 W 8 CFPR8 0 W 0 CFPR0 0 W The 16-bit preset data that defines the specified CFG speed is set in CFPR. When data is written, the 16-bit preset data is sent to the preset circuit. The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'8000* as the reference value. CFG speed preset data = H'8000 − ( φs/n DVCFG frequency − 2) φs: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fOSC/2) DVCFG frequency: In Hz The constant 2 is the preset interval (see figure 26.33). φs/n: Clock source of the selected counter CFPR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word acces is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset. Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the CFG speed error data register (CFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 640 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CFG Speed Error Data Register (CFER) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 CFER15 0 R*/W 14 CFER14 0 R*/W 13 CFER13 0 R*/W 12 CFER12 0 R*/W 11 CFER11 0 R*/W 10 CFER10 0 R*/W 9 CFER9 0 R*/W 8 CFER8 0 R*/W 7 CFER7 0 R*/W 6 CFER6 0 R*/W 5 CFER5 0 R*/W 4 CFER4 0 R*/W 3 CFER3 0 R*/W 2 CFER2 0 R*/W 1 CFER1 0 R*/W 0 CFER0 0 R*/W Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read. CFER is a 16-bit read/write register that stores 16-bit CFG speed error data. When the speed of the capstan motor is correct, the data latched in CFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the speed is faster than the specified speed, and positive data if the speed is slower than the specified speed. The CFER value is sent to the digital filter either automatically or by software. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in module stop mode and standby mode. See the note on the specified CFG speed preset data register (CFPR) in section 26.8.4, Register Description. CFG Lock UPPER Data Register (CFRUDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CFRUDR15 CFRUDR14 CFRUDR13 CFRUDR12 CFRUDR11 CFRUDR10 CFRUDR9 CFRUDR8 0 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 0 2 4 3 7 6 5 CFRUDR7 CFRUDR6 CFRUDR5 CFRUDR4 CFRUDR3 CFRUDR2 CFRUDR1 CFRUDR0 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W CFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when capstan speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when limiter function is in use. When lock is being detected, if the capstan speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter which has been set by CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits of CFVCR register decrements the count. If the set value of CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation of the digital filter in the capstan phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the CFG speed error data exceeds the CFRUDR value when the limiter function is in use, the DFRUDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. A Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 641 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits read is invalid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. CFG Lock LOWER Data Register (CFRLDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 9 8 10 12 11 15 14 13 CFRLDR15 CFRLDR14 CFRLDR13 CFRLDR12 CFRLDR11 CFRLDR10 CFRLDR9 CFRLDR8 1 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 1 0 2 4 3 7 6 5 CFRLDR7 CFRLDR6 CFRLDR5 CFRLDR4 CFRLDR3 CFRLDR2 CFRLDR1 CFRLDR0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W CFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when capstan speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when limiter function is in use. When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter that has been set by CFRCS 1 and 0 bits of CFVCR register decrements the count. If the set value of CFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the CFG speed error data is under the CFRLDR value when the limiter function is in use, the CFRLDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register (CFVCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CFCS1 0 R/W 6 CFCS0 0 R/W 5 CFOVF 0 R/(W)*1 4 3 2 CFRFON CF-R/UNR CPCNT 0 R/W 0 R 0 R/W 1 CFRCS1 0 (R)*2/W 0 CFRCS0 0 (R)*2/W Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written. 2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out. CFVCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of capstan speed error detection. Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 642 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bits (CFCS1, CFCS0): CFCS1 and CFCS0 select the clock to be supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 7 CFCS1 0 Bit 6 CFCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (CFOVF): CFOVF flag indicates overflow of the 16-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Bit 5 CFOVF 0 1 Description Normal state. Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter. (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (CFRFON): Enables the error data limit function. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR)). Bit 4 CFRFON 0 1 Description Disables limit function. Enables limit function. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Capstan Lock Flag (CF-R/UNR): Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock counter. Bit 3 CF-R/UNR 0 1 Description Indicates that the capstan speed system is not locked. Indicates that the capstan speed system is locked. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 643 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 2⎯Capstan Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (CPCNT): Enables the filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock counter. Bit 2 CPCNT 0 1 Description Disables the filter computation by detection of the capstan lock. (Initial value) Enables the filter computation of the phase system when capstan lock is detected. Bits 1 and 0⎯Capstan Lock Counter Setting Bits (CFRCS1, CFRCS0): Sets the number of times to detect capstan locks (DVCFG has been detected in the rage set by the lock range data register). The capstan lock flag is set when the specified number of capstan lock is detected. If the DVCFG signal is detected outside the lock range after data is written in CFRCS1 and CFRCS0, the data will be stored in the lock counter. Note: If CFRCS1 or CFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (capstan lock flag) is 1 and the capstan lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the capstan speed system is locked. The capstan lock counter stops until lock is released after underflow. Bit 1 CFRCS1 0 Bit 0 CFRCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Underflow occurs after lock was detected once (Initial value) Underflow occurs after lock was detected twice Underflow occurs after lock was detected three times Underflow occurs after lock was detected four times Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 644 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.8.5 Operation The capstan speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the CFG specified speed preset register (CFPR). The reference value set in CFPR is preset in the counter by the DVCFG signal, and the counter decrements the count by the selected clock. The timing of the counter presetting and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or falling edge of DVCFG signal. See DVCFG Control Register (CDVC) in section 26.14.3, CFG Frequency Divider. The error data detected is sent to digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binaries. The data takes a positive number (+) if the speed is slower than the specified speed, a negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if it had no error (revolving at the specified speed). Figure 26.33 shows an example of operation to detect the capstan speed. Setting the Error Data Limit: A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit using the CFG lock data register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in CFRUDR and the lower limit in CFRLDR, and write 1 in CFRFON bit. If the error data is outside the limit range, the CFRLDR value is sent to the digital filter circuit if a negative number is latched, or the CFRUDR value if a positive number is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off the limit setting (CFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit setting on (CFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured. Lock Detection: If an error data is detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the capstan lock flag (CF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of locking set by CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits, and an interrupt is requested (IRRCAP2) at the same time. The number of the occurrence of locking (once to 4 times) before the flag is set can be specified. Use CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits for this purpose. The on/off state of the phase system digital filter computation can be controlled automatically by the status of lock detection when bit 5 (CPHA bit) of the capstan system digital filter control register (CFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off) and DPCNT bit is 1. Capstan System Speed Error Detection Counter: The capstan system speed error detection counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag (CFOVF) when an overflow occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRCAP1). To clear CFOVF, write 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Interrupt Request: IRRCAP1 is generated by the DVCFG signal latch and the overflow of the error detection counter. IRRCAP2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the specified number of times of locking). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 645 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Error data latch signal (DVCFG) Preset data load signal Preset period (2 counts) Specified speed value Counter –value +value Preset value Latch data 0 (no error) Figure 26.33 Example of the Capstan Speed Error Detection Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 646 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.9 26.9.1 Capstan Phase Error Detector Overview The capstan phase control system must start operation after the capstan motor has reached the specified speed by the speed control system. The capstan phase control system operates as follows in record/playback mode: • Record mode: Controls the tape running so that it may run at a specified speed together with the speed control system. • Playback mode: Controls the tape running so that the recorded track may be traced correctly. Any error deviated from the reference phase is detected by the digital counter. This phase error data and the speed error data is processed and added by the digital filter circuit to control the PWM output. The phase and speed of the capstan, in turn, is control this PWM output. The control signal of the capstan phase control in the record mode differ from that in playback mode. In record mode, the control is performed by the DVCFG2 signal which is generated by dividing the frequencies of the reference signal (REF30P or CREF) and the CFG signal. In playback mode, it is performed by divided rising signal (DVCTL) of the reference signal (CAPREF30) and the playback control pulse (PB-CTL). The reference signal in record and playback modes are as follows: • Record mode: 1/2 Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded. • Playback mode: Signal generated by dividing the PB-CTL signal (DVCTL) at its rising edge. 26.9.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.34 shows the block diagram of the capstan phase error detector. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 647 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus R/W CPGCR CPPR1 Preset data R/W CPGCR CPOVF W W R/(W) Section 26 Servo Circuits CR/RF CPCS1,0 (4 bits) MSB Preset CPPR2 Preset data (16 bits) LSB CREF REF30P CAPREF30 S F/F QR Counter (20 bits) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 648 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Preset PB: X value + TRK value = CAPREF30 REC: REF30P or CREF Latch PB : DVCTL REC : DVCFG2 OVF Sequence controller Latch RECREF φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 DVCFG2 DVCTL IRRCAP3 CPGCR CTLM R/P ASM DFUCR CFEPS LSB Error data (20 bits) To DFU SELCFG2 CPER1 Error data (4 bits) MSB CPER2 Error data (16 bits) Figure 26.34 Block Diagram of Capstan Phase Error Detector R/W Internal bus R/W R/W R/W φs = fosc/2 R/W R/W Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.9.3 Register Configuration Table 26.12 shows the register configuration of the capstan phase error detector. Table 26.12 Register Configuration Name Specified Capstan phase preset data register 1 Specified Capstan phase preset data register 2 Capstan phase error data register 1 Capstan phase error data register 2 Abbrev. CPPR1 CPPR2 CPER1 CPER2 R/W W W R/W R/W R/W Size Byte Word Byte Word Byte Initial Value H'F0 H'0000 H'F0 H'0000 H'07 Address H'D05C H'D05A H'D05D H'D05E H'D059 Capstan phase error detection control CPGCR register Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 649 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.9.4 Register Description Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Registers (CPPR1, CPPR2) CPPR1 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 CPPR19 0 W 2 CPPR18 0 W 1 CPPR17 0 W 0 CPPR16 0 W CPPR2 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 CPPR15 0 W 14 CPPR14 0 W 13 CPPR13 0 W 12 CPPR12 0 W 11 CPPR11 0 W 10 CPPR10 0 W 9 CPPR9 0 W 8 CPPR8 0 W Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CPPR7 0 W 6 CPPR6 0 W 5 CPPR5 0 W 4 CPPR4 0 W 3 CPPR3 0 W 2 CPPR2 0 W 1 CPPR1 0 W 0 CPPR0 0 W The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified capstan phase is set in CPPR1 and CPPR2. The 20 bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of CPPR1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPPR2 is the LSB. When CPPR2 is written to, the 20-bit preset data, including CPPR1, is loaded into the preset circuit. Write to CPPR1 first, and CPPR2 next. The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'80000* as the reference value. Target phase difference = Reference signal frequency/2 Capstan phase preset data = H'80000 − (φs/n × target phase difference) φs: φs/n: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2) Clock source of selected counter Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. CPPR1 and CPPR2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the capstan phase error data registers (CPER1 and CPER2), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'00000. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 650 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Capstan Phase Error Data Registers (CPER1, CPER2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 15 CPER15 0 R*/W 7 CPER7 0 R*/W 6 — 1 — 14 CPER14 0 R*/W 6 CPER6 0 R*/W 5 — 1 — 13 CPER13 0 R*/W 5 CPER5 0 R*/W 4 — 1 — 12 CPER12 0 R*/W 4 CPER4 0 R*/W 3 CPER19 0 R*/W 11 CPER11 0 R*/W 3 CPER3 0 R*/W 2 CPER18 0 R*/W 10 CPER10 0 R*/W 2 CPER2 0 R*/W 1 CPER17 0 R*/W 9 CPER9 0 R*/W 1 CPER1 0 R*/W 0 CPER16 0 R*/W 8 CPER8 0 R*/W 0 CPER0 0 R*/W Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read. CPER1 and CPER2 constitute a 20-bit capstan phase error data register. The 20 bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of CPER1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPER2 is the LSB. When the rotational phase is correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the phase leads the correct phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in CPER1 and CPER 2 are transferred to the digital filter circuit. CPER1 and CPER are 20-bit read/write registers. When writing data to CPER 1 and CPER2, write to CPER1 first, and then write to CPER2. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CPER1 and CPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. See the note on the capstan phase preset data registers (CPPR1 and CPPR2) in section 26.9.4, Register Description. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 651 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Capstan Phase Error Detection Control Register (CPGCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CPCS1 0 R/W 6 CPCS0 0 R/W 5 CPOVF 0 R/(W)* 4 CR/RF 0 R/W 3 SELCFG2 0 R/W 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Note: * Only 0 can be written CPGCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of capstan phase error detection. Bits 2-0 are reserved, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (CPCS1, CPCS0): These bits select the clock supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 7 CPCS1 0 Bit 6 CPCS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φs φs/2 φs/4 φs/8 (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (CPOVF): CPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Bit 5 CPOVF 0 1 Description Normal state Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Preset Signal Selection Bit (CR/RF): Selects the preset signal. Bit 4 CR/RF 0 1 Description Presets REF30P Presets CREF signal (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 652 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Latch Signal Selection Bit (SELCFG2): Selects the counter preset signal and the error data latch signal data in PB (ASM) mode. Bit 3 SELCFG2 0 1 Description Presets CAPREF30 signal; latches DVCTL signal Presets REF30P (CREF) signal; latches DVCFG2 signal (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 26.9.5 Operation The capstan phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the capstan specified phase preset data registers 1 and 2 (CPPR1 and CPPR2). The reference values set in CPPR1 and CPPR2 are preset in the counter by REF30P (CREF) signal or CAPREF signal, and counted up by the clock selected. The latching of the error data is performed by DVCTL or DVCFG2. The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (CFEPS bit of DFUCR = 0) is sent to the digital filter circuit automatically. In soft transmission mode (CFEPS bit of DFUCR = 1), the data written in CPER1 and CPPR2 is sent to the digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the specified phase, a negative number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no phase error (revolving at the specified phase). Figures 26.35 and 26.36 show examples of operation to detect a capstan phase error. Capstan Phase Error Detection Counter: The capstan phase error detection counter stops counting when an overflow or latch occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRCAP3), and sets the overflow flag (CPOVF) if overflow occurred. To clear CPOVF, write 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Interrupt Request: IRRCAP3 is generated by the DVCTL or DVCFG2 signal latch and the overflow of the error detection counter. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 653 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CAPREF30 PB-CTL DVCTL or DVCFG2 Preset Counter Latch Preset value Latch Preset Figure 26.35 Capstan Phase Control in Playback Mode REF30P or CREF DVCFG2 Preset Counter Preset value Preset Latch Latch Figure 26.36 Capstan Phase Control in Record Mode Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 654 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.10 X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit 26.10.1 Overview To maintain compatibility with other VCRs, an on-chip adjustment circuit adjusts the phase of the reference signal (internal reference signal (REF30) or external reference signal (EXCAP)) during playback. Because of manufacturing tolerances, the physical distance between the video head and control head (the X-value: 79.244 mm) may vary from set to set, so when a tape that was recorded on a different set is played back, the phase of the reference signal may need to be adjusted. The adjustment can be made by a register setting. The same setting can adjust the rotational phase of the capstan motor to maintain positional alignment (tracking alignment) of the video head with the recorded tracks in autotracking, or when tracks that were recorded with an EP head are traced by a wider head. These tracking adjustments can be made by the acquisition of the envelope signal by the A/D converter. 26.10.2 Block Diagram The adjustment circuit consists of a 10-bit counter clocked by the system clock (φs or φs/2), and two down-counters with load registers. Individual setting of X-value adjustment can be made by X-value data register (XDR) and tracking adjustment by TRK data register (TRDR). The reference signal clears the 10-bit counter and sets the load register value in the down-counter with two load registers. After the adjusted reference signal is generated, clock supply stops and the circuit halts until the next reference signal is input. REF30 signal can be divided as necessary. Figure 26.37 shows a block diagram. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 655 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Internal bus W W TRDR TRK value data register W W XTCR XCS XTCR (12 bits) AT/MU TRK/X Section 26 Servo Circuits XTCR ASM Counter (10 bits) Down counter φs φs /2 (12 bits) R QS Down counter REC/PB Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 656 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 CAPREF30 REF30X (12 bits) R SQ (2 bits) XTCR XDR X-value data register EXC/REF , EXCAP Edge selection REF30P Down counter CAPRF XTCR (12 bits) DVREF1, 0 W Internal bus Figure 26.37 Block Diagram of X-Value Adjustment Circuit R*/W W W Note: * When DVREF1 and DVREF0 are read, values in the down counter (2 bits) are readout. φs = fosc/2 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.10.3 Register Description Register Configuration Table 26.13 shows the register configuration of X-value correction and tracking correction circuits. Table 26.13 Register Configuration Name X-value and TRK-value control register X-value data register TRK-value data register Abbrev. XTCR XDR TRDR R/W R/W W W Size Byte Word Word Initial Value H'80 H'F000 H'F000 Address H'D074 H'D070 H'D072 X-Value and TRK-Value Control Register (XTCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 CAPRF 0 W 5 AT/MU 0 W 4 TRK/X 0 W 3 EXC/REF 0 W 2 XCS 0 W 1 DVREF1 0 R/W 0 DVREF0 0 R/W XTCR is an 8-bit register to determine the X-value and TRK-value correction circuits. Bits 6 to 2 are write-only bits. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 1 and 0 are read/write bits. Only a byte access is valid for XTCR. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. It is initialized to H'80 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6⎯External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CAPRF): Selects the EXCAP edge when a selection is made to generate external sync signals. Bit 6 CAPRF 0 1 Description Signal generated at the rising edge of EXCAP. Signal generated at both edges of EXCAP. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 657 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯Capstan Phase Correction Auto/Manual Selection Bit (AT/MU): Selects whether the generation of the correction reference signal (CAPREF30) for capstan phase control is controlled automatically or manually depending on the status of the ASM and REC/PB bits of CTL mode register. Bit 5 AT/MU 0 1 Description Manual mode Auto mode (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Correction Register Selection Bit (TRK/X): Determines the method to generate the CAPREF30 signal when AT/MU bit is 0. Bit 4 TRK/X 0 1 Description Generates CAPREF30 only by the set value of XDR. Generates CAPREF30 by the set value of XDR and TRDR. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Reference Signal Selection Bit (EXC/REF): Selects the reference signal to generate the correction reference signal (CAPREF30). Bit 3 EXC/REF 0 1 Description Generates the signal based on REF30P. Generates the signal based on the external reference signal. (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (XCS): Selects the clock source to be supplied to the 10-bit counter. Bit 2 XCS 0 1 Description φs φs/2 (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 658 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 1 and 0⎯REF30P Division Ratio Selection Bit (DVREF1, DVREF0): Select the division value of REF30P. If they are read-accessed, the counter value is read out. (The selected division value is set by the UDF of the counter.) Bit 1 DVREF1 0 Bit 0 DVREF0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Division in 1 Division in 2 Division in 3 Division in 4 (Initial value) X-Value Data Register (XDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 — 1 — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 XD11 XD10 XD9 XD8 XD7 XD6 XD5 XD4 XD3 XD2 XD1 XD0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W The X-value data register (XDR) is an 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. Set an X-value correction data to XDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL pulse. If AT/MU = 0, TRK/X = 0 is set, CAPREF30 can be generated only by setting the XDR. Set an X-value and TRK correction value in PB mode, and X- value in REC mode. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. TRK-Value Data Register (TRDR) Bit : 15 — Initial value : 1 R/W : — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — TRD11 TRD10 TRD9 TRD8 TRD7 TRD6 TRD5 TRD4 TRD3 TRD2 TRD1 TRD0 1 — 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W The TRK-value data register (TRDR) is an 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. Set an TRK-value correction data to TRDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL pulse. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 659 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11 Digital Filters 26.11.1 Overview The digital filters required in servo control make extensive use of multiply-accumulate operations on signed integers (error data) and coefficients. A filter computation circuit (digital filter computation circuit) is provided in on-chip hardware to reduce the load on software, and to improve processing efficiency. Figure 26.38 shows a block diagram of the filter circuit configuration. The filter circuit includes a high-speed 24-bit × 16-bit multiplier-accumulator, an arithmetic buffer, and an I/O processor. The digital filter computations are carried out by the high-speed multiplier-accumulator. The arithmetic buffer stores coefficients and gain constants needed in the filter computations, which are referenced by the high-speed multiplier-accumulator. The I/O processor is activated by a frequency generator signal, and determines what operation is carried out. When activated, it reads the speed error and phase error from the speed and phase error detectors and sends them to the accumulator. When the filter computation is completed, the I/O processor reads the result from the accumulator and sends it to a 12-bit PWM. At this time, the accumulation result gain can be controlled. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 660 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.2 Block Diagram Error latch signal Accumulator Error check Accumulation controller Address bus Data bus End Start Accumulation sequence circuit Buffer/ register select & R/W A, B, G, etc. LA (16 bits), lower accumulator Data shifter Accumulator UA (32 bits), upper accumulator Sign controller Write-only Calculation buffer Coefficient register Constant register MD (32 bits), multiplied data Read-only Buffer circuit Error data (from the error detector) Motor control data (to PWM circuit) Figure 26.38 Block Diagram of Digital Filter Circuit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 661 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Digital filter control register DFIC CFIC Section 26 Servo Circuits • Add the same 8-bit value as MSB • Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point αEs XSn 24 8 + 24 VSn 8+ + GS + 8 8 DGKs15 to 0 CGKs15 to 0 PWM 24 KS Ws 24 - 8 DFUout 24 Speed system + Usn-1 24 GKs 16 Ofs 14 24 As 16 XAs 24 Y 24 8 8 8 DBs15 to 0 CBs15 to 0 DAs15 to 0 CAs15 to 0 DOfs15 to 0 COfs15 to 0 Es Right-bit shift of the decimal point along with Go 8 12 PWM Go Note: Go = ×64, ×32 are optional. Go = ×64, ×32, ×16, ×8,×4, ×2 16 Z -1 DZs11 to 0 CZs11 to 0 DFER15 to 0 CFER15 to 0 * 4 8 Bs 16 1 Error detector Usn + Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 662 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 • DFUCR PION CP/DP VBs 24 *2 8 + GP KP Tp 24 8 Phase direct test output 12 PWM Phase system + Upn-1 24 8 DGKp15 to 0 CGKp15 to 0 Ep • Add the same 8-bit value as MSB • Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point αEp VPn 24 24 8 + PWM 20 GKp 16 Z -1 CZp11 to 0 DPER19 to 0 CPER19 to 0 • OPTION OfP 16 DOfp15 to 0 COfp15 to 0 *1 DZp11 to 0 24 8 BP Error detector Upn AP XAp 24 DBp15 to 0 CBp15 to 0 Figure 26.39 Digital Filter Representation + 16 8 VBp 24 8 16 Overflows during accumulation are ignored, and values below the decimal point are always omitted. Notes: 1. See figure 26.42, Z-1 initialization circuit. 2. Gain control is disabled during phase output. DAp15 to 0 CAp15 to 0 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer This buffer stores computational data used in the digital filters. See table 26.14. Write access is -1 limited to the gain and coefficient data (Z ). The other data is used by hardware. None of the data can be read. Table 26.14 Arithmetic Buffer Register Configuration Buffer Data Length Arithmetic Data Phase system Ep Upn Upn-1 (Zp-1) Vpn Tp Y Ap Bp GKp Ofp Ap × Epn Bp × Vpn Gain or Processing 16 bits Coefficient Data 16 bits 16 bits Speed system Es Xsn Usn Usn-1 (Zs-1) Vsn Ws As Bs GKs Ofs As × Xsn Bs × Vsn Error output Legend: PWM Valid bits Non-existent bits ↑ Decimal point Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 663 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.4 Register Configuration Table 26.15 shows the register configuration of the digital circuit. Table 26.15 Register Configuration Name Capstan phase gain constant Capstan speed gain constant Capstan phase coefficient A Capstan phase coefficient B Capstan speed coefficient A Capstan speed coefficient B Capstan phase offset Capstan speed offset Drum phase gain constant Drum speed gain constant Drum phase coefficient A Drum phase coefficient B Drum speed coefficient A Drum speed coefficient B Drum phase offset Drum speed offset Drum system speed delay initialization register Drum system phase delay initialization register Capstan system speed delay initialization register Capstan system phase delay initialization register Drum system digital filter control register Capstan system digital filter control register Digital filter control register Abbrev. CGKp CGKs CAp CBp CAs CBs COfp COfs DGKp DGKs DAp DBp DAs DBs DOfp DOfs DZs DZp CZs CZp DFIC CFIC DFUCR R/W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W R/W R/W R/W Size Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Byte Byte Byte Initial Value Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'F000 H'F000 H'F000 H'F000 H'80 H'80 H'C0 Address H'D010 H'D012 H'D014 H'D016 H'D018 H'D01A H'D01C H'D01E H'D000 H'D002 H'D004 H'D006 H'D008 H'D00A H'D00C H'D00E H'D020 H'D022 H'D024 H'D026 H'D028 H'D029 H'D02A Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 664 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.5 Register Description Gain Constants (CGKp, CGKs, DGKp, DGKs) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W Note: * Initial value is uncertain. These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set accumulation gain of the digital filter. Only a word access is valid. Accumulation gain can be set to gain 1 value as maximum value. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them before processing starts. In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output gain into account when setting accumulation gain. Coefficients (CAp, CBp, CAs, CBs, DAp, DBp, DAs, DBs) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W Note: * Initial value is uncertain. These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that determine the cutoff frequency f1 and f2. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them before processing starts. In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output gain into account when setting accumulation gain. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 665 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Offset (COfp, Cofs, DOfp, DOfs) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W * W Note: * Initial value is uncertain. These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set offset level of digital filter output. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them before processing starts. In this digital filter, output gain adjustment (×1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64) after offset adding is enabled. Take output gain into account when setting accumulation gain. Delay Initialization Register (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W The delay initialization register is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. The MSB of 12-bit data (bit 11) is a sign bit. -1 Loading to Z is performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON, -1 DZPON, DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z is not possible when the digital filter is performing computation in relation to such register. In such a case, loading to -1 Z will be done the next time computation begins. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 666 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Drum System Digital Filter Control Register (DFIC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 DROV 0 R/(W)* 5 DPHA 0 R/(W) 4 DZPON 0 R/W 3 DZSON 0 R/W 2 DSG2 0 R/W 1 DSG1 0 R/W 0 DSG0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written DFIC is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the status of the drum digital filter and operating mode. Only a byte access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. DFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6⎯Drum System Range Over Flag (DROV): This flag is set to 1 when the result of a filter computation exceeds 12 bits in width. To clear this flag, write 0 after reading 1. Bit 6 DROV 0 1 Description Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Drum Phase System Filter Computation Start Bit (DPHA): Starts or stops filter processing for drum phase system. Bit 5 DPHA 0 1 Description Phase system filter computations are disabled Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 26.39) Phase system filter computations are enabled (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 667 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 4⎯Drum Phase System Z Initialization Bit (DZPON): Reflects the DZp value on Z of the phase system when computation processing of the drum phase system begins. If 1 is written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to DZp. -1 -1 Bit 4 DZPON 0 1 Description DZp value is not reflected on Z of the phase system DZp value is reflected on Z of the phase system -1 -1 -1 -1 (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Drum Speed System Z Initialization Bit (DZSON): Reflects the DZs value on Z of the speed system when computation processing of the drum speed system begins. If 1 is written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to DZs. Bit 3 DZSON 0 1 Description DZs value is not reflected on Z of the speed system DZs value is reflected on Z of the speed system -1 -1 (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Drum System Output Gain Control Bits (DSG2 to DSG0): Control the gain output to DRMPWM. Bit 2 DSG2 0 Bit 1 DSG1 0 Bit 0 DSG0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Note: * 0 1 Setting optional. Description ×1 ×2 ×4 ×8 ×16 (×32)* (×64)* Invalid (Do not use this setting) (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 668 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Capstan System Digital Filter Control Register (CFIC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 DROV 0 R/(W)* 5 DPHA 0 R/(W) 4 DZPON 0 R/W 3 DZSON 0 R/W 2 DSG2 0 R/W 1 DSG1 0 R/W 0 DSG0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written CFIC is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the status of the capstan digital filter and operating mode. Only a byte access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6⎯Capstan System Range Over Flag (CROV): This flag is set to 1 when the result of a filter computation exceeds 12 bits in width. To clear this flag, write 0 after reading 1. Bit 6 DROV 0 1 Description Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits. Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits. (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Capstan Phase System Filter Start (CPHA): Starts or stops filter processing for capstan phase system. Bit 5 CPHA 0 1 Description Phase filter computations are disabled. Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 26.39). Phase filter computations are enabled. -1 -1 (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase System Z Initialization Bit (CZPON): Reflects the CZp value on Z of the capstan phase system when computation processing of the phase system begins. If 1 is written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to CZp. Bit 4 CZPON 0 1 Description CZp value is not reflected on Z of the phase system CZp value is reflected on Z of the phase system Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 669 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 -1 -1 (Initial value) Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed System Z Initialization Bit (CZSON): Reflects the CZs value on Z of the capstan speed system when computation processing of the speed system begins. If 1 is written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to CZs. -1 -1 Bit 3 CZSON 0 1 Description CZs value is not reflected on Z of the speed system CZs value is reflected on Z of the speed system -1 -1 (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Capstan System Gain Control Bits (CSG2 to CSG0): Control the gain output to CAPPWM. Bit 1 CSG2 0 Bit 2 CSG1 0 Bit 0 CSG0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Note: * Setting optional 0 1 Description ×1 ×2 ×4 ×8 ×16 (×32)* (×64)* Invalid (Do not use this setting) (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 670 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Digital Filter Control Register (DFUCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 PTON 0 R/W 4 CP/DP 0 R/W 3 CFEPS 0 R/W 2 DFEPS 0 R/W 1 CFESS 0 R/W 0 DFESS 0 R/W DFUCR is an 8-bit read/write register which controls the operation of the digital filter. Only a byte access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 5⎯Phase System Computation Result PWM Output Bit (PTON): Outputs the computation results of only the phase system to PWM. (The computation results of the drum phase system is output to CAPPWM pin, and that of the capstan phase system is output to DRMPWM pin.) Bit 5 PTON 0 1 Description Outputs the results of ordinary computation of the filter to PWM pin Outputs the computation results of only the phase system to PWM pin (Initial value) Bit 4⎯PWM Output Selection Bit (CP/DP): Selects whether the phase system computation results when PTON was set to 1 is output to the drum or capstan. The PWM of the selected side outputs ordinary filter computation results (speed system of MIX). Bit 4 CP/DP 0 1 Description Outputs the drum phase system computation results (DRMPWM) Outputs the capstan phase system computation results (CAPPWM) (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 671 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Capstan Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFEPS): Transfers the capstan phase system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced. Bit 3 CFEPS 0 1 Description Error data is transferred by DVCFG2 signal latching. Error data is transferred when the data is written. (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Drum Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFEPS): Transfers the drum phase system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced. Bit 2 DFEPS 0 1 Description Error data is transferred by HSW (NHSW) signal latching. Error data is transferred when the data is written. (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Capstan Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFESS): Transfers the capstan phase system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced. Bit 1 CFESS 0 1 Description Error data is transferred by DVCFG signal latching. Error data is transferred when the data is written. (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Drum Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFESS): Transfers the drum speed system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced. Bit 0 DFESS 0 1 Description Error data is transferred by NCDFG signal latching. Error data is transferred when the data is written. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 672 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.6 Filter Characteristics • Lag-Lead Filter A filter required for a servo loop is built in the hardware. This filter uses IIR (infinite impulse response) type digital filter (another type of the digital filter is FIR, i.e. finite impulse response type). This digital filter circuit implements a lag-lead filter, as shown in figure 26.40. R1 INPUT OUTPUT R2 + C Figure 26.40 Lag-Lead Filter The transfer function is expressed by the following equation: S 2πf2 Transfer function G (S) = S 1+ 2πf1 1+ f1 = 1/2πC (R1 + R2) f2 = 1/2πCR2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 673 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Frequency Characteristics The computation circuit repeats computation of the function, which is obtained by s-z conversion according to bi-linear approximation of the transfer function on the s-plane. Figure 26.41 shows the frequency characteristics of the lag-lead filter. 20log(f1/f2) gain(dB) f1 f2 Frequency (Hz) phase(deg) 0 Figure 26.41 Frequency Characteristics of the Lag-Lead Filter The pulse transfer function G (Z) is obtained by the bi-linear approximation of the transfer G (S). In the transfer G (S), S= 1 – Z–1 2 · Ts 1 + Z–1 -1 -j Ts Where, assumed that Z = e ω , G (Z) = G · 2 1 + AZ–1 · Ts 1 + BZ–1 1 πf2 A= 1 Ts + πf2 Ts – 1 πf1 B= 1 Ts + πf1 Ts – G (Z) = 1 πf2 1 Ts + πf1 Ts + Ts: Sampling cycle (sec) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 674 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response In case of transient response when the motor is activated, the digital filter computation circuit must prevent computation due to a large error. The convergence of the computations becomes slow and servo retraction deteriorates if a large error is input to the filter circuit when it is performing repeated computations. To prevent them from occurring, operate the filter (set constants A and B) after pulling in the speed and phase within a certain range of error, initialize -1 -1 the Z (set initial values in CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs)(see section 26.11.8, Initialization of Z ), or use the error data limit function (see section 26.6, Drum Speed Error Detector, and section 26.8, Capstan Speed Error Detector). 26.11.8 Initialization of Z -1 -1 Z can be initialized by its delay initialization register (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs). Loading to Z is performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON, DZPON, -1 DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z is not possible when the digital -1 filter is performing computation in relation to such register. In such a case, loading to Z will be -1 done when the next time computation begins. Figure 26.42 shows the initialization circuit of Z . -1 The delay initialization register sets 12-bit data. The MSB (bit 11) is a sign bit. Z has 24 bits for integrals and 8 bits for decimals. Accordingly, the same value as the sign bit should be set in the -1 13 bits on the MSB side of Z , and 0 in the entire decimal section. Example: Value set for the delay initialization register MSB 100000000000 -1 Value set for Z -1 MSB 111111111111100000000000 Set here the value in the sign bit 00000000 Fixed Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 675 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Xn + + Vn Usn-1 24 8 DZs11 to 0 DZp11 to 0 CZs11 to 0 CZp11 to 0 Res Z USn - -1 Delay initialization register 12 + B Z -1initialization bit DZSON DZPON CZSON CZSON DBs15 to 0 DBp15 to 0 CBs15 to 0 CBp15 to 0 A DAs15 to 0 DAp15 to 0 CAs15 to 0 CAp15 to 0 16 16 W W Internal bus W W Note: MSB of 12-bit data to be written in the delay initialization register is a sign bit. Figure 26.42 Z Initialization Circuit -1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 676 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.12 Additional V Signal Generator 26.12.1 Overview The additional V signal generator outputs an additional vertical sync signal to take the place of Vsync in special playback. It is activated at both edges of the HSW signal output by the headswitch timing generator. The head-switch timing generator also outputs a V pulse signal containing the additional vertical sync pulse itself, and an M level signal that defines the width of the additional vertical sync signal including the equalizing pulses. The additional V signal is output at a three-level output pin (V pulse). Figure 26.43 shows the additional V signal control circuit. HSW timing generator Csync Vpulse signal Mlevel signal Sync signal detector OSCH Additional V pulse generator Additional V pulse Figure 26.43 Additional V Pulse Control Circuit HSW Timing Generator: This circuit generates signals that are synchronized with head switching. It should be programmed to generate the Mlevel and Vpulse signals at edges of the HSW signal (VideoFF). For details, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. Sync Signal Detector: This circuit detects pulses of the width specified by VTR or HTR from the signal input at the Csync pin and generates an internal horizontal sync signal (OSCH). The sync signal detector has an interpolation function, so OSCH has a regular period even if there are horizontal sync dropouts in the signal received at the pin. For details, see section 26.15, Sync Signal Detector. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 677 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.12.2 Pin Configuration Table 26.16 summarizes the pin configuration of the additional V signal. Table 26.16 Pin Configuration Name Additional V pulse pin Abbrev. Vpulse I/O Output Function Output of additional V signal synchronized to video FF 26.12.3 Register Configuration Table 26.17 summarizes the register that controls the additional V signal. Table 26.17 Register Configuration Name Abbrev. R/W R/W Size Byte Initial Value H'E0 Address H'D06F Additional V control register ADDVR 26.12.4 Register Description Additional V Control Register (ADDVR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 HMSK 0 R/W 3 Hi-Z 0 R/W 2 CUT 0 R/W 1 VPON 0 R/W 0 POL 0 R/W ADDVR is an 8-bit read/write register. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 5⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 4⎯OSCH Mask (HMSK): Masks the OSCH signal in the additional V signal. Bit 4 HMSK 0 1 Description OSCH is added in OSCH is not added in (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 678 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯High Impedance (Hi-Z): Set to 1 when the intermediate level is generated by an external circuit. Bit 3 Hi-Z 0 1 Description Vpulse is a three-level output pin Vpulse is a three-state output pin (high, low, or high-impedance) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0⎯Additional V Output Control (CUT, VPON, POL): These bits control the output at the additional V pin. Bit 2 CUT 0 Bit 1 VPON 0 1 Bit 0 POL * 0 1 1 * 0 1 Legend: * Don’t care. Description Low level Negative polarity (see figure 26.46) Positive polarity (see figure 26.45) Intermediate level (high impedance if Hi-Z bit = 1) High level (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 679 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal Figure 26.44 shows the additional V pulse signal. The M level and V pulse signals are generated by the head-switch timing generator. The OSCH signal is combined with these to produce equalizing pulses. The polarity can be selected by the POL bit in the additional V control register (ADDVR). V pulse pin outputs a low level by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. Internal bus R/W •ADDVR VPON CUT HMSK R/W R/W R/W POL R/W •ADDVR Hi-Z STBY VCC VCC OSCH V pulse Rs V pulse pin Rs M level Note: STBY : Power-down mode signal V pulse, M level : Signal from the HSW timing generator Rs : Voltage division resistance (20 kΩ: reference value) VSS VSS Figure 26.44 Additional V Pulse Pin Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 680 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Additional V Pulses When Sync Signal is Not Detected: With additional V pulses, the pulse signal (OSCH) detected by the sync signal detector is superimposed on the V pulse and Mlevel signals generated by the head-switch timing generator. If there is a lot of noise in the input sync signal (Csync), or a pulse is missing, OSCH will be a complementary pulse, and therefore an H pulse of the period set in HRTR and HPWR will be superimposed. In this case, there may be slight timing drift compared with the normal sync signal, depending on the HRTR and HPWR setting, with resultant discontinuity. If no sync signal is input, the additional V pulse is generated as a complementary pulse. Set the sync signal detector registers and activate the sync signal detector by manipulating the SYCT bit in the sync signal control register (SYNCR). See section 26.15.7, Activation of the Sync Signal Detector. Figures 26.45 and 26.46 show the additional V pulse timing charts. HSW signal edge Mlevel signal Vpulse signal OSCH Additional V pulse Notes: VPON = 1 CUT = 0 POL = 1 Figure 26.45 Additional V Pulse when Positive Polarity Is Specified Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 681 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits HSW signal edge M level signal V pulse signal OSCH Additional V pulse Notes: VPON = 1 CUT = 0 POL = 0 Figure 26.46 Additional V Pulse when Negative Polarity Is Specified Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 682 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13 CTL Circuit 26.13.1 Overview The CTL circuit includes a Schmitt amplifier that amplifies and reshapes the CTL input, then outputs it as the PB-CTL signal to the servo, linear time counter, and other circuits. The PB-CTL signal is also sent to a duty discriminator in the CTL circuit that detects and records VISS, ASM, and VASS marks. A REC-CTL amplifier is included in the record circuits. Detection and recording whether the CTL pulse pattern is long or short can also be enabled to correspond to the wide-aspect. The following operating modes can be selected by settings in the CTL mode register: • Duty discrimination VISS detect, ASM detect, VASS detect, L/S bit pattern detect • CTL record VISS record, ASM record, VASS record, L/S bit pattern record • Rewrite Trapezoid waveform generator Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 683 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.2 Block Diagram Figure 26.47 shows a block diagram of the CTL circuit. PB-CTL CTL mode IRRCTL FW/RV CTL detector Duty discriminator VISS detect VISS control circuit Bit pattern register VISS write REF30X Schmitt amplifier Write control circuit Duty I/O flag Internal bus +- RECCTL amplifier CTL(+) CTL(-) Figure 26.47 Block Diagram of CTL Circuit Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 684 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.3 Pin Configuration Table 26.18 summarizes the pin configuration of the CTL circuit. Table 26.18 Pin Configuration Name CTL (+) I/O pin CTL (–) I/O pin CTL bias input pin CTL Amp (O) output pin CTL SMT (i) input pin CTL FB input pin CTL REF output pin Abbrev. CTL (+) CTL (–) CTL Bias CTLAmp (O) CTLSMT (i) CTL FB CTL REF I/O I/O I/O Input Output Input Input Output Function CTL signal input/output CTL signal input/output CTL primary amplifier bias supply CTL amplifier output CTL Schmitt amplifier input CTL amplifier high-range characteristics control CTL amplifier reference voltage output 26.13.4 Register Configuration Table 26.19 shows the register configuration of the CTL circuit. Table 26.19 Register Configuration Name CTL control register CTL mode register REC-CTL duty data register 1 REC-CTL duty data register 2 REC-CTL duty data register 3 REC-CTL duty data register 4 REC-CTL duty data register 5 Duty I/O register Bit pattern register Abbrev. CTCR CTLM RCDR1 RCDR2 RCDR3 RCDR4 RCDR5 DI/O BTPR R/W R/W R/W W W W W W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Word Word Word Word Word Byte Byte Initial Value Address H'30 H'00 H'F000 H'F000 H'F000 H'F000 H'F000 H'F1 H'FF H'D080 H'D081 H'D082 H'D084 H'D086 H'D088 H'D08A H'D08C H'D08D Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 685 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.5 Register Description CTL Control Register (CTCR) Bit : 7 NT/PL Initial value : R/W : 0 W 6 FSLC 0 W 5 FSLB 1 W 4 FSLA 1 W 3 CCS 0 W 2 LCTL 0 W 1 UNCTL 0 R 0 SLWM 0 W CTCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls PB-CTL rewrite and sets the slow mode. When CTL pulse cannot be detected with the input amplifier gain set at the CTL gain control register (CTLGR) in PB-CTL circuit, bit 1 (UNCTL) of CTCR is set to 1. It is automatically cleared to 0 when CTL pulse is detected. Bit 1 is read-only, and the rest are write-only. If a read is attempted to a write-only bit, an undetermined value is read out. CTCR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in standby and module stop mode. Bit 7⎯NTSC/PAL Select (NT/PL): Selects the period of the rewrite circuit. Bit 7 NT/PL 0 1 Description NTSC mode (frame rate: 30 Hz) PAL mode (frame rate: 25 Hz) (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4⎯Frequency Select (FSLA, FSLB, FSLC); These bits select the operating frequency of the CTL write circuit. They should be set according to fOSC. Bit 6 FSLC 0 Bit 5 FSLB 0 Bit 3 FSLA 0 1 1 0 1 1 * * Legend: * Don’t care. Description Reserved (do not use this setting) Reserved (do not use this setting) fosc = 8 MHz fosc = 10 MHz Reserved (do not use this setting) (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 686 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 3⎯Clock Source Select Bit (CCS): Selects clock source of CTL. Bit 3 CCS 0 1 Description φs φs/2 (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Long CTL Bit (LCTL): Sets the long CTL detection mode. Bit 2 LCTL 0 1 Description Clock source (CCS) operates at the setting value (Initial value) Clock source (CCS) operates for further 8-division after operating at the setting value Bit 1⎯CTL Undetected Bit (UNCTL): Indicates the CTL pulse detection status at the CTL input amplifier sensitivity set at the CTL gain control register. Bit 1 UNCTL 0 1 Description Detected Undetected (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Mode Select Bit (SLWM): Selects CTL mode. Bit 0 SLWM 0 1 Description Normal mode Slow mode (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 687 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CTL Mode Register (CTLM) Bit : 7 ASM Initial value : R/W : 0 R/W 6 REC/PB 0 R/W 5 FW/RV 0 R/W 4 MD4 0 R/W 3 MD3 0 R/W 2 MD2 0 R/W 1 MD1 0 R/W 0 MD0 0 R/W CTLM is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operating state of the CTL circuit. If 1 is written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be cleared to 0 one cycle (φ) later. CTLM is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. When CTL is being stopped, only bits 7, 6 and 5 operate. Note: Do not set any value other than the setting value for each mode (see table 26.20, CTL Mode Functions). Bits 7 and 6⎯Record/Playback Mode Bits (ASM, REC/PB): These bits switch between record and playback. Combined with bits 4 to 0 (MD4 to MD0), they support the VISS, VASS, and ASM mark functions. Bit 7 ASM 0 Bit 6 REC/PB 0 1 1 0 1 Description Playback mode Record mode Assemble mode Invalid (do not set) (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Direction (FW/RV): Selects the direction in playback. Clear this bit to 0 during record. Figure 26.48 shows the PB-CTL signal. Bit 5 FW/RV 0 1 Description Forward Reverse (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 688 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CTL input FWD PB-CTL REV Figure 26.48 Internal PB-CTL Signal in Forward and Reverse Bits 4 to 0⎯CTL Mode Select (MD4 to MD0): These bits select the detect, record, and rewrite modes for VISS, VASS, and ASM marks. If 1 is written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be cleared to 0 one cycle (φ) later. The 5 bits from MD4 to MD0 are used in combination with bits 7 and 6 (ASM and REC/PB). Table 26.20 describes the modes. Table 26.20 CTL Mode Functions Bit ASM 0 R/P 0 F/R 0/1 MD4 0 MD3 0 MD2 0 MD1 0 MD0 0 Mode Description VASS PB-CTL duty discrimination (Initial value) detect (duty • Duty I/O flag is set to 1 if duty ≥ detect) 44% is detected • Duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 if duty < 44% is detected • Interrupt request is generated when one CTL pulse has been detected 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 VASS record • If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, REC-CTL is generated and recorded with the duty cycle set by register RCDR2 or RCDR3 • If 1 is written in the duty I/O flag, REC-CTL is generated and recorded with the duty cycle set by register RCDR4 or RCDR5 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 VASS rewrite Same as above (VASS record); trapezoid waveform circuit operation Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 689 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit ASM 0 R/P 0 F/R 0/1 MD4 0 MD3 1 MD2 0 MD1 0 MD0 1 Mode Description • The duty I/O flag is set to 1 at the VISS detect point of write access to register (index CTLM detect) • The 1 pulses recognized by the duty discrimination circuit are counted in the VISS control circuit • The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0, indicating VISS detection, when the value set at VCTR register is repeatedly detected • An interrupt request is generated when VISS is detected 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 • 64 pulse data with 0 pulse data at VISS record both edge are written (index (index record) record) • The index bit string is written through the duty I/O flag • An interrupt request is generated at the end of VISS recording 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 VISS rewrite Same as above (VISS record; trapezoid waveform circuit operation) VISS VISS write is forcibly aborted initialize ASM mark detect ASM mark detection • The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 when PB-CTL duty ≥ 66% is detected • An interrupt request is generated when an ASM mark is detected 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 ASM mark record • An ASM mark is recorded by writing 0 in the duty I/O flag • An interrupts is requested for every one CTL pulse • REC-CTL is generated and recorded with the duty cycle set by register RCDR3 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 690 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REC-CTL Duty Data Register 1 (RCDR1) Bit : 15 — Initial value : R/W : 1 — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMT1B CMT1A CMT19 CMT18 CMT17 CMT16 CMT15 CMT14 CMT13 CMT12 CMT11 CMT10 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W RCDR1 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the REC-CTL rising timing. This setting is valid only for recording and rewriting, and is not used in detection. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not affected by write access. RCDR1 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode and CTL stop mode. The value to set in RCDR1 can be calculated from the transition timing T1 and the servo clock frequency φs by the equation given below. See figure 26.60. Any transition timing can be set. The timing should be selected with attention to playback tracking compensation and the latch timing for phase control. RCDR1 = T1 × φs/64 φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T1 is the set timing (s). Note: 0 cannot be set to RCDR1. Set a value 1 or above. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 691 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REC-CTL Duty Data Register 2 (RCDR2) Bit : 15 — Initial value : R/W : 1 — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMT2B CMT2A CMT29 CMT28 CMT27 CMT26 CMT25 CMT24 CMT23 CMT22 CMT21 CMT20 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W RCDR2 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets 1 pulse (short) falling timing of REC-CTL at recording and rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not affected by write access. RCDR2 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop mode. At recording, the value to set in RCDR2 can be calculated from the transition timing T2 and the servo clock frequency φs by the equation given below, and the set value should be 25% of the duty obtained by the equation. See figure 26.60. RCDR2 = T2 × φ s/64 φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T2 is the set timing (s). At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 26.56. RCDR2 = T2' × φ s/64 φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T2' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD (s). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 692 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REC-CTL Duty Data Register 3 (RCDR3) Bit : 15 — Initial value : 1 R/W : — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMT3B CMT3A CMT39 CMT38 CMT37 CMT36 CMT35 CMT34 CMT33 CMT32 CMT31 CMT30 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W RCDR3 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets 1 pulse (long) and assemble mark falling timing of REC-CTL at recording and rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not affected by write access. RCDR3 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop mode. At recording, the value to set in RCDR3 can be calculated from the transition timing T3 and the servo clock frequency φs by the equation given below. The set value should be 30 percent of the duty when the RCDR3 is used for REC-CTL 1 pulse, and 67 to 70 percent when used for assemble mark. The set value must not exceed the frequency of REF30X. See figure 26.60. RCDR3 = T3 × φs/64 φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T3 is the set timing (s). At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 26.56. RCDR3 = T3' × φs/64 φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T3' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD (s). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 693 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REC-CTL Duty Data Register 4 (RCDR4) Bit : 15 — Initial value : 1 R/W : — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMT4B CMT4A CMT49 CMT48 CMT47 CMT46 CMT45 CMT44 CMT43 CMT42 CMT41 CMT40 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W RCDR4 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (short) of REC-CTL in record or rewrite mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in them is valid. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop. In record mode, set a value with the 57.5 percent duty cycle obtained from the set time T4 corresponding to the frequency φs according to the following equation. See figure 26.60. RCDR4 = T4 × φ s/64 φ is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T4 is the set timing (s). At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 26.56. RCDR4 = H'FFF − (T4' × φ s/80) φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T4' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at REV (s). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 694 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits REC-CTL Duty Data Register 5 (RCDR5) Bit : Initial value : 15 — 1 R/W : — 14 — 1 — 13 — 1 — 12 — 1 — 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMT5B CMT5A CMT59 CMT58 CMT57 CMT56 CMT55 CMT54 CMT53 CMT52 CMT51 CMT50 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W RCDR5 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (short) of REC-CTL in record or rewrite mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in them is valid. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop. In record mode, set a value with the 62.5 percent duty cycle obtained from the set time T5 corresponding to the frequency φs according to the following equation. See figure 26.60. RCDR5 = T5 × φ s/64 φ is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T5 is the set timing (s). At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 26.56. RCDR5 = H'FFF − (T5' × φ s/80) φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T5' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at REV (s). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 695 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Duty I/O Register (DI/O) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 VCTR2 1 W 6 VCTR1 1 W 5 VCTR0 1 W 4 — 1 — 3 BPON 0 W 2 BPS 0 W 1 BPF 0 R/(W)* 0 DI/O 1 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written DI/O is an 8-bit register that confirms and determines the operating status of the CTL circuit. It is initialized to H'F1 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop mode. Bits 7 to 5⎯VISS Interrupt Setting Bit (VCTR2 to VCTR0): Combination of VCTR2, VCTR1 and VCTR0 sets number of 1 pulse detection in VISS detection mode. Detecting the set number of pulse detection is considered as VISS detection, and an interrupt request is generated. Note: When changing the detection pulse number during VISS detection, initialize VISS first, then resume the VISS detection setting. Bit 7 VCTR2 0 Bit 6 VCTR1 0 Bit 5 VCTR0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Number of 1-Pulse for Detection 2 4 (SYNC mark) 6 8 (mark A, short) 12 (mark A, long) 16 24 (mark B) 32 Bit 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 696 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Bit Pattern Detection ON/OFF Bit (BPON): Determines ON or OFF of bit pattern detection. Note: When writing 1 to BPON bit, be sure to set appropriate data to RCDR 2 to 5 beforehand. Bit 3 BPON 0 1 Description Bit pattern detection off Bit pattern detection on (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Bit Pattern Detection Start Bit (BPS): Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection. When 1 is written to this bit, it returns to 0 after one cycle. Writing 0 to this bit does not affect operation. Bit 2 BPS 0 1 Description Normal status Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Bit Pattern Detection Flag (BPF): Sets flag every time 8-bit PB-CTL is detected in PB or ASM mode. To clear flag, write 0 after reading 1. Bit 1 BPF 0 1 Description Bit pattern (8-bit) is not detected Bit pattern (8-bit) is detected (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Duty I/O Register (DI/O): This flag has different functions for record and playback. In VISS detect mode, VASS detect mode, and ASM mark detect mode, this flag indicates the detection result. In VISS record or rewrite mode, this flag controls the write control circuit so as to write an index code, operating according to a control signal from the VISS control circuit. In VASS record or rewrite mode and ASM mark record mode, this flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. This bit can always be written to, but this does not affect the write control circuit in modes other than VISS record, rewrite, and ASM record. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 697 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • VISS Detect Mode and VASS Detect Mode: The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 44% (a 0 pulse in the CTL signal). The duty I/O flag is 0 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 43% (a 1 pulse in the CTL signal). • ASM Mark Detect Mode: The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is 0 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 66% (when an ASM mark is detected). The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 65% (when an ASM mark is not detected). • VISS Record Mode and VISS Rewrite Mode: The duty I/O flag operates according to a control signal from the VISS control circuit, and controls the write control circuit so as to write an index code. The write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to RCDR5). For VISS recording, registers RCDR1 to RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X. For VISS rewrite, RCDR2 to RCDR5 are set with reference to the low-to-high transition of the previously recorded CTL signal, and the write is carried out through the trapezoid waveform generator. Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0 pulse (short) in RCDR4, and for a 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5. While an index code is being written, the value of the bit being written can be read by reading the duty I/O flag. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 0 pulse, the duty I/O flag will read 1. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 1 pulse, the duty I/O flag will read 0. • VASS Record Mode and VASS Rewrite Mode: The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. The write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to RCDR5). For VASS recording, registers RCDR1 to RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X. For VASS rewrite, RCDR2 to RCDR5 are set with reference to the low-to-high transition of the previously recorded CTL signal, and the write is carried out through the trapezoid waveform generator. Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0 pulse (short) in RCDR4, and for 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5. If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR2 and RCDR3, referenced to the immediately following REF30X. If 1 is written in the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR4 and RCDR5, referenced to the immediately following REF30X. • ASM Record Mode: The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. The write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 and RCDR3). If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle of 67% to 70% as set in RCDR3, referenced to the immediately following REF30X. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 698 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit Pattern Register (BTPR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 LSP7 1 R/W* 6 LSP6 1 R/W* 5 LSP5 1 R/W* 4 LSP4 1 R/W* 3 LSP3 1 R/W* 2 LSP2 1 R/W* 1 LSP1 1 R/W* 0 LSP0 1 R/W* Note: * Write is prohibited when bit pattern detection is selected. BTPR is an 8-bit shift register which detects and records the bit pattern of the CTL pulses. If a CTL pulse is detected in PB or ASM mode, the register is shifted leftward at the rising edge of PB-CTL, and reflects the determined result of long/short on the bit 0 (long pulse = 1, short pulse = 0). If BPON bit is set to 1 in PB mode, the register starts detection of bit pattern immediately after the CTL pulse. To exit the bit pattern detection, set the BPON bit at 0. If 1 was written in the BPS bit when the bit pattern is being detected, the BPF bit is set at 1 when an 8-bit bit pattern was detected. If continuous detection of 8-bits is required, write 0 in the BPF bit, and then write 1 in BPS bit. At the time of VISS detection, the bit pattern detection is disabled. Set the BPON bit to 0 at the time of VISS detection. In REC mode, the register record the long/shorts in the bit pattern set in BTPR. The pulse in record mode is determined always by bit 7 (LSP7) of BTPR. BTPR records one pulse, shifts leftward, and stores the data of bit 7 to bit 0. BTPR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, in stand-by, module stop, or CTL stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 699 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.6 Operation CTL Circuit Operation: As shown in figure 26.49, the CTL discrimination/record circuit is composed of a 16-bit up/down counter and 12-bit registers (×5). In playback (PB) mode, the 16-bit up/down counter counts on a φs/4 clock when the PB-CTL pulse is high, and on a φs/5 clock when low. In record or slow mode, this counter increments the count on a φs/4 clock. In ASM mode, this counter increments the count on a φs/8 clock when the pulse is high, and on a φs/4 clock when low. This counter always counts up in record and slow modes. In playback or slow mode, it is cleared on the rise of PB-CTL signal. In record mode, it is cleared on the rise of REF30X signal. Up/Down control signal REC: UP PB, ASM: UP when PB-CTL is high Down when PB-CTL is low Counter clear signal REF30X ↑ (REC) PB-CTL ↑ (PB, ASM) UP φs/4 (φs/8) φs/5 (φs/4) UP/DOWN counter (16 bits) DOWN RCDR1 RCDR2 RCDR3 RCDR4 RCDR5 Legend: UDF: Underflows when PB-CTL duty is 43% or less 12-bit register UDF Duty detection REC-CTL↑ REC-CTL↓(S1) REC-CTL↓(L1and ASM) REC-CTL↓(S0) REC-CTL↓(L0) Upper 12 bits Match detection Match detection Match detection Match detection Match detection Figure 26.49 CTL Discrimination/Record Circuit CTL Mode Register (CTLM) Switchover Timing: CTLM is enabled immediately after data is written to the register. Care must be taken with changes in the operating state. Capstan phase control is performed by the VD sync REF30X (X-value + tracking value) and PBCTL in ASM mode, and by the REF30P or CREF and CFG division signal (DVCFG2) in REC mode. If CAPREF30 signal to be used for capstan phase control is always generated by XDR, the Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 700 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits value of XDR must be overwritten when switching between PB and REC modes. Figures 26.50 and 26.51 show examples of switch timing of CTLM and XDR. The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed before REF30P in the cycle in which the X-value is changed. X-value (XDR) is rewritten in this cycle VD REF30P HSW X-value after change Tx Latch Preset X-value Capstan phase control ASM mode, PB mode : REF30X-PB-CTL REC mode : REF30P-DVCFG2 REF30X PB-CTL REC-CTL CTL Ta Tb 16bit UP/DOWN counter φ/4 φ/5 φ/4 RCDR1 UDF 0 pulse 1 pulse RCDR3 RCDR1 RCDR2 1 pulse 0 pulse DVCFG2 CDIVR2 Register write Notes: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3. 2. Tb is the interval in which switchover is performed from ASM mode to REC mode. 3. Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period is shortened due to the change of XDR. Figure 26.50 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing (When Phase Control Is Performed by REF30P and DVCFG2 in REC Mode) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 701 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed before REF30P in the cycle in which the X-value is changed. X-value (XDR) is rewritten in this cycle VD REF30P HSW X value X-value after change Tx Capstan phase control ASM mode, PB mode: REF30X-PB-CTL REF30X PB-CTL CTL Ta Tb REC-CTL 16bit UP/DOWN counter φ/4 φ/5 φ/4 RCDR1 UDF RCDR3 RCDR1 RCDR2 0 pulse 1 pulse 0 pulse 1 pulse DVCFG2 CDIVR2 Register write CREF ASM-REC switchover Capstan phase control REC mode : CREF30P-DVCFG2 Latch Preset Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3. Tb is the interval in which switchover is performed from ASM mode to REC mode. Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period is shortened due to the change of XDR. With CREF and DVCFG2 phase alignment, the frequency need not be 25 Hz or 30 Hz. Figure 26.51 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing (When Phase Control Is Performed by CREF and DVCFG2 in REC Mode) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 702 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.7 CTL Input Section The CTL input section consists of an input amplifier of which gain can be controlled by the register setting and a Schmitt amplifier. Figure 26.52 shows a block diagram of the CTL input section. Trivial CTL pulse signal is received from the CTL head, amplified by the input amplifier, reshaped into a square wave by the Schmitt amplifier, and sent to the servo circuits, and the Timer L as the PB-CTL signal. Control the CTL input amplifier gain by bits 3 to 0 in CTL gain control register (CTLGR) of the servo port. AMPON (PB-CTL) AMPSHORT (REC-CTL) CTLGR3 to 1 CTLFB CTLGR0 –+ + – – + PB-CTL(+) PB-CTL(-) CTL(-) CTL(+) CTLREF CTLBias CTLFB CTLAmp(o) CTLSMT(i) Note Note : Be sure to set a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i). Figure 26.52 Block Diagram of CTL Input Amplifier Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 703 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CTL Detector: If the CTL detector fails to detect a CTL pulse, it sets the CTL control register (CTCR) bit 1 to 1 indicating that the pulse has not been detected. If a CTL pulse is detected after that, the bit is automatically cleared to 0. Duration used for determining detection or non-detection of the pulse depends on magnitude of phase shift of the last detected pulse from the reference phase (phase difference between REF30 and CTL signal). Typically, detection or non-detection is determined within 3 to 4 cycles of the reference period. If settings of the CTL gain control register are maintained in a table format, you can refer to it when the CTL detector failed to detect CTL pulses. From the table, you can control amplifier gain of the CTL according to state of UNCTL bit, thereby selecting an optimum CTL amplifier gain depending on state of the pulse recorded. Figure 26.53 illustrates concept of gain control for detecting the CTL input pulse. * V+TH (fixed) V-TH (fixed) * Note: * CTL input sensitivity is variable depending on CTL gain control register (CTLGR) setting. Figure 26.53 CTL Input Pulse Gain Control Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 704 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB-CTL Waveform Shaper in Slow Mode Operation: If bit 0 in CTL control register (CTCR) is set to slow mode, slow reset function is activated. In slow mode, if falling edge is not detected within the specified time from rising edge detection, PB-CTL is forcibly shut down (slow reset). The time TFS (s) until the signal falls is the following interval after the rising edge of the internal CTL signal is detected: TFS = 16384 × 4/φ s (φs = fOSC/2) When fOSC = 10 MHz, TFS = 13.1 ms. Figure 26.54 shows the PB-CTL waveform in slow mode. 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame CTL waveform Slow reset Internal CTL signal CTLP↑ Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration CTLP↑ Deceleration Acceleration CTLP↑ Slow tracking delay Stop Slow tracking delay Stop Slow tracking delay Figure 26.54 PB-CTL Waveform in Slow Mode Operation Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 705 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.8 Duty Discriminator The duty discriminator circuit measures the period of the control signal recorded on the tape (PBCTL signal) and discriminates its duty cycle. In VISS or VASS detection, the duty I/O flag is set or cleared according to the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is set to 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 44%, and is cleared to 0 when the duty cycle is below 43%. In ASM detection, an ASM mark is recognized (and the duty I/O flag is cleared to 0) when the duty cycle is above 66%. When the duty cycle is below 65%, no ASM mark is recognized and the duty I/O flag is set to 1. The detection direction can be switched between forward and reverse by bit 5 (FW/RV) in the CTL mode register. Long or short pulse can be detected by comparing REC-CTL duty data register (RCDR2 to RCDR5) and UP/DOWN counter. Long or short pulse is discriminated at PB-CTL signal falling. Discrimination result is stored in bit 0 of bit pattern register (BTPR). At the same time, BTPR is shifted to the left. LSP0 indicates 0 when short pulse is detected, and 1 when long pulse is detected. Set the threshold value of long/short pulse in RCDR2 to RCDR5. See the description on the detection of the long/short pulse. Figure 26.55 shows the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 706 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Input signal Short 1 pulse PB-CTL 25 ±0.5% Input signal Long 1 pulse PB-CTL 30 ±0.5% Input signal Short 0 pulse PB-CTL 57.5 ±0.5% Input signal Long 0 pulse PB-CTL 62.5 ±0.5% Input signal ASM mark PB-CTL 67 to 70% Figure 26.55 PB-CTL Signal Duty Cycle Figure 26.56 shows the duty discrimination circuit. A 44% duty cycle is discriminated by counting with the 16-bit up/down counter, using a φs/4 clock for the up-count and a φs/5 clock for the down-count. An up-count is performed when the PB-CTL signal is high, and a down-count when low. Long or short pulse is discriminated by comparing with RCDR2 to RCDR5. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 707 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits PB-CTL φ s/4 φ s/5 Comparison of upper 12-bit * RCDR2or4 (12-bit) * RCDR3or5 (12-bit) * FWD : Discriminated by RCDR2 and RCDR3 REV : Discriminated by RCDR4 and RCDR5 φ s/4 Counter φ s/5 S R Clear PB-CTL↑ Q L/S discrimination UP/DOWN UP/DOWN counter (16 bits) UDF 0/1 discrimination PB-CTL 1 pulse φ s/5 Counter φ s/4 PB-CTL 0 pulse RCDR3 Counter 0 pulse L/S threshold value φ s/5 1 pulse L/S threshold value φ s/4 FWD RCDR2 PB-CTL Short pulse (0 pulse) φ s/5 REV RCDR4 Counter RCDR5 PB-CTL Long pulse (1 pulse) φ s/4 0 pulse L/S threshold value 1 pulse L/S threshold value Figure 26.56 Duty Discriminator Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 708 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits VISS (Index) Detect Mode: VISS detection is carried out by the VISS control circuit, which counts 1 pulses in the PB-CTL signal. If the pulse count detects any value set in the VISS interrupt setting bits (bits 5, 6, or 7 in the duty I/O register), an interrupt request is generated and the duty I/O flag is cleared to 0. At VISS record or rewrite, INDEX code is automatically written. INDEX code is composed of 0 continuous 62-bit data with 0 pulse data at both edge. Examples of bit strings and the duty I/O flag at VISS detection/record is illustrated in figure 26.57. IRRCTL Thirty-two 1 pulses detected Tape direction 01111 1 1 1 1 0 61 ±3 bits 63 ±3 bits Start Duty I/O flag (a) VISS detection (INDEX: Thirty-two 1 pulse setting) IRRCTL 123 Tape direction 01111 1 1 62 63 64 1 1 0 62 bits 64 bits Start Duty I/O flag (b) VISS record Figure 26.57 Examples of VISS Bit Strings and Duty I/O Flag Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 709 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Duty Detection Mode (VASS): VASS detection is carried out by the duty discriminator. Software can detect index sequences by reading the duty I/O flag at each CTL pulse. At each CTL pulse, the duty discriminator sends the result of duty discrimination to the duty I/O flag, and simultaneously generates an interrupt request. The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 if the CTL pulse is a 1 (duty cycle below 43%), and is set to 1 if the CTL pulse is a 0 (duty cycle above 44%). The duty I/O flag is modified at each CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal. VASS detection format is illustrated in figure 26.58. Tape direction Written three times 11111111111S Header (11 bits) M B LM SS BB LM SS BB LM SS BB L S B Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones Data (16 bits: 4 digits of 4-bit BCD) Figure 26.58 VASS (Index) Format Assemble (ASM) Mark Detect Mode: ASM mark detection is carried out by the duty discriminator. If the duty discriminator detects that the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is 66% or higher, it generates an interrupt request, and simultaneously clears the duty I/O flag to 0. The duty I/O flag is updated at every CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 710 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Detection of the Long/Short Pulse: The long/short pulse is detected in PB mode by the L/S determination based on the comparison of the REC-CTL duty register (RCDR2 to RCDR5) with the up/down counter and the results of the duty I/O flag. The results of the determination is stored in bit 0 (LSP0) of the bit pattern register (BTPR) at the rising edge of PB-CTL, shifting at the same time BTPR leftward. RCDR2-5 set the L/S thresholds for each of FWD/REV. Set to RCDR2 a threshold of 1 pulse L/S for FWD, to RCDR3 a threshold of 0 pulse L/S for FWD, to RCDR4 a threshold of 0 pulse L/S for REV, and to RCDR5 a threshold of 1 pulse L/S for REV. Figure 26.59 shows the detection of long/short pulse. Also, the bit pattern of 8-bit can be detected by BTPR. Check that an 8-bit detection has been done by bit 1 (BPF bit) of the duty I/O register, and then read BTPR. Internal bus R BTPR Shift left-ward Bit patter register (8 bits) LSB RCDR2 (12 bits) RCDR3 (12 bits) S R Q RCDR4 (12 bits) RCDR5 (12 bits) S R Q FW/RV DI/O High-order 12-bit data φs/4 Up/Down counter (16 bits) Note: L/S is determined at the rising edge of PB-CTL. After the determination, bit pattern register is shifted leftward, and the results of the determination is stored in the LSB. Figure 26.59 Detection of Long/Short Pulse Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 711 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.9 CTL Output Section An on-chip control head amplifier is provided for writing the REC-CTL signal generated by the write control circuit onto the tape. The write control circuit controls the duty cycle of the REC-CTL signal in the writing of VISS and VASS sequences and ASM marks and the rewriting of VISS and VASS sequences. The duty cycle of the REC-CTL signal is set in REC-CTL duty data registers 1 to 5 (RCDR1 to RCDR5). Times calculated in terms of φs (= fOSC/2) should be converted to appropriate data to be set in these registers. In VISS or VASS mode, set RCDR2 for a duty cycle of 25% ±0.5%, RCDR3 for a duty cycle of 30% ±0.5%, RCDR4 for a duty cycle of 57.5 ±0.5%, and RCDR5 for a duty cycle of 62.5 ±0.5%. When 1 is written in the duty I/O flag, the REC-CTL signal will be written on the tape with a 25% ±0.5% duty cycle when 0 is written in bit 7 (LSP7) in the bit pattern register (BTPR) and with a 30 ±0.5% duty cycle when 1 is written. Table 26.21 shows the relationship between the REC-CTL duty register and CTL outputs. In ASM mark write mode, set RCDR3 for a duty cycle of 67% to 70%. An ASM mark will be written when 0 is written in the duty I/O flag. An interrupt request is generated at the rise of the reference signal after one CTL pulse has been written. The reference signal is derived from the output signal (REF30X) of the X-value adjustment circuit, and has a period of one frame. Figure 26.60 shows the timings that generate the REC-CTL signal. Table 26.21 REC-CTL Duty Register and CTL Outputs MODE VISS, VASS modes D/IO 0 LSP7 0 1 1 0 1 ASM mode Legend: * Don’t care. 0 * Pulse S1 L1 S0 L0 ⎯ RCDR RCDR2 RCDR3 RCDR4 RCDR5 RCDR3 Duty 25 ±0.5% 30 ±0.5% 57.5 ±0.5% 62.5 ±0.5% 67 to 70% Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 712 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits RESET REF30X↑ Clear φs/4 UP/DOWN counter (12 bits) Upper 12 bits Internal bus W W W RCDR1 (12 bits) RCDR2or4 (12 bits) RCDR3or5 (12 bits) Compare Compare Compare REC-CTL rise timing REC-CTL1 pulse, ASM fall timing REC-CTL 0 pulse fall timing End of writing of one CTL pulse (except VISS) IRRCTL REF30X Counter reset Match detection Counter Match detection REC-CTL RCDR1 RCDR2 (VISS/VASS S1 pulse) RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse, or ASM) RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse) RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse) Figure 26.60 REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 713 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits The 16-bit counter in the REC-CTL circuit continues counting on a clock derived by dividing the system clock φs (= fOSC/2) by 4. The counter is cleared on the rise of REF30X in record mode, and on the rise of PB-CTL in rewrite mode. REC-CTL match detection is carried out by comparing the counter value with each RCDR value. RCDR1 to RCDR5 can be written to by software at all times. If RCDR is changed before the respective match detection is performed, match detection is performed using the new value. The value changed after match detection becomes valid on the rise of REF30X following the change. Figure 26.61 shows examples of RCDR change timing. REF30X RCDR4 Counter RCDR2 RCDR1 REC-CTL RCDR1 RCDR2 RCDR1 RCDR4 RCDR1 RCDR4 RCDR4 Interval in which RCDR4 can be written to Rewritten 0 pulse (Short) RCDR1 1 pulse (Short) 0 pulse (Short) Figure 26.61 Example of RCDR Change Timing (Example Showing RCDR4) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 714 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit In rewriting, the trapezoid waveform circuit leaves the rising edge of the already-recorded PBCTL signal intact, but changes the duty cycle. In rewriting, the CTL pulse is written with reference to the rise of PB-CTL. The CTL duty cycle for a rewrite is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR2 to RCDR5). Time values T2 to T5 are referenced to the rise of PB-CTL. Figure 26.62 shows the rewrite waveform. RESET PB-CTL↑ Clear φs/4 Up/Down counter (16 bits) RCDR2or4 (12 bits) RCDR3or5 (12 bits) RCDR1 (12 bits) Not used when rewriting Upper 12 bits Internal bus W W W Compare Compare REC-CTL 1 pulse fall timing REC-CTL 0 pulse fall timing End of writing of one CTL pulse (except VISS) IRRCTL PB-CTL Eliminated pulse High-impedance interval New pulse REC-CTL when rewriting T2 to T5 RCDR2 (BISS/VASS S1 pulse) RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse) RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse) RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse) Figure 26.62 Relationship between REC-CTL and RCDR2 to RCDR5 when Rewriting Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 715 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt After a reset, the CTL circuit is in the VISS discrimination input mode. Depending on the CTL pin states, a false PB-CTL input pulse may be recognized and an interrupt request generated. If the interrupt request will be enabled, first clear the CTL interrupt request flag. 26.14 Frequency Dividers 26.14.1 Overview On-chip frequency dividers are provided for the pulse signal picked up from the control track during playback (the PB-CTL signal), and the pulse signal received from the capstan motor (CFG signal). The CTL frequency divider generates a CTL divided control signal (DVCTL) from the PB-CTL signal, for use in capstan phase control during high-speed search, for example. The CFG frequency divider generates two divided CFG signals (DVCFG for speed control and DVCFG2 for phase control) from the CFG signal. The DFG noise canceller is a circuit which considers signal less than 2φ as noise and mask it. 26.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider Block Diagram: Figure 26.63 shows a block diagram of the CTL frequency divider. Internal bus R/W CTVC CEG R/W CTVC CEX W CTLR CTL division register (8 bits) EXCTL PB-CTL↑ Edge detector ↑, ↓ Down counter (8 bits) UDF DVCTL Figure 26.63 CTL Frequency Divider Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 716 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Register Description Register configuration Table 26.22 shows the register configuration of the CTL frequency dividers. Table 26.22 Name DVCTL control register CTL frequency division register Register Configuration Abbrev. CTVC CTLR R/W R/W W Size Byte Byte Initial Value Address Undefined H'00 H'D098 H'D099 DVCTL Control Register (CTVC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CEX 0 W 6 CEG 0 W 5 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 4 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 3 ⎯ 1 ⎯ 2 CFG * R 1 HSW * R 0 CTL * R Note: * Undefined CTVC consists of the external input signal selection bits and the flags which show the CFG, HSW, and CTL levels. Note: It has an undetermined value by a reset or in stand-by mode. Bit 7⎯DVCTL Signal Generation Selection Bit (CEX): Selects which of the PB-CTL signal or the external input signal is used to generate the DVCTL signal. Bit 7 CEX 0 1 Description Generates DVCTL signal with PB-CTL signal Generates DVCTL signal with external input signal (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 717 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 6⎯External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CEG): Selects the edge of the external signal at which the frequency division is made when the external signal was selected to generate DVCTL signal. Bit 6 CEG 0 1 Description Rising edge Falling edge (Initial value) Bits 5 to 3⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2⎯CFG Flag (CFG): Shows the CFG level. Bit 2 CFG 0 1 Description CFG is at low level CFG is at high level (Initial value) Bit 1⎯HSW Flag (HSW): Shows the level of the HSW signal selected by the VFF/NFF bit of the HSW mode register 2 (HSM2). Bit 1 HSW 0 1 Description HSW is at low level HSW is at high level (Initial value) Bit 0⎯CTL Flag (CTL): Shows the CTL level. Bit 0 CTL 0 1 Description REC or PB-CTL is at low level REC or PB-CTL is at high level (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 718 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CTL Frequency Division Register (CTLR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 CTL7 0 W 6 CTL6 0 W 5 CTL5 0 W 4 CTL4 0 W 3 CTL3 0 W 2 CTL2 0 W 1 CTL1 0 W 0 CTL0 0 W CTLR is an 8-bit write-only register to set the frequency dividing value (N-1 if divided by N) for PB-CTL. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. PB-CTL is divided by N at its rising edge. If the register value is 0, no division operation is performed, and the DVCTL signal with the same cycle with PB-CTL is output. It is initialized by a reset or in stand-by mode. Operation: During playback, control pulses recorded on the tape are picked up by the control head and input to the CTL pin. The control pulse signal is amplified by a Schmitt amplifier, reshaped, then input to the CTL frequency divider as the PB-CTL signal. This circuit is employed when the control pulse (PB-CTL signal) is used for phase control of the capstan motor. The divided signal is sent as the DVCTL signal to the capstan phase system in the servo circuits and timer R. The CTL frequency divider is an 8-bit reload timer consisting of a reload register and a downcounter. Frequency division is obtained by setting frequency-division data in bits 7 to 0 in the CTL frequency division register (CTLR), which is the reload register. When a frequency division value is written in this reload register, it is also written into the down-counter. The down-counter is decremented on rising edges of the PB-CTL signal. Figure 26.64 shows examples of the PB-CTL and DVCTL waveforms. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 719 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CTL input signal PB-CTL or external sync signal CTLR=00 CTLR=01 CTLR=02 Legend: CTLR: CTL frequency division register Figure 26.64 CTL Frequency Division Waveforms Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 720 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider Block Diagram: Figure 26.65 shows a block diagram of the 7-bit CFG frequency divider and its mask timer. Internal bus W •CDVC CRF CDIVR(7 bits) W R/W W •CDVC MCGin Edge select ↑, ↑↓ •CDVC CMN CFG Down counter (7 bits) UDF DVCFG UDF Down counter (7 bits) S CMK R DVCFG2 PB(ASM)→REC •CDVC CDIVR2(7 bits) φs/1024 φs/512 φs/256 φs/128 DVTRG Down counter (6 bits) UDF •CDVC CPS1, CPS0 CTMR(6 bits) W W W W Internal bus R φs = fosc/2 Figure 26.65 CFG Frequency Divider Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 721 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Register Description: Register configuration Table 26.23 shows the register configuration of the CFG frequency division circuit. Table 26.23 Register Configuration Name DVCFG control register CFG frequency division register 1 CFG frequency division register 2 DVCFG mask period register Abbrev. CDVC CDIVR1 CDIVR2 CTMR R/W R/W W W W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'60 H'80 H'80 H'FF Address H'D09A H'D09B H'D09C H'D09D DVCFG Control Register (CDVC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 MCGin 0 R/W* 6 — 1 — 5 CMK 1 R 4 CMN 0 W 3 DVTRG 0 W 2 CRF 0 W 1 CPS1 0 W 0 CPS0 0 W Note: * Only 0 can be written. CDVC is an 8-bit register to control the capstan frequency division circuit. It is initialized to H'60 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Mask CFG Flag (MCGin): MCGin is a flag to indicate occurrence of a frequency division signal during the mask timer's mask period. To clear it by software, write 0 after reading 1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a condition setting the flag and 0 write occur simultaneously, the latter is invalid. Bit 7 MCGin 0 1 Description CFG is in normal operation Shows that DVCFG was detected during masking (runaway detected) (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 722 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 5⎯CFG Mask Status Bit (CMK): Indicates the status of the mask. It is initialized to 1 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bit 5 CMK 0 1 Description Indicates that the capstan mask timer has released masking Indicates that the capstan mask timer is currently masking (Initial value) Bit 4⎯CFG Mask Selection Bit (CMN): Selects the turning on/off of the mask function. Bit 4 CMN 0 1 Description Capstan mask timer function on. Capstan mask timer function off. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯PB (ASM) → REC Transition Timing Sync ON/OFF Selection Bit (DVTRG): Selects the On/Off of the timing sync of the transition from PB (ASM) to REC when the DVCFG2 signal is generated. Bit 3 DVTRG 0 1 Description PB (ASM) → REC transition timing sync on. PB (ASM) → REC transition timing sync off. (Initial value) Bit 2⎯CFG Frequency Division Edge Selection Bit (CRF): Selects the edge of the CFG signal to be divided. Bit 2 CRF 0 1 Description Performs frequency division at the rising edge of CFG. Performs frequency division at both edges of CFG. (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 723 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bits 1 and 0⎯CFG Mask Timer Clock Selection Bits (CPS1, CPS0): Select the clock source for the CFG mask timer. (φs = fosc/2) Bit 1 CPS1 0 Bit 0 CPS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description φs/1024 φs/512 φs/256 φs/128 (Initial value) CFG Frequency Division Register 1 (CDIVR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 CDV16 0 W 5 CDV15 0 W 4 CDV14 0 W 3 CDV13 0 W 2 CDV12 0 W 1 CDV11 0 W 0 CDV10 0 W CDIVR1 is an 8-bit write-only register to set the division value. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bit 7 is reserved. The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the same time. CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges If the register value is 0, no division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle with CFG signal is output. The DVCFG signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector. It is initialized to H'80 by a reset or in stand-by mode together with the capstan frequency division register and the down counter. CFG Frequency Division Register 2 (CDIVR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 CDV26 0 W 5 CDV25 0 W 4 CDV24 0 W 3 CDV23 0 W 2 CDV22 0 W 1 CDV21 0 W 0 CDV20 0 W CDIVR2 is an 8-bit write-only register to set the division value. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bit 7 is reserved. The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the same time. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 724 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges If the register value was 0, no division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle with CFG is output. The DVCFG2 signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector and the Timer L. The DVCFG2 circuit has no mask timer function. The frequency division counter starts its division operation at the point data was written in CDIVR2. If synchronization is required for phase matching, for example, do it by writing in CDIVR2. If the DVTRG bit of the CDVC register is 0, the register synchronizes with the switching timing from PB (ASM) to REC. It is initialized to H'80 by a reset or in stand-by mode together with the capstan frequency division register and the down counter. DVCFG Mask Period Register (CTMR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 CPM5 1 W 4 CPM4 1 W 3 CPM3 1 W 2 CPM2 1 W 1 CPM1 1 W 0 CPM0 1 W CTMR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. CTMR is a reload register for the mask timer (down counter). Set in it the mask period of CFG. The mask period is determined by the clock specified by the bits 1 and 0 of CDVC and the set value (N - 1). If data is written in CTMR, it is written also in the mask timer at the same time. It is initialized to H'FF by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Mask period = N × clock cycle Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 725 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Operation: • Frequency divider The CFG pulses output from the capstan motor are sent to internal circuitry as the CFG signal via the zero-cross type comparator. The CFG signal, shaped into a rectangular waveform by a reshaping circuit, is divided by the CFG frequency dividers, and used in servo control. The rising edge or both edges of the CFG signal can be selected for the frequency divider. The CFG frequency divider consists of a 7-bit frequency divider with a mask timer for capstan speed control (DVCFG signal generator) and a 7-bit frequency divider for capstan phase control (DVCFG2 signal generator). The DVCFG signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division register1: CDIVR1), a 7-bit down-counter, and a 6-bit mask timer (with settable mask interval). Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in 7-bit CDIVR1. When the frequency-division value is written in CDIVR1, it is also written in the down-counter. After frequency-division of a CFG signal for which the edge has been selected, the signal is sent via the mask timer to the capstan speed error detector as the DVCFG signal. The DVCFG2 signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division register 2: CDIVR2) and a 7-bit down-counter. The 7-bit frequency divider does not have a mask timer. Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in CDIVR2. When the frequency-division value is written in CDVIR2, it is also written in the down-counter. After frequency division of a CFG signal for which the edge has been selected, the signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector and timer L as the DVCFG2 signal. Frequency division starts when the frequency-division value is written. When DVTRG bit in CDVC register is set to 0, reloading is executed with the switch over timing from PB (ASM) mode to REC mode. To switch from REF30 to CREF, change the settings of bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR). If synchronization is necessary for phase control, this can be provided by writing the frequencydivision value in CDIVR2. The down-counters are decremented on rising edges of the CFG signal when the CRF bit is 0 in the DVCFG control register (CDVC), and on both edges when the CRF bit is 1. Figure 26.66 shows examples of CFG frequency division waveforms. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 726 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits CFG CRF bit = 1 CDIVR = 00 CRF bit = 0 CDIVR = 00 CRF bit = 0 CDIVR = 01 CRF bit = 0 CDIVR = 02 Figure 26.66 CFG Frequency Division Waveforms Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 727 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits • Mask timer The capstan mask timer is a 6-bit reload timer that uses a prescaled clock as a clock source. The mask timer is used for masking DVCFG signal intended for controlling the capstan speed. The capstan mask timer prevents edge detection to be carried out for an unnecessarily long duration by masking the edge detection for a certain period. The above trouble can result from abnormal revolution (runout) of the capstan motor because its revolution has to cover a wide range speeds from the low/still up to the high speed search. The capstan mask timer is started by a pulse edge in the divided CFG signal (DVCFG). While the timer is running, a mask signal disables the output of further DVCFG pulses. The mask signal is shown in figure 26.67. The mask timer status can be monitored by reading the CMK flag in the DVCFG control register (CDVC). DVCFG Mask Mask timer underflow Figure 26.67 Mask Signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 728 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Figures 26.68 and 26.69 show examples of CFG mask timer operations. CFG (racing) Edge detect Capstan motor mask timer Mask interval Mask interval DVCFG MCGin flag Cleared by wiring 0 after reading 1 Figure 26.68 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor Is Racing) CFG Edge detect Capstan motor mask timer Mask interval Mask interval Figure 26.69 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor Is Operating Normally) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 729 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit Block Diagram: Figure 26.70 shows the block diagram of the DFG noise removal circuit. Rising edge detection Delay circuit delay = 2φ Falling edge detection DFG S R Q NCDFG Figure 26.70 DFG Noise Removal Circuit Register Description: Table 26.24 shows the register configuration of the DFG mask circuit. Table 26.24 Register Configuration Name FG control register Abbrev. FGCR R/W W Size Byte Initial Value H'FE Address H'D09E FG Control Register (FGCR) Bit : 7 — Initial value : R/W : 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 — 1 — 0 DRF 0 W FGCR selects the edge of the DFG noise removal signal (NCDFG) to be sent to the drum speed error detector. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'FE by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. The edge selection circuit is located in the drum speed error detector, and outputs the register output to the drum speed error detector. Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 730 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 0⎯DFG Edge Selection Bit (DRF): Selects the edge of the NCDFG signal used in the drum speed error detector. Bit 0 DRF 0 1 Description Selects the rising edge of NCDFG signal Selects the falling edge of NCDFG signal (Initial value) Operation The DFG noise removal circuit generates a signal (NCDFG signal) as a result of removing noise (signal fluctuation smaller than 2 φ) from the DFG signal. The resulted NCDFG signal is behind the time when the DFG signal was detected by 2 φ. Figure 26.71 shows the NCDFG signal. Noise DFG NCDFG 2φ 2φ 2φ φ = fosc Figure 26.71 NCDFG Signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 731 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.15 Sync Signal Detector 26.15.1 Overview This block performs detection of the horizontal sync signal (Hsync) and vertical sync signal (Vsync) from the composite sync signal (Csync), noise counting, and field detection. It detects the horizontal and vertical sync signals by setting threshold in the register and based on the servo clock (φs = fosc/2). Noise masking is possible during the detection of the horizontal sync signals, and if any Hsync pulse is missing, it can be supplemented. Also, if total volume of the noise detected in one frame of Csync amounted over a specified volume, the detector generates a noise detection interrupt. Note: This circuit detects a pulse with a specific width set by the threshold register. It does not classify or restore the sync signal to a formal one. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 732 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 26.15.2 Internal bus W W W W W R/(W) R R/W R/W W Block Diagram •VTR •SYNCR NOIS FLD Noise detection interrupt •HTR •HRTR H complement Complementary H pulse width start time register register Noise detection window register SYCT NIS/VD (8 bits) (4 bits) (6 bits) Noise detection register •HPWR •NWR •NDR V threshold register (4 bits) (8 bits) H threshold register (6 bits) IRRSNC VD interrupt NOISE Csync Noise detection window Noise detector Field detector FIELD Selection of polarity VD(SEPV) Sync signal detector SEPH Complement control & nozzle mask control circuit OSCH Figure 26.72 shows the block diagram of the sync signal detector. Up/Down counter (6 bits) H counter (8 bits) Noise counter (10 bits) Clear Toggle circuit Figure 26.72 Block Diagram of the Sync Signal Detector H reload counter (8 bits) φs = fosc/2 Section 26 Servo Circuits Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 733 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 φs/2 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.15.3 Pin Configuration Table 26.25 shows the pin configuration of the sync signal detector. Table 26.25 Pin Configuration Name Composite sync signal input pin Abbrev. Csync I/O Input Function Composite sync signal input 26.15.4 Register Configuration Table 26.26 shows the register configuration of the sync signal detector. Table 26.26 Register Configuration Name Vertical sync signal threshold register Abbrev. VTR R/W W W W W W W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value Address H'C0 H'F0 H'00 H'F0 H'C0 H'00 H'F8 H'D0B0 H'D0B1 H'D0B2 H'D0B3 H'D0B4 H'D0B5 H'D0B6 Horizontal sync signal threshold register HTR H complement start time setting register Complement H pulse width setting register Noise detection window setting register Noise detector Sync signal control register HRTR HPWR NWR NDR SYNCR 26.15.5 Register Description Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VTR) Bit : Initial value : R/ W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 VTR5 0 W 4 VTR4 0 W 3 VTR3 0 W 2 VTR2 0 W 1 VTR1 0 W 0 VTR0 0 W VTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the threshold for the vertical sync signal when the signal is detected from the composite sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 5 to 0 (VTR5 to VTR0). Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 734 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HTR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 HTR3 0 W 2 HTR2 0 W 1 HTR1 0 W 0 HTR0 0 W HTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the threshold for the horizontal sync signal when the signal is detected from the composite sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 3 to 0 (HTR3 to HTR0). Bits 7 and 4 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'F0 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Figure 26.73 shows the threshold values and separated sync signals. Hpulse 1/2 Hpulse Hpulse Csync TH Counter value H'00 VVTH HVTH TH SEPH SEPV VD interrupt Legend: TH : Period of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC: 63.6, PAL: 64 [μs]) Hpulse : Pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC, PAL: 4.7 [μs]) VVTH : Value set as the threshold of the vertical sync signal HVTH : Value set as the threshold of the horizontal sync signal SEPV : Detected vertical sync signal SEPH : Detected horizontal sync signal (before complement) Figure 26.73 Threshold Values and Separated Sync Signals Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 735 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Example The values set to detect the vertical and horizontal sync signals (SEPV, SEPH) from Csync are required to meet the following conditions. Assumed that the set values in VTHR register were VVTH and HVTH, (VVTH - 1) × 2/φs > Hpulse (HVTH - 2) × 2/φs ≤ Hpulse/2 < (HVTH - 1) × 2/φs Where, Hpulse is pulse width (μs) of the horizontal sync signal, and φs is servo clock (fosc/2). Thus, if φs = 5 MHz, NTSC system is used, (VVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs > 4.7 μs ∴VVTH ≥ H'D (HVTH - 2) × 0.4 μs ≤ 2.35 μs < (HVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs ∴HVTH ≥ H'7 Note: This circuit detects the pulse with the width set in VTHR. If a noise pulse with the width greater than the set value is input, the circuit regards it as a sync signal. H Complement Start Time Setting Register (HRTR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 HRTR7 0 W 6 HRTR6 0 W 5 HRTR5 0 W 4 HRTR4 0 W 3 HRTR3 0 W 2 HRTR2 0 W 1 HRTR1 0 W 0 HRTR0 0 W HRTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the timing to generate a complementary pulse if a pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. ((Value of HRTR7 - 0) + 1) × 2/φs = TH where, TH is the period of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock (fosc/2). Whether the horizontal sync signal exists or not is determined one clock before the complementary pulse is generated. Accordingly, set to HRTR7 to HRTR0 a value obtained from the equation shown above plus one. Also, HRTR7-HRTR0 sets the noise mask period. If the horizontal sync signal has the normal pulses, it is masked in the mask period. The start and the end of the mask period are computed frm the rising edge of OSCH and SEPH, respectively. See figure 26.75. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 736 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Complementary H Pulse Width Setting Register (HPWR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 HPWR3 0 W 2 HPWR2 0 W 1 HPWR1 0 W 0 HPWR0 0 W HRWR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the pulse width of the complementary pulse which is generated if a pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'F0 by a reset or in stand-by mode. ((Value of HPWR3 - 0) + 1) × 2/φs = Hpulse Where, Hpulse is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock (fosc/2). Noise Detection Window Setting Register (NWR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 NWR5 0 W 4 NWR4 0 W 3 NWR3 0 W 2 NWR2 0 W 1 NWR1 0 W 0 NWR0 0 W NWR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the period (window) when the drop-out of the horizontal sync signal pulse is detected and the noise is counted. Set the timing of the noise detection window in bits 5 to 0. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Set the value of the noise detection window timing according to the following equation. ((Value of NWR5-0) + 1) × 2/φs = 1/4 × TH Where, TH is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock (fosc/2). It is recommended that this timing value is set at about 1/4 of the cycle of the horizontal sync signal. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 737 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Noise Detection Register (NDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 NDR7 0 W 6 NDR6 0 W 5 NDR5 0 W 4 NDR4 0 W 3 NDR3 0 W 2 NDR2 0 W 1 NDR1 0 W 0 NDR0 0 W NDR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the noise detection level when the noise of the horizontal sync signal is detected (when NWR is set). Set the noise detection level in bits 7 to 0. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. The noise detector takes counts of the drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal pulses and the noise within the pulses, and if they amount to a count greater than four times of the value set in NDR7NDR0, the detector sets the NOIS flag in the sync signal control register (SYNCR). Set the noise detection level at 1/4 of the noise counts in one frame. The noise counter is cleared whenever Vsync is detected twice. See section 26.15.6, Noise Detection for the details of the noise detection window and the noise detection level. Sync Signal Control Register (SYNCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 NIS/VD 1 R/W 2 NOIS 0 R/(W)* 1 FLD 0 R 0 SYCT 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written SYNCR is an 8-bit register that controls the noise detection, field detection, polarity of the sync signal input, etc. It is initialized to H'F8 by a reset, or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. No write is valid. Bit 1 is read-only. Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 738 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 3⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (NIS/VD): Selects whether an interrupt request is generated by noise level detection or VD signal detection. Bit 3 NIS/VD 0 1 Description Interrupt at the noise level Interrupt at VD (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Noise Detection Flag (NOIS): NOIS is a status flag indicating that the noise counts reached at more than four times of the value set in NDR. The flag is cleared only by writing 0 after reading 1. Care is required because it is not cleared automatically. Bit 2 NOIS 0 1 Description Noise count is smaller than four times of the value set in NDR (Initial value) Noise count is the same or greater than four times of the value set in NDR Bit 1⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates whether the field currently being scanned is even or odd. See figure 26.74. Bit 1 FLD 0 1 Description Odd field Even field (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Sync Signal Polarity Selection Bit (SYCT): Selects the polarity of the sync signal (Csync) to be input. Bit 0 SYCT 0 1 Description (Initial value) Polarity Positive Negative Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 739 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Composite sync signal SEPV Noise detection window Field detection flag (FLD) Even field (a) Even field Composite sync signal SEPV Noise detection window Field detection flag (FLD) Odd field (b) Odd field Figure 26.74 Field Detection Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 740 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.15.6 Noise Detection If a pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing, a complementary pulse is set at the timing set in HPWR and with the set pulse width. Set the noise detection window with HWR of about 1/4 of the horizontal sync signal, and the pulse with equal high and low periods will be obtained. Example of Setting: Assumed that a complementary pulse is set when fosc = 10MHz under the conditions φs = 5 MHz, NTSC:TH = 63.6 (μs) and Hpulse = 4.7 (μs), the set values of the complementary pulse timing (HRTR7-0), complementary pulse width (HPWR3-0), and noise detection window timing (NWR5-0) are expressed by the following equations. (Value of HRTR7 – 0) × 2/φs = TH ((Value of HPWR3 – 0) + 1) × 2/φs = Hpulse ((Value of NWR5 – 0) + 1) × 2/φs = 1/4 × TH Where, TH is the cycle of the horizontal sync signal (μs), Hpulse is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (μs) and φs is the servo clock (Hz) (fosc/2). Accordingly, (Value of HRTR7 – 0) × 0.4 (μs) = 63.6 (μs) ∴HRTR7 – 0 = H'9F ((Value of HPWR3 – 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 4.7 (μs) ∴HPWR3 – 0 = H'B ((Value of NWR5 – 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 16 (μs) ∴NWR5 – 0 = H'27 Also, the noise mask period is computed as follows. ((Value of HRTR7 – 0) + 1) − 24) × 2/φs = 54 (μs) Where, 24 is a constant required for a structural reason. Figure 26.75 shows the set period for HRTR, HPWR, and NWR. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 741 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits A horizontal sync pulse is missing TH The pulse in the mask period is ignored TH SEPH c H counter a b H'00 OVF H'E8 a H reload counter c Mask period Mask period Don't mask immediately after complement. Mask period Mask period Noise mask for H counter TM OSCH Mask period Mask period Mask period Do mask also immediately after complement. Mask period Noise mask for OSCH Noise detection window Period determined by NWR5 to NWR0 Period determined by HRTR7 to HRTR0 Period determined by HPWR3 to HPER0 period determined by a and a period determined by c and H'E8 period determined by b Legend: SEPH : Horizontal sync signal after detection OSCH : Horizontal sync signal after complement a : Value set for the noise detection window (NWR5 to NWR0) b : Value set for the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NPWR3 to NPWR0) c : Value set for complement timing (HRTR7 to HRTR0) a, b, c : Complements of 1 of a,b,c, respectively H'E8 : Complement of 2 of multiplier 24 in the equation for the noise mask period (The noise mask period ends 24 counts before the overflow of H reload counter.) TH : Cycle of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC:63.6 [ms], PAL:64[ms]) TM : Timing at which the noise mask period ends. Figure 26.75 Set Period for HRTR, HPWR, and NWR Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 742 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Noise Detection Operation: The noise detector considers an irregular pulse of the composite sync signal (Csync) and a chip of a horizontal sync signal pulse within a frame as noise. The noise counter takes counts of the irregular pulses during the high period of the noise detection window and the chips and drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal pulses during the low period. The noise detector counts more than one irregular pulses as one. The noise counter is cleared at every frame (Vsync is detected twice). The equalizing pulse contained in 9H of the vertical sync signal is counted also as an irregular pulse. The noise detection flag (NOIS) in the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is set to 1 if the count of the irregular pulses + the count of the pulse chips and drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal > 4 × (value of NDR7 to 0). See the description on the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is section 26.15.5, Register Description, for the NOIS bit. Figure 26.76 shows the operation of the noise detection. Noise Csync Noise detection window Noise detection level Noise counter Noise detection flag is set. Noise detection flag (NOIS) Legend: NOIS : Bit 3 of the sync signal control register (SYNCR) Figure 26.76 Operation of the Noise Detection Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 743 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.15.7 Activation of the Sync Signal Detector After release of reset or transition from the power down mode to the active mode, the sync signal detector starts operation by a sync signal input after release of module stop. The pulse of the polarity specified by the SYCT bit of the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is input to the detector. The detector starts operation even if this pulse is a noise pulse with a width smaller than the regular width. The minimum pulse width which can activate the detector is not constant depending on the internal operation of the input circuit. Accordingly, if the assured activation of the detector is required, input a pulse with a width greater than 4/φs (φs = fosc/2 (Hz)). In such a case, care is required to noise, because even a pulse with a width smaller than 4φ/s may cause activation. 26.16 Servo Interrupt 26.16.1 Overview The interrupt exception processing of the servo module is started by one of ten factors, i.e. the drum speed error detector (×2), drum phase error detector, capstan speed error detector (×2), capstan phase error detector, HSW timing generator (×2), sync detector, and CTL circuit. For these interrupt factors, see each of their circuit sections of this manual. For details of exception processing, see section 5, Exception Handling. 26.16.2 Register Configuration Table 26.27 shows the list of the registers which control the interrupt of the servo section. Table 26.27 Registers which Control the Interrupt of the Servo Section Name Servo interrupt enable register 1 Servo interrupt enable register 2 Servo interrupt request register 1 Servo interrupt request register 2 Abbrev. SIENR1 SIENR2 SIRQR1 SIRQR2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value Address H'00 H'FC H'00 H'FC H'D0B8 H'D0B9 H'D0BA H'D0BB Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 744 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits 26.16.3 Register Description Servo Interrupt Enable Register 1 (SIENR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 IEDRM3 0 R/W 6 IEDRM2 0 R/W 5 IEDRM1 0 R/W 4 IECAP3 0 R/W 3 IECAP2 0 R/W 2 IECAP1 0 R/W 1 IEHSW2 0 R/W 0 IEHSW1 0 R/W SIENR1 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupts in the servo section. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Drum Phase Error Detection Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM3) Bit 7 IEDRM3 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM3 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM3 (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Drum Speed Error Detection (Lock Detection) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM2) Bit 6 IEDRM2 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM2 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM2 Bit 5⎯Drum Speed Error Detection (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM1) Bit 5 IEDRM1 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM1 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 745 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Error Detection Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP3) Bit 4 IECAP3 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP3 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP3 Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed Error Detection (Lock Detection) Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP2) Bit 3 IECAP2 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP2 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP2 Bit 2⎯Capstan Speed Error Detection (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP1) Bit 2 IECAP1 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP1 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP1 Bit 1⎯HSW Timing Generation (counter clear, capture) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEHSW2) Bit 1 IEHSW2 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW2 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 746 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 0⎯HSW Timing Generation (OVW, Matching, STRIG) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEHSW1) Bit 0 IEHSW1 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW1 (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW1 Servo Interrupt Enable Register 2 (SIENR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 IESNC 0 R/W 0 IECTL 0 R/W SIENR2 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupts in the servo section. It is initialized to H'FC by a reset, stand-by or module stop. Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 1⎯Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Enable Bit (IESNC) Bit 1 IESNC 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt (interrupt to the vertical sync signal) by IRRSNC (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRSNC Bit 0⎯CTL Interrupt Enable Bit (IECTL) Bit 0 IECTL 0 1 Description Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCTL (Initial value) Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCTL Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 747 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Servo Interrupt Request Register 1 (SIRQR1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRRDRM3 IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1 IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. SIRQR1 is an 8-bit read/write register that indicates interrupt request in the servo section. If the interrupt request has occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bit 7⎯Drum Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM3) Bit 7 IRRDRM3 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the drum phase error detector. Interrupt requested from the drum phase error detector. (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (Lock Detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM2) Bit 6 IRRDRM2 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (lock detection). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection). Bit 5⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM1) Bit 5 IRRDRM1 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 748 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP3) Bit 4 IRRCAP3 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the capstan phase error detector. Interrupt requested from the capstan phase error detector. (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed Error Detector (Lock Detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP2) Bit 3 IRRCAP2 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (lock detection). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection). Bit 2⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP1) Bit 2 IRRCAP1 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch). Bit 1⎯HSW Timing Generator (Counter Clear, Capture) Interrupt Permission Bit (IRRHSW2) Bit 1 IRRHSW2 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 749 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 26 Servo Circuits Bit 0⎯HSW Timing Generator (OVW, Matching, STRIG) Interrupt Permission Bit (IRRHSW1) Bit 0 IRRHSW1 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG). (Initial value) Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG). Servo Interrupt Request Register 2 (SIRQR2) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 — 1 — 2 — 1 — 1 IRRSNC 0 R/(W)* 0 IRRCTL 0 R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. SIRQR2 is an 8-bit read/write register that indicates interrupt request in the servo section. If the interrupt request has occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1. Writing 0 after reading 1 is allowed; no other writing is allowed. It is initialized to H'FC by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 1⎯Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRSNC) Bit 1 IRRSNC 0 1 Description No interrupt request from the sync signal detector (VD, noise) Interrupt requested from the sync signal detector (VD, noise) (Initial value) Bit 0⎯CTL Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCTL) Bit 0 IRRCTL 0 1 Description No interrupt request from CTL Interrupt requested from CTL (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 750 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.1 Overview The sync separator separates the horizontal sync signal and vertical sync signal from the composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal and sends the sync signals to the on screen display (OSD) module and data slicer. The sync separator has an automatic frequency controller (AFC), which generates a reference clock at 576 or 448 times the horizontal sync signal frequency. This reference clock is used to separate the horizontal sync signal from the composite video signal. The AFC receives the Hsync signal processed by the H complement and mask counter. The H complement and mask counter removes noise and equalizing pulses from the Hsync signal and interpolates necessary pulses for the Hsync signal. The sync separator separates the vertical sync signal from the composite video signal through the counting operation of the V complement and mask counter. The V complement and mask counter increments the count at double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal to mask the Vsync noise and to generate complementary pulses for the Vsync signal according to the register settings. Through the above functions, the sync signals can be separated correctly against noise input to the CVin2 terminal, motor skew due to VCR tape playback or special-function playback, and abnormal noise in a weak field. In addition, the sync separator provides the field detection function necessary for the data slicer, and the noise detection function necessary for tuner detection (detecting the tuning status). As the AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock of the OSD, switching the reference clock can change the dot width of the display. When the text display mode of the OSD is used, refer to section 27.3.6, Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC). In addition to the CVin2 video signal, the following signals can be selected as sources of sync separation through the external circuit and register settings: the Csync composite sync signal input from the Csync/Hsync terminal, and the separate Vsync and Hsync signals input from the VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals, respectively. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 751 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.1.1 Features • Horizontal sync signal separation: Stable separation is provided by the AFC, and complement and mask functions are available. • AFC reference clock frequency: 576 or 448 times the frequency of the horizontal sync signal can be selected. • Vertical sync signal separation: The masking and complement functions are available through the V complement and mask counter. • The source for sync separation can be selected from three signals (five methods). 1. Composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal 2. Csync signal input from the Csync/Hsync terminal 3. Vsync and Hsync signals that are input from the VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals, respectively • Csync separation comparator: The slice level can be selected by register settings. • Polarity of the Csync/Hsync terminal input: The signal detection polarity can be selected. • Polarity of the VLPF/Vsync terminal input: The signal detection polarity can be selected. • Noise detection: Noise during one frame is counted and a noise detection interrupt is generated when the count reaches the specified value. • Noise detection counter: The count is readable and is reset every other vertical sync signal input. • Field detection: The odd or even field for interlace scanning is distinguished. • Reference Hsync signal for the AFC: The reference Hsync signal can be selected. • V complement and mask counter: The source for the counter clock (twice the frequency of the horizontal sync signal) can be selected. • Internal Csync generator: The clock source for the internal Csync generator can be selected. 27.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 27.1 shows the block diagram of the sync separator. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 752 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 : Register Separation method Hvth register Noise detection C R Noise counter Noise detection interrupt Hsync Switching φ/2 C Noise detection window 1/2 Noise detection level register R OSCH SEPH φ/2 H complement and mask counter C (complement and mask functions) U/D Digital H separation counter Slicing voltage control CVin2 Csync separation comparator Csync/Hsync Polarity switching Masking Switching Vsync φ/2 C Switching Vvth register (0) VCKSL I/O switching Digital LPF ON Complement and mask setting register OSC2H Complement enable bit U/D (1) SEPV Vsync/VLPF Polarity switching Digital V separation counter R R V complement and mask counter (complement and C mask functions) C Switching Complement and mask Si/TEXT AFCV V complement enabled: Complemented and masked V V complement disabled: Masked V External Vsync (data slicer) External Vsync interrupt Si/TEXT inV (TE) Switching (Si) inFLD HHK (Self-running) (TE) Switching (Si) When the data slicer is used and the text display mode is selected in the OSD, the AFC clock is selected; the clock is also used as the dot clock. HCKSEL Reset for V OSDV (OSD) Si = AFCV TEXT = inV TV format 4/2fsc (0) External Hsync Internally generated Hsync Switching Field detection window Field detection (TE) Switching (Si) AFCFLD Si/TEXT OSDFLD Switching (1) AFC Internal Csync generator Field signal (OSD) Si = AFCFLD TEXT = inFLD Reset for H Si/TEXT Switching Reference Hsync Frequency-dividing counter AFC2H 2 × fh in H (Selfrunning) Field detection window register AFCH Field signal (data slicer) External Hsync (data slicer) (Si) (TE) HSEL Internally generated sync signal (OSD) Clock run-in period and start bit period Detection window signals for data slicer (data slicer) (0) Figure 27.1 Sync Separator Block Diagram AFC error output circuit (comparator) Switching (1) HCKSEL AFC oscillator AFCH When the data slicer is not used and the text display mode is selected in the OSD, the self-running signal is selected. OSDH (OSD) AFCosc AFCpc Reference clock Selecting 576 or 448 as the division ratio 4/2fsc (0) Switching (1) Dot clock (OSD) AFCLPF Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 753 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 DOTCKSL Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 27.1 shows the pin configuration of the sync separator. Table 27.1 Sync Separator Pin Configuration Name Sync signal input/output Abbrev. Csync/Hsync VLPF/Vsync I/O Input/output Input Function Composite sync signal input/output or horizontal sync signal input Pin for connecting external LPF for vertical sync signal or input pin for vertical sync signal AFC oscillation signal AFC by-pass capacitor connecting pin External LPF connecting pin for AFC Composite video signal input (2 Vpp, with a sync tip clamp circuit) AFC oscillation signals LPF for AFC Composite video signal AFCosc AFCpc AFCLPF CVin2 Input/output Input/output Input/output Input 27.1.4 Register Configuration Table 27.2 shows the sync separator registers. Table 27.2 Sync Separator Registers Name Sync separation input mode register Sync separation control register Sync separation AFC control register Horizontal sync signal threshold register Vertical sync signal threshold register Field detection window register H complement and mask register Noise detection counter Noise detection level register Data slicer detection window register Internal sync signal frequency register Abbrev. SEPIMR SEPCR SEPACR HVTHR VVTHR FWIDR HCMMR NDETC NDETR DDETWR INFRQR R/W R/W R/(W)* 2 R/(W)* 2 Size Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Word Byte Byte Byte Byte Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'10 H'E0 H'00 H'F0 H'0000 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'10 Address* H'D240 H'D241 H'D242 H'D243 H'D244 H'D245 H'D246 H'D248 H'D248 H'D249 H'D24A 1 W W W W R W W W Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 754 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2 27.2.1 Register Description Sync Separation Input Mode Register (SEPIMR) Bit : 5 6 7 CCMPV1 CCMPV0 COMPSL 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 4 SYNCT 0 R/W 3 VSEL 0 R/W 2 DLPFON 0 R/W 1 — 0 — 0 FRQSEL 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : The SEPIMR is an 8-bit read/write register for selecting the source signals for sync separation. In addition to the internal switches controlled by this register setting, the external circuits are used to select the sources of the Hsync and Vsync signals to be supplied to the digital H separation counter and the digital V separation counter, respectively. Figure 27.2 and table 27.3 show the source signal selection. The SEPIMR also specifies the slicing voltage of the Csync separation comparator, switches the polarity of the signals input from the Csync/Hsync and VLPF/Vsync terminals, turns on or off the digital LPF, and switches the reference clock frequency for the AFC. For details on the source signals for sync separation, refer to section 27.3.1, Selecting Source Signals for Sync Separation. When reset, the SEPIMR is initialized to H'00. Bits other than bit 5 (CCMPSL) are cleared to 0 in module stop, sleep, standby, watch, subactive, and subsleep modes. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 755 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + CCMPSL CVin CVin2 Sync tip clamp Register control 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch CCMPV0, 1 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH Internal SW5 Csync External SW1 I/O switch External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b DLPFON I/O switch Polarity switch Vsync Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync External SW4 VLPF Vsync a 1 VLPF/Vsync Polarity switch Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit 0 b VSEL Figure 27.2 Diagram of the Circuit for Selecting the Source Signals for Sync Separation Table 27.3 Source Signals for Sync Separation Input Source CVin2 input Vsync Detector Vsync Schmitt Csync Schmitt Csync input Vsync Schmitt Csync Schmitt Hsync/ Vsync input Vsync Schmitt External SW1 Off Off On On Off External SW2 On Off On Off Off External SW3 a Open a a b External SW4 a CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 0 VSEL (Internal SW6) 0 1 0 1 0 Csync/ Hsync Terminal Output Output Input Input Input Input fixed 0 to OVss a 1 Input fixed 1 to OVss b 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 756 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bits 7 and 6⎯Csync Separation Comparator Slicing Voltage Select (CCMPV1 and CCMPV0): Select the slicing voltage for the Csync separation comparator. The value set by these bits is the slicing level against the sync tip level (–40 IRE). Note that this slicing level is used only for reference. Bit 7 CCMPV1 0 1 Bit 6 CCMPV0 0 1 0 1 Description The Csync slicing level is 10 IRE The Csync slicing level is 5 IRE The Csync slicing level is 15 IRE The Csync slicing level is 20 IRE (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Csync Separation Comparator Input Select (CCMPSL): Controls internal switch SW5 to select whether to use the Csync separation comparator input or Csync Schmitt input. Writing 0 to this bit selects the Csync separation comparator input, and writing 1 selects the Csync Schmitt input. This bit also controls the input/output status of the Csync/Hsync terminal. Writing 0 to this bit makes the Csync/Hsync an output terminal, and writing 1 makes it an input terminal. This bit is cleared to 0 only at reset. Note that the Csync/Hsync terminal enters a high-impedance state at reset and in sleep, subactive, subsleep, watch, standby, and module stop modes*. Bit 5 CCMPSL 0 1 Description The Csync separation comparator input is selected The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an output terminal The Csync Schmitt input is selected The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an input terminal (Initial value) Note: * When this bit is set to 1, it must be set to 1 by the instruction following the module stop release instruction in the interrupt-prohibited state. ORC #B'10000000, CCR ← Interrupt prohibited ← Module stop release ← Sets CCMPSL bit to 1 ← Interrupt permitted BCLR.B #1, @MSTPCRH BSET.B #5, @SEPIMR ANDC #B'01111111, CCR Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 757 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bit 4⎯Sync Signal Polarity Select (SYNCT): This bit selects the polarity of the Csync/Hsync and VLPF/Vsync input signals. When using the CVin2 input signal, be sure to write 0 to this bit to select the positive polarity. Bit 4 SYNCT 0 (Initial value) 1 Description Bit 3⎯Vsync Input Signal Select (VSEL): Controls internal switch SW6 to select the Vsync input signal. Writing 0 to this bit selects the Vsync Schmitt input, and writing 0 selects the Csync Schmitt input. Bit 3 VSEL 0 1 Description Vsync Schmitt input Csync Schmitt input (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Digital LPF Control (DLPFON): Specifies the digital LPF function, which masks noise components of the Vsync signal in a weak field. The digital LPF logically ORs the Csync signal (Vsync signal) and the SEPH signal that is separated by the digital H separation counter, then inputs the ORed result to the digital V separation counter. This function prevents Vsync detection delay and Vsync detection miss in a weak field. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.5, Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR). Bit 2 DLPFON 0 1 Description The digital LPF does not operate The digital LPF operates (Initial value) Bit 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit, correct operation is not guaranteed. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 758 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bit 0⎯Reference Clock Frequency Select (FRQSEL): Selects the frequency of the reference clock for the AFC: 576 times or 448 times the horizontal sync signal frequency. To obtain a desired reference clock frequency, connect an external circuit of a value suitable for the desired frequency to the AFCosc and AFCpc terminals, and select the division ratio of the frequency dividing counter with this bit. This AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD; change this frequency to adjust the dot width of the display characters. Note that the data slicer will operate when 448 times the horizontal sync frequency is selected. For details, refer to section 27.3.6, Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC). Bit 0 FRQSEL 0 1 Description 576 times the horizontal sync frequency 448 times the horizontal sync frequency (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 759 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.2 Sync Separation Control Register (SEPCR) Bit : 7 AFCVIE 0 R/W 6 AFCVIF 0 R/(W)* 5 VCKSL 0 R/W 3 4 VCMPON HCKSEL 0 R/W 0 R/W 2 HHKON 0 R/W 1 HHKON2 0 R/W 0 FLD 0 R Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The SEPCR is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the external Vsync interrupt, enabling or disabling the V complement function, selecting the clock source for the V complement and mask counter, selecting the clock source for the internal Csync generator, and indicating the field detected by the AFC. The SEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode. Bit 7⎯External Vsync Interrupt Enable (AFCVIE): Enables or disables the external Vsync interrupt to be requested when the AFCVIF is set to 1. Bit 7 AFCVIE 0 1 Description The external Vsync interrupt is disabled The external Vsync interrupt is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6⎯External Vsync Interrupt Flag (AFCVIF): This flag is set to 1 when the V complement and mask counter detects the external Vsync signal (the AFCV signal). For the Vsync interrupt generated in the OSD, refer to section 29, On-Screen Display (OSD). Bit 6 AFCVIF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 1 is read, then 0 is written [Setting condition] The V complement and mask counter detects the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal) (Initial value) Bit 5⎯V Complement and Mask Counter Clock Source Select (VCKSL): Selects the clock source for the V complement and mask counter: double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal for the AFC (AFCH signal) or that for the H complement and mask counter (OSCH signal). When the text display mode is selected for the OSD and internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC by setting the HSEL bit (bit 5) of the SEPACR, setting this Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 760 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer VCKSL bit to 1 enables the external Vsync signal to be detected irrespectively of the text display mode operation. Bit 5 VCKSL 0 1 Description Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal) for the AFC (Initial value) Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (OSCH signal) for the H complement and mask counter Bit 4⎯V Complement Function Control (VCMPON): Enables or disables the V complement function of the V complement and mask counter. The V complement function prevents the Vsync detection being delayed and missed in a weak field. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.5, Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR). Bit 4 VCMPON 0 1 Description The V complement function is disabled The V complement function is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3⎯Internal Csync Generator Clock Source Select (HCKSEL): Selects the clock source for the internal Csync generator: the 4/2 fsc clock or the AFC reference clock. When the text display mode is selected for the OSD and the external Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC, set this HCKSEL bit to 1 to generate the internal Csync signal from the AFC reference clock. In this case, however, the Hsync and Vsync signals must be dedicated separation inputs, with both signals having equal cycles and pulse widths. This bit must be cleared to 0 when bit 1 (DOTCKSL) of SEPACR is set to 1. Bit 3 HCKSEL 0 1 Description 4/2 fsc clock AFC reference clock (Initial value) Bit 2⎯HHK Forcibly Turned On (HHKON): Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK)* function when the H complement and mask counter interpolates complementary pulses three successive times. When the HVTHR is set within the range from 2.35 μs to 4.7 μs to remove equalizing pulses by using the digital H separation counter, the HHK function prevents Hsync- Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 761 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Vsync phase-difference errors during the V blanking period. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.4, Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR). Note: * HHK: Half Hsync killer Bit 2 HHKON 0 1 Description The HHK is not operated when complementary pulses are interpolated three successive times (Initial value) The HHK is forcibly operated when complementary pulses are interpolated three successive times Bit 1⎯HHK Forcibly Turned On 2 (HHKON2): Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK) during the V blanking period. Thus the HHK function can be forcibly operated after an interpolation operation even when the Hsync signal is not input. When the HVTHR is set within the range from 2.35 µs to 4.7 µs to remove equalizing pulses by using the digital H separation counter, this is an effective countermeasure against erroneous field or line detection that occurs when there is no Hsync signal input in the case of a weak electric field, etc., or when noise is superimposed. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.4, Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR). Bit 1 HHKON2 0 1 Description The HHK is not forcibly operated during the V blanking period The HHK is forcibly operated during the V blanking period (Initial value) Bit 0⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates the field status determined by the status of the field detection window signal generated by the AFC when the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal) rises. This flag is invalid when the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the AFC reference Hsync signal. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR). Bit 0 FLD 0 1 Description Even field Odd field (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 762 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.3 Sync Separation AFC Control Register (SEPACR) Bit : 7 NDETIE 0 R/W 6 NDETIF 0 R/(W)* 5 HSEL 0 R/W 4 — 1 — 3 — 0 — 2 ARST 0 R/W 1 0 DOTCKSL DSL32B 0 R/W 0 R/W Initial value : R/W : Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. The SEPACR is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the AFC. The AFC generates a reference clock of 576 or 448 times the frequency of the horizontal sync signal. From this reference clock, several signals such as the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal), clock run-in detection window signal, or start bit detection window signal are generated. The reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD. The AFC reference Hsync signal can be switched between the external Hsync signal and the internally generated Hsync signal. In addition, the SEPACR has a function for controlling the noise detection interrupt and enabling or disabling the AFC reset function. The SEPACR is initialized to H'10 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. Bit 7⎯Noise Detection Interrupt Enable (NDETIE): Enables or disables the noise detection interrupt to be requested when the NDETIF is set to 1. Bit 7 NDETIF 0 1 Description The noise detection interrupt is disabled The noise detection interrupt is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Noise Detection Interrupt Flag (NDETIF): This flag is set to 1 when the noise detection counter value matches the noise detection level register value. Bit 6 NDETIF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] 1 is read, then 0 is written [Setting condition] The noise detection counter value matches the noise detection level register value (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 763 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bit 5⎯Reference Hsync Signal Select (HSEL): Selects the reference Hsync signal for the AFC: the external Hsync signal or the internally generated Hsync signal. When using the data slicer, select the external Hsync signal. When not using the data slicer but using the text display mode for the OSD, select the internally generated Hsync signal. Before this bit setting is modified, the OSD display should be turned off. Bit 5 HSEL 0 1 Description The external Hsync signal is selected The internally generated Hsync signal is selected (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Blank Bit: Cannot be read or modified. Bit 3⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit, correct operation is not guaranteed. Bit 2⎯AFC Reset Control (ARST): Enables or disables the AFC reset function. When a VCR motor skew occurs or the channel is switched, and if the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) output from the AFC differs in phase from the reference Hsync signal input to the AFC, the AFC is reset to eliminate the phase difference and to lock the AFCH signal phase to that of the reference signal. Bit 2 ARST 0 1 Description The reset function is disabled The reset function is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1⎯DOTCKSL Bit (DOTCKSL): Selects the dot-clock source of the OSD. When this bit is reset to 0, the reference clock of the AFC circuit is selected. When this bit is set to 1, the 4/2fsc clock that is input from 4/2fsc in pin is selected. When this bit is set to 1, use the OSD in text display mode. When this bit is set to 1 in superimposed mode or when HCKSEL in SEPCR is set to 1, characters will flicker. When a 4fsc clock is input while this bit is set to 1, the OSD display becomes smaller in the horizontal derection; be sure to input a 2fsc clock. To operate the data slicer in text display mode, set this bit to 1. Bit 1 DOTCKSL 0 1 Description The reference clock of the AFC circuit is selected for the dot clock The 4/2fsc clock is selected for the dot clock (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 764 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bit 0⎯DSL32B Bit (DSL32B): Sets 16-bit or 32-bit mode slice operation of the data slicer. For details, see section 28.4, 32-bit Slice Operation. Bit 0 DSL32B 0 1 Description 16-bit mode is set for the slice operation 32-bit mode is set for the slice operation (Initial value) 27.2.4 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 HVTH4 0 W 3 HVTH3 0 W 2 HVTH2 0 W 1 HVTH1 0 W 0 HVTH0 0 W Initial value : R/W : The HVTHR is a 5-bit write-only register for specifying the threshold value for the digital H separation counter; this value is used to generate the SEPH signal from the Csync signal. The SEPH signal is set to 1 when the digital H separation counter value matches the HVTHR value while the Csync is high, and is reset to 0 when the digital H separation counter value becomes 00 while the Csync is low. The HVTHR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. Figures 27.3 and 27.4 show the HVTH value and the SEPH signal generation timing. Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH About 1.6 μs to 2.0 μs Figure 27.3 HVTH Value and SEPH Generation Timing when Equalizing Pulses Are Detected Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 765 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH About 3.2 μs to 3.6 μs Figure 27.4 HVTH Value and SEPH Generation Timing when Equalizing Pulses Are Not Detected The following shows examples of HVTHR settings. Condition: (HVTHR – 1) × (2/OSC) > 1.6 μs or 3.2 μs System clock OSC = 10 MHz 2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs) Example 1: To detect equalizing pulses Hsync detection threshold value: 1.6 μs 1.6 μs / 0.2 μs = 8 HVTHR value = H'8 (8) Example 2: To not detect equalizing pulses Hsync detection threshold value: 3.2 μs 3.2 μs / 0.2 μs = 16 HVTHR value = H'10 (16) In general, to detect Hsync pulses continuously, set the HVTH value so that 2.35-μs equalizing pulses can be detected. However, if an equalizing pulse at an Hsync pulse position is lost in a weak field, a Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error will occur, and the field will not be detected correctly. In such a weak field, this error can be prevented by eliminating 2.35-μs equalizing pulses. Figure 27.5 shows the timing when a phase-difference error occurs. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 766 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Pulse lost Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH HC H complement and mask counter HHK OSCH Complement Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error Complement Figure 27.5 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error when Equalizing Pulse Lost at Hsync Pulse Position Note: When 2.35-μs equalizing pulses are eliminated, the complement function operates for the eliminated period. Accordingly, the rising edge of the Vsync signal for the even field is detected as an Hsync pulse. Therefore, to not generate an Hsync pulse at this position, set the HHKON bit (bit 2) of the SEPCR to 1 so that the HHK function is forcibly operated when complementary pulses are inserted three successive times. Figures 27.6 and 27.7 show this timing. Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH HC H complement and mask counter HHK OSCH Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment Comple- Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment ment Phase-difference error Figure 27.6 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error when Equalizing Pulse Not Detected Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 767 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH HC H complement and mask counter HHK Forcible HHK operation OSCH Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment Forcible HHK operation Figure 27.7 Timing of HHK Operation when Complementary Pulses Inserted Three Successive Times while HHKON = 1 Note: When 2.35-µs equalizing pulses are eliminated, the complement function operates for the eliminated period. Accordingly, when there is no Hsync signal input in the case of a weak electric field, etc., and noise is superimposed, the noise is detected as an Hsync pulse. Therefore, in order not to generate an Hsync pulse in this case, set the HHKON2 bit (bit 1) of the SEPCR register to 1. Figures 27.8 and 27.9 show this timing. Pulse lost, noise Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH H complement and mask counter HHK OSCH Comple- Complement ment Comple- Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment ment Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error Figure 27.8 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error Due to Noise Occurrence after Equalizing Pulse Is Lost at Hsync Pulse Position Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 768 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Pulse lost, noise Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH H complement and mask counter HHK Forcible HHK operation OSCH Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment Comple- Comple- Complement ment ment Figure 27.9 Timing of Forcible HHK Operation in V Blanking Period when Equalizing Pulse Is Not Detected 27.2.5 Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 VVTH7 0 W 6 VVTH6 0 W 5 VVTH5 0 W 4 VVTH4 0 W 3 VVTH3 0 W 2 VVTH2 0 W 1 VVTH1 0 W 0 VVTH0 0 W The VVTHR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the threshold value for the digital V separation counter; this value is used to generate the SEPV signal from the Csync signal. The SEPV signal is set to 1 when the digital V separation counter value matches the VVTHR value while the Csync is high, and reset to 0 when the digital V separation counter value becomes 00 while the Csync is low. Set the VVTHR value so that the SEPV signal goes high 1/2H or more after the Vsync start point. The VVTHR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. Figure 27.10 shows the VVTHR value and the SEPV signal generation timing. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 769 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 1/2 H or more H Csync VVTH Digital V separation counter SEPV Figure 27.10 VVTH Value and SEPV Generation Timing The following shows an example of VVTHR settings. Condition: (VVTHR – 1) × (2/OSC) > (Hsync period / 2 – 4.7 μs) × 1.5 = 41 μs System clock OSC = 10 MHz 2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs) Example 1: To detect 41-μs pulses Vsync detection threshold value: 41 μs 41 μs / 0.2 μs = 205 HVTHR value = H'CE (206) The noise component of the Csync signal in a weak field is usually large, and will cause the Vsync detection delay or miss. In such a case, set the DLPFON (bit 2) of the SEPIMR to 1; the SEPH signal detected by the digital H separation counter is logically ORed with the Csync signal (Vsync), then the result is input to the digital V separation counter. This will prevent the Vsync detection delay or miss in a weak field. Figure 27.11 shows this timing. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 770 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Csync + SEPH HVTH Digital H separation counter SEPH VVTH Digital V separation counter SEPV Figure 27.11 VVTH Value and SEPV Generation Timing when Digital LPF Is Enabled Alternatively, set the VCMPON (bit 4) of the SEPCR to 1 when the Vsync detection delay or miss may occur in a weak field; the external Vsync detection signal (AFCV signal) will be generated by the V complement and mask counter. Figure 27.12 shows this timing. Csync VVTH Digital H separation counter SEPV 1/2 AFCH (V sampling clock) V complement and mask counter 521 522 523 524 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AFCV Figure 27.12 AFCV Generation Timing when V Complement Function Is Enabled (for NTSC) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 771 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.6 Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR) Bit : 7 — 1 — 6 — 1 — 5 — 1 — 4 — 1 — 3 FWID3 0 W 2 FWID2 0 W 1 FWID1 0 W 0 FWID0 0 W Initial value : R/W : The FWIDR is a 4-bit write-only register for specifying the field detection window timing in units of 16 × fh (fh: horizontal sync signal frequency). The field detection window signal is reset to 0 when the AFC dividing counter value matches the FWIDR value, and the signal is again set to 1 when 1/2 the Hsync signal period has passed. At a rising edge of the AFCV signal while the field detection window signal is 1, the field is determined as an odd one, and the field detection flag (FLD) is set to 1. At a rising edge of the AFCV signal while the field detection window signal is 0, the field is determined as an even one, and the FLD is cleared to 0. The value set to the FWIDR depends on the setting of the V complement function control (VCMPON) bit (bit 4) of the SEPCR. When the VCMPON is cleared to 0, that is, when the V complement function is not operating, the FWIDR must be set so that the rising edge of the SEPV signal, which is generated when the V separation counter value reaches the specified threshold value, comes to the center of the field detection window period. When the VCMPON is set to 1, that is, when the V complement function is operating, the FWIDR must be set so that the dividing counter overflow timing comes to the center of the field detection window period. The FWIDR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. (1) Bit 0 of SEPCR Register Bit 0⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates the field determined by the status of the field detection window signal generated by the AFC when the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal) rises. This flag is invalid when the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the AFC reference Hsync signal. For the timing, refer to figure 27.13 Field Detection Timing. Bit 0 FLD 0 1 Description Even field Odd field (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 772 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Csync Digital V separation counter SEPV AFC frequencydividing counter When V complement function is not operating: Field detection window signal AFCV TF* H/2 μs FLD When V complement function is operating: Field detection window signal V complement and mask counter clock AFCV TF* FLD Odd field Odd field timing Even field timing Even field Note: * TF: Field detection window register value Figure 27.13 Field Detection Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 773 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.7 H Complement and Mask Timing Register (HCMMR) Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HC8 HC7 HC6 HC5 HC4 HC3 HC2 HC1 HC0 HM6 HM5 HM4 HM3 HM2 HM1 HM0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Initial value : R/W : The HCMMR is a 16-bit write-only register for specifying the timing (Th: Hsync frequency) for generating a complementary pulse when a pulse in the Hsync signal is lost, and the timing (Tm and Tm2) for clearing the HHK (masking period). The HC8 to HC0 bits specify the timing for generating a complementary pulse; if no Hsync pulse is input within this specified time, a complementary pulse is generated from the H complement and mask counter. When a supplementary pulse is generated, the HHK function, provided for resetting the H supplement mask counter, remains cleared, and the H supplement mask counter is synchronized with the Hsync signal at the next Hsync pulse input. The HHK2 operation for generating the Hsync signal (OSCH) for the AFC circuit is performed when a supplementary pulse is generated. The HM6 to HM0 bits specify the timing for clearing the HHK function. Set the HHK clearing timing to about 85% of the Hsync period starting from the SEPH rising edge to eliminate equalizing pulses and copy-guard signals. Figure 27.14 shows the complement and mask timing. The HHK signal is set to 1 about 5 μs after the SEPH rising edge, and the HHK2 signal is set to 1 immediately after the H complement and mask counter is reset. The HHK signal is also used for the noise detection window. For details on the noise detection, refer to section 27.2.8, Noise Detection Counter (NDETC) and section 27.2.9, Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR). The HCMMR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 774 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Th Noise Csync HVTH Digital H separation counter Pulse lost SEPH HC HM H complement and mask counter HHK (for counter reset) Killer Tm Killer Killer Killer 5 μs HHK2 (for OSCH generation) Killer Killer Killer Killer Tm2 OSCH Complementary pulse Figure 27.14 Complement and Mask Timing of the H Complement and Mask Counter Bits 15 to 7⎯H Complementary Pulse Setting (HC8 to HC0): Specify the timing for generating a complementary pulse when an Hsync pulse is lost. If no Hsync pulse is input within the specified time, a complementary pulse is generated from the H complement and mask counter and interpolated to the OSCH signal. The following shows examples of HC8 to HC0 settings. Condition: (HC + 1) × (2/OSC) > 63.5 μs (PAL: 64 μs) System clock OSC = 10 MHz 2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs) Example 1: To set the timing for NTSC NTSC: 63.5 μs 63.5 μs / 0.2 μs = 317.5 HC8 to HC0 value = H'13E (318) Example 2: To set the timing for PAL PAL: 64 μs 64 μs / 0.2 μs = 320 HC8 to HC0 value = H'141 (321) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 775 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bits 6 to 0⎯HHK Period Setting (HM6 to HM0): Specify the timing for clearing the HHK (masking period) for the Hsync signal. The H complement and mask counter starts counting at a rising edge of the SEPH signal; the HHK period specified by these bits starts at this timing. This value is also used as the timing for resetting the noise detection window signal. Note that the setting precision is the upper six bits of the H complement and mask counter: the lower two bits of the counter are ignored. The following shows an example of HM6 to HM0 settings. Condition: (HM + 1) × (8/OSC) > 54 μs (about 85% of the Hsync period) System clock OSC = 10 MHz 8/OSC: 1.25 MHz (0.8 μs) To set the timing to 54 μs 54 μs / 0.8 μs = 67.5 HM6 to HM0 value = H'44 (67) Example: 27.2.8 Noise Detection Counter (NDETC) Bit : 7 NC7 0 R 6 NC6 0 R 5 NC5 0 R 4 NC4 0 R 3 NC3 0 R 2 NC2 0 R 1 NC1 0 R 0 NC0 0 R Initial value : R/W : The NDETC is a 10-bit read-only counter of which the upper eight bits can be read. This counter counts the number of Hsync cycles in which an Hsync pulse (noise H) is input while the noise detection window signal is 1, and counts the number of Hsync cycles in which no Hsync pulse is input while the noise detection window signal is 0. When this counter value matches the noise detection level, the noise detection interrupt request flag is set. The counter is reset at every other vertical sync signal (AFCV signal) input; that is, the noise status for one field can be monitored. The NDETC value can be read by the CPU; the noise status can be monitored by the read value. The NDETC is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. The NDETC is assigned to the same address as the NDETR. Figure 27.15 shows the timing for noise detection. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 776 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.9 Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR) Bit : 7 NR7 0 W 6 NR6 0 W 5 NR5 0 W 4 NR4 0 W 3 NR3 0 W 2 NR2 0 W 1 NR1 0 W 0 NR0 0 W Initial value : R/W : The NDETR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the noise detection level. The set value must be 1/4 of the actual noise detection level. The noise detection window signal is set to 1 at a falling edge of the OSCH signal, and reset to 0 after the time specified by the HHK period setting bits has passed. The OSCH signal falls about 5 μs after a rising edge of the SEPH signal. When the noise detection counter value matches the specified noise detection level, the noise detection interrupt request flag is set to 1. The NDETR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. The NDETR is assigned to the same address as the NDETC. Figure 27.15 shows the timing for noise detection. Pulse lost Noise Csync SEPH HM H complement and mask counter Noise detection window OSCH Noise Noise Complement NDETR NDETC AFCV NDETIF Noise Noise Complement Pulse Noise lost Noise counter cleared Cleared to 0 by CPU Figure 27.15 Noise Detection Window Setting and Noise Counting Timing Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 777 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.2.10 Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 SRWDE1 SRWDE0 SRWDS1 SRWDS0 CRWDE1 CRWDE0 CRWDS1 CRWDS0 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W The DDETWR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the timing of the clock run-in detection window signal and start bit detection window signal supplied to the data slicer. Figure 27.16 shows the timing of the signals. The DDETWR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. These detection window signals can be monitored through terminals. For details, refer to section 29.7.3, Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT). 32 × fh = 2 μs 32 × fh = 2 μs C.video Clock run-in detection window signal 10.5 μs ±0.5 μs 23.5 μs ±0.5 μs Start bit detection window signal 23.5 μs 29.5 μs ±0.5 μs ±0.5 μs Figure 27.16 Timing for Generating Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal and Start Bit Detection Window Signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 778 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bits 7 and 6⎯Start Bit Detection Window Signal Falling Timing Setting (SRWDE1, SRWDE0): Specify the falling timing (end timing) of the start bit detection window signal. Bit 7 SRWDE1 0 Bit 6 SRWDE0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The detection ends about 29.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value) The detection ends about 29.0 μs after the slicer start point The detection ends about 30.0 μs after the slicer start point This setting must not be used Bits 5 and 4⎯Start Bit Detection Window Signal Rising Timing Setting (SRWDS1, SRWDS0): Specify the rising timing (start timing) of the start bit detection window signal. Bit 5 SRWDS1 0 Bit 4 SRWDS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The detection starts about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value) The detection starts about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point The detection starts about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point This setting must not be used Bits 3 and 2⎯Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal Falling Timing Setting (CRWDE1, CRWDE0): Specify the falling timing (end timing) of the clock run-in detection window signal. Bit 3 CRWDE1 0 Bit 2 CRWDE0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The detection ends about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value) The detection ends about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point The detection ends about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point This setting must not be used Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 779 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal Rising Timing Setting (CRWDS1, CRWDS0): Specify the rising timing (start timing) of the clock run-in detection window signal. Bit 1 CRWDS1 0 Bit 0 CRWDS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The detection starts about 10.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value) The detection starts about 10.0 μs after the slicer start point The detection starts about 11.0 μs after the slicer start point This setting must not be used 27.2.11 Internal Sync Frequency Register (INFRQR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 VFS2 0 W 6 VFS1 0 W 5 HFS 0 W 4 — 1 — 3 — 0 — 2 — 0 — 1 — 0 — 0 — 0 — The INFRQR is an 8-bit write-only register for modifying the internally generated Hsync and Vsync frequency to reduce the color-bleeding or jitter of OSD in PAL, MPAL, or NPAL mode or when the non-interlaced text display mode is selected in the OSD. The INFRQR is initialized to H'10 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. Bits 7 and 6⎯Vsync Frequency Selection (VFS2, VFS1): Select the Vsync frequency. Here, fh indicates the Hsync frequency in each TV format. Bit 7 VFS2 0 1 Bit 6 VFS1 0 1 0 1 Description PAL fh/313 (Initial value) fh/314 fh/310 fh/312 MPAL fh/263 (Initial value) fh/266 fh/262 fh/264 NPAL fh/313 (Initial value) fh/314 fh/310 fh/312 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 780 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Bit 5⎯Hsync Frequency Selection (HFS): Selects the Hsync frequency. Here, fsc indicates the color subcarrier signal frequency in each TV format. Note that this setting is ignored when the HCKSEL bit (bit 3) of the SEPCR is set to 1 to select the AFC clock as the internal Csync generator clock source and when the FSCIN bit (bit 12) of the DFORM in the OSD is set to 1 to select the 2fsc clock. Bit 5 HFS 0 1 Description PAL fsc/283.75 (Initial value) fsc/283.5 MPAL fsc/227.25 (Initial value) fsc/227.5 NPAL fsc/229.25 (Initial value) fsc/229.5 Bit 4⎯Blank Bit: Cannot be read or modified. Bits 3 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 0. When 1 is written to these bits, correct operation is not guaranteed. 27.3 27.3.1 Operation Selecting Source Signals for Sync Separation The source for sync separation can be selected from three signals (five methods): 1. Composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal (two methods) 2. Csync signal input from the Csync/Hsync terminal (two methods) 3. Vsync and Hsync signals that are input from the VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals, respectively (one method) For the composite video signal and the Csync signal, two methods are available for processing the Vsync component. (1) Inputting the Composite Video Signal as the Source When the composite video signal is selected as the source, the Vsync component can be processed in two methods: using the Vsync Schmitt circuit or using the Csync Schmitt circuit. (a) Using the Vsync Schmitt Circuit The composite video signal input to the CVin2 terminal is selected as the source, and the Csync separation comparator separates the composite sync signal from the source signal. Of the composite sync signal, the Hsync component is input to the digital H separation counter, and the Vsync component is output from the Csync/Hsync terminal, goes through the external LPF circuit, then is input again through the Vsync/VLPF terminal and the Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 781 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Vsync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. The initial value of the SEPIMR specifies this method. Figure 27.17 shows this method. External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + Sync tip clamp Register control CCMPSL CVin2 CVin2 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH CCMPV0, 1 Csync External SW1 Internal SW5 I/O switch DLPFON External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b I/O switch Polarity switch Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync Vsync External SW4 VLPF Vsync a 1 Vsync/VLPF Polarity switch 0 b Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit VSEL Figure 27.17 Sync Source Selection when Using the CVin2 Signal and the Vsync Schmitt Circuit CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 0 VSEL (Internal SW6) 0 Csync/ Hsync Terminal I/O Output Source Signal CVin2 input Vsync Detection Vsync Schmitt External SW1 Off External SW2 On External SW3 a External SW4 a Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 782 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (b) Using the Csync Schmitt Circuit The Hsync component is processed in the same way as described in (a), but the Vsync component is processed differently; the Csync/Hsync terminal is left open and the separated Vsync component is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.18 shows this method. External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + CCMPSL CVin2 CVin2 Sync tip clamp Register control 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch CCMPV0, 1 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH Internal SW5 Csync External SW1 I/O switch DLPFON External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b I/O switch Polarity switch Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Vsync External SW4 VLPF Vsync a 1 Vsync/VLPF Polarity switch 0 b Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit VSEL Figure 27.18 Sync Source Selection when Using the CVin2 Signal and the Csync Schmitt Circuit CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 0 VSEL (Internal SW6) 1 Csync/ Hsync Terminal I/O Output Source Signal CVin2 input Vsync Detection Csync Schmitt External SW1 Off External SW2 Off External SW3 Open External SW4 Fixed to 0 or 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 783 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (2) Inputting the Csync Signal as the Source When the Csync signal is selected as the source, the Vsync component can be processed in two methods: using the Vsync Schmitt circuit or using the Csync Schmitt circuit. (a) Using the Vsync Schmitt Circuit The Csync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit (bit 4) of the SEPIMR is input to the Csync/Hsync terminal. The Hsync component is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital H separation counter; the Vsync component goes through the external LPF circuit, then is input through the Vsync/VLPF terminal and the Vsync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.19 shows this method. External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + CCMPSL CVin2 CVin2 Sync tip clamp Register control 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch CCMPV0, 1 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH Internal SW5 Csync External SW1 I/O switch DLPFON External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b I/O switch Polarity switch Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Vsync External SW4 VLPF a 1 Vsync/VLPF Polarity switch 0 Vsync b Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit VSEL Figure 27.19 Sync Source Selection when Using the Csync Signal and the Vsync Schmitt Circuit CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 1 VSEL (Internal SW6) 0 Csync/ Hsync Terminal I/O Input Source Signal Csync input Vsync Detection Vsync Schmitt External SW1 On External SW2 On External SW3 a External SW4 a Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 784 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (b) Using the Csync Schmitt Circuit The Hsync component is processed in the same way as described in (a), but the Vsync component is processed differently; the Vsync component is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.20 shows this method. External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + CCMPSL CVin2 CVin2 Sync tip clamp Register control 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH CCMPV0, 1 Csync External SW1 Internal SW5 I/O switch DLPFON External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b I/O switch Polarity switch Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync Vsync External SW4 VLPF Vsync a 1 Vsync/VLPF Polarity switch Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit 0 b VSEL Figure 27.20 Sync Source Selection when Using the Csync Signal and the Csync Schmitt Circuit CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 1 VSEL (Internal SW6) 1 Csync/ Hsync Terminal I/O Input Source Signal Csync input Vsync Detection Csync Schmitt External SW1 On External SW2 Off External SW3 a External SW4 Fixed to 0 or 1 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 785 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (3) Inputting the Hsync and Vsync Signals Separately as Sources The Hsync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit (bit 4) of the SEPIMR is input to the Csync/Hsync terminal, and is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital H separation counter; the Vsync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit is input to the Vsync/VLPF terminal, and is sent through the Vsync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.21 shows this method. External circuit Inside LSI Csync separation comparator – + CCMPSL CVin2 CVin2 Sync tip clamp Register control 0 Hsync Reference voltage switch 1 Digital H separation counter SEPH CCMPV0, 1 Csync External SW1 Internal SW5 I/O switch DLPFON External SW2 Csync/Hsync a b I/O switch Polarity switch Csync polarity Schmitt circuit SYNCT Internal SW6 Vsync Digital V separation counter SEPV External SW3 Hsync External SW4 VLPF Vsync a 1 Vsync/VLPF Polarity switch Vsync polarity Schmitt circuit 0 b VSEL Figure 27.21 Sync Source Selection when Using the Hsync and Vsync Signals Separately Csync/ Hsync Termina l I/O Input Source Signal Vsync Detection External SW1 Off External SW2 Off External SW3 b External SW4 b CCMPSL (Internal SW5) 1 VSEL (Internal SW6) 0 Hsync and Vsync Vsync Schmitt input Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 786 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.3.2 Vsync Separation The Hsync separator separates the Vsync signal from the Csync signal by using the digital V separation counter, which is an 8-bit up-/down-counter, and the VVTHR register, which holds the threshold value. The digital V separation counter increments the count when the Csync signal is high, and decrements the count when the Csync is low. When the count reaches the VVTHR value while the count is incremented, the SEPV signal is set to 1 and the counter stops until the Csync signal goes low. When the Csync signal goes low, the counter starts to decrement the count. When the count reaches H'00, the SEPV signal is reset to 0 and the counter stops until the Csync signal goes high. Set the VVTHR value so that the SEPV signal goes high 1/2 or more after the Vsync start position to correctly separate the Vsync signal against the signal disturbance in a weak field or the motor skew during video tape playback. Refer to figure 27.10. The obtained SEPV signal is sent to the V complement and mask counter. The V complement and mask counter is reset to 0 when the SEPV signal is input, and increments the count at twice the frequency (2 × fh) of the horizontal sync signal for the Vsync signal (SEPV signal) cycle period. This counter masks the reset signal (SEPV) for about 85% (NTSC) or 72% (PAL) of the period from a reset to the next reset; even if a SEPV signal generated by noise is input to the counter during this period, the counter is not reset. If no SEPV signal is input after the mask period ends, the mask is left cleared; the next SEPV signal input resets the counter, and the counter is synchronized with the SEPV signal. When the counter is reset by the SEPV signal, the external Vsync detection signal (AFCV) is generated and the external Vsync interrupt flag is set to 1. The Vsync separation function includes the digital LPF function and the Vsync complement function, which reduce the chance of the Vsync detection being delayed or missed due to the Vsync disturbance in a weak field. (1) Digital LPF Function This function logically ORs the Csync (Vsync) signal and the SEPH signal separated by the digital H counter to mask the noise component due to loss of a Vsync pulse. The digital V separation counter increment the count when the resultant signal is input. Loss of a Vsync pulse in a weak field causes SEPV signal detection to be delayed or missed, which will result in incorrect detection of fields or lines. To enable this function, set the DLPFON bit (bit 2) of the SEPIMR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.11. (2) Vsync Complement Function This function makes the V complement and mask counter increment the count at a clock having twice the frequency (2 × fh) of the horizontal sync signal (AFCH), and generates the AFCV signal (Vsync signal) from the count if a Vsync pulse is lost. The count value is decoded in different ways depending on the TV format. The source of the clock for the V complement and mask counter can be switched between the AFC or the H complement and mask counter. This function can reduce the chance of the SEPV signal Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 787 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer detection being delayed and missed in a weak field. To enable this function, set the VCMPON bit (bit 4) of the SEPCR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.12. 27.3.3 Hsync Separation The Hsync separator separates the Hsync signal from the Csync signal by using the digital H separation counter, which is a 5-bit up-/down-counter, and the HVTHR register, which holds the threshold value. The digital H separation counter increments the count when the Csync signal is high, and decrements the count when the Csync is low. When the count reaches the HVTHR value while the count is incremented, the SEPH signal is set to 1 and the counter stops until the Csync signal goes low. When the Csync signal goes low, the counter starts to decrement the count. When the count reaches H'00, the SEPH signal is reset to 0 and the counter stops until the Csync signal goes high. Set the HVTHR value so that 2.35-μs equalizing pulses* can be detected; that is, that the Hsync pulses can be continuously detected. Refer to figure 27.3. The obtained SEPH signal is sent to the H complement and mask counter. The H complement and mask counter is reset to 0 when the SEPH signal is input, and increments the count at a frequency of φ/2 for the SEPH signal cycle period to generate the OSCH signal, HHK signal, and noise detection window signal. The HHK period is specified by the HM6 to HM0 bits of the HCMMR. Even if a SEPH signal is input to the counter during this HHK period, the SEPH signal is masked and the counter is not reset; noise pulses and equalizing pulses during the V blanking period are eliminated by this function. The H complement and mask counter has the complement function. If no SEPH signal is input during the period specified by the HC8 to HC0 bits of the HCMMR, the complement function generates a complementary pulse and inserts the pulse into the OSCH signal. In this case, the counter is reset by the complementary pulse, but no HHK signal is generated; the next SEPH signal input resets the counter, and the counter is synchronized with the SEPH signal. For the timing, refer to figure 27.14. Note: * In a weak field, equalizing pulses are not detected in some cases because the pulses have a short duration of 2.35 μs. If equalizing pulses, which are input at the same timing as the Hsync pulses, are not detected, a phase-difference error between the Hsync and Vsync occurs at a rising edge of the Vsync signal. Such an error will cause incorrect field detection in the sync separator and incorrect line detection by the OSD or data slicer. In such a weak field, adjust the HVTHR value so that equalizing pulses are not detected. Note that while equalizing pulses are not detected, complementary pulses are inserted repeatedly and an Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error occurs at a rising edge of the Vsync signal, even in a field that is not weak. To avoid this, set the HHKON bit (bit 2) or HHKON2 bit (bit 1) of the SEPCR to 1 to operate the HHK Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 788 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer function when complementary pulses are generated three successive times. For the timing, refer to figures 27.6, 27.7, 27.8, and 27.9. 27.3.4 Field Detection The sync separator detects whether the current field is an even field or an odd field from the 1/2H phase difference between the Hsync and Vsync by using the AFCV signal generated by the V complement and mask counter and the field detection window signal generated by the AFC. The timing of the field detection window signal can be adjusted by the FWIDR setting so that it is suitable for comparison with the AFCV signal. When a rising edge of the AFCV signal is detected while the field detection window signal is high, the current field is determined as an odd field; when a rising edge of the AFCV signal is detected while the field detection window signal is low, the current field is determined as an even field. The field detection status can be monitored from the CPU by reading the FLD bit (bit 0) of the SEPACR. This function will not operate when the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC, because the AFC is not synchronized with the external Hsync signal in this case. For the timing, refer to figure 27.13. 27.3.5 Noise Detection The noise detection function is necessary for tuned status detection. The sync separator detects noise by using the Csync signal and the noise detection window signal generated by the H complement and mask counter. The noise detection window signal is set to 1 at a falling edge of the OSCH signal generated by the H complement and mask counter, and reset to 0 at the HHK clearing timing specified by bits HM6 to HM0 of the HCMMR. Noise is detected by comparing the noise counter value with the noise detection level register value. The noise counter counts the number of Hsync cycles in which an Hsync signal is input (noise H) while the noise detection window signal is high and the number of Hsync cycles in which no Hsync signal is input while the noise detection window signal is low. When the counted value reaches the noise detection level, the noise detection interrupt request flag is set. The noise counter can be read from the CPU, and the noise detection status can be monitored. The noise detection counter is reset every other Vsync signal input. Accordingly, the noise input during one field can be detected. When the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC and the text display mode is used in the OSD, the noise counter reset operation can be enabled by setting the VCKSL bit (bit 5) of the SEPCR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.15. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 789 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.3.6 Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC) The AFC averages the Hsync signal fluctuation of the video signal. Figure 27.22 shows the AFC configuration. The AFC generates a reference clock having 576 or 448 times the frequency (576 × fh or 448 × fh) of the Hsync signal. From this clock, several clocks are generated, such as the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal), clock run-in detection window signal, start bit detection window signal, V complement and mask counter clock when the V complement function is selected, and the field detection window signal. The reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD; modifying the reference clock frequency can change the dot width of the character display. To change the frequency, connect a circuit having a value suitable for the desired frequency to the AFCosc and AFCpc terminals, and select the division ratio for the frequencydividing counter through the setting of the FRQSEL bit in SEPIMR. Note that the data slicer operates even when 448 × fh is selected as the reference clock. AFCLPF Low pass filter Error signal HHK AFC error output circuit (comparator) H complement and mask R counter External Hsync Reference Hsync signal Switching External Hsync AFCH Masking and complementing H Masking H Internal Csync generator Switching FSC Reference clock Signals such as dot clock HSEL HCKSEL AFCpc VCO AFCosc FrequencyR dividing counter (Divided by C 576 or 448) FRQSEL Internally generated Hsync Figure 27.22 AFC Configuration Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 790 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (1) AFC Oscillator The AFCosc terminal, which is the oscillation signal terminal of the voltage controlled oscillator (VCO), oscillates at 576 times the frequency (576 × fh) of the Hsync signal when the Hsync signal is input at a certain phase and frequency. The difference in phase or frequency is detected between the reference Hsync signal and the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) obtained by dividing the 576 × fh signal, the error signal is converted to a voltage by a low pass filter through the AFC error output circuit, and the voltage is used to control the VCO. The VCO control voltage (the AFCLPF terminal voltage) is within a range from about 1.0 V to 4.0 V. The oscillating capacitance should be set so that the AFCosc oscillating frequency becomes 576 × fh at the center (about 2.5 V) of the control voltage range. To set the oscillating frequency to 448 × fh, change the values of the external circuits connected to the AFCpc and AFCosc terminals and modify the FRQSEL bit in SEPIMR. (2) AFCLPF The AFC error output circuit detects the difference in phase or frequency between the reference Hsync signal and the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) obtained by dividing the 576 × fh or 448 × fh signal, and generates a pulse corresponding to the error. Connect a low pass filter (LPF) to the AFCLPF terminal to average these error pulses. If the cut-off frequency is too low, the oscillation stabilizing time (the pull-in time) needed to reach 576 × fh or 448 × fh becomes long when a large error is detected or after the power is turned on; a high cut-off frequency will cause jitter or an unstable display. Connect a suitable LPF by referring to the external circuit examples shown in figures 27.23 and 27.24. When the Hsync signal includes a large disturbance, for example during special playback operation, the AFC circuit may operate incorrectly. (3) Reference Hsync Signal for AFC The AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD. Accordingly, select the reference Hsync signal depending on whether the OSD operates in the super-imposed mode or text display mode. Refer to table 27.4, Reference Hsync Signal for AFC. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 791 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Table 27.4 Reference Hsync Signal for AFC AFC V Complement Reference Data Slicer OSD Field and Mask Hsync Signal Operation Operation Detection Counter HCKSEL HSEL External Hsync signal Internally generated Hsync signal External Hsync signal Operates/ Stops Stops Superimposed mode Text display mode Text display mode Text display mode Operates Twice the frequency of the AFCH Twice the frequency of the OSCH Twice the frequency of the AFCH Twice the frequency of the AFCH 0 0 VCKSL 0 DOTCKSL 0 Stops 0 1 1 0 Operates Operates 0 0 0 1 External Operates Hsync signal* Operates 1 0 0 0 Note: * In this case, the Hsync and Vsync signals must be dedicated separation inputs, with both signals having equal cycles and pulse widths. The FRQSEL bit in the SEPIMR register must be cleared to 0. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 792 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer (4) External Circuit Examples Figures 27.23 and 27.24 show external circuit examples of the AFC. AFCosc 12 pF 470 Ω 8.2 μH AFCpc 0.01 μF + Reset, active, or sleep 1/2 OVcc VCO AFCLPF 10 kΩ + 4.7 μF 1000 pF Phase error signal Note: Reference values are shown. Figure 27.23 Circuit Example for a 576 × fh Reference Clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 793 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer AFCosc 15 pF 470 Ω 15 μH AFCpc + 0.01 μF 1/2 OVcc Reset, active, or sleep VCO AFCLPF 10 kΩ + 4.7 μF 1000 pF Phase error signal Note: Reference values are shown. Figure 27.24 Circuit Example for a 448 × fh Reference Clock Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 794 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer 27.3.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Bit : Initial value : 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR is a 16-bit read/write register for controlling the module stop mode. Writing 0 to the MSTP9 bit starts the sync separator; setting the MSTP9 bit to 1 stops the sync separator at the end of a bus cycle and the module stop mode is entered. The AFC oscillator operates in reset, active, and sleep modes. Accordingly, after the reset state is cleared, the AFC oscillator operates but the AFC error output circuit (comparator) does not operate. Clear the module stop mode of the sync separator and set the sync separator registers to the desired values. The AFC error output circuit (comparator) will stop in standby, sleep, watch, subactive, subsleep, and module stop modes. When these modes are cleared, wait for the oscillation to stabilize, that is, for the AFC frequency to reach 576 × fh or 448 × fh. The registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, refer to section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. Bit 9⎯Module Stop (MSTP9): Specifies the module stop mode of the sync separator. Bit 9 MSTP9 0 1 Description Clears the module stop mode of the sync separator Specifies the module stop mode of the sync separator (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 795 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 796 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Section 28 Data Slicer 28.1 Overview The data slicer extracts signals for closed caption signal in the U.S. This function can be used to extract caption data superimposed on the vertical blanking interval of TV video signals. A high-performance internal sync separator enables reliable caption data extraction. The data slicer operates even when 448 times the horizontal sync frequency is selected for the AFC reference clock frequency. For details, refer to section 27.3.6, Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC). 28.1.1 Features • Slice lines: 4 lines* (16-bit mode) / 1 line (32-bit mode) • Slice levels: 7 levels • Sampling clock: Generated by AFC • Slice interrupt: A slice completion interrupt is generated at the end of all slices in a field • Error detection: Clock run-in, start bit, and data end Note: * The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 2 lines. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 797 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 28.1 shows the block diagram of the data slicer. Sync separator H V V Sync signal generation H complement and mask AFC H Line counter Dot clock Field determination circuit Reference clock Field Line counting OSD Slice line specification circuit CVin2 Sync tip clamp + – Slice voltage generator Clock run-in detector Clock run-in detection flag Start bit detector Start bit detection flag Data sampling clock generator Slice completion interrupt Shift register Data end flag Slice data register Figure 28.1 Data Slicer Block Diagram Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 798 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 28.1 shows the pin configuration for the data slicer. Table 28.1 Data Slicer Pin Configuration Block Sync separator Name Sync signal input/output Abbrev. Csync/Hsync VLPF/Vsync I/O Input/output Input Function Composite sync signal input/output or horizontal sync signal input Pin for connecting external LPF for vertical sync signal or input pin for vertical sync signal AFC oscillation signal AFC by-pass capacitor connecting pin External LPF connecting pin for AFC 4fsc or 2fsc input 4fsc or 2fsc output Composite video signal input (2 Vpp, with a sync tip clamp circuit) AFC oscillation AFCosc AFCpc Input/output Input/output Input/output Input Output Input LPF for AFC fsc oscillation Data slicer Composite video signal AFCLPF 4fsc/2fscin 4fsc/2fscout Cvin2 Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 799 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.1.4 Register Configuration Table 28.2 shows the data slicer registers. Table 28.2 Register Configuration Name Slice even-field mode register Slice odd-field mode register Slice line setting register 1 Slice line setting register 2 Slice line setting register 3* 4 Slice line setting register 4* 4 Abbrev. SEVFD SODFD SLINE1 SLINE2 SLINE3 SLINE4 SDTCT1 SDTCT2 SDTCT3 SDTCT4 SDATA1 SDATA2 SDATA3 SDATA4 R/W 1 R/(W)* 1 R/(W)* Size Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte 2 Initial Value H'2000 H'2000 H'20 H'20 H'20 H'20 H'10 H'10 H'10 H'10 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 3 Address* H'D220 H'D222 H'D224 H'D225 H'D226 H'D227 H'D228 H'D229 H'D22A H'D22B H'D22C H'D22E H'D230 H'D232 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* 2 R/(W)* 2 R/(W)* 2 R/(W)* Slice detection register 1 Slice detection register 2 4 Slice detection register 3* 4 Slice detection register 4* Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Word/byte Slice data register 1 Slice data register 2 4 Slice data register 3* 4 Slice data register 4* R R R R Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag (bit 14). 2. Bits 7 to 0 are cleared when 1 is written to bit 7 of the corresponding slice line setting register. 3. Lower 16 bits of the address. 4. Not available for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. 28.1.5 Data Slicer Use Conditions Table 28.3 indicates the conditions of use of the data slicer. Table 28.3 Data Slicer Use Conditions Sync Signal Input for Sync Separation Sync separation signal input from CVin2 Sync separation signal input from Csync Hsync or Vsync separation signals Data Slicer Usable Usable Usable Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 800 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.2 28.2.1 Register Description Slice Even- (Odd-) Field Mode Register (SEVFD, SODFD) The SEVFD and SODFD control the start bit detection starting position, slice voltage level, data sampling delay time, and interrupts. The SEVFD holds settings for even fields, and the SODFD holds settings for odd fields. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the SEVFD and SODFD are both initialized to H'2000. The SEVFD and SODFD are 16-bit read/write registers; however, rewriting of SEVFD or SODFD should be performed after output of an even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt. During data slice operations, if SEVFD or SODFD is rewritten, a malfunction will result; do not perform rewriting during data slice operation. (1) Slice even-field mode register Bit: Initial value: R/W: Bit: Initial value: R/W: 15 EVNIE 0 R/W 7 SLVLE2 0 R/W 14 EVNIF 0 R/(W)* 6 SLVLE1 0 R/W 13 — 1 — 5 SLVLE0 0 R/W 12 STBE4 0 R/W 4 DLYE4 0 R/W 11 STBE3 0 R/W 3 DLYE3 0 R/W 10 STBE2 0 R/W 2 DLYE2 0 R/W 9 STBE1 0 R/W 1 DLYE1 0 R/W 8 STBE0 0 R/W 0 DLYE0 0 R/W (2) Slice odd-field mode register Bit: Initial value: R/W: Bit: Initial value: R/W: 15 ODDIE 0 R/W 7 SLVLO2 0 R/W 14 ODDIF 0 R/(W)* 6 SLVLO1 0 R/W 13 — 1 — 5 SLVLO0 0 R/W 12 STBO4 0 R/W 4 DLYO4 0 R/W 11 STBO3 0 R/W 3 DLYO3 0 R/W 10 STBO2 0 R/W 2 DLYO2 0 R/W 9 STBO1 0 R/W 1 DLYO1 0 R/W 8 STBO0 0 R/W 0 DLYO0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 801 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Bit 15⎯Even- (Odd-) Field Slice Completion Interrupt Enable Flag (EVNIE, ODDIE): Enables or disables the generation of even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupts. Bit 15 EVNIE ODDIE 0 1 Description Disables even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt Enables even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt (Initial value) Bit 14⎯Even- (Odd-) Field Slice Completion Interrupt Flag (EVNIF, ODDIF): Set when data slicing for all specified lines of even (odd) field is completed. Bit 14 EVNIF ODDIF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after reading 1 [Setting condition] When data slicing is completed for all specified lines of even (odd) field (Initial value) Bit 13⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 12 to 8⎯Start Bit Detection Starting Position Bits (STBE4 to STBE0) (STBO4 to STBO0): Set the starting position for start bit detection in even (odd) fields. The base point for the data slicer is the falling edge of the horizontal sync signal (slicer base point H) synchronized within the LSI; the starting position for start bit detection can be set using STBE4 to STBE 0 (STBO4 to STBO0) in 288* × fh (where fh is the horizontal sync signal frequency) clock units from approximately 23.5 μs after the data slicer base point. The start bit detection end position is at approximately 29.5 μs after the data slicer base point. In start bit detection, the presence of the rising edge of start bits in the interval between these starting and ending positions is detected. Further, the start bit detection window signal, which becomes the base point for the start bit detection starting position, can be adjusted by means of the data slicer detection window register of the sync separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10, Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR). Figure 28.2 shows the data slicer base point and start bit detection starting position. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 802 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Note: 288 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 224 when FRQSEL is 1. Clock run-in Start bit S1 S2 S3 C.video Data slicer base point Clock run-in detection window signal Approx. 23.5 µs TS Set by STB Start bit detectable period Start bit detection window signal Te = Approx. 29.5 µs TS = 23.5 µs + Data slicer base point 1 µs × (Set by STB4 to STB0) 288* × fh Base point for start bit detection starting position Note: * 288 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 224 when FRQSEL is 1. Figure 28.2 Data Slicer Base Point and Start Bit Detection Starting Position Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 803 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Bits 7 to 5⎯Slice Level Setting Bits (SLVLE2 to SLVLE0) (SLVLO2 to SLVLO0): Specify the even (odd) field data slice level. The data slice level is common to clock line detection, start bit detection, and 16-bit data slicing. Bit 7 SLVLE2 SLVLO2 0 Bit 6 SLVLE1 SLVLO1 0 Bit 5 SLVLE0 SLVLO0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Slice level is 0 IRE Slice level is 5 IRE Slice level is 15 IRE Slice level is 20 IRE Slice level is 25 IRE Slice level is 35 IRE Slice level is 40 IRE Must not be specified (Initial value) Note: All slice levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE). Slice level values are provided for reference. Bits 4 to 0⎯Data Sampling Delay Time Setting Bits (DLYE4 to DLYE0) (DLYO4 to DLYO0): Set the even (odd) field data sampling clock delay time. Figure 28.3 explains the data sampling clock. 2 The data sampling clock is a clock with period 32 × fh* , used for slicing 16-bit closed caption data. The data sampling clock is generated after the rising edge of the start bit is detected and the 1 2 time set by the DLY bit is passed. The delay time setting can be adjusted in units of 576* × fh* , so that sampling is possible at a phase optimal for the slice data. The data sampling delay time (TD) should be set based on the calculation indicated below. Eighteen pulses of data sampling clock are output in total for start bit detection, slice data, and end data detection. In order to make the sampling phase even more optimal, the slice data (analog comparator output) and sampling clock can be output from the port. For details of monitor output, refer to section 28.2.6, Monitor Output Setting Register (DOUT). Notes: 1. 576 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 448 when FRQSEL is 1. 2. fh: Horizontal sync signal frequency Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 804 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 1st character 2nd character Start bit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Slice data S1 S2 S3 LSB MSB Detected start bit 32 × fh Data sampling clock 32 × fh TD: Data sampling delay time specified by DLYE4 to DLYE0 (DLYO4 to DLYO0) TD = 1 ns × [setting in bits DLY4 to DLY0 + 2] 576* × fh Note: * 576 when bit0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 448 when FRQSEL is 1. Figure 28.3 Data Sampling Clock Description 28.2.2 Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4) Bit: Initial value: R/W: 7 SENBLn* 0 R/W 6 SFLDn* 0 R/W 5 — 1 — 1 0 2 4 3 SLINEn4* SLINEn3* SLINEn2* SLINEn1* SLINEn0* 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W The slice line setting registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4) specify slice fields and lines. Up to four slice lines can be specified; these are specified in the slice line setting registers 1 to 4 respectively. These are 8-bit read/write registers. Rewrites of SLINE should be performed after an even (odd) field slice completion interrupt is output, or after module stop mode has been set, registers have been initialized, and module stop mode has been cleared again. If SLINE is rewritten during a data slice operation, a malfunction will result; do not perform rewriting during data slice operation. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the registers are initialized to H'20. Note: * n = 1 and 2 in the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 805 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Bit 7⎯Slice Enable Bit (SENBLn n = 1 to 4): Enables or disables data slice operations for the line specified by SFLDn and SLINEn4 to SLINEn1. When data slicing for a given line is completed, this bit is reset to 0, and slicing is not again performed until it is set to 1. This bit is set at the rising edge of the Vsync signal; hence data slicing settings become valid from the rising edge of the next Vsync signal after this bit has been set. When 1 is written to this bit, the corresponding slice detection register is cleared, and so caution should be exercised. Bit 7 SENBLn 0 Description When read: Disables data slice operation for the specified lines [Clearing condition] When the data slice operation for the line has been completed 1 Enables data slice operation for the specified lines Bit 6⎯Field Setting Bit (SFLDn n = 1 to 4): Specifies the field of the slice line. For information on field discrimination, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR). Bit 6 SFLDn 0 1 Description Even field Odd field (Initial value) Bit 5⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 4 to 0⎯Slice Line Setting Bits (SLINE4 to SLINE0): Specify the data slice line. Slice lines up to H'1F (31) can be specified. Figure 28.4 explains the line count. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 806 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 9-line vertical sync pulse period Pre-equalizing period 1 2 3 Vertical synchronization period 4 5 6 Post-equalizing period 7 8 9 10 19 20 21 Sync separation base point Clear Line count 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 Line count specified by SLINEn4 to SLINEn0 (n = 1 to 4) H'11 16 17 18 Figure 28.4 Line Count 28.2.3 Slice Detection Registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4) Bit: Initial value: R/W: 7 CRDFn* 0 R 6 SBDFn* 0 R 5 ENDFn* 0 R 4 — 1 — 1 2 3 CRICn3* CRICn2* CRICn1* 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 CRICn0* 0 R The slice detection registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4) store information on data slice results. Data slice result information includes the clock run-in detection flag, start bit detection flag, data end detection flag, and run-in pulse count for the clock run-in period. This information is useful for optimal positioning of the data slicer slice level, start bit detection timing, and sampling clock generation timing. There are four slice detection registers; data slice information results are stored in them on completion of data slicing for each line specified by the slice line setting registers 1 to 4. Data is stored not in slicing order, but in the corresponding registers. For information on the slice line sequence, refer to section 28.3.2, Slice Sequence. Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 807 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Slice line setting register n Line m Slice detection register n Data slice result information for line m Figure 28.5 Relationship between Slice Line Setting Register and Slice Detection Register SDTCT is an 8-bit read-only register. SDTCT read operations should be performed after an even (odd) field slice completion interrupt. If SDTCT is read during a data slice operation, an indeterminate value may be read; the register should not be read during operation. If 1 is written to bit 7 (SENBL) of slice line setting registers 1 to 4, the corresponding slice detection register is automatically cleared, so caution should be exercised. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the registers are initialized to H'10. Note: * n = 1 and 2 in the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S. Bit 7⎯Clock Run-In Detection Flag (CRDFn n = 1 to 4): Set when, during the clock run-in period, the count is concluded in the range 3 to 7 pulses, and clock run-in is detected. When 16 or more pulses are counted, further input pulses are not counted in order to prevent erroneous detection, and an overflow state is maintained. Further, the clock run-in detection window signal indicating the clock run-in period can be adjusted using the DDETWR register of the sync separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10, Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR). Bit 7 CRDFn 0 1 Description Clock run-in not detected for line for data slicing Clock run-in detected for line for data slicing (Initial value) Bit 6⎯Start Bit Detection Flag (SBDFn, n = 1 to 4): Set when the start bit for a line for data slicing is detected. Bit 6 SBDFn 0 1 Description Start bit not detected for line for data slicing Start bit detected for line for data slicing (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 808 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer When the start bit is not detected, the data sampling clock is generated after the time set as the data sampling delay time (DLY4 to DLY0) has elapsed from the phase of the start bit detection end position. Start bit C.video Data slicer base point Start bit detection starting position Start bit detection end position Data sampling clock Delay Figure 28.6 Data Sampling Clock when Start Bit Is Not Detected Bit 5⎯Data End Detection Flag (ENDFn n = 1 to 4): Shows whether or not slice data is input at the 18th sampling clock pulse. This flag is set when the slice data is 0, that is, when data slicing is regarded as having been completed normally. Bit 5 ENDFn 0 1 Description Data end not detected for line for data slicing Data end detected for line for data slicing (Initial value) Bit 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 3 to 0⎯Clock Run-in Count Value (CRICn3 to CRICn0): Count result for run-in pulses during the clock run-in period. When 16 or more pulses are input, further input pulses are not counted in order to prevent erroneous detection, and an overflow state is maintained. Further, the clock run-in detection window signal indicating the clock run-in period can be adjusted using the DDETWR register of the sync separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10, Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 809 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.2.4 Slice Data Registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4) Bit: 15 * R 14 * R 13 * R 12 * R 11 * R 10 * R 9 * R 8 * R 7 * R 6 * R 5 * R 4 * R 3 * R 2 * R 1 * R 0 * R Initial value: R/W: *: Unefined The slice data registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4) are registers in which the slice results are stored. The data is stored in LSB-first fashion, in order from the LSB side near the start bit. Figure 28.7 shows how to store the slice data. S1 S2 S3 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 Slice data LSB MSB Bit Slice data register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 b20 b21 b22 b23 b24 b25 b26 b27 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 Figure 28.7 Relationship between Slice Data and Slice Data Register There are four slice data registers, in which are stored slice results when data slicing is completed for each line specified by the slice line setting registers. At this time data is stored in the corresponding registers, rather than in the slicing order. Slice line setting register n Line m Slice data register n Data slice result for line m Figure 28.8 Relationship between Slice Line Setting Register and Slice Data Register Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 810 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer These are 16-bit read-only registers. SDATA read operations should be performed after an even (odd) field slice completion interrupt. If an SDATA register is read during a data slice operation, an indeterminate value may be read; the register should not be read during operation. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the SDATA register values are indeterminate. 28.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Bit: Initial value: 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP MSTP 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W: R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit read/write registers for controlling the module stop mode. Writing 0 to the MSTP3 bit starts the data slicer; setting the MSTP3 bit to 1 stops the data slicer at the end of a bus cycle and the module stop mode is entered. Before writing 0 to this bit, set the MSTP9 bit to 0, to operate the sync separator. The registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, refer to section 4.5, Module Stop Mode. Bit 3⎯Module Stop (MSTP3): Specifies the module stop mode for the data slicer. Bit 3 MSTP3 0 1 Description Clears the module stop mode for the data slicer Specifies the module stop mode for the data slicer (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 811 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.2.6 Monitor Output Setting Register (DOUT) Bit: 7 — 0 — 6 RGBC 0 R/W 5 YCOC 0 R/W 4 DOBC 1 R/W 3 DSEL 0 R/W 2 CRSEL 0 R/W 1 — 1 — 0 — 1 — Initial value: R/W: The internal signals used by the data slicer can be monitored through the R, G, B, YCO, and YBO pins. For the bits other than bits 2 and 3, refer to section 29.7.3, Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT). Bit 3⎯Bit to Select Functions for R, G, B, YCO, YBO Pins (DSEL): Selects whether the digital output pins output R, G, B, YCO, and YBO signals, or output data slicer internal monitor signals. Bit 3 DSEL 0 1 Description R, G, B, YCO, and YBO signals selected Data slicer monitor signals selected Pin R: Signal selected by bit 2 (CRSEL) Pin G: Slice data signal analog-compared with Cvin2 Pin B: Sampling clock generated within data slicer Pin YCO: External Hsync signal (AFCH) synchronized in the LSI Pin YBO: External Vsync signal (AFCV) synchronized in the LSI (Initial value) Bit 2⎯Monitor Signal Select Bit (CRSEL): Selects whether the clock run-in detection window signal is output, or the start bit detection window signal is output. This bit is valid when DSEL is set to 1 to select data slicer internal monitor signal output. Bit 2 CRSEL 0 1 Description Clock run-in detection window signal output selected Start bit detection window signal output selected (Initial value) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 812 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer 28.3 28.3.1 Operation Slice Line Specification Up to four slice lines can be specified using the slice line setting registers 1 to 4. For information on field discrimination, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR). After completion of data slicing for all lines specified by registers, a slice completion interrupt is output; the slice results and slice information should then be read. Slice information includes clock run-in detection, start bit detection, and data end detection to determine whether data sampling was performed normally; this information is stored in slice detection registers 1 to 4. After completion of slicing for specified lines, the slice enable bit for the slice line setting register is reset to 0. The next time the data slicer is operated, the slice enable bit of the slice line setting register should be set to 1. At this time, the corresponding slice detection register is cleared. The slice enable bit is sampled at the rising edge of the Vsync signal. Hence enabling of slice operation is valid until the next Vsync signal after reset of the slice enable bit. Figures 28.9 and 28.10 show examples of slice line specification and operation. For details, refer to section 28.2.2, Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4). Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 813 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer The data slicer initialization and operation for one specification example are shown in figure 28.9. Contents of slice line setting registers Register No. 1 2 3 4 Slice Line Setting Register Enable 1 1 1 0 Field Even Odd Even Odd Start An external Vsync interrupt occurs Set the slice (even and odd) field mode registers Set the slice line setting registers 1 to 4 (except the enable bits) Set the enable bits of the slice line setting registers 1 through 3 to 1 An external Vsync interrupt occurs Execute slicing for line c Execute slicing for line d Reset the slice enable bit Reset the slice enable bit Generate an even field slice completion interrupt Line Line c Line b Line d Line a d>c b>a Initialize the data slicer Even field Odd field An external Vsync interrupt occurs Execute slicing for line b Reset the slice enable bit Generate an odd field slice completion interrupt Note: Data slice operation is not performed for line a, because the enable bit = 0. Further, when the same line is specified within the same field, erroneous operation results; do not specify the same line in the same field. For details on the external Vsync interrupt, refer to section 27.2.2, Sync Separation Control Register (SEPCR). Figure 28.9 Example of Slice Line Specification and Operation (1) Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 814 of 1174 REJ09B0329-0200 Section 28 Data Slicer Operation for data slicer resetting for a second specification is shown in figure 28.10. Contents of slice line setting registers Register No. 1 2 3 4 Slice Line Setting Register Enable 1 1 1 1 Field Even Even Even Even Line Line a Line b Line d Line c a